2009 harley davidson sportster 2009 eletrical diagnostic manual

2009 Harley-Davidson Sportster ModelsElectrical Diagnostic Manual

99495-09©2008 H-D.

Harley-Davidson motorcycles conform to all applicable U.S.A. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standardsand U.S.A. Environmental Protection Agency regulations effective on the date of manufacture.

To maintain the safety, dependability, and emission and noise control performance, it is essential thatthe procedures, specifications and service instructions in this manual are followed.

Any substitution, alteration or adjustment of emission system and noise control components outside offactory specifications may be prohibited by law.

IMPORTANT NOTICE

Harley-Davidson Motor Company

2009 Harley-DavidsonSportster Models Electrical

Diagnostic Manual

©2008 H-D.ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

99495-09

Printed in the U.S.A.

VISIT THE HARLEY-DAVIDSON WEB SITEhttp://www.harley-davidson.com

Blank Text Here

Blank Text HereREADER COMMENTS

Please comment on the completeness, accuracy, organization, usability, and readability of this manual.

Please list the page, item, and part number(s) of any errors you find in this manual.

Please tell us how we can improve this manual.

Occupation:

Name: Dealership:

Street: Department:

City: State: Zip:

Please clip out and mail to:Service Communications DepartmentHarley-Davidson Motor CompanyP.O. Box 653Milwaukee, WI USA 53201

The Harley-Davidson Service Communications Department maintains a continuous effort to improve the qualityand usefulness of its publications. To do this effectively, we need user feedback - your critical evaluation ofthis manual.

2009 Harley-Davidson Sportster Models Electrical Diagnostic Manual (99495-09)

ABOUT THIS MANUAL

GENERALThis electrical diagnostic service manual has been preparedwith two purposes in mind. First, it will acquaint the user withthe construction of the Harley-Davidson product and assist inthe performance of repair. Secondly, it will introduce to theprofessional Harley-Davidson Technician the latest field-testedand factory-approved diagnostic methods.We sincerely believethat this manual will make your association with Harley-Dav-idson products more pleasant and profitable.

HOW TO USE YOUR SERVICE MANUALRefer to the table below for the content layout of this manual.

CHAPTERNO.

Starting / Charging1

Instruments2

TSM/HFSM3

Engine Management4

Appendix A Connector RepairA

Appendix B WiringB

Appendix C ConversionsC

Appendix D GlossaryD

Appendix E TSM/TSSM (Japan/Korea)E

Use the TABLE OF CONTENTS (which follows this FORE-WORD) and the INDEX (at the back of this manual) to quicklylocate subjects. Sections and topics in this manual aresequentially numbered for easy navigation.

For example, a cross-reference shown as 2.1 SPECIFICA-TIONS refers to chapter 2 CHASSIS, heading 2.1 SPECIFIC-ATIONS.

For quick and easy reference, all pages contain a sectionnumber followed by a page number. For example, page 3-5refers to page 5 in section 3.

A number of acronyms and abbreviations are used in thisdocument. See the D.1 GLOSSARY for a list of acronyms,abbreviations and definitions.

PREPARATION FOR SERVICE

Stop the engine when refueling or servicing the fuelsystem. Do not smoke or allow open flame or sparks neargasoline. Gasoline is extremely flammable and highlyexplosive, which could result in death or serious injury.(00002a)

Good preparation is very important for efficient service work.A clean work area at the start of each job will allow you toperform the repair as easily and quickly as possible, and willreduce the incidence of misplaced tools and parts. A motorcyclethat is excessively dirty should be cleaned before work starts.Cleaning will occasionally uncover sources of trouble. Tools,instruments and any parts needed for the job should begathered before work is started. Interrupting a job to locatetools or parts is a distraction and causes needless delay.

NOTES

• To avoid unnecessary disassembly, carefully read all rel-ative service information before repair work is started.

• In figure legends, the number which follows the name ofa part indicates the quantity necessary for one completeassembly.

• When servicing a vehicle equipped with the Harley-Dav-idson Smart Security System (H-DSSS), you must firstdisarm the security system. Either keep the fob in closeproximity to the vehicle, or use Digital Technician II todisable the security system while the vehicle is being ser-viced and re-enable the system after service is completed.

SERVICE BULLETINSIn addition to the information presented in this Service Manual,Harley-Davidson Motor Company will periodically issue ServiceBulletins to Harley-Davidson dealers. Service Bulletins coverinterim engineering changes and supplementary information.Consult the Service Bulletins to keep your product knowledgecurrent and complete.

USE GENUINE REPLACEMENT PARTS

Do not use aftermarket parts and custom made front forkswhich can adversely affect performance and handling.Removing or altering factory installed parts can adverselyaffect performance and could result in death or seriousinjury. (00001a)

To ensure satisfactory and lasting repairs, carefully follow theService Manual instructions and use only genuine Harley-Davidson replacement parts. Behind the emblem bearing thewords GENUINE HARLEY-DAVIDSON stand more than 100years of design, research, manufacturing, testing and inspectingexperience.This is your assurance that the parts you are usingwill fit right, operate properly and last longer.

WARNINGS AND CAUTIONSStatements in this service manual preceded by the followingwords are of special significance.

WARNING indicates a potentially hazardous situationwhich, if not avoided, could result in death or seriousinjury. (00119a)

CAUTION indicates a potentially hazardous situationwhich, if not avoided, may result in minor or moderateinjury. (00139a)

CAUTION used without the safety alert symbol indicatesa potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided,may result in property damage. (00140a)

I

FO

RE

WO

RD

NOTE

Refers to important information, and is placed in italic type. Itis recommended that you take special notice of these items.

Proper service and repair is important for the safe, reliableoperation of all mechanical products. The service proceduresrecommended and described in this service manual areeffective methods for performing service operations.

Always wear proper eye protection when using hammers,arbor or hydraulic presses, gear pullers, spring com-pressors, slide hammers and similar tools. Flying partscould result in death or serious injury. (00496b)

Some of these service operations require the use of toolsspecially designed for the purpose.These special tools shouldbe used when and as recommended. It is important to notethat some warnings against the use of specific service methods,which could damage the motorcycle or render it unsafe, arestated in this service manual. However, please remember thatthese warnings are not all-inclusive. Inadequate safety precau-tions could result in death or serious injury.

Since Harley-Davidson could not possibly know, evaluate oradvise the service trade of all possible ways in which servicemight be performed, or of the possible hazardous con-sequences of each method, we have not undertaken any suchbroad evaluation. Accordingly, anyone who uses a serviceprocedure or tool which is not recommended by Harley-Dav-idson must first thoroughly satisfy himself that neither his northe operator's safety will be jeopardized as a result. Failure todo so could result in death or serious injury.

PRODUCT REFERENCES

Read and follow warnings and directions on all products.Failure to follow warnings and directions can result indeath or serious injury. (00470b)

When reference is made in this manual to a specific brandname product, tool or instrument, an equivalent product, toolor instrument may be substituted.

Kent-Moore ProductsAll tools mentioned in this manual with an "HD", "J" or "B"preface must be ordered through SPX Kent-Moore. For ordering

information or product returns, warranty or otherwise, visitwww.spx.com.

Loctite Sealing and Threadlocking ProductsSome procedures in this manual call for the use of Loctiteproducts. If you have any questions regarding Loctite productusage or retailer/wholesaler locations, please contact LoctiteCorp. at www.loctite.com.

PRODUCT REGISTERED MARKSAllen, Amp Multilock, Bluetooth, Brembo, Delphi, Deutsch,Dunlop, Dynojet, Fluke, G.E. Versilube, Gunk, Hydroseal,Hylomar, Kevlar, Lexan, Loctite, Lubriplate, Keps, K&N, Mag-naflux, Marson Thread-Setter Tool Kit, MAXI fuse, Molex, MPZ,Mulitilock, Novus, Packard, Pirelli, Permatex, Philips, PJ1,Pozidriv, Robinair, S100, Sems, Snap-on, Teflon, Threadlocker,Torca, Torco, TORX, Tufoil, Tyco, Ultratorch, Velcro, X-Acto,and XM Satellite Radio are among the trademarks of theirrespective owners.

H-D MICHIGAN, INC.TRADEMARKINFORMATIONHarley, Harley-Davidson, H-D, Bar & Shield, Cross Bones,Digital Tech, Digital Technician, Digital Technician II, Dyna,Electra Glide, Evolution, Fat Bob, Fat Boy, Glaze, Gloss, H-D,H-Dnet.com, HD, Harley, Harley-Davidson, Heritage Softail,Low Rider, Night Rod, Nightster, Night Train, Profile, Revolu-tion, Road Glide, Road King, Road Tech, Rocker, Softail,Sportster, Street Glide, Street Rod, Sun Ray, Sunwash, TechLink, Twin Cam 88, Twin Cam 88B, Twin Cam 96, Twin Cam96B, Twin Cam 103, Twin Cam 103B, Twin Cam 110, TwinCam 110B, Tour-Pak, Screamin' Eagle, Softail, Super Glide,SYN3, Ultra Classic, V-Rod, VRSC and Harley-DavidsonGenuine Motor Parts and Genuine Motor Accessories areamong the trademarks of H-D Michigan, Inc.

CONTENTSAll photographs, illustrations and procedures may not neces-sarily depict the most current model or component, but arebased on the latest production information available at the timeof publication.

Since product improvement is our continual goal, Harley-Dav-idson reserves the right to change specifications, equipmentor designs at any time without notice and without incurringobligation.

II FOREWORD

STARTING / CHARGING

1.1 STARTER TROUBLESHOOTINGGeneral...............................................................................1-1Starter Troubleshooting......................................................1-1

1.2 STARTING SYSTEM DIAGNOSISDiagnostics.........................................................................1-3

Diagnostic Notes.........................................................1-3Job/Time Code Values................................................1-3

1.3 DIAGNOSTICS/TROUBLESHOOTINGVoltage Drop.....................................................................1-11

1.4 STARTER ACTIVATION CIRCUITSStarter Activation Circuits.................................................1-12

1.5 TESTING STARTER ON MOTORCYCLEStart Relay Test................................................................1-13Starter Current Draw Test.................................................1-13

1.6 TESTING STARTER ON BENCHFree Running Current Draw Test......................................1-15Starter Solenoid................................................................1-15Solenoid Pull-In Test.........................................................1-15Solenoid Hold-In Test........................................................1-15Solenoid Return Test........................................................1-16Testing..............................................................................1-16

Armature...................................................................1-16Brushes and Brush Holder........................................1-18

1.7 CHARGING SYSTEMGeneral.............................................................................1-20

Alternator...................................................................1-20Voltage Regulator......................................................1-20

Troubleshooting................................................................1-20Battery.......................................................................1-20Wiring........................................................................1-20

Testing..............................................................................1-24Milliampere Draw Test...............................................1-24Total Current Draw Test.............................................1-24Current and Voltage Output Test: Using HD-48053....1-25Current and Voltage Output Test: Using LoadTester.........................................................................1-25Stator Check..............................................................1-26AC Output Check......................................................1-27

1.8 BATTERY TESTINGGeneral.............................................................................1-28Voltmeter Test...................................................................1-28Conductance Test.............................................................1-28Load Test..........................................................................1-28

INSTRUMENTS

2.1 CHECKING FOR DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLECODESCheck Engine Lamp...........................................................2-1Security Lamp....................................................................2-2

Turn Signal Module (TSM)..........................................2-2Turn Signal Security Module (TSSM) or Hands-FreeSecurity Module (HFSM).............................................2-2

Code Types.........................................................................2-3Current........................................................................2-3

Historic........................................................................2-3Retrieving Diagnostic Trouble Codes..................................2-3Multiple Diagnostic Trouble Codes.....................................2-3

2.2 INITIAL DIAGNOSTIC CHECK:ODOMETERGeneral...............................................................................2-4

Diagnostic Notes.........................................................2-4Circuit Diagram/Wire Harness Connector Table..........2-4Job/Time Code Values................................................2-5Reprogramming ECM..................................................2-5

Initial Diagnostics...............................................................2-5Diagnostic Tips............................................................2-5Diagnostic Notes.........................................................2-5Other Diagnostic Trouble Codes..................................2-5

2.3 ODOMETER SELF-DIAGNOSTICSGeneral.............................................................................2-13Diagnostics.......................................................................2-13

Diagnostic Tips..........................................................2-13Diagnostic Notes.......................................................2-13

2.4 SPEEDOMETER/TACHOMETERGeneral.............................................................................2-15

Trip Odometer Reset Switch.....................................2-15Speedometer Theory of Operation...................................2-15Odometer Theory of Operation.........................................2-15Tachometer Theory of Operation......................................2-15Diagnostics.......................................................................2-16

Diagnostic Notes.......................................................2-16

2.5 BREAKOUT BOX:SPEEDOMETER/TACHOMETERGeneral.............................................................................2-20Speedometer: XL only......................................................2-20

Installation.................................................................2-20Removal....................................................................2-20

Tachometer.......................................................................2-20Installation.................................................................2-20Removal....................................................................2-20

2.6 INDICATOR LAMPSGeneral.............................................................................2-21

Job/Time Code Values..............................................2-21Diagnostics.......................................................................2-21


2.7 DTC B1004, B1005General.............................................................................2-26Diagnostics.......................................................................2-26


2.8 DTC B1006, B1007General.............................................................................2-30

Accessory or Ignition Line Overvoltage.....................2-30

2.9 DTC B1008General.............................................................................2-32

Trip Odometer Reset Switch Closed.........................2-32Diagnostics.......................................................................2-32


2.10 DTC U1016, U1255General.............................................................................2-34

III

TAB

LE

OF

CO

NT

EN

TS

Loss of ECM Serial Data...........................................2-34Diagnostics.......................................................................2-34


2.11 DTC U1064, U1255General.............................................................................2-39

Loss of TSM/TSSM/HFSM Serial Data.....................2-39Diagnostics.......................................................................2-39


2.12 DTC U1300, U1301 OR BUS ERGeneral.............................................................................2-44

Serial Data Low or Serial Data Open/High................2-44Diagnostics.......................................................................2-44


TSM/HFSM

3.1 TURN SIGNAL OVERVIEWGeneral...............................................................................3-1Security System: Japan/Korea...........................................3-1Turn Signal Functions.........................................................3-1Manual Cancellation...........................................................3-1Automatic Cancellation.......................................................3-1Bank Angle Functions........................................................3-1Bank Angle Restart............................................................3-1Clutch/Neutral Interlock......................................................3-1Security System H-DSSS...................................................3-1

3.2 HARLEY-DAVIDSON SMART SECURITYSYSTEMComponents.......................................................................3-2Security Immobilization......................................................3-2HFSM Features..................................................................3-3

3.3 H-DSSS ACTUATIONGeneral...............................................................................3-5Sidecar Configuration.........................................................3-5Actuation............................................................................3-5Fob Assignment..................................................................3-5Power Disruption and Configuring......................................3-5

3.4 PERSONAL IDENTIFICATION NUMBER(PIN)General...............................................................................3-6Initial Pin Entry...................................................................3-6Changing the Pin................................................................3-6

Modifying an Existing Pin............................................3-6

3.5 ARMING/DISARMING SECURITYSYSTEMHands-Free Fob..................................................................3-8Security Lamp (Key Icon)...................................................3-8Arming................................................................................3-8Disarming...........................................................................3-9

Automatic Disarming...................................................3-9Disarming with a Personal Identification Number(PIN)............................................................................3-9

3.6 WARNINGS AND ALARMSWarnings..........................................................................3-10Alarm................................................................................3-10

Activation...................................................................3-10Deactivation...............................................................3-10

Siren Chirp Mode (Confirmation)......................................3-10Chirpless Mode.........................................................3-10Chirp Mode................................................................3-10Switching Modes.......................................................3-10

3.7 SERVICE/EMERGENCY FUNCTIONSTransport Mode................................................................3-11

To Enter Transport Mode...........................................3-11To Exit Transport Mode..............................................3-11

Service Mode...................................................................3-11Four-Way Flashing...........................................................3-11

To Arm the HFSM with the Hazard Warning FlashersON.............................................................................3-11To Disarm the HFSM and Turn the Hazard WarningFlashers OFF............................................................3-11

3.8 TROUBLESHOOTINGTurn Signals (TSM/HFSM)...............................................3-12Security System (HFSM)..................................................3-12Diagnostics Mode.............................................................3-12Troubleshooting................................................................3-12

3.9 CHECKING FOR DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLECODESGeneral.............................................................................3-13Security/Lamp Diagnostics...............................................3-13Code Types.......................................................................3-14

Current......................................................................3-14Historic......................................................................3-14

Retrieving DTCs...............................................................3-14Multiple DTCs/Priority Order............................................3-15

3.10 INITIAL DIAGNOSTIC CHECK:TSM/HFSMGeneral.............................................................................3-16

Diagnostic Notes.......................................................3-16Circuit Diagram/Wire Harness Connector Table........3-16Job/Time Codes........................................................3-16Reprogramming ECM................................................3-16

Initial Diagnostics.............................................................3-16Diagnostic Tips..........................................................3-16Diagnostic Notes.......................................................3-16Other DTCs...............................................................3-17



3.12 BREAKOUT BOX:TSM/HFSMGeneral.............................................................................3-26Installation........................................................................3-26Removal...........................................................................3-26

IV TABLE OF CONTENTS

TABLE OF CONTENTS

3.13 FAILS TO DISARM (HFSM ONLY)General.............................................................................3-28Job/Time Codes...............................................................3-28Diagnostics.......................................................................3-28


3.14 DTC B0563General.............................................................................3-31Diagnostics.......................................................................3-31


3.15 TSM/HFSM:TURN SIGNAL ERRORSAND DTCSGeneral.............................................................................3-32Diagnostics.......................................................................3-32

Job/Time Codes........................................................3-32Diagnostic Tips..........................................................3-32Diagnostic Notes.......................................................3-34

3.16 DTC B1131, B1132 (HFSM ONLY)General.............................................................................3-48Diagnostics.......................................................................3-48


3.17 DTC B1134General.............................................................................3-51Diagnostics.......................................................................3-51


3.18 DTCS B1135, B1136, B1141, AND B1142Diagnostics.......................................................................3-54

DTC B1135 Accelerometer Fault..............................3-54DTC B1136 Accelerometer Tip-Over Self-Test Fault and DTCB1142 Internal Fault.........................................................3-54DTC B1141 Ignition Switch Open/Low.............................3-54


3.19 DTC B1143, B1144, B1145 (HFSMONLY)General.............................................................................3-58

DTC B1143: Security Antenna Short-to-Ground.......3-58DTC B1144: Security Antenna Short-to-Voltage.......3-58

Diagnostics.......................................................................3-58Diagnostic Notes.......................................................3-58

3.20 DTC B1154, B1155Diagnostics.......................................................................3-61


3.21 DTC U1016, U1255General.............................................................................3-65Diagnostics.......................................................................3-65


3.22 DTC U1300, U1301 OR BUS ERDiagnostics.......................................................................3-70


3.23 TSM/HFSM: PASSWORD LEARNGeneral.............................................................................3-71Password Learning...........................................................3-71

3.24 HFSM MAINTENANCEGeneral.............................................................................3-72Hands-Free Fob................................................................3-72

Schedule...................................................................3-72Battery Replacement.................................................3-72

Smart Siren (If Installed)...................................................3-72Schedule...................................................................3-72Battery Replacement: Early Style Siren....................3-72Battery Replacement: Late Style Siren.....................3-72

ENGINE MANAGEMENT

4.1 SPECIFICATIONSSpecifications.....................................................................4-1

4.2 EFI SYSTEMGeneral...............................................................................4-3Troubleshooting..................................................................4-3

4.3 EFI DIAGNOSTIC INTRODUCTIONSystem Problems...............................................................4-5

No Start.......................................................................4-5Poor Performance.......................................................4-5Check Engine Lamp....................................................4-5

Resolving Problems............................................................4-5

4.4 CHECKING FOR DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLECODES: EFICheck Engine Lamp...........................................................4-6Code Types.........................................................................4-7

Current........................................................................4-7Historic........................................................................4-7

Retrieving Diagnostic Trouble Codes..................................4-7Multiple Diagnostic Trouble Codes.....................................4-8

4.5 INITIAL DIAGNOSTIC CHECK: EFIGeneral...............................................................................4-9

Diagnostic Notes.........................................................4-9Circuit Diagram/Wire Harness Connector Table..........4-9Reprogramming ECM..................................................4-9

Initial Diagnostics...............................................................4-9General Information.....................................................4-9Diagnostic Tips............................................................4-9Diagnostic Notes.........................................................4-9Other DTCs.................................................................4-9



TABLE OF CONTENTS V

TABLE OF CONTENTS

4.7 BREAKOUT BOX: EFIGeneral.............................................................................4-22Installation........................................................................4-22Removal...........................................................................4-22

4.8 WIGGLE TESTGeneral.............................................................................4-23Procedure.........................................................................4-23

4.9 ENGINE CRANKS, BUT WILL NOTSTARTGeneral.............................................................................4-24Diagnostics.......................................................................4-24

Diagnostic Notes.......................................................4-24Diagnostic Tips..........................................................4-24

4.10 NO ECM POWERGeneral.............................................................................4-31

No Spark/No Check Engine Lamp at Key On............4-31Diagnostics.......................................................................4-31


4.11 STARTS,THEN STALLSGeneral.............................................................................4-36

Diagnostic Trouble Codes U1300, U1301, or BUSER.............................................................................4-36

Diagnostics.......................................................................4-36Diagnostic Tips..........................................................4-36Diagnostic Notes.......................................................4-36

4.12 FUEL SYSTEM ELECTRICAL TESTGeneral.............................................................................4-42Diagnostics.......................................................................4-42


4.13 SYSTEM RELAY CHECKGeneral.............................................................................4-50

System Relay............................................................4-50Diagnostics.......................................................................4-50


4.14 IDLE AIR CONTROLGeneral.............................................................................4-55

IAC Operation............................................................4-55Diagnostic Trouble Code P0505: Loss of Idle SpeedControl.......................................................................4-55

Diagnostics.......................................................................4-55Diagnostic Tips..........................................................4-55Diagnostic Notes.......................................................4-55

4.15 MISFIRE AT IDLE OR UNDER LOADGeneral.............................................................................4-60

Misfire at Idle or Under Load.....................................4-60Diagnostics.......................................................................4-60


4.16 DTC P0107, P0108, P0112, P0113General.............................................................................4-66

MAP Signal...............................................................4-66IAT Signal..................................................................4-66

Diagnostics.......................................................................4-66Diagnostic Tips: MAP Sensor....................................4-66Diagnostic Notes: MAP Sensor.................................4-66Diagnostic Tips: IAT Sensor.......................................4-67Diagnostic Notes: IAT Sensor....................................4-67

4.17 DTC P0117, P0118General.............................................................................4-73

ET Sensor.................................................................4-73Diagnostics.......................................................................4-73


4.18 DTC P0122, P0123General.............................................................................4-77

TP Sensor.................................................................4-77Diagnostics.......................................................................4-77


4.19 DTC P0131, P0132, P0134, P0151,P0152, P0154General.............................................................................4-82

Oxygen Sensor.........................................................4-82Diagnostics.......................................................................4-82


4.20 DTC P0261, P0262, P0263, P0264General.............................................................................4-87

Fuel Injectors.............................................................4-87Diagnostics.......................................................................4-87


4.21 DTC P0373, P0374General.............................................................................4-93

CKP Sensor..............................................................4-93Diagnostics.......................................................................4-93


4.22 DTC P0501, P0502General.............................................................................4-96

Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS)....................................4-96Diagnostics.......................................................................4-96


4.23 DTC P0562, P0563General...........................................................................4-100

Battery Voltage........................................................4-100Diagnostics.....................................................................4-100

Diagnostic Tips........................................................4-100Diagnostic Notes.....................................................4-100

4.24 DTC P0603, P0605General...........................................................................4-104

ECM Failure............................................................4-104Diagnostics.....................................................................4-104

DTC P0603.............................................................4-104DTC P0605.............................................................4-104

VI TABLE OF CONTENTS

TABLE OF CONTENTS

4.25 DTC P0661, P0662General...........................................................................4-105

Active Intake Solenoid (HDI XR Models Only)........4-105Diagnostics.....................................................................4-105

Diagnostic Notes.....................................................4-105

4.26 DTC P1009, P1010General...........................................................................4-109

Password Problem..................................................4-109Diagnostics.....................................................................4-109


4.27 DTC P1351, P1352, P1354, P1355General...........................................................................4-114

Ignition Coil.............................................................4-114Diagnostics.....................................................................4-114


4.28 DTC P1501, P1502General...........................................................................4-119

Jiffy Stand Sensor (HDI)..........................................4-119Diagnostics.....................................................................4-119


4.29 DTC U1064, U1255General...........................................................................4-124

Loss of TSM/TSSM/HFSM Serial Data...................4-124Diagnostics.....................................................................4-124


4.30 DTC U1097, U1255General...........................................................................4-129

Loss of Speedometer Serial Data...........................4-129Diagnostics.....................................................................4-129


4.31 FUEL PRESSURE TESTGeneral...........................................................................4-134Diagnostics.....................................................................4-134

Low Fuel Pressure..................................................4-134High Fuel Pressure..................................................4-134

APPENDIX A CONNECTOR REPAIR

A.1 AMP MULTILOCK CONNECTORSAMP Multilock Connector Repair.......................................A-1

General.......................................................................A-1Separating Pin and Socket Housings.........................A-1Mating Pin and Socket Housings................................A-1Removing Terminals from Housing.............................A-1Inserting Terminals into Housing.................................A-2Preparing Wire Leads for Crimping.............................A-2Crimping Terminals to Leads......................................A-4Inspecting Crimped Terminals.....................................A-4

A.2 DELPHI CONNECTORSDelphi Connector Repair....................................................A-6

General.......................................................................A-6Separating Pin and Socket Housings.........................A-6Mating Pin and Socket Housings................................A-6

Removing Socket Terminals........................................A-6Installing Socket Terminals..........................................A-6

A.3 DEUTSCH 1-PLACE ELECTRICALCONNECTORSDeutsch 1-Place Connector Repair....................................A-8

Separating Pin and Socket Housings.........................A-8Mating Pin and Socket Housings................................A-8Removing Socket Terminals........................................A-8Installing Socket Terminals..........................................A-8

A.4 DEUSCH ELECTRICAL CONNECTORSDeutsch Connector Repair.................................................A-9

General.......................................................................A-9Separating Pin and Socket Housings.........................A-9Mating Pin and Socket Housings................................A-9Removing Socket Terminals........................................A-9Installing Socket Terminals..........................................A-9Removing Pin Terminals...........................................A-11Installing Pin Terminals.............................................A-11Crimping Terminals...................................................A-12

A.5 DEUTSCH STANDARD TERMINALSDeutsch Standard Terminal Crimps.................................A-13

Preparing Wire Leads for Crimping...........................A-13Crimping Terminal to Lead........................................A-13Inspecting Crimps.....................................................A-13

A.6 DEUTSCH MINI-TERMINAL CRIMPSDeutsch Mini Terminal Crimps.........................................A-14

Preparing Wire Leads for Crimping...........................A-14Crimping a Mini Terminal to Wire Lead.....................A-14Inspecting Crimps.....................................................A-14

A.7 DEUTSCH SOLID BARREL TERMINALSDeutsch Solid Barrel Terminal Crimps.............................A-15

Preparing Wire Leads For Crimping.........................A-15Adjusting Crimper Tool..............................................A-15Crimping a Barrel Contact To Wire Lead...................A-15Inspecting Crimps.....................................................A-15

A.8 RELAY AND FUSE BLOCKSFuse Block Repair............................................................A-17

Removing Socket Terminals......................................A-17Installing Socket Terminals........................................A-17Crimping Terminals...................................................A-17

A.9 150 METRI-PACK CONNECTORS150 Metri-Pack Connector Repair....................................A-18

General.....................................................................A-18Separating Pin and Socket Housings.......................A-18Mating Pin and Socket Housings..............................A-18Removing Socket Terminal.......................................A-18Inserting Socket Terminal..........................................A-18


General.....................................................................A-20Separating Pin and Socket Housings.......................A-20Mating Pin and Socket Housings..............................A-20Removing Socket Terminals......................................A-20

TABLE OF CONTENTS VII

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Installing Socket Terminals........................................A-20Crimping Terminals...................................................A-20


General.....................................................................A-22Separating Pin and Socket Housings.......................A-22Mating Pin and Socket Housings..............................A-22Removing Socket Terminals......................................A-22Installing Socket Terminals........................................A-22


General.....................................................................A-23Separating Pin and Socket Housings.......................A-23Mating Pin and Socket Housings..............................A-23Removing Socket Terminal.......................................A-23Installing Socket Terminal.........................................A-23

A.13 800 METRI-PACK CONNECTORSDelphi Main Fuse Housing Repair...................................A-24

General.....................................................................A-24Removing Main Fuse................................................A-24Installing Main Fuse..................................................A-24Removing Socket Terminals......................................A-24Installing Socket Terminals........................................A-24

A.14 METRI-PACK TERMINALSMetri-Pack Terminal Crimps.............................................A-26

Matching Terminal To Crimper..................................A-26Preparing Wire Lead.................................................A-26Crimping Wire Core..................................................A-26Crimping Insulation/Seal...........................................A-26Inspecting Crimps.....................................................A-27

A.15 MOLEX CONNECTORSMolex Connector Repair..................................................A-28

Separating Pin and Socket Housings.......................A-28Mating Pin and Socket Housings..............................A-28Removing Terminals.................................................A-28Installing Terminals...................................................A-28

A.16 PACKARD ECM CONNECTORPackard 100W Connector Repair.....................................A-30

General.....................................................................A-30Separating Socket Housing From ECM....................A-30Mating Socket Housing To ECM...............................A-30Removing Socket Terminal.......................................A-30Installing Socket Terminal.........................................A-30Crimping Terminals...................................................A-30

A.17 PACKARD MICRO-64 CONNECTORSPackard Micro-64 Connector Repair................................A-32

General.....................................................................A-32Separating Pin and Socket Housings.......................A-32Mating Pin and Socket Housings..............................A-32Removing Terminal...................................................A-32Installing Terminal.....................................................A-33Preparing Wire Leads for Crimping...........................A-33Crimping Terminals...................................................A-33Inspecting Crimps.....................................................A-33

A.18 SEALED SPLICE CONNECTORSSealed Splice Connector Repair......................................A-35

General.....................................................................A-35Preparing Wire Leads...............................................A-35Splicing Wire Leads..................................................A-35Inspecting Seals.......................................................A-35

APPENDIX B WIRING

B.1 CONNECTORSConnector Locations..........................................................B-1

Function/Location.......................................................B-1Place and Color..........................................................B-1Connector Number......................................................B-1Repair Instructions......................................................B-1

B.2 WIRING DIAGRAMSWiring Diagram Information...............................................B-3

Wire Color Codes........................................................B-3Wiring Diagram Symbols............................................B-3

2009 Sportster Wiring Diagrams........................................B-4

APPENDIX C CONVERSIONS

C.1 METRIC CONVERSIONConversion Table................................................................C-1

C.2 FLUID CONVERSIONSUnited States System........................................................C-2Metric System....................................................................C-2British Imperial System......................................................C-2

C.3 TORQUE CONVERSIONSUnited States System........................................................C-3Metric System....................................................................C-3

APPENDIX D GLOSSARY

D.1 GLOSSARYAcronyms and Abbreviations.............................................D-1

APPENDIX E TSM/TSSM(JAPAN/KOREA)

E.1 TSM/TSSM (JAPAN/KOREA) OVERVIEWGeneral..............................................................................E-1

TSM............................................................................E-1TSSM..........................................................................E-1

Troubleshooting..................................................................E-1

E.2 TSM/TSSM FEATURESTurn Signal Functions........................................................E-2

TSM/TSSM Features..................................................E-2Bank Angle Function..........................................................E-2Clutch/Neutral Interlock Functions.....................................E-2

TSM/TSSM Features..................................................E-2Security Alarm and Immobilization Functions....................E-2

TSSM Feature.............................................................E-2

VIII TABLE OF CONTENTS

TABLE OF CONTENTS

E.3 VEHICLE DELIVERYGeneral..............................................................................E-4Configuring A TSSM..........................................................E-4Sidecar Configuration.........................................................E-4Power Disruption and Configuring.....................................E-4Key Fob Assignment: TSSM...............................................E-4Pin Entry: TSSM.................................................................E-5Changing the Pin: TSSM....................................................E-7

E.4 TURN SIGNAL FUNCTIONSGeneral..............................................................................E-8Automatic Cancellation......................................................E-8Manual Cancellation...........................................................E-8Four-Way Flashing.............................................................E-8Diagnostics Mode..............................................................E-8

E.5 BANK ANGLE FUNCTIONGeneral..............................................................................E-9Operation...........................................................................E-9

E.6 SECURITY SYSTEM FUNCTIONS (TSSMONLY)General............................................................................E-10

Security System Operation.......................................E-10Security System Options: TSSM...............................E-10

Alarm Sensitivity: TSSM...................................................E-10Sensitivity..................................................................E-10Transport Mode.........................................................E-11

Auto-Arming Function: TSSM...........................................E-11Storage Mode: TSSM.......................................................E-12

E.7 ARMING/DISARMING (TSSM ONLY)General............................................................................E-13Security Lamp..................................................................E-13Using Key FOB: TSSM.....................................................E-13

General.....................................................................E-13Arming the System...................................................E-13Disarming the System...............................................E-13Troubleshooting.........................................................E-13

Using the Pin....................................................................E-13General.....................................................................E-13Disarming the System...............................................E-13

E.8 DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTC)TSM/TSSM......................................................................E-15Code Types......................................................................E-16

Current......................................................................E-16Historic......................................................................E-16

Retrieving Diagnostic Trouble Codes...............................E-16Multiple Diagnostic Trouble Codes...................................E-17

E.9 INITIAL DIAGNOSTIC CHECK:TSM/TSSMGeneral............................................................................E-18

Diagnostic Notes.......................................................E-18Circuit Diagram/Wire Harness Connector Table.......E-18Job/Time Code Values..............................................E-18Reprogramming ECM...............................................E-18

Initial Diagnostics.............................................................E-18Diagnostic Tips.........................................................E-18

Diagnostic Notes.......................................................E-18Other DTCs...............................................................E-18

E.10 ODOMETER SELF-DIAGNOSTICSGeneral............................................................................E-26Diagnostics......................................................................E-26

Diagnostic Tips.........................................................E-26Diagnostic Notes.......................................................E-26

E.11 BREAKOUT BOX:TSM/TSSMGeneral............................................................................E-28Installation........................................................................E-28Removal...........................................................................E-29

E.12 FAILS TO DISARM (TSSM ONLY)General............................................................................E-30

Security Equipped Vehicles Only..............................E-30Job/Time Code Values..............................................E-30

Diagnostics......................................................................E-30Diagnostic Tips.........................................................E-30Diagnostic Notes.......................................................E-30

E.13 TURN SIGNAL ERRORS: B1121, B1122,B1141General............................................................................E-33

Job/Time Code Values..............................................E-33Diagnostics......................................................................E-33

Diagnostic Tips: All....................................................E-33Diagnostic Notes: All Turn Signal Flowcharts............E-35

E.14 DTC B0563General............................................................................E-46

Battery Voltage High.................................................E-46Diagnostics......................................................................E-46


E.15 DTC B1131, B1132General............................................................................E-47

Alarm Output Low (DTC B1131) or Alarm Output High(DTC B1132).............................................................E-47

Diagnostics......................................................................E-47Diagnostic Tips.........................................................E-47Diagnostic Notes.......................................................E-47

E.16 DTC B1134General............................................................................E-50

Starter Output High...................................................E-50Diagnostics......................................................................E-50

Diagnostic Notes.......................................................E-50

E.17 DTC B1135General............................................................................E-53

Accelerometer Fault: B1135......................................E-53

E.18 DTC B1154, B1155General............................................................................E-54Diagnostic Notes..............................................................E-54

TABLE OF CONTENTS IX

TABLE OF CONTENTS

E.19 DTC U1016, U1255General............................................................................E-58

Loss of ECM Serial Data..........................................E-58Diagnostics......................................................................E-58

Diagnostic Notes.......................................................E-58

E.20 DTC U1300, U1301 OR BUS ERGeneral............................................................................E-63

Serial Data Low or Serial Data Open/High...............E-63Diagnostics......................................................................E-63


E.21 TSM/TSSM: PASSWORD LEARNGeneral............................................................................E-64Password Learning..........................................................E-64

E.22 TSSM MAINTENANCEGeneral............................................................................E-65Key FOB...........................................................................E-65

Schedule...................................................................E-65Battery Replacement................................................E-65

Siren (If Installed).............................................................E-65Schedule...................................................................E-65Battery Replacement: Early Style Siren....................E-65Battery Replacement: Late Style Siren.....................E-66

REFERENCE MATERIAL

TOOLS...........................................................I

TORQUE VALUES........................................V

INDEX.........................................................VII

X TABLE OF CONTENTS

TABLE OF CONTENTS

TABLE OF CONTENTS

SUBJECT............................................................................................................................PAGE NO.1.1 STARTER TROUBLESHOOTING..............................................................................................1-11.2 STARTING SYSTEM DIAGNOSIS............................................................................................1-31.3 DIAGNOSTICS/TROUBLESHOOTING...................................................................................1-111.4 STARTER ACTIVATION CIRCUITS.........................................................................................1-121.5 TESTING STARTER ON MOTORCYCLE...............................................................................1-131.6 TESTING STARTER ON BENCH............................................................................................1-151.7 CHARGING SYSTEM.............................................................................................................1-201.8 BATTERY TESTING................................................................................................................1-28

STA

RT

ING

/ C

HA

RG

ING

..\99495-09_pdf_en\maintoc.pdf

1.1STARTER TROUBLESHOOTING

GENERALThe troubleshooting tables contain detailed procedures to solveand correct problems. Follow 1.2 STARTING SYSTEM DIA-GNOSIS to diagnose starting system problems. The 1.3 DIA-

GNOSTICS/TROUBLESHOOTING, Voltage Drop procedurewill help you to locate poor connections or components withexcessive voltage drops.

STARTER TROUBLESHOOTING

Table 1-1. Starter Does Not Run or Runs at Very Low Speeds

SOLUTIONPROBABLE CAUSESOURCE OFPROBLEM

Charge battery.Voltage drop due to discharged battery.Battery

Replace battery.Short-circuited or open between electrodes.

Clean and retighten.Poor contact condition of battery terminal(s).

Repair or replace cable(s).Poor or no connection at either battery positive ornegative cable, at either end.

Wiring

Clean, tighten or replace cable(s) as needed.Cracked or corroded battery cable ends.

Tighten connections or repair or replace wire(s).Open wire(s) or poor connection at handlebar switchor start relay, especially relay ground wire (groundsthrough TSM/TSSM/HFSM).

Replace switch.Poor switch contacts or open switch.Start switch, enginestop switch, clutchswitch or neutralswitch

Replace relay.Open coil winding.Start relay

Replace relay.Poor or no continuity at relay points.

Disarm security system.TSM/TSSM/HFSM has disabled start relay.

Polish contact surface or replace solenoid assemblyPoor contact condition caused by burnt contact.Solenoid

Repair or replace solenoid assembly.Pull-in winding open or short-circuited.

Repair or replace solenoid assembly.Hold-in winding open or short-circuited.

Check brush spring tension. Replace field frameand holder.

Brushes worn below specification.Starting motor

Re-face or replace.Commutator burnt.

Correct by undercutting.Commutator high mica.

Replace starter.Field winding grounded.

Replace starter.Armature winding grounded or short-circuited.

Replace starter.Free running current draw out of range.

Replace starter.Reduction gears damaged.

Replace starter.Insufficient brush spring tension.

Repair or replace lead wire.Disconnected lead wire between solenoid and fieldwindings.

Replace bearing.Ball bearing sticks.

Use recommended viscosity oil for temperaturerange. Consult Owner's Manual.

Incorrect oil for low temperature.Temperature

HOME

2009 Sportster Diagnostics: Starting / Charging 1-1

Table 1-2. Pinion Does Not Engage With Ring Gear While Starter is Cranked or Engine Cannot Be Cranked

SOLUTIONPROBABLE CAUSESOURCE OF PROBLEM

Charge battery.Voltage drop due to discharged battery.Battery

Replace battery.Short-circuited or open between electrodes.

Clean and retighten.Poor contact condition of battery terminal(s).

Replace overrunning clutch.Overrunning clutch malfunction (rollers orcompression spring).

Overrunning clutch

Replace pinion.Pinion teeth worn out.

Replace overrunning clutch.Pinion does not run in overrunning direction.

Remove foreign materials, dirt or replaceoverrunning clutch or pinion shaft.

Poor sliding condition of spline teeth.

Replace overrunning clutch and idler gear.Reduction gears damaged.

Replace clutch shell.Excessively worn teeth.Gear teeth on clutch shell

Table 1-3. Starter Does Not Stop Running

SOLUTIONPROBABLE CAUSESOURCE OF PROBLEM

Replace start switch or start relay.Unopened contacts.Start switch or start relay

Replace start switch or start relay.Poor return caused by sticky switch or relay contacts.

Replace clutch shell.Excessively worn teeth.Gear teeth on clutch shell

Replace spring.Return spring worn.Solenoid

Replace solenoid.Coil layer shorted.

Replace solenoid.Contact plate melted and stuck.

HOME

1-2 2009 Sportster Diagnostics: Starting / Charging

1.2STARTING SYSTEM DIAGNOSIS

DIAGNOSTICS

TOOL NAMEPART NUMBER

HARNESS CONNECTOR TEST KITHD-41404-B

BREAKOUT BOXHD-42682

Diagnostic NotesEach reference number below correlates to a circled numberon the flowchart(s).

1. See 1.3 DIAGNOSTICS/TROUBLESHOOTING, VoltageDrop.

2. Remove starter motor. Connect jumper wires as describedin 1.6 TESTING STARTER ON BENCH, Free RunningCurrent Draw Test.

3. Connect BREAKOUT BOX (Part No. HD-42682) toTSM/TSSM/HFSM as follows:

a. On models with a TSM/HFSM, see 3.12 BREAKOUTBOX: TSM/HFSM.

b. On models with a TSSM (Japan/Korea), seeE.11 BREAKOUT BOX: TSM/TSSM.

4. Use HARNESS CONNECTOR TEST KIT (Part No. HD-41404-B) gray terminal socket probe and patch cord.

5. Closely inspect handlebar controls for pinched wiring.

6. If the neutral switch or ground is open, a reading of severalhundred ohms is normal due to the neutral indicator lamp(LED).

7. See 1.5 TESTING STARTER ON MOTORCYCLE, StarterCurrent Draw Test.

Job/Time Code ValuesDealership technicians filing warranty claims should use thejob/time code values printed in bold text underneath theappropriate repair.

1

3

2

ed02787

1. Motor terminal2. Battery terminal3. Relay terminal

Figure 1-1. Starter Terminals

HOME


GY

GY

GY

GN

GN

BK

BK

BK

BK

BK

BK

TN

TN

R R

R

R

R

BN/GY BN/GY

TN/GN TN/GNBK/R

BK/R

BK

BK/R

BK/R BK

BK

/R

BK

/R

GY

BK

/R

W/BK

W/BKW

/BK

W/B

K

R/BK

R/BK

R/B

K

GND 1

BatteryIgnition

Neutral Switch

Start Relay Control

Ground

Engine Stop SwitchStart Switch

Front Stop Lamp Switch

Right Turn Switch

1

1

2

9

12

TSM/TSSM/HFSM

NeutralSwitch

RightHand Controls

3

7

8

7

8

6

3

4

46

4

Clutch Switch 10

12

9

12

4

10

To System Relay

ECM

123

HFSM ONLY

Starter

Ignition 15A

Battery 15A

30 AmpMain Fuse

[5B]

IGNSwitch

[33]

[61B]

B A

PowertrainGroundPoint

Battery

B I

[119B]

SWITCHPOSITION

RED/BLACK RED RED/GRAY

OFF

ACC

IGNITION

Ignition Switch Legend

Dot Indicates Continuity With RedWire In Switch Position Indicated

E

K

TS U

START RELAY SYSTEM RELAY

I

C

QP RM O

G H

A B

FUEL PUMP

SPARE

ECM

15A

15A

15AP R

I J

C D

BATTERY

LIGHTS

ACCESSORIES

15A

15A

15AM O

G H

A B

INSTRUMENTS

SPARE

IGNITION

15A

15A

15A

K L

F

SPARE(XL) ENG CTL(XR)

OPEN

P&A IGN

15A

15A

Top View

E

[119] [61]

1

Start Relay

Receive AntennaTransmit Antenna ATransmit Antenna B

Switch Power 13 13

Left HandControls

Clutch Switch

[22A][22B]

[24A][24B]

[208A]

[30B][30A]

[136B][136A]

[78B][78A]

8685

30

87

12

3

5

RP

C

I

A B

J I

em00280

Figure 1-2. Starting Circuit Schematic

HOME


Initial Starter Test

Check battery using visual inspection, voltagetest, and either conductance test or load test.

Check connections at battery and startercomponents. Is system operational?

YES

Starterruns on.

YES YES NO

Starter spins, butdoes notengage.

Starter stallsor spins too

slowly.

Check for audibleclicking noise.

Disconnect solenoid relayterminal from solenoid.

Is 12V present on (GN) wirewith starter button not

pressed?

Go to StarterStalls or Spins Too

Slowly.

Solenoid clicks.Go to Solenoid

Clicks.

YES NO

Is 12V present on start relayterminal 86 (1) with starter

button not pressed?

Replacesolenoid.

YES NO

Replacestart relay.

OR

Relay clicks.Go to Relay

Clicks.

OR

Nothing clicks.Go to Nothing Clicks (Part

1 of 2).

5818 5832

5845

fc01944_en

Replacestarter button.

Remove starter. Disassemble drivehousing assembly. Inspect for damage

to armature gear or idler gear.Is damage present?

YES

Replace damaged idlergear and armature.

NO

Starter clutch failure.Replace starter clutch.

5825 5837

HOME


Solenoid Clicks

Perform voltage drop tests between batteryand relay terminal on solenoid.

Is voltage drop less than 1.0 volt?

YES NO

Backtrack to pinpoint poorconnections or relay contact

problems using voltage drop tests.

Perform voltage drop tests frombattery positive to starter motor

terminal. Crank engine.Is voltage drop greater than 1.0 volt?

YES

Perform voltage drop tests frombattery positive to starter battery

terminal. Crank engine.Is voltage drop greater than 1.0 volt?

YES

Repair connectionbetween battery and

starter.

NO

Perform voltage drop tests between batterynegative and starter ground studs or bolts.

Is voltage drop greater than 1.0 volt?

NO

Repair or replacesolenoid (contacts).

YES

Clean groundconnections.

NO

5824 5845 5824

5823

1

1 1

1

fc01945_en

1

Go to Relay Clicks.Begin with box marked

with bold asterisk.

HOME


Relay Clicks

Test for voltage at solenoid relay terminal (GN) onstarter.

Is 12V present when starter button is pressed?

YES NO

Does starter motorturn if jumped?

YES

Replacesolenoid.

NO

Replace or repairstarter motor.

Test for voltage to relay.Is 12V present on relay terminal

30 (3)?

YES NO

Test for voltage to relay.Is 12V present on relay

terminal 87 (5)?

Repair open on (R/BK)wire feeding terminal 30

(3) on start relay.

YES

Repair open on(GN) wire betweenrelay and solenoid.

NO

Replacestart relay.

5827 5832

58275860 5817

2

fc01002_en

HOME


Nothing Clicks (Part 1 of 2)

Do turn signals work properly?

YES

With the engine stop switch inthe RUN position, turn theignition switch on. With the

starter button depressed, checkfor battery voltage from starter

button to relay terminal 86.Is battery voltage present?

NO

Is connector [30] fully mated?

YES NO

Is there continuity to ground onTSM/TSSM/HFSM terminal 12?

Mate connector [30].

YES

Is there continuity on terminal 1to battery fuse?

Repair open.

NO

YES

Is there continuity on terminal 2to ignition fuse?

NO

Repair open.

YES

Replace TSM/TSSM/HFSM.

NO

Repair open.

6792

6805

6806

67936791

3

YES

Check for ground at relayterminal 85.

Is ground present?

YES

Substitute goodrelay or test relay.

NO

Check for continuity from relay terminal 85to terminal 9 on TSM/TSSM/HFSM

connector [30].Is continuity present?

NO

Repair open.

YES

5828

NO

Disconnect connector [22]. Check for continuity betweenterminal 4 (W/BK) and terminal 6 (BK/R)

of connector [22A].Is continuity present with starter button pressed?

4

NO

Check for battery voltage tostarter button, at connector [22B]

terminal 3 (GY).Is battery voltage present?

YES

NOYES

Locate and repairopen in (GY) wireconnector [22B].

Locate and repairopen in (BK/R) wire

from connector[22B] to relay.

5831 5831

Replacestarter button.

5818

5

fc01946_en

Go to Nothing Clicks(Part 2 of 2).

HOME


Nothing Clicks (Part 2 of 2)

Continued from Nothing Clicks (Part 1 of 2).

Vehicle in neutral. Install Breakout Box HD-42682.Measure resistance to ground on terminal 4 (Gray)

(neutral switch).Is resistance (less than 10 ohms) present?

YES

Clutch disengaged (pulled in). Check for continuity toground on terminal 10 (Gray) (clutch switch)

with clutch disengaged.Is continuity present?

NO

Check for continuity to ground atblack female terminal at neutral

switch.Is continuity present?

YES

Replace neutralswitch.

NO

Locate and repair open onblack wire between neutral

switch and ground.

YES

Check for voltage on TSM/TSSM/HSFM terminal 9 (Gray)

with key ON.Is voltage present?

YES

Locate and repairshort to voltage.

NO


NO

Check for continuity to ground onterminal 8 on connector [24B].

Is continuity present?

YES

Replace clutch switch.

NO

Locate and repair openon black wire between

clutch switch andground.

5157 5862

5830 5838 51685861

6

fc01947_en

HOME


Starter Stalls or Spins Too Slowly

Perform voltage drop tests from batterypositive to starter motor terminal. Crank engine.


YES NO

Perform voltage drop tests between batterypositive to starter battery terminal. Crank engine.


Perform voltage drop tests between batterynegative and starter studs or bolts.


1 1

YES

Repair connectionbetween battery

and starter.

NO

Repair or replacesolenoid

(contacts).

5824 5845

NOYES

Cleanground

connections.

Perform starter motor currentdraw test (on vehicle).

Perform starter motor freerunning current draw bench test.

Are test results within range?

7

2

YES NO

Remove spark plugs. While in5th gear, rotate rear wheel.Check for engine, primary

and/or crankshaft bind.

Replace or repairstarter motor.

5817

5835

1

Use appropriate code

fc01006_en

HOME


1.3DIAGNOSTICS/TROUBLESHOOTING

VOLTAGE DROPCheck the integrity of all wiring, switches, fuses and connectorsbetween the source and destination.

The voltage drop test measures the difference in potential orthe actual voltage dropped between the source and destination.

1. See ITEM A in Figure 1-3. Attach your red meter lead tothe most positive part of the circuit, which in this casewould be the positive post of the battery (5).

2. See ITEM B in Figure 1-3. Attach the black meter lead tothe final destination or component in the circuit (solenoidterminal from relay).

3. Activate the starter and observe the meter reading. Themeter will read the voltage dropped or the difference inpotential between the source and destination. An idealcircuit's voltage drop would be 0 volt or no voltagedropped, meaning no difference in potential.

4. See ITEM C in Figure 1-3. An open circuit should read 12volts, displaying all the voltage dropped, and the entiredifference in potential displayed on the meter.

NOTEOpen circuits on the ground side will read zero.

5. Typically, a good circuit will drop less than 1.0 volt. If thevoltage drop is greater, backtrack through the connections

until the source of the potential difference is found. Thebenefits of doing it this way are speed and accuracy.

a. Readings are not as sensitive to real battery voltage.

b. Readings show the actual voltage dropped, not justthe presence of voltage.

c. This tests the system as it is actually being used. Itis more accurate and will display hard to find poorconnections.

d. This approach can be used on lighting circuits, ignitioncircuits, etc. Start from most positive and go to mostnegative (the destination or component).

6. See ITEM D in Figure 1-3. The negative or ground circuitcan be checked as well.

a. Place the negative lead on the most negative part ofthe circuit (or the negative battery post). Remember,there is nothing more negative than the negative postof the battery.

b. Place the positive lead to the ground you wish tocheck.

c. Activate the circuit. This will allow you to read thepotential difference or voltage dropped on the neg-ative or ground circuit.This technique is very effectivefor identifying poor grounds due to powdered paint.Even the slightest connection may cause an ohm-meter to give a good reading. However, when suffi-cient current is passed through, the resistance causedby the powdered paint will cause a voltage drop orpotential difference in the ground circuit.

HOME


1.4STARTER ACTIVATION CIRCUITS

STARTER ACTIVATION CIRCUITS

200A

20A

20A

0.1A

200A

0.1A

200A

20A

20A

0.1A

200A

0.1A

200A

20A

20A

0.1A

200A

0.1A

200A

20A 20A

0.1A

200A

0.1A

ITEM A

ITEM COPEN CIRCUIT

ITEM DGROUND CIRCUIT

ITEM BIDEAL CLOSEDCIRCUIT

VDC

OV

VDC

VDC

VOV21

435

6

7

8

1

2

1

2

3 4

8

7

6

5

1

3 4

2

3 45

6

7

2

1

8

7

6

5

ed02788

1. Start switch2. Relay3. Solenoid4. Starter5. Battery6. MAXIFUSE7. Ignition switch8. Ignition fuse

Figure 1-3.Typical Circuitry. Refer to wiring diagrams for more information.

HOME


1.5TESTING STARTER ON MOTORCYCLE

START RELAY TEST1. Open left side cover.

2. See Figure 1-4. Locate start relay (1) in relay/fuse block(2) forward of battery (3) on motorcycle's left side.

3. If replacing old start relay:

a. To unplug old relay, grasp body of relay and with agentle rocking motion, pull straight out from relay/fuseblock.

b. To plug in new relay, line up spade terminals of relaywith sockets in relay/fuse block and push relay firmlyinto sockets.

4. The start relay can be tested using the motorcycle's 12volt battery and a multimeter.

a. See Figure 1-4. Unplug start relay (1) from relay/fuseblock (2).

b. See Figure 1-5. To energize the relay, connect thenegative battery terminal to the relay terminal "85" (or"2") and relay terminal "86" (or "1") to the positivebattery terminal.

c. Check for continuity between relay terminals "3" (or"30") and "5" (or "87"). A good relay shows continuity(continuity tester lamp "on" or a zero ohm reading onthe ohmmeter). A malfunctioning relay will not showcontinuity and must be replaced.

5. If start relay is functioning properly, plug it into relay/fuseblock and proceed to 1.5 TESTING STARTER ONMOTORCYCLE, Starter Current Draw Test.

1 3

42

ed02790

1. Start relay2. Relay/fuse blocks3. Battery4. MAXIFUSE

Figure 1-4. Start Relay (Typical)

1 4 2

53

3

12

ed02791

1. Ohmmeter2. Battery3. Start relay

Figure 1-5. Start Relay Test

STARTER CURRENT DRAW TESTNOTES

• Engine temperature should be stable and at room temper-ature.

• Battery should be fully charged.

See Figure 1-6. Check starter current draw with an inductionammeter before disconnecting battery. Proceed as follows:

1. Verify that transmission is in neutral. Disconnect sparkplug wires from spark plug terminals.

2. Clamp induction ammeter over positive battery cable nextto starter.

3. With Ignition Switch ON, turn engine over by pressingstarter switch while reading the ammeter. Disregard initialhigh current reading which is normal when engine is firstturned over.

a. Typical starter current draw will range from 160 to200 amperes.

b. If starter current draw exceeds 250 amperes, theproblem may be in the starter or starter drive. Removestarter for further tests. See the Service Manual.

NOTE

A DC current probe may be used if an induction ammeter isnot available.

HOME


1

2

ed02792

1. Induction ammeter2. Battery

Figure 1-6. Starter Current Draw Test

HOME


1.6TESTING STARTER ON BENCH

FREE RUNNING CURRENT DRAW TEST1. Place starter in vise, using a clean shop towel to prevent

scratches or other damage.

2. See Figure 1-7. Attach one heavy jumper cable (6 gaugeminimum).

a. Connect one end to the starter mounting flange.

b. Connect the other end to the negative (-) terminal ofa fully charged battery.

3. Connect a second heavy jumper cable (6 gauge minimum).

a. Connect one end to the positive (+) terminal of thebattery.

b. Connect the other end to the battery terminal on thestarter solenoid. Place an induction ammeter overcable.

4. Connect a smaller jumper cable (14 gauge minimum).

a. Connect one end to the positive (+) terminal of thebattery.

b. Connect the other end to the solenoid relay terminal.

5. Check ammeter reading.

a. Ammeter should show 90 amps maximum.

b. If reading is higher, disassemble starter for inspection.See the service manual.

c. If starter current draw on vehicle was over 200 amps,and this test was within specification, there may be aproblem with engine or primary drive.

2

3

4

51

ed02794

1. Mounting flange2. Battery3. Induction ammeter4. Battery terminal5. Relay terminal

Figure 1-7. Free Running Current Draw Test

STARTER SOLENOIDDo not disassemble solenoid. Before testing, disconnect fieldwire from motor terminal as shown in Figure 1-8.

Each test should be performed for only 3-5 seconds to preventdamage to solenoid.

The solenoid Pull-in, Hold-in, and Return tests must be per-formed together in one continuous operation. Conduct all threetests one after the other in the sequence given without interrup-tion.

SOLENOID PULL-IN TEST1. See Figure 1-8. Using a 12 volt battery, connect three

separate test leads as follows:

a. Solenoid housing to negative battery post.

b. Solenoid motor terminal to negative battery post.

c. Solenoid relay terminal to positive battery post.

2. Observe starter shaft.

a. If starter shaft extends strongly, solenoid is workingproperly.

b. If starter shaft does not extend strongly, replace thesolenoid.

23

1

ed02795

1. Motor terminal2. Relay terminal3. Battery

Figure 1-8. Pull-In Test

SOLENOID HOLD-IN TEST1. See Figure 1-9. With test leads still connected in the

manner specified in the previous 1.6 TESTING STARTERON BENCH, Solenoid Pull-In Test, disconnect solenoidmotor terminal/battery negative test lead at negative bat-tery post only; reconnect loose end of this test lead topositive battery post instead.

HOME


2. Observe starter shaft.

a. If starter shaft remains extended, solenoid is workingproperly.

b. If starter shaft retracts, replace the solenoid.

23

1

ed02796


Figure 1-9. Hold-In Test

SOLENOID RETURN TEST1. See Figure 1-10. With test leads still connected in the

manner specified at the end of the previous 1.6 TESTINGSTARTER ON BENCH, Solenoid Hold-In Test, disconnectsolenoid relay terminal/positive battery post test lead ateither end.

2. Observe starter pinion.

a. If starter shaft retracts, solenoid is working properly.

b. If starter shaft does not retract, replace the solenoid.

21 3

ed02797


Figure 1-10. Return Test

TESTING

Armature1. Remove armature and brush holder from field coil. See

the service manual.

2. Place armature in lathe or truing stand and check runoutof commutator. Commutators with more than 0.015 in.(0.38 mm) of runout should be replaced or machined ona lathe. Commutators should be replaced when diameteris less than 1.141 in. (29.98 mm).

3. Check depth of mica on commutator. If undercut is lessthan 0.008 in. (0.20 mm), use an undercutting machine toundercut the mica to 1/32 in. (0.79 mm) deep. The slotsshould then be cleaned to remove any dirt or copper dust.

NOTES

• See Figure 1-11. If an undercutting machine is not avail-able, undercutting can be done satisfactorily using a thinhacksaw blade. After undercutting, lightly sand the arma-ture with crocus cloth to remove any burrs.

• Do not use sandpaper or emery cloth on commutator.Theabrasive grit may remain on commutator segments andcould cause excessive brush wear.

4. See Figure 1-12. Check for a SHORTED ARMATURE.

a. Place armature on growler.

b. Hold a thin steel strip (hacksaw blade), against thearmature core and slowly turn armature.

c. A shorted armature will cause the steel strip to vibrateand be attracted to the core. Replace the armature ifshorted.

5. See Figure 1-13. Check for a GROUNDED ARMATUREwith an ohmmeter or continuity tester.

a. Touch one probe to any commutator segment.

b. Touch the other probe to the armature core.

c. There should be no continuity (infinite ohms). If thereis continuity, the armature is grounded. Replace agrounded armature.

6. See Figure 1-14. Check for an OPEN ARMATURE withan ohmmeter or continuity tester.

a. Check for continuity between all commutator seg-ments.

b. There should be continuity (0 ohms) at all test points.If there is no continuity at any test point, then thearmature is open. Replace an open armature.

HOME


5

6

1

1

2

2

3

4

7

7

sm02320

1. Segments2. Mica3. Incorrect (Mica must not be left with a thin edge next to segments)4. Correct (Mica must be cut away clean between segments)5. Starting groove in mica with 3 cornered file6. Undercutting mica with piece of hacksaw blade7. Commutator

Figure 1-11. Undercutting Mica Separators

HOME


1

2

sm02325

1. Growler2. Thin steel strip (hacksaw blade)

Figure 1-12. Shorted Armature Test Using Growler

sm03710

Figure 1-13. Grounded Armature Test

sm03711

Figure 1-14. Armature Open Test

Brushes and Brush Holder1. Remove armature and brush holder from field coil. See

the service manual.

2. Measure the brush length. If any one of four brushes isless than 0.433 in. (11 mm), replace the field coil and brushholder assembly. No further testing is necessary.

3. See Figure 1-15. Check for a GROUNDED FIELD COILWINDING with an ohmmeter or continuity tester.

a. Touch one probe to the field coil housing (frame).

b. Touch the other probe to each of two brushesattached to the field coil winding.

c. There should be no continuity (infinite ohms). If thereis continuity at either brush, then the field coil windingis grounded. Replace the field coil/brush holderassembly if grounded.

4. See Figure 1-16. Check for an OPEN FIELD COILWINDING with an ohmmeter or continuity tester.

a. Touch one probe to the field wire.

b. Touch the other probe to each of the two brushesattached to the field coil winding(s).

c. There should be continuity (0 ohms). If there is nocontinuity at either brush, then the field coil winding(s)are open. Replace the field coil/brush holder assemblyif open.

5. See Figure 1-17.Test the BRUSH HOLDER INSULATIONwith an ohmmeter or continuity tester.

a. Touch one probe to the holder plate.

b. Touch the other probe to each of the positive (insu-lated) brush holders.

c. There should be no continuity (infinite ohms). If thereis continuity at either brush holder, replace the fieldcoil/brush holder assembly.

d. Touch one probe to the non-insulated brush holdersand the other probe to the holder plate. If any resist-ance is measured, replace the field coil/brush holderassembly.

sm03712

Figure 1-15. Grounded Field Test

HOME


sm03713

Figure 1-16. Open Field Test1

2

sm02331

Figure 1-17. Brush Holder Insulation Test

HOME


1.7CHARGING SYSTEM

GENERALThe charging system consists of the alternator and regulator.The charging system circuit is shown in Figure 1-20.

AlternatorThe alternator consists of two main components:

• The rotor which mounts to the engine sprocket shaft.

• The stator which bolts to the engine crankcase.

Voltage RegulatorSee Figure 1-18.The voltage regulator (1) is a series regulatorwith shunt control. The circuit combines the functions of recti-fying and regulating.

1

2

ed02798

1. Voltage regulator2. DC output connector [77]

Figure 1-18. Voltage Regulator (Typical)

TROUBLESHOOTING


ELECTRICAL SYSTEM TESTERHD-48053

When the charging system fails to charge or does not chargeat a satisfactory rate, make the following recommended checks.

BatteryCheck for a weak or dead battery. See 1.8 BATTERY TESTINGfor battery testing procedures. Battery must be fully chargedin order to perform a load test, or starting or charging tests.However, a partially discharged battery may be tested usingthe BATTERY TEST function of the ELECTRICAL SYSTEMTESTER (Part No. HD-48053).

WiringSee Figure 1-19.The stator connector plug and socket connec-tion must be clean and tight.

Check for corroded or loose connections in the charging circuit.See Figure 1-20.

ed02799

Figure 1-19. Stator Connector [46] (typical)

HOME


BK

BK

BK

BK

BK

BK

BK

BK

BK

BK

BK

BK

BK

BK

R

R

R

R

30 AmpMain Fuse


Stator

VoltageRegulator

Battery

GND1

–+

–+

1 2

1 2

B A

[5]

[46B][46A]

[77A][77B]

em00279

Figure 1-20. Charging System Circuit

HOME


Charging System Test (Part 1 of 2)

Test battery.Charge or replace as required.

Inspect regulator for loss connections.

PASS FAIL

Perform MILLIAMP DRAWTEST (If applicable).

Correct asrequired.

5306

PASS

Perform TOTAL CURRENTDRAW TEST.

Record measurement.

FAIL

Isolatedamaged

component orwiring.

5308

PASS FAIL

Isolate damagedwiring or

excessiveaccessories.

5310

NOTE

Whenever a charging system component fails a test andis replaced, re-test the system to be sure the problemhas been corrected.

fc01948_en

Replacegrounded

stator.

Disconnect regulator.Does milliamp draw

drop?

YES NO

5312

Go to ChargingSystem Test (Part

2 of 2).

HOME


Charging System Test (Part 2 of 2)

Continued From Charging System Test (Part 1 of 2).

Perform CURRENT AND VOLTAGE OUTPUT TEST. Record measurement andcompare with TOTAL CURRENT DRAW TEST before proceeding.

PASS FAIL

PerformVOLTAGE

OUTPUT TEST.

PerformSTATOR CHECK.

PASS FAIL

Replacevoltage regulator.System tests good up to this point.

Suspect:

• Accessories on for long periods whenvehicle is parked and not running.

• Accessories on when vehicle isridden very slowly for long periods.

• Battery self-discharge and/oraccessory draw because vehicle wasnot operated for a long period.

5316

PASS FAIL

Perform ACOUTPUT TEST.

Replacestator.

5312

PASS

Replace voltageregulator.

Perform CURRENTOUTPUT TEST.

Inspect rotor.

FAIL

FAILPASS

Damaged orslipping rotor.

SystemOK.

5315

NOTEWhenever a charging system component fails a test andis replaced, re-test the system to be sure the problemhas been corrected.

5319

FAILPASS

Replacestator.

Replacerotor.

5314 5319

fc01061_en

HOME


TESTING


ADVANCED BATTERY CONDUCT-ANCE AND ELECTRICAL SYSTEMANALYZER

HD-48053

Milliampere Draw TestNOTES

• Be sure accessories are not wired so they stay on at alltimes. This condition could drain battery completely ifvehicle is parked for a long time. Check for this by con-necting ammeter between negative battery cable andground.

• TSM/TSSM/HFSM will continue to draw 16-25 mA for 30seconds after ignition is turned off. Any disruption andreconnection of battery power, such as disconnecting thebattery to place a meter in series, will cause TSM/TSSM/HFSM to draw 16-25 mA for 30 seconds.

1. See Figure 1-21. Connect ammeter between negativebattery cable and crankcase ground. With this arrange-ment, you will also pick up any regulator drain.

2. With ignition switch turned to OFF and all lights andaccessories off, observe current reading.

a. Refer to Table 1-4. Add voltage regulator draw toappropriate value for TSM/TSSM/HFSM. If sum isgreater than reading observed on ammeter, draw iswithin limits.

b. A higher reading indicates excessive current draw.Any accessories must be considered and checkedfor excessive drain.

NOTE

A battery with a surface discharge condition could suffer astatic drain. Correct by cleaning battery case.

Table 1-4. Maximum Meter Reading (Averaged)

DRAW IN MILLIAMPERESITEM

1Voltage regulator

1Speedometer

1Tachometer (if equipped)

1TSM (non-security models)

3TSSM (disarmed)

3TSSM (armed)

1TSSM (storage mode)

1HFSM

20.0*Security siren

* Siren will draw for 2-24 hours from time motorcycle batteryis connected and 0.05 milliamperes once siren battery ischarged. For best results, disconnect siren during milliamperedraw test.

1 2

3

ed02801

1. 12 VDC battery2. Battery negative cable3. Crankcase

Figure 1-21. Milliampere Draw Test (Ignition turned to OFF)

Total Current Draw TestIf battery runs down during use, the current draw of themotorcycle components and accessories may exceed outputof the charging system.

NOTE

If a load tester is unavailable, an ammeter with current probemay be used.

Turn battery load tester OFF before connecting testercables to battery terminals. Connecting tester cables withload tester ON can cause a spark and battery explosion,which could result in death or serious injury. (00252a)

1. See Figure 1-22. To check for this condition, place loadtester induction pickup or current probe pickup over batterynegative cable.

2. Disconnect stator plug from voltage regulator. Start themotorcycle and run the engine at 2000 RPM.

3. With ignition and all continuously running lights andaccessories turned on (headlamp on high beam), read thetotal current draw.

4. Compare this reading to the reading obtained after per-forming the CURRENT AND VOLTAGE OUTPUT TEST.

a. The current output should exceed current draw by3.5 amps minimum.

b. If output does not meet specifications, there may betoo many accessories for the charging system tohandle.

5. Reconnect voltage regulator after testing.

HOME


1

2

3

ed02802

1. Load tester2. Induction pickup3. Battery

Figure 1-22. Check Current Draw (Ignition Switch On)

Current and Voltage Output Test: UsingHD-480531. Connect the ADVANCED BATTERY CONDUCTANCE

AND ELECTRICAL SYSTEM ANALYZER (Part No. HD-48053) leads to the vehicle's battery.

2. Follow the instructions in the analyzer's instruction manualto perform a Charging System Test.

See Figure 1-23.The test results will include a decision on thecharging system's condition and the measured output voltageat idle and at 3000 RPM. The analyzer's printer will provideyou with a printout including one of two possible test results:

• CHARGING SYSTEM NORMAL - No problem found.

• CHARGING SYSTEM PROBLEM - The analyzer detecteda problem and will display one of the three following res-ults:

1. LOW CHARGING VOLTS - The alternator is not supplyingsufficient current for the system's electrical loads.

2. HIGH CHARGING VOLTS - The voltage output from thealternator exceeds the normal regulator limits.

3. INVESTIGATE VOLT OUTPUT - The rev voltage is lowerthan the idle voltage.

ed02804

Figure 1-23. Charging System Test Results Printout

Current and Voltage Output Test: UsingLoad Tester1. See Figure 1-24. Connect load tester.

a. Connect negative and positive leads to battery ter-minals.

b. Place load tester induction pickup over positive regu-lator cable.

2. Run the engine at 3000 RPM. Increase the load asrequired to obtain a constant 13.0 VDC. Do not leave anyload switch turned on for more than 20 seconds or over-heating and tester damage can occur.

3. The current output should be 24-30 amps. Make 0note ofmeasurement for use in Total Current Draw Test.

NOTERider's habits may require output test at lower RPM.

4. See Figure 1-24. After removing the load, read the loadtester voltage meter.

a. If voltage to the battery is not more than 15 VDC,voltage output is within specifications. Investigateother possible problems.

b. If voltage is higher, voltage regulator is not functioningproperly or connections are loose or dirty.

HOME


1

23

4

5

ed02803

1. Load tester2. Battery3. Voltage regulator4. To MAXIFUSE (DC output)5. To stator

Figure 1-24. Current and Voltage Output Test

Stator Check1. Turn ignition switch OFF.

2. Connect an ohmmeter.

a. Open latch and separate socket connector from pinconnector.

b. See Figure 1-25. Insert one ohmmeter lead into astator connector (1) socket.

c. Attach the other lead to a suitable ground (4).

3. Test for continuity with ohmmeter set to the ohms scale(2).

a. A good stator will show no continuity between eitherstator socket and ground.

b. Any other reading indicates a grounded stator whichmust be replaced.

4. See Figure 1-26. Remove ground lead. Check resistanceacross stator sockets.

5. Test for resistance with ohmmeter set on the RX1 scale.

a. Resistance across the stator sockets should be 0.1-0.3 ohms.

b. If the resistance is higher, the stator is damaged andmust be replaced.

NOTE

Verify that meter reads 0 ohms when probes are shortedtogether. If not, subtract lowest value from resistance value ofstator.

1

3

2

4

ed02805

1. Alternator stator connector [46B]2. DVOM set to ohms scale3. Positive meter lead to either stator connector

socket4. Negative meter lead grounded to engine

Figure 1-25.Test for Grounded Stator (Typical)

HOME


2

1

3

ed02809

1. Alternator stator connector [46B]2. DVOM set to ohms scale3. Meter leads to stator connector sockets

Figure 1-26. Check for Stator Resistance (Typical)

AC Output Check1. See Figure 1-27. Test AC output.

a. Disconnect voltage regulator connector from alternatorstator wiring.

b. Connect an AC voltmeter across both stator connectorsockets.

c. Run the engine at 2000 RPM. The AC output shouldbe 40-56 volts AC (approximately 20-28 volts AC per1000 RPM).

2. Compare test results to specifications.

a. If the output is below specifications, charging problemcould be a faulty rotor or stator.

b. If output is good, charging problem might be faultyvoltage regulator. Replace as required.

3. Check the output again as previously described underCURRENT AND VOLTAGE OUTPUT TEST.

1

2

3

ed02810

1. Alternator stator connector [46B]2. DVOM set to AC volts scale3. Meter leads to stator connector sockets

Figure 1-27. Check Stator AC Voltage Output (Typical)

HOME


1.8BATTERY TESTING

GENERALThree different procedures may be performed to provide agood indicator of battery condition: a voltage test, a conduct-ance test, or a load test.

A battery may be tested, whether fully charged or not, viaconductance test. In order to perform a load test, however, thebattery must be fully charged.

VOLTMETER TESTThe voltmeter test provides a general indicator of battery stateof charge or condition. Check the voltage of the battery to verifythat it is in a 100% fully charged condition. Refer to Table 1-5.

If the open circuit (disconnected) voltage reading is below12.6V, charge the battery and then recheck the voltage afterthe battery has set for one to two hours. If the voltage readingis 12.7V or above, perform the Load Test described in thissection.

Table 1-5. Voltmeter Test For Battery Charge Conditions

STATE OF CHARGEVOLTAGE

100%12.7

75%12.6

50%12.3

25%12.0

0%11.8

CONDUCTANCE TEST


ADVANCED BATTERY CONDUCT-ANCE AND ELECTRICAL SYSTEMANALYZER

HD-48053

Test the battery using the ADVANCED BATTERY CONDUCT-ANCE AND ELECTRICAL SYSTEM ANALYZER (Part No. HD-48053). Perform a battery test as follows:

1. Connect the HD-48053 analyzer leads to the vehicle bat-tery lead terminal, not to bolt or wire terminal.

NOTEConnect the tester directly to the lead terminals of the battery,and not the bolts.

2. Follow the instructions in the analyzer instruction manualto perform a battery test.

The test results will include a decision on the battery conditionand the measured state of charge.

See Figure 1-28. The analyzer printer will provide you with aprintout including one of six possible test results:

• GOOD BATTERY - Return the battery to service.

• GOOD-RECHARGE - Fully charge the battery and returnto service.

• CHARGE & RETEST - Fully charge the battery and retest.

• REPLACE BATTERY - Replace the battery and retest.

• BAD CELL-REPLACE - Replace the battery and retest.

• BATTERY NOISE - Remove surface charge from batteryand retest.

NOTES

• A REPLACE BATTERY test result may also mean a poorconnection between the battery cables and the vehicle.After disconnecting the battery cables from the battery,retest the battery using the out-of-vehicle test beforereplacing.

• Connect the tester directly to the lead terminals of thebattery, and not the bolts.

ed02811

Figure 1-28. Battery Test Results Printout

LOAD TESTTo load test the battery, proceed as follows:

Disconnect negative (-) battery cable first. If positive (+)cable should contact ground with negative (-) cable con-nected, the resulting sparks can cause a battery explosion,which could result in death or serious injury. (00049a)

1. Remove battery from motorcycle.

2. Always fully charge the battery before testing or testreadings will be incorrect. Load testing a discharged bat-tery can also result in permanent battery damage.

3. After charging, allow battery to stand for at least one hourbefore testing.

HOME


Turn battery load tester OFF before connecting testercables to battery terminals. Connecting tester cables withload tester ON can cause a spark and battery explosion,which could result in death or serious injury. (00252a)

4. See Figure 1-29. Connect tester leads to battery postsand place induction pickup over negative (black) cable.

NOTETo avoid load tester and/or battery damage, do not leave theload tester switch turned ON for more than 20 seconds.

5. Refer to Table 1-6. Load battery at 50% of CCA ratingusing the load tester. Voltage reading after 15 secondsshould be 9.6V or more at 70° F (21° C).

Turn battery load tester OFF before disconnecting testercables to battery terminals. Disconnecting tester cableswith load tester ON can cause a spark and battery explo-sion, which could result in death or serious injury. (00253a)

Connect positive (+) battery cable first. If positive (+) cableshould contact ground with negative (-) cable connected,the resulting sparks can cause a battery explosion, whichcould result in death or serious injury. (00068a)

Do not over-tighten bolts on battery terminals. Userecommended torque values. Over-tightening battery ter-minal bolts could result in damage to battery terminals.(00216a)

6. Install the battery in the motorcycle.

1

2

3

ed02876

1. Load tester2. Induction pickup3. Battery

Figure 1-29. Load Test Battery

Table 1-6. Battery Load Test

50%100%COLD CRANKINGAMPERAGE (CCA)

102.5205Sportster models

HOME



NOTES

TABLE OF CONTENTS

SUBJECT............................................................................................................................PAGE NO.2.1 CHECKING FOR DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES................................................................2-12.2 INITIAL DIAGNOSTIC CHECK: ODOMETER...........................................................................2-42.3 ODOMETER SELF-DIAGNOSTICS........................................................................................2-132.4 SPEEDOMETER/TACHOMETER...........................................................................................2-152.5 BREAKOUT BOX: SPEEDOMETER/TACHOMETER..............................................................2-202.6 INDICATOR LAMPS................................................................................................................2-212.7 DTC B1004, B1005.................................................................................................................2-262.8 DTC B1006, B1007.................................................................................................................2-302.9 DTC B1008..............................................................................................................................2-322.10 DTC U1016, U1255...............................................................................................................2-342.11 DTC U1064, U1255...............................................................................................................2-392.12 DTC U1300, U1301 OR BUS ER..........................................................................................2-44

INS

TR

UM

EN

TS


2.1CHECKING FOR DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES

CHECK ENGINE LAMPSee Figure 2-1.To diagnose Electronic Control Module (ECM)system problems, begin by observing the behavior of the checkengine lamp (2).

NOTES

• See Figure 2-2. "Key ON" means that the Ignition Switchis turned to IGNITION and the Engine Stop Switch is setto RUN (although the engine is not running).

• When the Ignition Switch is turned to IGNITION, the checkengine lamp will illuminate for approximately four secondsand then turn off.

• If the check engine lamp is not illuminated at Ignition ON,the problem is likely to be an instrument failure. See2.2 INITIAL DIAGNOSTIC CHECK: ODOMETER.

• If the check engine lamp illuminates late (after 20seconds), the problem is most likely a serial data busfailure. Test for Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) usingspeedometer self diagnostics. See 2.2 INITIAL DIA-GNOSTIC CHECK: ODOMETER.

• If the check engine lamp fails to turn off after the initialfour-second period, see 2.2 INITIAL DIAGNOSTICCHECK: ODOMETER.

1. See Figure 2-3. After the check engine lamp turns off fol-lowing the first four-second illumination period, one ofthree events may occur:

a. The lamp remains off. This indicates there are nocurrent fault conditions or stored DTCs currentlydetected by the ECM.

b. The lamp remains off for only four seconds and thenilluminates for an eight-second period. This indicatesa DTC is stored, but no current DTC exists.

c. The lamp remains on beyond the eight-second period.This indicates a current DTC exists.

2. See 2.1 CHECKING FOR DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLECODES, Code Types for a complete description of DTCformats.

NOTE

Some DTCs can be fully diagnosed only during actuation. Forexample, a problem with the ignition coil will be considered acurrent fault even after the problem is corrected, since the ECMwill not know of its resolution until after the coil is exercised bythe vehicle start sequence. In this manner, there may some-times be a false indication of the current DTC.

12

34

5

ed01721

1. Sixth gear indicator (not used)2. Check engine lamp3. Low fuel lamp4. Battery lamp5. Security lamp (key icon)

Figure 2-1. Indicator Lamps (Typical)

OFFACC. IGNITION

3

1

2ed02814

1. Ignition OFF2. Accessory (ACC) ON3. Ignition ON

Figure 2-2. Ignition Switch

HOME

2009 Sportster Diagnostics: Instruments 2-1

SECURITY LAMP

Turn Signal Module (TSM)If the turn signals flash six 4-way flashes shortly after key ON,it indicates a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) has been loggedsometime in the last three ignition cycles.

Turn Signal Security Module (TSSM) orHands-Free Security Module (HFSM)See Figure 2-3. To diagnose Turn Signal Security Module(TSSM) or Hands-Free Security Module (HFSM) systemproblems, begin by observing the behavior of the security lamp(4).

NOTES

• To provide an indication of TSSM/HFSM DTCs, thesecurity lamp is enabled on TSSM/HFSM models.


• When the Ignition Switch is turned ON, the security lampwill illuminate for approximately four seconds and thenturn off.

• If the security lamp is not illuminated at Key ON, theproblem is likely to be an instrument failure. See 2.2 INI-TIAL DIAGNOSTIC CHECK: ODOMETER.

• If the security lamp illuminates late (after 20 seconds), theproblem is most likely a serial data bus failure. Test for

DTCs using speedometer self diagnostics. See 2.2 INITIALDIAGNOSTIC CHECK: ODOMETER.

• If the security lamp fails to turn off after the initial four-second period, a problem exists in the instrumentation.See 2.2 INITIAL DIAGNOSTIC CHECK: ODOMETER.

1. See Figure 2-3. After the security lamp turns off followingthe first four-second illumination period, one of threeevents may occur:

a. The lamp remains off. This indicates there are nocurrent fault conditions or stored DTCs currentlydetected by the TSSM/HFSM.

b. The lamp stays off for only four seconds and thencomes back on for an eight-second period. Thisindicates a DTC is stored, but no current DTC exists.


2. See 2.1 CHECKING FOR DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLECODES, Code Types for a complete description of DTCformats.

NOTE

Some DTCs can only be fully diagnosed during actuation. Forexample, a problem with the turn signals will be considered acurrent fault even after the problem is corrected, since theTSM/TSSM/HFSM will not know of its resolution until after theturn signals are activated. In this manner, there may sometimesbe a false indication of the current DTC.

ONA

B

C

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

Key On

Key On

Key On

Lamp OFF: No Current or Historic DTCs

Lamp OFF

Lamp ON 8 Seconds:Only Historic DTCs Exist

Lamp Remains ON: Current DTC*

* Historic DTCs May Also Exist

4 Sec.

4 Sec.

4 Sec.

4 Sec.

8 Sec.

4 Sec.

ed01046

Figure 2-3. Check Engine and Security Lamp Operation

HOME

2-2 2009 Sportster Diagnostics: Instruments

CODE TYPES


DIGITAL TECHNICIAN IIHD-48650

There are two types of DTCs: current and historic. If a DTC isstored, it can be read using DIGITAL TECHNICIAN II (PartNo. HD-48650) or odometer self-diagnostics. See 2.3 ODO-METER SELF-DIAGNOSTICS.

All DTCs reside in the memory of the ECM, TSM/TSSM/HFSM,speedometer or tachometer until the code is cleared.

CurrentCurrent DTCs are those which presently disrupt motorcycleoperation. See the appropriate flowcharts for solutions.

HistoricIf a particular problem happens to resolve itself, the activestatus problem is dropped and it becomes a historic fault ratherthan a current fault. Historic DTCs are stored for a length oftime to assist in the diagnosis of intermittent faults.

Historic DTCs are cleared after a total of 50 trips has elapsed.A trip consists of a start and run cycle. After the 50 trip retentionperiod, the historic DTC is automatically erased from memoryproviding no subsequent faults of the same type are detectedin that period.

DTCs can only be identified as historic using DIGITAL TECH-NICIAN II (Part No. HD-48650), a computer-based diagnosticpackage.

It is important to note that historic DTCs may also be presentwhenever the system indicates the existence of a current fault.See 2.1 CHECKING FOR DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES,Multiple Diagnostic Trouble Codes if multiple DTCs are found.

Diagnostic charts are designed for use with current DTCs andas a result they frequently suggest wire repair or part replace-ment.

RETRIEVING DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLECODES



The engine management system provides two levels of dia-gnostics.

• The most sophisticated mode employs DIGITAL TECHNI-CIAN II (Part No. HD-48650), a computer-based diagnosticpackage.

• The second mode requires using the odometer self dia-gnostics. See 4.6 ODOMETER SELF-DIAGNOSTICS.

MULTIPLE DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODESWhile it is possible for more than one fault to occur and setmore than one DTC, there are several conditions which mayresult in one fault setting multiple DTCs. For example, serialdata DTCs (DTC U1016, U1064, U1097, U1300 and U1301)may be accompanied by other DTCs. Always correct the serialdata DTCs before resolving other DTCs.

For proper resolution of multiple DTCs, refer to Table 2-3.

HOME


2.2INITIAL DIAGNOSTIC CHECK: ODOMETER

GENERAL



See Figure 2-4. Constant power is supplied to the speedometerthrough terminal 5 of connector [39] on XL, and the tachometerthrough terminal 5 of connector [108] on XR. The odometerturns on when power is applied to terminal 1.The speedometeron XL, and tachometer on XR, proceeds through an initializationsequence every time power is removed and re-applied to ter-minal 6. See Figure 2-1. The visible part of this sequence isthe check engine lamp, security lamp, backlighting and odo-

meter display . Upon key ON (engine stop switch set to RUN),the check engine lamp and security lamp will illuminate for fourseconds and then (if parameters are normal) will turn off.

To locate faulty circuits or other system problems, follow thediagnostic flowcharts and tests in this section. For a systematicapproach, always begin with 2.2 INITIAL DIAGNOSTICCHECK: ODOMETER, Initial Diagnostics. Read the generalinformation and then work your way through the flowchart boxby box.

Loss of power on any of the three power inputs will changespeedometer behavior on XL or XR, and tachometer on XR.Refer to Table 2-1 or Table 2-2, depending on the model.

Table 2-1. XL Speedometer or XR Tachometer Function Chart - Loss of Input

TERMINAL 8 AND 11(TRIP ODOMETERRESET SWITCH)

TERMINAL 7 (GRD)TERMINAL 6 (ACC)TERMINAL 1 (IGN)TERMINAL 5(CONSTANT)

No trip odometer resetswitch function

Instrument completelynon-functional

Instrument will benon-functional inaccessory and igni-tion modes

Will not "WOW"Instrument is com-pletely non-functional

Will not "WOW"Diagnostic absentSecurity lamp stillperforms 4-secondbulb check in ignitionmode

Instrument will indicate vehiclespeed (zero)

Diagnostic absent

Trip odometer resetswitch functions onlyin OFF position

Security lamp still functions

Check engine lamp and battery lampnon-functional

Diagnostics absent

Table 2-2. XR Speedometer Function Chart - Loss of Input

TERMINAL D (GRD)TERMINAL B (ACC)TERMINAL A (CONSTANT)

Instrument completely non-functionalInstrument will be non-functional inaccessory and ignition modes

Instrument is completely non-functional

Diagnostic absentDiagnostic absent

Diagnostic NotesIf a numbered circle appears adjacent to a flowchart box, moreinformation is offered in the diagnostic notes. Many diagnosticnotes contain supplemental information, descriptions of variousdiagnostic tools or references to other parts of the manualwhere information on the location and removal of componentsmay be obtained.

Circuit Diagram/Wire Harness ConnectorTableWhen working through a flowchart, refer to the illustrations,the associated circuit diagram and the wire harness connectortable as necessary.The wire harness connector table for eachcircuit diagram identifies the connector number, description,type and general location.

In order to perform most diagnostic routines, a Breakout Boxand a DVOM are required. See 2.5 BREAKOUT BOX:SPEEDOMETER/TACHOMETER.

HOME


To perform the circuit checks with any degree of efficiency, afamiliarity with the various wire connectors is also necessary.


Reprogramming ECMDiagnostic charts frequently suggest ECM replacement. In theevent an ECM needs to be replaced, it must be reprogrammedusing a computer-based diagnostic package called DIGITALTECHNICIAN II (Part No. HD-48650). See your dealer. Pass-word learn procedure must also be performed. See3.23 TSM/HFSM: PASSWORD LEARN or E.21 TSM/TSSM:PASSWORD LEARN.

INITIAL DIAGNOSTICS



INSTRUMENT HARNESS ADAPTERSHD-46601

Diagnostic Tips• See Figure 2-4. If Odometer reads "BUS Er" while ignition

switch is turned to ON (engine stop switch at RUN with

the engine off), check diagnostic link for an open or shortto ground between data link connector [91A] terminal 3and ECM connector [78] terminal 5, TSM/TSSM/HFSMconnector [30] terminal 3, speedometer connector [39]terminal 2 (on XL, terminal C on XR) or tachometer (ifequipped) connector [108] terminal 2.

• Check for an open diagnostic test terminal between datalink connector [91A] terminal 3 and TSM/TSSM/HFSMconnector [30] terminal 3. With ignition switch turned toON, transmit data should be typically 0.6-0.8 volts. Therange of acceptable operation is greater than 0.0 volts andless than 7.0 volts.

• To identify intermittents, wiggle instrument and/or vehicleharness while performing steps in the Initial DiagnosticCheck charts.


1. Connect BREAKOUT BOX (Part No. HD-42682) (black)between speedometer connector [39A] and [39B] on XL,or tachometer connector [108A] and [108B] on XR usingINSTRUMENT HARNESS ADAPTERS (Part No. HD-46601). See 2.4 SPEEDOMETER/TACHOMETER.

All Odometer DTCs are listed in Table 2-3.

Table 2-3. Odometer Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Priority Chart

SOLUTIONFAULT CONDITIONRANKINGDTC

2.12 DTC U1300, U1301 OR BUS ERSerial data bus shorted low1U1300

2.12 DTC U1300, U1301 OR BUS ERSerial data bus shorted high2U1301

2.10 DTC U1016, U1255Loss of ECM serial data3U1016

2.11 DTC U1064, U1255Loss of TSM/TSSM/HFSM serial data4U1064

2.11 DTC U1064, U1255Missing response from other module (TSM/TSSM/HFSMand/or ECM) at startup

5U1255

2.8 DTC B1006, B1007Ignition line overvoltage6B1007

2.8 DTC B1006, B1007Accessory line overvoltage7B1006

2.9 DTC B1008Reset switch closed8B1008

2.7 DTC B1004, B1005Fuel level sending unit low9B1004

2.7 DTC B1004, B1005Fuel level sending unit high/open10B1005

Other Diagnostic Trouble CodesSee 3.10 INITIAL DIAGNOSTIC CHECK: TSM/HFSM orE.9 INITIAL DIAGNOSTIC CHECK: TSM/TSSM for any DTCsrelated to the TSM, TSSM or HFSM.

See 4.5 INITIAL DIAGNOSTIC CHECK: EFI for any DTCsrelated to the ECM.

HOME


BK

BK

BK

GY GYG

Y

O/W

O/W

O/W

O/W

O

O

O

R

BN

/GY

BN

/GY

BN

/GY

BN/GY

BN

/GY

LGN

/V BK

BK

BK

O/WO

O

BN

/GY

LGN

/V

LGN

/V

LGN

/V

LGN/V

LGN

/V

LGN

/V

R/BK

R/BK

R/GY

1 2 3 12

1 2 3 12

1 2 5 76

1 2 5 76

1 2 5 6 7

1 2 5 6 7

Igni

tion

Ser

iald

ata

Bat

tery

Acc

esso

ryG

roun

d

Igni

tion

Ser

ialD

ata

Bat

tery

Bat

tery

Igni

tion

Ser

ialD

ata

Gro

und

Acc

esso

ryG

roun

d

Speedometer

TSM/TSSM/HFSM

Tachometer (Optional)

To ACCY Fuse

To BATT Fuse

To INSTR Fuse

To IGN Fuse

12V ACCYFuse

12V BATTFuse

12V INSTRFuse

12V IGNFuse

3

1

2

4

Data LinkConnector

21 6 7 12

21 6 7 12

ECM

Ser

ialD

ata

5

5

GND1

GND1

GND1[78B][78A]

[30A][30B]

[20A][20B]

[108A][108B]

[39A][39B]

[91A]

Ground

Serial Data

Power

em01120

Figure 2-4. Serial Data Circuit (XL)

HOME


BK

BK

BK

GY GY

O/W

O/W

O/W

O/W

O

R

BN

/GY

BN

/GY

BN

/GY

BN

/GY

BN/GY

LGN

/V BK

BK

GY

BK

O/WO

OO

BN

/GY

LGN

/V

LGN

/V

LGN

/V

LGN/V

LGN

/V

LGN

/V

R/BK

R/BK

R/GY

1 2 3 12

1 2 3 12

1 2 5 76

1 2 5 76

C B A D

C B A D

Ser

ialD

ata

Bat

tery

Acc

esso

ryG

roun

d

Igni

tion

Ser

ialD

ata

Bat

tery

Bat

tery

Igni

tion

Ser

ialD

ata

Gro

und

Acc

esso

ryG

roun

d

Speedometer

TSM/TSSM/HFSM

Tachometer

To ACCY Fuse

To BATT Fuse

To INSTR Fuse

To IGN Fuse

12V ACCYFuse

12V BATTFuse

12V INSTRFuse

12V IGNFuse

3

1

2

4

Ground

Serial Data

Power

Data LinkConnector

21 6 7 12

21 6 7 12

ECM

Ser

ialD

ata

5

5

GND1

GND1

GND1[78B][78A]

[108A][108B]

[20A][20B]

[39A][39B]

[30A][30B]

[91A]

em01304

Figure 2-5. Serial Data Circuit (XR)

Table 2-4. Wire Harness Connectors

LOCATIONTYPEDESCRIPTIONNO.

Under fuel tank12-place MolexInstruments[20]

Under battery12-place DeutschTSM/TSSM/HFSM[30]

Back of speedometer12-place PackardSpeedometer (XL)[39]

Back of speedometer5-place PackardSpeedometer (XR)[39]

Under seat36-place PackardECM[78]

HOME




On battery strap, behind left side cover4-place DeutschData link connector[91A]

Back of tachometer12-place PackardTachometer (if equipped)[108]

HOME


Initial Diagnostic Check (Part 1 of 3)

Does enginestart?

YES.Starts and runs.

YES.Starts, then stalls.

NO.Cranks, but will not start.

NO.Engine will not crank.

Check for DTCs. See 2.3ODOMETER

SELF-DIAGNOSTICS.DTCs found?

See 4.11 STARTS,THEN STALLS.

See 4.9 ENGINE CRANKS,BUT WILL NOT START.

See 1.2 STARTINGSYSTEM DIAGNOSIS.

YES

Refer to applicable DTC prioritychart. All DTCs are listed in Table

2-3. DTCs are listed by priority.

NOUnable to enter

diagnostic mode.

NONo DTCsdisplayed.

With ignition switch OFF, press andrelease trip odometer reset switch.Does odometer display appear with

backlighting?

For a list of symptoms thatmay not set DTCs, refer to

Table 3-6.

YES NO

Check for continuity to ground atBreakout Box terminal 7 (Black). Wiggle

harness during continuity check.Is continuity present?

YES NO

Check for battery voltage at Breakout Boxterminal 5 (Black) while wiggling harness.Is battery voltage continuously present?

Locate and repair openbetween terminal 7 and

ground.

YES NO

With ignition switch OFF and speedometerconnector [39] on XL or tachometer connector [108]

on XR disconnected, check continuitybetween Breakout Box terminals 8 and 11 (Black).

Is continuity present when trip odometer resetswitch is depressed and infinity when released?


battery fuse.

YES NO

Replacespeedometer (XL),tachometer (XR).

Replace trip odometerreset switch.

1

fc01964_en

Go to Initial DiagnosticCheck (Part 2 of 3).

HOME



Continued from Initial Diagnostic Check (Part 1 of 3).

Turn ignition switch ON.Is odometer backlight present?

YES NO

Replace speedometer (XL),tachometer (XR).

Perform “WOW” test.See 2.3 ODOMETER SELF-DIAGNOSTICS.

The following features should be functional1) backlight should illuminate2) needle should sweep its full range of motion3) LED’s should illuminate:

• check engine• battery• security (all models)

4) LED’s that may illuminate:• low fuel• cruise (although not cruise equipped)

Are all features functional?

YES

Turn ignition switch to ACC.Is backlight present?

YES NO

Check for battery voltage atBreakout Box terminal 6 (Black).

Is battery voltage present?

YES NO

Replacespeedometer

(XL),tachometer

(XR).

Is accessoryfuse good?

YES

Locate and repairsource of fault.Replace fuse.

Locate and repair openon (O/W) wire betweenterminal 6 of connector[39] on XL, or connector

[108] on XR andaccessory fuse.

1

NO

With ignition switch turned to IGNITION, check forbattery voltage at terminal 1 of Breakout Box.


YES NO


Is instrumentfuse good?

YES NO

Locate andrepair

source of fault.Replace fuse.

Locate and repair openbetween terminal 1 of

connector [39] on XL, orconnector [108] on XR

andinstrument fuse.

1

fc02005_en

NO

Go to InitialDiagnostic

Check (Part 3 of3).

HOME




Is problem intermittent?

YES

NO.Speedometer

inoperative(no vehicle speed).

NO.Tachometerinoperative

(no engine speed).

Repeat Initial DiagnosticCheck while wiggling

harnesses.Was intermittent found?

Remove and inspectVSS.

Is debris present?

See TachometerInoperative (Part 1 of 2).

YES NO

Locate and repairintermittent.

No troublefound.

YES NO

Remove debris.Reinstall VSS.

Check for damaged wiring/loose connection between

VSS and ECM.Is wiring damage/loose

connection present?

YES NO

Locate and repairsource of fault.

Replacespeedometer.

fc01965_en

XLXR

Go toSpeedometer

Inoperative (XR).

HOME


Speedometer Inoperative, XR

All features should be functional on thetachometer.


YESNO

YES NO

Is battery fusegood?

YES NO


Locate and repairopen in (BN/GY) wirebetween terminal B ofconnector [39B] andconnector [20A] main

harness.

Check for continuitybetween Breakout Box

terminal 2 and terminal Cof connector [108B].Is continuity present?

YES NO

Locate andrepair openon (LGN/V)

wire.

fc01931_en

Does backlightilluminate?

Check for battery voltage atconnector [39B] terminal B.Is battery voltage present?

NOYES

1

With ignition ON, Checkfor voltage at connector

[39B] terminal A.Is battery voltage

present?

NO



YES

Check for continuity between Breakout Boxterminal 7 and terminal D of connector

[108B].Is continuity present?

YES

Locate andrepair open

on (BK) wire.

NO YES


NO

Replacespeedometer.


Is debris present?

YES


YES




connection present?

NO

NO

Replacespeedometer.

Go to InitialDiagnostic Check

(Part 1 of 3).

HOME


2.3ODOMETER SELF-DIAGNOSTICS

GENERALThe speedometer on XL and the tachometer on XR are capableof displaying and clearing speedometer, tachometer,TSM/TSSM/HFSM, and ECM Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs)(diagnostic mode).

DIAGNOSTICS

Diagnostic Tips• For a quick check of instrument function, a "WOW" test

can be performed. See Figure 2-7. Press and hold tripodometer reset switch, then turn ignition switch ON.Release trip odometer reset switch. Background lightingshould illuminate, gauge needle should sweep its full rangeof motion, and indicator lamps (check engine, low fuel,battery and security) should illuminate.

• If instrument module fails "WOW" test, check for battery,ground, ignition, trip odometer reset switch and accessorywiring to speedometer on XL and tachometer on XR. Ifany feature in the speedometer on XL and tachometer on

XR is non-functional, see 2.2 INITIAL DIAGNOSTICCHECK: ODOMETER.


1. To exit diagnostic mode, turn ignition switch OFF.

2. To clear DTCs for the selected module:

a. Press and hold the trip odometer reset switch for morethan 5 seconds to display available modules, release.

b. Press the trip odometer reset switch to choose themodule.

c. Press and hold the trip odometer reset switch for morethan 5 seconds to display the DTC, release.

d. Press and hold the trip odometer reset switch for morethan 5 seconds to clear the DTCs for the selectedmodule.

HOME


Odometer Self-Diagnostics

1 While holding trip odometer resetswitch in, turn ignition switch to

IGNITION.Make sure engine stop switch is in

RUN position.

Release trip odometerreset switch.

Does “diag” appear?

YES

”P” flashing.

To display DTCs for theECM, press and hold trip

odometer reset switch for morethan 5 seconds.

To display DTCs forTSM/TSSM, press and hold tripodometer reset switch for more

than 5 seconds.

To choose TSM/TSSM/HFSM, press

and release trip odometerreset switch.

”S” flashing.

To choose speedometer,press and release tripodometer reset switch.

”SP” flashing.

To choose tachometer,press and release trip odometer

reset switch.

To choose ABS, pressand release trip odometer

reset switch.

”T” flashing.

To display DTCs forspeedometer, press andhold trip odometer resetswitch for more than 5

seconds.

To display DTCs for tachometer,press and hold trip odometerreset switch for more than 5

seconds.

Press and release tripodometer reset switch again to

continue to next module.

See 2.2 INITIALDIAGNOSTIC

CHECK: ODOMETER.

YES

YES

NO

NO

NO

Deviceresponse?

Press and releasetrip odometer resetswitch. Part number

of module will bedisplayed.

Press and release tripodometer reset switch.

Are more DTCs displayed?

“end” displayed. To clear all DTCs for selectedmodule hold trip odometer reset switch for more than5 seconds. If DTCs are not to be cleared, Press andrelease trip odometer reset switch. Part number of

module will be displayed.

“no rsp” displayed. See applicable code fromother modules. Models not equipped with a

tachometer or ABS will display “no rsp” normally.

If “no rsp” displayed on odometer on tachometerequipped vehicle, See 2.4 SPEEDOMETER/

TACHOMETER.

“none” displayed.

DTCdisplayed.

Press and release trip odometer reset switch.“PSSPtb” appears.

2

”b” flashing.

To display DTCs forABS, press and

hold trip odometer resetswitch for morethan 5 seconds.

To choose ECM, pressand release trip odometer

reset switch.

fc01815_en

HOME


2.4SPEEDOMETER/TACHOMETER

GENERALSee Figure 2-6. The speedometer on XL and tachometer onXR consists of a warning display and four status lamps. Thelamps include: check engine, low fuel, battery, and security.

Trip Odometer Reset SwitchFigure 2-7. Pressing the trip odometer reset switch providesthe following capabilities:

• Change the odometer display between mileage, trip A andtrip B values (press and immediately release).

• Reset an individual trip odometer (press and hold 2-3seconds).

• Gain access to the diagnostic mode and clear DTCs. See2.3 ODOMETER SELF-DIAGNOSTICS.

• Display odometer while ignition switch is OFF. Press andhold trip odometer reset switch while ignition switch is OFFand odometer mileage will be displayed.

• On models with dual scale speedometers, toggle betweenmiles/kilometers on odometer and trip odometer display.To toggle display, turn ignition switch ON. Press and holdtrip odometer reset switch while odometer is displayed.Release switch when change is noted. (If trip odometerreset switch is held while trip odometer is displayed, tripodometer will reset).

12

34

5

ed01721


Figure 2-6. Indicator Lamps (Typical)

ed02816

Figure 2-7.Trip Odometer Reset Switch (Typical)

SPEEDOMETER THEORY OF OPERATIONThe speedometer circuit consists of a Vehicle Speed Sensor(VSS), the ECM, the trip odometer reset switch and thespeedometer. The VSS is mounted on the rear of the enginecrankcase behind the starter motor assembly. The sensor cir-cuitry is that of a Hall-effect sensor triggered by the gear teethof 5th gear on the transmission mainshaft.

The output from the sensor is a series of pulses that are inter-preted by the ECM circuitry, converted into serial data thensent to the speedometer. The vehicle speed serial data is alsotransmitted to the TSM/TSSM/HFSM for turn signal cancella-tion.

ODOMETER THEORY OF OPERATIONThe odometer mileage is permanently stored and will not belost when electrical power is turned off or disconnected. Thetrip odometer reset switch allows switching between the odo-meter, trip odometer A and trip odometer B displays.

To zero the trip odometer, have the desired trip odometer dis-play visible and press and hold the trip odometer reset switch.The trip odometer mileage will be displayed for 2-3 secondsand then the trip mileage will return to zero miles.

The odometer can display six numbers to indicate a maximumof 999999 miles/kilometers.The trip odometers can display sixnumbers with a tenth of a mile accuracy for a maximum of99999.9 miles/kilometers.

TACHOMETER THEORY OF OPERATIONSee Figure 2-8. The tachometer receives serial data from theECM. The tachometer interprets the serial data and convertsit into tachometer needle movement.

NOTE

Indicator lamps in the tachometer face may illuminate duringa "WOW" test, even though they do not function during normalvehicle operation.

HOME


ed02817

Figure 2-8.Tachometer (Typical)

DIAGNOSTICS






1. If problems are intermittent, wiggle harness while per-forming tests.

2. Connect BREAKOUT BOX (Part No. HD-42682) (black)between tachometer connector [108A] (at the back of thetachometer) and wire harness connector [108B] usingINSTRUMENT HARNESS ADAPTERS (Part No. HD-46601). See 2.5 BREAKOUT BOX: SPEEDO-METER/TACHOMETER.

3. Use HARNESS CONNECTOR TEST KIT (Part No. HD-41404-B), black pin probe and patch cord.

1 532 4

ed01765

1. Engine temperature lamp2. Check engine lamp3. Low fuel lamp4. Battery lamp5. Security lamp

Figure 2-9. Instruments (XR)

BK

BKBK

BK

BK

O/W

O/W

O/W

O

OO

LGN/V

LGN/VLGN/V

BN/GY

BN/GY

BN/GY

BN/V

BN/V

IgnitionSerial data

BatteryAccessory

Ground

12

567

12

567

RPM x 100

IgnitionSerial data

BatteryAccessory

GroundTrip SW

Trip SW

12

67

1112

12

45678

11

12

45678

11

[39A] [39B]

[108A] [108B]

Tachometer(if equipped)

Speedometer

OdometerReset Switch

[20A]

Security LP

em01124

Figure 2-10. Speedometer/Tachometer Circuit (XL)

HOME


BK

BKBK

GY

GY

O/W

O/W

O/W

O

O

LGN/V

LGN/VLGN/V

BN/GY

BN/GY

BN/GY

BN/V

BN/V

Serial Data

BatteryAccessory

Ground

C

BAD

C

BAD

RPM x 100

IgnitionSerial Data

BatteryAccessory

GroundTrip/Reset

Trip/Reset

12

67

1112

12

45678

11

12

45678

11

[108A] [108B]

[39A] [39B]

Tachometer

Speedometer

Trip/ResetSwitch

[20A]

[154]Security LP

em01305

Figure 2-11. Speedometer/Tachometer Circuit (XR)







HOME


Tachometer Inoperative (Part 1 of 2)

Perform “WOW” test. See 2.3 ODOMETERSELF-DIAGNOSTICS.

The following features should be functional1) backlight should illuminate2) needle should sweep its full range of motion3) LED’s may illuminate (XL only):

• cruise (although not cruise equipped)• pursuit (although not a police vehicle)


YES


YES NO

Repeat “WOW” testwhile wiggling

harnesses.

No troublefound.

NO

Check for battery voltage atBreakout Box terminal 1.


YES NO


YES NO

Locate andrepair

source offault.

Replacefuse.

Locate and repairopen in (O) wirebetween terminal

1 of connector[108] and

instrument fuse.


terminal 2 and terminal 7of connector [20].


YESNO


wire.

3

2

fc01966_en

1

Go toTachometerInoperative

(Part 2 of 2).

HOME


Tachometer Inoperative (Part 2 of 2)

Continued from Tachometer Inoperative (Part 1 of 2).Check for continuity to ground on Breakout Box terminal 7. Wiggle


YES NO

Check for battery voltage at Breakout Boxterminal 5 while wiggling harness.

Is battery voltage continuously present?

Locate and repair open on (BK) wirebetween terminal 7 of connector [108]

and ground.

YES NO

Check for battery voltage at BreakoutBox terminal 6.


Locate and repair open on (BN/GY)wire between terminal 5 of connector

[108] and battery fuse.

YES NO

Replace tachometer.

Locate and repair openon (O/W) wire betweenterminal 6 of connector

[108] and accessoryfuse.

fc01067_en

HOME


2.5BREAKOUT BOX:SPEEDOMETER/TACHOMETER

GENERAL




The BREAKOUT BOX (Part No. HD-42682) and INSTRUMENTHARNESS ADAPTERS (Part No. HD-46601) connect to thespeedometer connector [39] (XL only) or tachometer connector[108]. Used in conjunction with a DVOM, the breakout boxallows circuit diagnosis of wiring harness and connectionswithout having to probe with sharp objects

NOTE

See wiring diagrams for speedometer and tachometer terminalfunctions.

SPEEDOMETER: XL ONLY




Installation1. See Figure 2-12. Press latch on connector [39B].

2. Connect INSTRUMENT HARNESS ADAPTERS (PartNo. HD-46601) to connectors [39A] and [39B].

3. Attach black connectors from BREAKOUT BOX (PartNo. HD-42682) to INSTRUMENT HARNESSADAPTERS (Part No. HD-46601).

Removal1. Disconnect BREAKOUT BOX (Part No. HD-42682)from

INSTRUMENT HARNESS ADAPTERS (Part No. HD-46601).

2. Detach INSTRUMENT HARNESS ADAPTERS (PartNo. HD-46601) from connectors [39A] and [39B].

3. See Figure 2-12. Plug wire harness connector [39B] intospeedometer connector [39A].

ed02819

Figure 2-12. Speedomter Connector [39] on XL orTachometer Connector [108] on XR (Typical)

TACHOMETER




Installation1. Press latch on connector [108B].

2. Connect INSTRUMENT HARNESS ADAPTERS (PartNo. HD-46601) to connectors [108A] and [108B].

3. Attach black connectors from BREAKOUT BOX (PartNo. HD-42682) to INSTRUMENT HARNESSADAPTERS (Part No. HD-46601).

Removal1. Disconnect BREAKOUT BOX (Part No. HD-42682) from

INSTRUMENT HARNESS ADAPTERS (Part No. HD-46601).

2. Detach INSTRUMENT HARNESS ADAPTERS (PartNo. HD-46601)from connectors [108A] and [108B].

3. Plug wire harness connector [108B] into tachometer con-nector [108A].

HOME


2.6INDICATOR LAMPS

GENERALSee Figure 2-13. All models are equipped with Light EmittingDiode (LED) indicator lamps, which must be replaced as acomplete assembly with harness.


23

1

ed02820

1. LED assembly2. Release latch (4)3. Lamp bezel

Figure 2-13. Indicator Lamp Assembly (Typical)

DIAGNOSTICS




1. Use HARNESS CONNECTOR TEST KIT (Part No. HD-41404-B), gray pin probe and patch cord.

HOME


TNT

N

BK

BK

BK

BK

BK BK

BK

BK

BK

BN

BN

O

O

OO

O

O

W

W

V

V

GN/Y

GN

/Y

3 654 98 12

Main Harness Connector

[20A]

[39A][39B]

Speedometer

[108A]

Tachometer(if equipped)

[108B]

1 7

1 7

1 7

Igni

tion

Gro

und

Gro

und

Igni

tion

1 7

em01121

Figure 2-14. Indicator Lamp Circuit (XL)

HOME


TN

TN

BK

BK

BK

BK

BK

BK

BK

BK

BK

BK

BN

BN

O

O

OO

O

W

W

V

V

GN

/Y

GN

/Y3 654 98 12

Main Harness Connector

[20A]

[108A][108B]

Speedometer

[39A]

Tachometer[39B]

1 7

1 7

D

Gro

und

Gro

und

Igni

tion

D

em01306

Figure 2-15. Indicator Lamp Circuit (XR)







HOME


Oil Pressure or Neutral Indicator Will Not Function

Turn on ignition switch. Check for 12 VDC at connector [20B] terminal6. Turn off ignition switch.

Was 12 VDC present?1

YES

Check for continuity to ground at Breakout Box terminal 8 (Neutral)and terminal 9 (oil pressure).


YES

Replace indicatorlamp.

NO

Check for open fusesor locate open circuit.

NO

Check each terminal for continuityto ground through switch.


YES NO NO

Repair open in (GN/Y)wire (oil pressure) or(TN) wire (neutral).

Replace oilpressure switch.


5048

5191

50485161 5157

fc01068_en

HOME


High Beam or R/L Turn Signal Indicator Will Not Function

Check for ground at connector [20B] terminal 12.Is ground present?

YES NO

Check for 12 VDC when circuit is active:Breakout Box terminal 5 (left turn), terminal 3

(right turn) or terminal 4 (high beam).Is voltage present?

YES

Replace indicator lamp.

Locate and repairopen in circuit.

NO

Locate and repairopen in circuit.

1

5048

51915048

fc01069_en

HOME


2.7DTC B1004, B1005

GENERALSee Figure 2-16. The fuel level is monitored by the speedo-meter terminal "9" of connector [39] (Y/W) XL or Tachometerconnector [108] XR.

• If the voltage on terminal "9" of connector [39] XL andconnector [108] XR exceeds the lower limit for greaterthan or equal to 15 seconds, DTC B1004 will set.

• If the voltage on terminal "9" of connector [39] XL andconnector [108] XR exceeds the upper limit (or is open)for greater than or equal to 15 seconds, DTC B1005 willset.

Table 2-7. Code Description

DESCRIPTIONDTC

Fuel level sending unit lowB1004

Fuel level sending unit high/openB1005

ed02819

Figure 2-16. Speedometer Connector [39] on XL orTachometer [108] on XR (Typical)

DIAGNOSTICS





Diagnostic TipsIf fuel gauge is performing erratically (possible false DTCs),review Table 2-8 for proper functionality.


1. Use HARNESS CONNECTOR TEST KIT (Part No. HD-41404-B), brown pin probe and patch cord.

2. Connect BREAKOUT BOX (Part No. HD-42682) andINSTRUMENT HARNESS ADAPTERS (Part No. HD-46601) between wire harness and speedometer XL ortachometer XR.

Table 2-8.Testing Fuel Sender Resistor Assembly

[39B] PIN 2 RESISTANCE TO GROUNDFUEL LEVEL

2000 ohms ±200Low

10000 ohms ±200High

HOME


12

65

9

7

12

65

9

7

1

32

4

[91A]

1210

10

71 62

1271 62

3 2 1

3 2 1

41 32

41 32

IgnitionSerial Data

BatteryAccessory

Ground

Fuel Level

12V(Switched)

AccessoryFuse

BatteryFuse

InstrumentFuse

12V(Switched)

12V(Switched)

12V(BATT)

IgnitionFuse

Fuel PumpFuse

GND 1

GND 1

[GND1]

SystemRelay

BN/GY

BN

/GY

BN

/GY

R/GY

Data LinkConnector

Fuel Pump AndLow Fuel Switch

Fuel SenderResistor

Assembly 2000

2000 [86]

BK

BK

BK

GY

GY

BK

BK

BK

BK

BK

Y/GN

Y/W

Y/W

Y/W

Y/W

Y/W

Y/R

Y/R

O

OO

R

O

LGN/V

LGN

/VLG

N/V

LGN

/V

LGN/V

BN/GY

O/G

Y

O/GY

R/BK

R/BK

O/W

O/W

O/W

O/W

ECM

Ser

ialD

ata

5

5[78B][78A]

[141B][141A]

[20A][20B]

[200A][200B]

[39B]-XLSpeedometer-XL [39A][108B]-XRTachometer-XR [108A]

em01309

Figure 2-17. Fuel Sender Circuitry







Back of tachometer12-place PackardTachometer (XR)[108]

Forward of relay/fuse blocks4-place MolexFuel pump and low fuel switch[141]

Under seat3-place MolexFuel sender resistor assembly[200]

HOME


DTC B1004

Disconnect speedometerconnector [39] on XL, or

tachometer connector [108] onXR.

Disconnect and measureresistance between terminal 2

and terminal 4 of connector[141A].

Is resistance between 1800and 10200 ohms?

YES NO

Replace fuel level switch.

6035

Disconnect [200].Is there continuity to

ground?

NOYES

Replace fuel senderresistor assembly.

Locate and repair short toground in harness.

60837182

Clear DTCs using odometer self-diagnostics. See 2.3ODOMETER SELF-DIAGNOSTICS. Confirm properoperation with no check engine lamp. fc01949_en

HOME


DTC B1005

Disconnect speedometerconnector [39] on XL, ortachometer connector[108] on XR. Measure

voltage on terminal 2 ofconnector [141A] (Y/W).

Should be 0 volts.Is it?

YES NO

Check continuity between terminal2 of connector [141A] (Y/W) andBreakout Box terminal 11 (BK).


Locate and repair shortto voltage.

YES NO

Check continuity to ground on terminal4 of connector [141A] (BK).



YES NO

Replace fuel senderresistor assembly.

Locate and repair open on(BK) wire (ground circuit).

1

1

2

1

6083 6069

6069

6069

Clear DTCs using odometer self-diagnostics. See 2.3ODOMETER SELF-DIAGNOSTICS. Confirm properoperation with no check engine lamp.

fc01818_en

HOME


2.8DTC B1006, B1007

GENERAL

Accessory or Ignition Line OvervoltageIgnition and accessory voltage is constantly monitored by thespeedometer (terminal 1 ignition and terminal 6 accessory). Ifthe battery voltage fails to meet normal operating parameters,a DTC is set.

• DTC B1006 is displayed when accessory line voltage isgreater than 16.0 volts for longer than 5 seconds.

• DTC B1007 is displayed when ignition line voltage isgreater than 16.0 volts for longer than 5 seconds.

NOTE

ECM or TSM/TSSM/HFSM may also set a battery voltage DTC.


DESCRIPTIONDTC

Accessory line overvoltageB1006

Ignition line overvoltageB1007

HOME


DTCs B1006 and B1007

Has battery charger beenrecently connected?

YES NO

Diagnose charging system.See 1.7 CHARGING SYSTEM.

NOTESometimes battery charger may

cause over voltage condition whichwill set codes.Clear codes.

Start vehicle. Run at 3000RPM for 5 seconds.Does code reset?

YES NO

Diagnose chargingsystem.

See 1.7 CHARGINGSYSTEM.

System normal.


fc01819_en

HOME


2.9DTC B1008

GENERAL

Trip Odometer Reset Switch ClosedDiagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) B1008 will be set if trip odo-meter reset switch terminals are in a constant shorted state.

ed02816



DESCRIPTIONDTC

Trip odometer reset switch closedB1008

DIAGNOSTICS





1. Disconnect speedometer connector [39] on XL, or tacho-meter connector [108] on XR (at the back of the speedo-meter). See 2.5 BREAKOUT BOX: SPEEDO-METER/TACHOMETER.

2. Connect BREAKOUT BOX (Part No. HD-42682) (black)to wire harness connector [39B] on XL, wire harnessconnector [108B] on XR using INSTRUMENT HARNESSADAPTERS (Part No. HD-46601), leaving speedometerXL, or tachometer XR disconnected.

8

11

8

11Trip SW

Trip SW

ResetSwitch

BK BK

BK

BK

[39B]-XLSpeedometer-XL [39A][108B]-XRTachometer-XR [108A]

em01310

Figure 2-19.Trip Odometer Reset Switch Circuit





HOME


DTC B1008

Remove trip odometer reset switch rubberboot.

Clear codes. See 2.3 ODOMETER SELF-DIAGNOSTICS.

Are codes still present?


YES NO

With speedometer connector [39]on XL, or tachometer connector

[108] on XR disconnected,measure resistance between

Breakout Box terminal 8 and 11(black). Resistance should be lessthan 1 ohm with switch depressedand infinity ohms when released.

Is it?

1

YES NO

Replace speedometer onXL, or tachometer on XR.


Replace boot.

fc01820_en

2

HOME


2.10DTC U1016, U1255

GENERAL

Loss of ECM Serial DataThe serial data line provides a means for the ECM,TSM/TSSM/HFSM, speedometer on XL and tachometer onXR to communicate their current status. When all operatingparameters on the serial data line are within specifications, astate of health message is sent between the components.

• DTC U1016 indicates that the ECM is not capable ofsending this state of health message.

• DTC U1255 indicates that no messages were presentduring power up of the current key cycle.

• DTC U1016 indicates that there was communication onthe data bus since power up, but communication was lostor interrupted during that key cycle.


DESCRIPTIONDTC

Loss of all ECM serial data (state of health)U1016

Serial data error/missing messageU1255

DIAGNOSTICS




ECM BREAKOUT BOXHD-48637


1. Connect BREAKOUT BOX (Part No. HD-42682) (black)between speedometer connector [39A] on XL, or tacho-meter connector [108A] on XR and wire harness connector[39B] on XL, or wire harness connector [108B] on XR usingINSTRUMENT HARNESS ADAPTERS (Part No. HD-46601). See 2.5 BREAKOUT BOX: SPEEDO-METER/TACHOMETER.

2. Use ECM BREAKOUT BOX (Part No. HD-48637).

HOME


BK

BK

BK

GY GY

GY

O/W

O/W

O/W

O/W

O

O

O

R

BN

/GY

BN

/GY

BN

/GY

BN/GY

BN

/GY

LGN

/V BK

BK

BK

O/WO

O

BN

/GY

LGN

/V

LGN

/V

LGN

/V

LGN/V

LGN

/V

LGN

/V

R/BK

R/BK

R/GY

1 2 3 12

1 2 3 12

1 2 5 76

1 2 5 76

1 2 5 6 7

1 2 5 6 7

Igni

tion

Ser

iald

ata

Bat

tery

Acc

esso

ryG

roun

d

Igni

tion

Ser

ialD

ata

Bat

tery

Bat

tery

Igni

tion

Ser

ialD

ata

Gro

und

Acc

esso

ryG

roun

d

Speedometer

TSM/TSSM/HFSM


To ACCY Fuse

To BATT Fuse

To INSTR Fuse

To IGN Fuse

12V ACCYFuse

12V BATTFuse

12V INSTRFuse

12V IGNFuse

3

1

2

4

Data LinkConnector

21 6 7 12

21 6 7 12

ECM

Ser

ialD

ata

5

5

GND1

GND1

GND1[78B][78A]

[30A][30B]

[20A][20B]

[108A][108B]

[39A][39B]

[91A]

Ground

Serial Data

Power

em01120


HOME


BK

BK

BK

GY GY

O/W

O/W

O/W

O/W

O

R

BN

/GY

BN

/GY

BN

/GY

BN

/GY

BN/GY

LGN

/V BK

BK

GY

BK

O/WO

OO

BN

/GY

LGN

/V

LGN

/V

LGN

/V

LGN/V

LGN

/V

LGN

/V

R/BK

R/BK

R/GY

1 2 3 12

1 2 3 12

1 2 5 76

1 2 5 76

C B A D

C B A DS

eria

lDat

a

Bat

tery

Acc

esso

ryG

roun

d

Igni

tion

Ser

ialD

ata

Bat

tery

Bat

tery

Igni

tion

Ser

ialD

ata

Gro

und

Acc

esso

ryG

roun

d

Speedometer

TSM/TSSM/HFSM

Tachometer

To ACCY Fuse

To BATT Fuse

To INSTR Fuse

To IGN Fuse

12V ACCYFuse

12V BATTFuse

12V INSTRFuse

12V IGNFuse

3

1

2

4

Ground

Serial Data

Power

Data LinkConnector

21 6 7 12

21 6 7 12

ECM

Ser

ialD

ata

5

5

GND1

GND1

GND1[78B][78A]

[108A][108B]

[20A][20B]

[39A][39B]

[30A][30B]

[91A]

em01304









HOME






HOME


DTCs U1016 and U1255

Can you read ECM hardware Part No.?See 2.3 ODOMETER SELF-DIAGNOSTICS.

YES NO or “No Rsp”

While wiggling harness, checkcontinuity between Breakout Box

terminal 2 (Black) and terminal 5 ofECM Breakout Box.


Check continuity betweenBreakout Box terminal 2 (Black)and terminal 5 of ECM Breakout

Box.Is continuity present?

YES NO

Clear codes. Test ride.Does DTC U1016

return?

Repair intermittenton (LGN/V) wire.

YES

Replace ECM.Reprogram and learn

password.No trouble found.

NO

1

2

1

2

YES NO

Replace ECM.Reprogram and

learnpassword.

Repair open on(LGN/V) wire.


fc01821_en

HOME


2.11DTC U1064, U1255

GENERAL

Loss of TSM/TSSM/HFSM Serial DataThe serial data line provides a means for the ECM,TSM/TSSM/HFSM, speedometer, and tachometer to commu-nicate their current status. When all operating parameters onthe serial data line are within specifications, a state of healthmessage is sent between the components.

• DTC U1064 indicates that the TSM/TSSM/HFSM is notreceiving this state of health message.




DESCRIPTIONDTC

Loss of TSM/TSSM/HFSM serial dataU1064


DIAGNOSTICS





1. Connect BREAKOUT BOX (Part No. HD-42682) as fol-lows:

a. Mate black socket housing on Breakout Box withspeedometer connector [39A] on XL, or tachometerconnector [108A] on XR using INSTRUMENT HAR-NESS ADAPTERS (Part No. HD-46601).

b. Mate black pin housing on Breakout Box with wireharness connector [39B] on XL, or wire harness con-nector [108B] on XR using INSTRUMENT HARNESSADAPTERS (Part No. HD-46601).

c. Mate gray socket housing on Breakout Box withTSM/TSSM/HFSM connector [30A].

d. Mate gray pin housing on Breakout Box with wireharness connector [30B].

HOME


BK

BK

BK

GY GYG

Y

O/W

O/W

O/W

O/W

O

O

O

R

BN

/GY

BN

/GY

BN

/GY

BN/GY

BN

/GY

LGN

/V BK

BK

BK

O/WO

O

BN

/GY

LGN

/V

LGN

/V

LGN

/V

LGN/V

LGN

/V

LGN

/V

R/BK

R/BK

R/GY

1 2 3 12

1 2 3 12

1 2 5 76

1 2 5 76

1 2 5 6 7

1 2 5 6 7

Igni

tion

Ser

iald

ata

Bat

tery

Acc

esso

ryG

roun

d

Igni

tion

Ser

ialD

ata

Bat

tery

Bat

tery

Igni

tion

Ser

ialD

ata

Gro

und

Acc

esso

ryG

roun

d

Speedometer

TSM/TSSM/HFSM


To ACCY Fuse

To BATT Fuse

To INSTR Fuse

To IGN Fuse

12V ACCYFuse

12V BATTFuse

12V INSTRFuse

12V IGNFuse

3

1

2

4

Data LinkConnector

21 6 7 12

21 6 7 12

ECM

Ser

ialD

ata

5

5

GND1

GND1

GND1[78B][78A]

[30A][30B]

[20A][20B]

[108A][108B]

[39A][39B]

[91A]

Ground

Serial Data

Power

em01120


HOME


BK

BK

BK

GY GY

O/W

O/W

O/W

O/W

O

R

BN

/GY

BN

/GY

BN

/GY

BN

/GY

BN/GY

LGN

/V BK

BK

GY

BK

O/WO

OO

BN

/GY

LGN

/V

LGN

/V

LGN

/V

LGN/V

LGN

/V

LGN

/V

R/BK

R/BK

R/GY

1 2 3 12

1 2 3 12

1 2 5 76

1 2 5 76

C B A D

C B A D

Ser

ialD

ata

Bat

tery

Acc

esso

ryG

roun

d

Igni

tion

Ser

ialD

ata

Bat

tery

Bat

tery

Igni

tion

Ser

ialD

ata

Gro

und

Acc

esso

ryG

roun

d

Speedometer

TSM/TSSM/HFSM

Tachometer

To ACCY Fuse

To BATT Fuse

To INSTR Fuse

To IGN Fuse

12V ACCYFuse

12V BATTFuse

12V INSTRFuse

12V IGNFuse

3

1

2

4

Ground

Serial Data

Power

Data LinkConnector

21 6 7 12

21 6 7 12

ECM

Ser

ialD

ata

5

5

GND1

GND1

GND1[78B][78A]

[108A][108B]

[20A][20B]

[39A][39B]

[30A][30B]

[91A]

em01304









HOME






HOME



Can you read TSM/TSSM/HFSM hardware Part No.?See 2.3 ODOMETER SELF-DIAGNOSTICS.

YES NO

While wiggling harness, checkfor continuity between

Breakout Box terminal 3(Gray) and Breakout Box

terminal 2 (Black).Is continuity present?

Check for continuitybetween Breakout Boxterminal 3 (Gray) and

Breakout Box terminal 2(Black).


YES NO

Clear codes. Test ride.Does DTC U1064

return?


YES NO


password.No trouble found.

YES NO

Replace TSM/TSSM/HFSM.Perform password learn.


11


fc01822_en

HOME


2.12DTC U1300, U1301 OR BUS ER

GENERAL

Serial Data Low or Serial Data Open/HighThe typical serial data voltage range is 0 volts (inactive) to 7volts (active). Due to the short pulse, voltages will be muchlower on a DVOM. In analog mode, a DVOM reading serialdata will show continuous voltage when active, typically 0.6-0.8 volts. The range for acceptable operations is 0-7.0 volts.


DESCRIPTIONDTC

Serial data lowU1300

Serial data open/highU1301

ed01340

Figure 2-24. Data Link Connector [91A] (Behind Left SideCover)

DIAGNOSTICS

Diagnostic Tips• If serial data is shorted, these Diagnostic Trouble Codes

(DTCs) will automatically cause the check engine lamp toilluminate. The odometer will read "BUS Er" in this condi-tion.

• DTCs P1009 and P1010 may accompany DTCs U1300and U1301.

Diagnostic NotesIf a U1300, U1301 or "BUS Er" is present, perform diagnosticprocedures listed in 4.11 STARTS, THEN STALLS.

HOME


TABLE OF CONTENTS

SUBJECT............................................................................................................................PAGE NO.3.1 TURN SIGNAL OVERVIEW.......................................................................................................3-13.2 HARLEY-DAVIDSON SMART SECURITY SYSTEM.................................................................3-23.3 H-DSSS ACTUATION................................................................................................................3-53.4 PERSONAL IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (PIN)........................................................................3-63.5 ARMING/DISARMING SECURITY SYSTEM............................................................................3-83.6 WARNINGS AND ALARMS.....................................................................................................3-103.7 SERVICE/EMERGENCY FUNCTIONS...................................................................................3-113.8 TROUBLESHOOTING.............................................................................................................3-123.9 CHECKING FOR DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES..............................................................3-133.10 INITIAL DIAGNOSTIC CHECK: TSM/HFSM.........................................................................3-163.11 ODOMETER SELF-DIAGNOSTICS......................................................................................3-243.12 BREAKOUT BOX: TSM/HFSM..............................................................................................3-263.13 FAILS TO DISARM (HFSM ONLY)........................................................................................3-283.14 DTC B0563............................................................................................................................3-313.15 TSM/HFSM: TURN SIGNAL ERRORS AND DTCS..............................................................3-323.16 DTC B1131, B1132 (HFSM ONLY)........................................................................................3-483.17 DTC B1134............................................................................................................................3-513.18 DTCS B1135, B1136, B1141, AND B1142............................................................................3-543.19 DTC B1143, B1144, B1145 (HFSM ONLY)...........................................................................3-583.20 DTC B1154, B1155...............................................................................................................3-613.21 DTC U1016, U1255...............................................................................................................3-653.22 DTC U1300, U1301 OR BUS ER..........................................................................................3-703.23 TSM/HFSM: PASSWORD LEARN.........................................................................................3-713.24 HFSM MAINTENANCE.........................................................................................................3-72

TS

M/H

FS

M


3.1TURN SIGNAL OVERVIEW

GENERALThe TSM has two major functions:

• Control turn signals.

• Serve as BAS.

The optional, factory-installed, Harley-Davidson Smart SecuritySystem (H-DSSS) includes a HFSM, which provides the samefunctions as the TSM, but also includes security and immobil-ization functions.

SECURITY SYSTEM: JAPAN/KOREAThe security system on motorcycles sold in Japan and Koreameet the regulatory requirements for those countries. Thesystem incorporates a TSSM. Complete details on operation,troubleshooting, and diagnostics are found in E.1 TSM/TSSM(JAPAN/KOREA) OVERVIEW.

TURN SIGNAL FUNCTIONS• Manual turn signal control: Manual activation/deactiva-

tion of left and right turn signal flashing sequences.

• Automatic turn signal cancellation: Automatic cancella-tion of left and right turn signal flashing sequences basedon either vehicle speed, vehicle acceleration or turn com-pletion.

• Hazard warning 4-way flashers: Four-way left and rightturn signal flashing capability.

• Turn signal lamp diagnostics: Self-diagnostics for shortcircuit and open lamp conditions on both left and right turnsignal systems. See 3.9 CHECKING FOR DIAGNOSTICTROUBLE CODES.

NOTE

The turn signals cannot be activated or deactivated when theignition switch is in the ACC position.The turn signals can onlybe activated or deactivated with the ignition switch in theIGNITION position.

MANUAL CANCELLATIONTo stop the turn signals from flashing, briefly depress the turnsignal switch a second time.

To switch turn direction signals, depress the switch for theopposite turn signal. The first signal is cancelled and theopposite side begins flashing.

AUTOMATIC CANCELLATIONPress the left or right turn switch to activate automatic turnsignal cancellation. There is no need to hold the turn switch inwhen approaching the turn. The TSM/HFSM will not cancelthe signal before the turn is actually completed.

• When the directional switch is released, the system startsa 20 count. As long as the vehicle is traveling above 7

MPH (11.3 km/h) the directional will always cancel after20 flashes if the system does not recognize any otherinput.

• If the vehicle speed drops to 7 MPH (11.3 km/h) or less,including stopped, the directionals will continue to flash.Counting will resume when vehicle speed reaches 8 MPH(12.9 km/h) and will automatically cancel when the counttotal equals 20 as stated above.

• The turn signals will cancel within two seconds upon turncompletion. A sensor inside the TSM/HFSM cancels thesignal after the vehicle has been returned to an uprightposition.

NOTE

The bank angle cancellation function has an automatic calibra-tion feature. Ride the motorcycle for 0.25 miles (0.4 km) atsteady speeds (upright) to calibrate the system. Performanceof bank angle function may not be optimal until this calibrationis performed. This self-calibration is performed automaticallyevery time the vehicle is started and ridden.

BANK ANGLE FUNCTIONS• Emergency engine shutdown: Will provide engine

shutdown when vehicle is tipped over.

• Emergency outputs disable: Will disable turn signallamps and starter motor when vehicle is tipped over.

BANK ANGLE RESTARTThe engine will shut off automatically if the vehicle is tippedover. The turn signals, starter motor, ECM, fuel pump and coilwill be disabled.

The odometer displays "tIP" when a tip over condition isdetected.

To restart the motorcycle after shutdown has occurred:

1. Return the motorcycle to an upright position.

2. Cycle the ignition switch OFF-ON before restarting themotorcycle.

CLUTCH/NEUTRAL INTERLOCK• Disables starter: Disables starter until either the clutch

lever is pulled in or transmission neutral is selected.

• Diagnostics: Provides diagnostics for clutch and neutralswitch faults.

SECURITY SYSTEM H-DSSSSee 3.2 HARLEY-DAVIDSON SMART SECURITY SYSTEM.

HOME

2009 Sportster Diagnostics: TSM/HFSM 3-1

3.2HARLEY-DAVIDSON SMART SECURITY SYSTEM

COMPONENTSThe H-DSSS consists of three components:

• Hands-Free Security Module: See Figure 3-1. A elec-tronic module that functions both as the TSM and as theHFSM.

• Hands-Free Antenna: See Figure 3-1. Mounted underthe seat of the motorcycle.

• Hands-Free Fob: See Figure 3-2. A remote control device,intended to be carried by the rider whenever the vehicleis being operated.

NOTE

Do not relocate any of the Security System components.

ed02826

Figure 3-1. HFSM and Antenna

ed02044

Figure 3-2. Hands-Free Fob w/Serial Number Label

SECURITY IMMOBILIZATIONThe HFSM provides security and immobilization functions notfound on the TSM. The HFSM will disable the starter and igni-tion system. Additional functions include the ability to alternatelyflash the left and right turn signals and sound a siren (ifequipped) if a theft attempt is detected.

NOTE

The siren must be in the Chirp Mode for the siren to chirp onarming or disarming. See 3.6 WARNINGS AND ALARMS,Siren Chirp Mode (Confirmation).

Conditions that activate the security system when system isarmed include:

• Detecting tampering of the ignition circuit: Turn signalsflash three times, optional siren chirps once and then turnsoff. If the tampering continues, a second warning willactivate after four seconds. Continued tampering will causethe alarm to activate for 30 seconds and then turn off.Thetwo warnings/alarm cycle is repeated for each tamperingincident.

• Detecting vehicle movement: Turn signals flash threetimes, optional siren chirps once and then turns off. If thevehicle is not returned to its original position, a secondwarning will activate after four seconds. If the vehicle isnot returned to its original position, the alarm activates for30 seconds then turns off. The two warnings/alarm cyclemay repeat a maximum of 10 times with a 10 secondpause between cycles.

• Detecting that a battery or ground disconnect hasoccurred while armed: Siren, if installed, activates itsself-alarm mode. Turn signals will not flash.

HOME

3-2 2009 Sportster Diagnostics: TSM/HFSM

See 3.5 ARMING/DISARMING SECURITY SYSTEM for moreinformation.

NOTE

Disconnect the battery to prevent the siren (if installed) fromactivating within 5 seconds of turning the ignition switch toOFF/FORK LOCK. If the HFSM is armed, you must turn theignition switch to IGNITION with a fob within range, again turnthe ignition switch to OFF/FORK LOCK and remove theMAXIFUSE before the 5-second arming period expires. Withthe MAXIFUSE removed, the battery can be disconnected.

HFSM FEATURES



The following information applies only to motorcycles equippedwith the Hands-Free Security System (HFSM).

• Security lamp: See Figure 3-3. A lamp (key icon) withinthe speedometer face on XL, or tachometer face on XR,tells the rider if the system is armed or disarmed.

• Personal code disarming: If the fob is not available, theHFSM allows the rider to disable the security alarm andimmobilization functions with a five-digit personal code.

• Arming confirmation: When the HFSM is armed, thesystem provides visual feedback (confirmation) to the riderby flashing the turn signals and an audible "chirp" ifequipped with the optional smart siren and chirp mode isenabled.

• Disarming confirmation: When the HFSM is disarmed,the system provides an audible "chirp" (confirmation) ifequipped with the optional smart siren and chirp mode isenabled.

• Transport mode: It is possible to arm the security systemwithout enabling the motion detector for one ignition cycle.This allows the vehicle to be moved in an immobilizedstate.

• Starter/ignition disable: When armed the starter andignition system are disabled.

• Security system alarm: See Figure 3-4. The system willalternately flash the left and right turn signals and soundan optional Security Siren if a vehicle security conditionis detected while the system is armed.

• Dealer service mode: This mode allows the dealer todisable security system via DIGITAL TECHNICIAN II (Part

No. HD-48650). Dealer service mode is exited whenmodule detects an assigned fob in range.

ed02920

Figure 3-3. Security Lamp (Key Icon) (Typical)

ed02047

Figure 3-4. Security Siren

HOME


1

3

3

Battery

SerialData

SerialData

BatteryFuse15A

IGN Fuse15A

ACC Fuse15A

421

2

1 Receive Antenna

Transmit Antenna A

Transmit Antenna B3

2

1

2

1

2

5

2 2

5

12

4

7

8

2

1

3

12

4

7

8

2

1

3

BB

6

5

9

10

11

6

5

9

10

11

30 AmpMAXIFUSE Fuse

Block

IgnitionSwitch

Data LinkConnector

ECM

Speedometer-XLTachometer-XR

Right TurnSwitch

ClutchSwitch

SecuritySiren(Optional)

Left TurnSwitch

NeutralSwitch

Receive

HandsFree

Antenna

HFSM

TSM/HFSM

Right TurnLamps

Left TurnLamps

BK

BK

BK

BN

BN

BN

BN

BK

BK

BK

BK

BK

BK

BK

BK

BK

GY

TN

TN

BK

BK

R

R

VV V V

RR

R

R/BK

R/GY

BK/R

BK/R

BN/GY

GY

BN/GY

LGN/V LGN/V

LGN/BN

LGN/BN

LGN

/VLG

N/V

LGN

/V

Y/BK Y/BK

O/Y

O/Y

O/W

O/W

W/BN

W/V

O/W

[78B]

[78A]

[91A]

[39A] [39B]-XL[108A] [108B]-XR

[209B] [209A]

[208B] [208A]

[142B] [142A]

[30B] [30A] [30A] [30B]

AlarmSignal

Battery

ClutchSwitch

Ignition

Start RelayControl

Left TurnSwitch Input

Right TurnSwitch Input

Serial Data

Left TurnFeed

NeutralSwitch

Right TurnFeed

Ground

30

87

86

85

StartRelay

Starter

EngineStop Switch

StartSwitch

ToBatteryPositive

ToIgnitionSwitch

ToIgnitionFuse

ToECM

GN

BK

GY

BK

R/BK

W/BK

W/BKW/BK

BK

/R

TN/GN

em01317

Figure 3-5. Simplified TSM/HFSM Wiring

HOME


3.3H-DSSS ACTUATION

GENERALSetting up a vehicle TSM/HFSM depends on whether thevehicle has a TSM or the optional HFSM security systeminstalled.

SIDECAR CONFIGURATION

Only Touring Harley-Davidson Motorcycles are suitablefor sidecar use. Consult a Harley-Davidson dealer. Use ofmotorcycles other than Touring models with sidecarscould result in death or serious injury. (00040a)

All motorcycles ship with the H-DSSS set for use without asidecar installed. If a motorcycle is equipped with a TSM, nofurther actuation is required.

ACTUATIONActuation consists of assigning two fobs to the system, andentering an initial PIN. The PIN can be changed by the riderat any time.

1. Configure HFSM motorcycles by assigning both fobs tothe vehicle.

2. Configure HFSM motorcycles by entering a PIN pickedby the owner. The personal code allows the owner tooperate the system if the fob is lost or inoperable. Recordthe PIN in the Owner's Manual and instruct the customerto carry a copy (use the wallet card found in the Owner'sManual). See 3.4 PERSONAL IDENTIFICATION NUMBER(PIN).

Once the system has been activated, it will always "arm" within5 seconds of turning the ignition switch to OFF and no motor-cycle motion.

FOB ASSIGNMENT



Use DIGITAL TECHNICIAN II (Part No. HD-48650) to assignboth fobs to the H-DSSS. Follow the menu prompts in theDIGITAL TECHNICIAN II (Part No. HD-48650) display andscan the fob serial number with the bar code reader, or key-inthe number from the keyboard. See a Harley-Davidson dealer.

NOTE

Each fob has a unique serial number. The label should beremoved from the fob and attached to a blank NOTES pagein the Owner's Manual for reference.

POWER DISRUPTION AND CONFIGURING



The HFSM will not enter PIN entry mode on the first attemptafter battery voltage has been removed from terminal 1. Thiswill occur after any of the following:

• Battery disconnect or power drain.

• Battery fuse removal.

• Connecting BREAKOUT BOX (Part No. HD-42682) toHFSM connector.

Therefore, after all battery reconnects, the configurationsequence must be modified as follows:

1. Set Engine Stop Switch to OFF, cycle ignition switchIGNITION-OFF-IGNITION-OFF-IGNITION and press leftturn signal switch twice.

2. Repeat steps listed above.

3. Continue with PIN entry sequence listed.

HOME


3.4PERSONAL IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (PIN)

GENERALThe PIN consists of five digits. Each digit can be any numberfrom 1-9. There can be no zeros (0) in the PIN. The PIN mustbe used to disarm the security system in case the fob becomesunavailable.

INITIAL PIN ENTRYTo enter a PIN on a motorcycle with no PIN previously installedduring HFSM actuation, refer to Table 3-1.

Table 3-1. Entering an Initial PIN: HFSM

CONFIRMATIONACTIONSTEP

Select a five-digit (1 through 9) initial PIN and record in the Owner'sManual and on the wallet card.

1

With an assigned fob present, set engine stop switch to OFF.2

Cycle ignition switch IGNITION-OFF-IGNITION-OFF-IGNITION.3

Turn signals flash three times.Press left turn signal button twice.4

Five dashes appear in the odometerwindow. The first dash flashes.

Press right turn signal button once.5

Enter first digit (a) of initial PIN by pressing left turn signal button untildesired digit is displayed in odometer.

6

The digit (a) replaces the dash in theodometer. The second dash flashes.


Enter second digit (b) of initial PIN by pressing left turn signal buttonuntil desired digit is displayed in odometer.

8

The digit (b) replaces the dash in theodometer. The third dash flashes.


Enter third digit (c) of initial PIN by pressing left turn signal button untildesired digit is displayed in odometer.

10

The digit (c) replaces the dash in theodometer. The fourth dash flashes.


Enter fourth digit (d) of initial PIN by pressing left turn signal buttonuntil desired digit is displayed in odometer.

12

The digit (d) replaces the dash in theodometer. The fifth dash flashes.


Enter fifth digit (e) of initial PIN by pressing left turn signal button untildesired digit is displayed in odometer.

14

The digit (e) replaces the dash in theodometer. The first digit flashes.


Turn the ignition switch to OFF.16

CHANGING THE PINTo change a PIN, refer to Table 3-2. The rider can change thePIN at any time.

Modifying an Existing PinIf a PIN was previously entered, the odometer will display theequivalent digit. Each additional press of the left turn switchwill increment the digit.

Examples:

• To advance from 5 to 6, press and release the left turnswitch 1 time.

• To advance from 8 to 2, press and release the left turnswitch 3 times (9-1-2).

HOME


Table 3-2. Changing the PIN: HFSM

NOTESCONFIRMATIONACTIONSTEP

Select a 5-digit (1 thru 9) personal codeand record in the Owner's Manual and onthe wallet card.

1

With fobs present, cycle ignition switchIGNITION-OFF-IGNITION-OFF-IGNITION.

2

Turn signals will flash 3 times.Press left turn signal button 2 times.3

Current PIN will appear in odometer. Thefirst digit will flash.

Press right turn signal button 1 time.4

Enter first digit (a) of new PIN by pressingleft turn signal button until desired digit isdisplayed in odometer.

5

The new digit will replace the current inthe odometer. The second digit will flash.


Enter second digit (b) of new PIN bypressing left turn signal button untildesired digit is displayed in odometer.

7

The new digit will replace the current inthe odometer. The third digit will flash.


Enter third digit (c) of new PIN by pressingleft turn signal button until desired digit isdisplayed in odometer.

9

The new digit will replace the dash in theodometer. The fourth digit will flash.


Enter fourth digit (d) of new PIN bypressing left turn signal button untildesired digit is displayed in odometer.

11

The new digit will replace the current inthe odometer. The fifth digit will flash.


Enter fifth digit (e) of new PIN by pressingleft turn signal button until desired digit isdisplayed in odometer.

13

The new digit will replace the current inthe odometer. The first digit will flash.


Turning ignition switch to OFFstores PIN.

Turn the ignition switch to OFF.15

HOME


3.5ARMING/DISARMING SECURITY SYSTEM

HANDS-FREE FOBSee Figure 3-6. The HFSM's reception range for the Hands-Free Fob signal depends on a specific receiver pattern. Therange will be an arm's length.

NOTES

• Environmental and geographic conditions may affect signalrange.

• Always have the fob present whenever the motorcycle isoperated.

• Do not place fob in metal enclosure, and do not place itcloser than 3.0 in. (80.0 mm) to the hands-free antenna,cellular phones, PDAs, displays and other electronicdevices while operating the motorcycle.That may preventthe fob from disarming the security system.

• Fob battery should be replaced every year. See3.24 HFSM MAINTENANCE.

ed02829

Figure 3-6. Hands-Free Fob

SECURITY LAMP (KEY ICON)Refer to Table 3-3. See Figure 3-7. The security lamp (keyicon) in the speedometer face on XL, and tachometer on XR,provides feedback to the rider confirming armed or disarmedstatus.

Table 3-3. Security Lamp Status

MODELAMP

No security system (TSM only), securitysystem not armed.

Does not flash.

Two minute timeout after failed PIN entryattempt or a battery reconnect hasoccurred while armed.

Flashes everysecond.

Security system armed.Flashes every 2.5seconds.

PIN entry mode.Flashes 4 times asecond.

Arming is starting up.You have 5seconds before system is armed.

Stays on solid withignition switch OFF.

If solid for more than 4 seconds afterignition switch is turned to IGNITION, acurrent DTC is present.

Stays on solid withignition switch ON.

ed02920


ARMINGThe H-DSSS automatically arms within five seconds when themotorcycle is parked and the ignition switch is turned to OFFand motion is not detected.

Confirmation: On arming, the turn signals flash twice and thesecurity siren will "chirp" twice if chirp function is activated.While armed, the security lamp (key icon) will flash every 2.5seconds. Refer to Table 3-3.

HOME


DISARMINGThere are two ways to disarm the H-DSSS:

• Automatic disarming.

• Disarming with a PIN.

Automatic DisarmingAlways have the fob present when riding, loading, fueling,moving, parking or servicing the motorcycle. Carry the fob ina convenient pocket.The H-DSSS disarms automatically whenthe ignition switch is turned to IGNITION. On disarming, thesecurity siren will chirp once (if chirp function is activated) and

the security lamp (key icon) will turn ON solid for four secondsthen go out. Refer to Table 3-4.

Disarming with a Personal IdentificationNumber (PIN)See 3.4 PERSONAL IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (PIN) toenter an initial PIN to actuate the system.

Refer to Table 3-4. If you make an error while disarming theHFSM using the PIN, the alarm will activate for 30 secondsafter the last digit is entered. After a failed attempt, the securitylamp will flash once every second for 2 minutes. During thistime, the vehicle will not accept any attempt to enter a PIN.

Table 3-4. Entering the PIN to Disarm HFSM (Example: 3-1-3-1-3)

NOTESWAIT FOR CONFIRMATIONACTIONNO.

Set engine stop switch to OFF.1

Turn ignition switch to IGNITION.2

System is ready for PIN entry.Security lamp blinks at fast rate and "0- -- - " is displayed in the odometer. The firstdigit will flash.

Hold both turn switches in until confirma-tion. *

3

Enter first digit of code (3) by pressing leftturn switch 3 times.

4

Serves as "enter" key.The first digit will be displayed and the nextdash will flash in the odometer.

Press right turn switch 1 time.5

Enter second digit of code (1) by pressingleft turn switch 1 time.

6

Serves as "enter" key.The first two digits will be displayed andthe next dash will flash in the odometer.


Enter third digit of code (3) by pressingleft turn switch 3 times.

8

Serves as "enter" key.The first three digits will be displayed andthe next dash will flash in the odometer.


Enter fourth digit of code (1) by pressingleft turn switch 1 time.

10

Serves as "enter" key.The first four digits will be displayed andthe next dash will flash in the odometer.


Enter fifth digit of code (3) by pressing leftturn switch 3 times.

12

System is disarmed.Security lamp stops blinking and the odo-meter displays miles.


* This must be done within two seconds of turning the ignition switch to IGNITION. If system issues a warning before the securitysystem flashes at a fast rate, then cycle ignition switch OFF until security key icon flashes at 2.5 second rate before re-attemptingPIN entry.

HOME


3.6WARNINGS AND ALARMS

WARNINGSA warning consists of three alternate flashes of the turn signalsand chirp from the optional security siren.Warnings are issuedfrom an armed HFSM in the following order:

1. First Warning: A warning is issued whenever a personwithout a fob present attempts to move the motorcycle orturns the ignition switch to IGNITION.

2. Second Warning: If the motion continues or the ignitionswitch is not turned back to OFF, a second warning isissued within four seconds of the first.

3. Alarm: If the motion continues or the ignition switch is notturned to OFF past the second warning, the H-DSSS willgo into full alarm.

ALARM

ActivationIn the full alarm state, the turn signals flash alternately, and ifequipped with the security siren, the siren will sound.

After 30 seconds of alarm, if no further motorcycle motion isdetected, the alarm will stop.

NOTE

Motorcycle must be returned to original parked position withignition switch turned to OFF.

If motorcycle motion continues, the alarm will start again con-tinue for another 30 seconds.

The HFSM will repeat the alarm cycles 10 times for a total offive minutes, with a 10-second pause between alarm cycles.

NOTES

• During warnings and alarms, the starter motor and theignition remain disabled.

• The alarm will also activate the LED and vibration or aud-ible modes of a Harley-Davidson Security Pager. A pager

can operate either in silent or in combination with anoptional smart siren. The range of the pager can be up to0.50 mile (0.89 km).

DeactivationThe alarm cycles can be discontinued at any time by movingan assigned fob to the motorcycle. The presence of the fobwill terminate the alarm.

SIREN CHIRP MODE (CONFIRMATION)

Chirpless ModeIn the chirpless mode, the siren does not chirp on arming ordisarming.

NOTE

Even when armed in the chirpless mode, the siren still chirpswarnings on movement and will activate the alarm throughcycles.

Chirp ModeOn arming in the chirp mode, the siren responds with twochirps.When disarming, the siren responds with a single chirp.

Switching ModesCycling quickly through two armings and disarmings will switchthe system from either the chirpless mode or the chirp modeto its opposite.

1. With the fob present, the Ignition Switch to ON and thesystem disarmed, turn the Ignition Switch OFF.

2. When the system arms (2 flashes of turn signals), imme-diately turn the Ignition Switch to ON.

3. When the system disarms, then immediately turn theIgnition Switch OFF.

4. When the system arms (2 flashes of turn signals), imme-diately turn the Ignition Switch to ON and wait for systemto disarm.

HOME


3.7SERVICE/EMERGENCY FUNCTIONS

TRANSPORT MODEIt is possible to arm the security system without enabling themotion detector for one ignition cycle. This allows the vehicleto be picked up and moved in an armed state, however, anyattempt to start the engine will trigger the alarm.

To Enter Transport Mode1. Turn the Ignition Switch to IGNITION.

2. Set the Engine Stop Switch to OFF.

3. With an assigned fob within range, turn the Ignition Switchfrom IGNITION to ACC.

4. Simultaneously press both the left and the right turn signalswitches.This must be done within five seconds of turningthe Ignition Switch to ACC.

5. After the turn signals flash once, turn the Ignition Switchto OFF and the module is armed.

6. Confirmation: Turn signal blinks three times when armedfor one ignition cycle.

To Exit Transport ModeReturn the system to normal operation:

With the fob present, turn the Ignition Switch to IGNITION todisarm the HFSM.To cancel the transport mode, set the EngineStop Switch to RUN.

SERVICE MODE



With a fob present, the HFSM can be configured for serviceby disabling the security system with DIGITAL TECHNICIANII (Part No. HD-48650).

Once disabled, the motorcycle can be operated without anassigned fob present. To maintain the Service Mode, theassigned fobs must be kept out of range. If the fob appears inrange, the Service Mode will be exited.

FOUR-WAY FLASHINGIf it is necessary to leave a motorcycle parked along side theroad, the hazard warning four-way flashers can be turned ONwith the H-DSSS armed.

To Arm the HFSM with the Hazard WarningFlashers ON1. Turn the ignition switch to IGNITION.

2. Simultaneously press both left and right turn signalswitches to turn the four-way flashers ON. The four-wayflashers will continue for two hours.

3. Turn the ignition switch to OFF to arm the H-DSSS

To Disarm the HFSM and Turn the HazardWarning Flashers OFF1. With a fob present, turn the ignition switch to IGNITION.

2. Simultaneously press the left and right turn signal switches.

HOME


3.8TROUBLESHOOTING

TURN SIGNALS (TSM/HFSM)Verify the operation of the turn signals and the integrity of thefuse protecting the turn signals before further troubleshooting.

SECURITY SYSTEM (HFSM)If the fob is present, and the security system is issuing "warn-ings" or "Alarm" when the motorcycle is moved, the reasonmay be one of the following:

1. Strong electromagnetic interference in the area you haveparked.

a. Verify you have not placed your fob in a metalenclosure or within 3.0 in. (80.0 mm) of other elec-tronic devices.

b. Place fob on the vehicle seat and turn the IgnitionSwitch to IGNITION. After the system disarms, thefob can be placed back in its carrying location.

c. Move the motorcycle approximately 15 feet (4.57 m)away from the current parking spot.

2. The fob battery is dead. Use PIN to disarm the vehicle.Replace fob battery.

3. Fob is damaged. Use PIN to disarm the vehicle. Replacethe fob.

NOTES

• If your Security Icon is staying solid ON while you areriding the vehicle, take your vehicle to your dealer as soonas practical.

• Always lock the fork and take the ignition key with you foradded protection.

DIAGNOSTICS MODEThe TSM/HFSM measures the current when the turn signalsare used. If there is a burned out light bulb on one side, theremaining light and the corresponding turn signal indicator flashat double the normal rate starting with the fifth flash.

Other diagnostic conditions monitored include:

• Short circuit in the turn signal wiring.

• Open circuit in the turn signal wiring.

• Stuck turn signal switch.

NOTES

• A stuck turn signal switch will disable the automatic turnsignal cancellation feature.

• If a stuck switch is detected, you must hold the left andright turn signal switches in for more than one second toactivate the four-way flashers.

See 3.9 CHECKING FOR DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODESfor more information.

TROUBLESHOOTINGTo resolve TSM/HFSM faults, follow three basic steps:

1. Retrieve DTCs using odometer self-diagnostics. See3.11 ODOMETER SELF-DIAGNOSTICS.

2. Diagnose system problems. This involves using specialtools and the diagnostic flowcharts in this section.

3. Correct problems through the replacement and/or repairof the affected components.

After repairs are performed, the work must be validated. Thisinvolves clearing the DTCs and confirming proper vehicleoperation as indicated by the behavior of the turn signals.

HOME


3.9CHECKING FOR DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES

GENERALProblems fall into at least one of five categories:

• Turn signal malfunction.

• Bank angle (engine disable).

• Clutch/neutral interlock (starter enable).

• Security lamp problem.

• Security system malfunction.

SECURITY/LAMP DIAGNOSTICSTo diagnose system problems, start by observing the behaviorof the security lamp.

NOTES


• See Figure 3-9. When the Ignition Switch is turned to ON,the security lamp will illuminate for approximately fourseconds and then turn off.

• If the security lamp is not illuminated at Key ON or if it failsto turn OFF after the initial four-second period, thespeedometer on XL, or the tachometer on XR, may needto be replaced. See 3.11 ODOMETER SELF-DIA-GNOSTICS. If "BUS Er" is displayed on the odometer, itmay take up to twenty seconds for the security lamp toilluminate.

• The security lamp will also light for eight seconds after thebulb check if historic Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs)are present.The security lamp will stay on if current DTCsare set. If a historic DTC is present, the security lamp willlight for 2 ignition cycles or until the DTC is clearedmanually.

See Figure 3-10. After the lamp turns off after being illuminatedfor the first four-second period, one of three events may occur:

• The lamp remains off. This indicates there are no currentfault conditions or stored historic DTCs currently detectedby the HFSM (A).

• The lamp stays off for only four seconds and then comesback on for an eight-second period. This indicates a his-toric DTC is stored, but no current DTC exists (B).

• The lamp remains on beyond the eight-second period.This indicates a current DTC exists (C).

NOTE

See 3.9 CHECKING FOR DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES,Code Types for a complete description of DTC formats.

OFFACC. IGNITION

3

1

2ed02814



ed02920


HOME


ONA

B

C

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

Key On

Key On

Key On


Lamp OFF




4 Sec.

4 Sec.

4 Sec.

4 Sec.

8 Sec.

4 Sec.

ed01046

Figure 3-10. Security Lamp Operation

CODE TYPES



There are two types of DTCs:

• Current

• Historic

If a DTC is stored, it can be read using either a computer-baseddiagnostic package called DIGITAL TECHNICIAN II (PartNo. HD-48650) or odometer self-diagnostics. See 3.11 ODO-METER SELF-DIAGNOSTICS.

NOTES

• Odometer self-diagnostics will display both current andhistoric DTCs.To differentiate between current and historicDTCs, the DIGITAL TECHNICIAN II (Part No. HD-48650)must be employed.

• All DTCs reside in the memory of the ECM, TSM/HFSM,speedometer or tachometer until the DTC is cleared byuse of the odometer self-diagnostics. See 3.11 ODO-METER SELF-DIAGNOSTICS.

• An historic DTC is also cleared after a total of 50 ignitioncycles has elapsed. After the 50 ignition cycle retentionperiod, the DTC is automatically erased from memoryproviding that no subsequent faults of the same type aredetected in that period.

CurrentCurrent DTCs are those which are present during the currentignition cycle. See the appropriate flowcharts for solutions.

HistoricIf a particular problem happens to resolve itself, the activestatus problem is dropped and it becomes a historic DTC ratherthan a current DTC. For example, intermittent output shortscan become typical historic DTCs.

Historic DTCs are stored for 50 ignition cycles after any DTCwas last set as current to assist in the diagnosis of intermittentfaults. On the 50th cycle, the DTC will clear itself. The securitylamp will only indicate the existence of historic DTCs for twoignition cycles.

It is important to note that historic DTCs will exist wheneverthe system indicates the existence of a current fault. See3.9 CHECKING FOR DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES, Mul-tiple DTCs/Priority Order if multiple DTCs are found.

Diagnostic charts are designed for use with current DTCs andas a result they frequently suggest part replacement. Whendiagnosing a historic DTC the charts can be helpful but shouldnot lead to part replacement without verification the part isfaulty.

RETRIEVING DTCS



The TSM/HFSM supports two levels of diagnostics.

• The most sophisticated mode employs a computer-baseddiagnostic package called DIGITAL TECHNICIAN II (PartNo. HD-48650).

• The second mode requires using the odometer self dia-gnostics. Speedometer, tachometer (if equipped),TSM/HFSM and ECM DTCs can be accessed and cleared.See 3.11 ODOMETER SELF-DIAGNOSTICS.

HOME


MULTIPLE DTCS/PRIORITY ORDERWhile it is possible for more than one fault to occur and setmore than one DTC, there are several conditions which mayresult in one fault setting multiple DTCs:

Serial data DTCs (U1016, U1255, U1300 and U1301) may beaccompanied by other DTCs. Always correct the serial dataDTCs before resolving the other DTCs.

Refer to Table 3-5. This table lists the DTCs in priority order.Correct DTCs in priority order.

Table 3-5.TSM/HFSM DTCs and Fault Conditions

DIAGNOSTICSFAULT CONDITIONDTCPRIORITY

3.22 DTC U1300, U1301 OR BUS ER.J1850 Short-to-groundU13001

3.22 DTC U1300, U1301 OR BUS ER.J1850 Short-to-batteryU13012

3.21 DTC U1016, U1255Loss of serial communications - ECMU10163

3.21 DTC U1016, U1255Loss of serial communications - GeneralU12554

3.18 DTCS B1135, B1136, B1141, AND B1142.HFSM2 Internal faultB11425

3.18 DTCS B1135, B1136, B1141, AND B1142.Accelerometer periodic test faultB11356

3.18 DTCS B1135, B1136, B1141, AND B1142.Accelerometer tip-over self-test faultB11367(HFSM)

3.20 DTC B1154, B1155.Clutch switch input short-to-groundB11548

3.20 DTC B1154, B1155.Neutral switch input short-to-batteryB11559

3.17 DTC B1134.Start relay output short-to-batteryB113410

3.15 TSM/HFSM:TURN SIGNAL ERRORS AND DTCS.Left turn lamp output open circuitB1121 (TSM)11

3.15 TSM/HFSM:TURN SIGNAL ERRORS AND DTCS.Left turn lamp output open circuitB1121(HFSM)

3.15 TSM/HFSM:TURN SIGNAL ERRORS AND DTCS.Right turn lamp output open circuitB1122 (TSM)12

3.15 TSM/HFSM:TURN SIGNAL ERRORS AND DTCS.Right turn lamp output open circuitB1122(HFSM)

3.15 TSM/HFSM:TURN SIGNAL ERRORS AND DTCS.Left turn lamp output short-to-groundB112313(HFSM)

3.15 TSM/HFSM:TURN SIGNAL ERRORS AND DTCS.Right turn lamp output short-to-groundB112414(HFSM)

3.15 TSM/HFSM:TURN SIGNAL ERRORS AND DTCS.Left turn lamp output short-to-batteryB112515(HFSM)

3.15 TSM/HFSM:TURN SIGNAL ERRORS AND DTCS.Right turn lamp output short-to-batteryB112616(HFSM)

3.19 DTC B1143, B1144, B1145 (HFSM ONLY).Security antenna short-to-groundB114317(HFSM)

3.19 DTC B1143, B1144, B1145 (HFSM ONLY).Security antenna short-to-batteryB114418(HFSM)

3.19 DTC B1143, B1144, B1145 (HFSM ONLY).Security antenna openB114519(HFSM)

3.14 DTC B0563.Battery voltage highB056320

3.16 DTC B1131, B1132 (HFSM ONLY).Alarm output short-to-groundB113121(HFSM)

3.16 DTC B1131, B1132 (HFSM ONLY).Alarm output short-to-batteryB113222(HFSM)

3.15 TSM/HFSM:TURN SIGNAL ERRORS AND DTCS.Ignition switch open/lowB1141 (TSM)23

3.18 DTCS B1135, B1136, B1141, AND B1142.Ignition switch open/lowB114124(HFSM)

HOME


3.10INITIAL DIAGNOSTIC CHECK:TSM/HFSM

GENERAL



To locate faulty circuits or other system problems, follow thediagnostic flowcharts. For a systematic approach, always beginwith INITIAL DIAGNOSTICS. Read the general informationand then work your way through the flowchart box by box.

Diagnostic NotesIf a numbered circle appears adjacent to a flowchart box, thenmore information is offered in the diagnostic notes. Many dia-gnostic notes contain supplemental information, descriptionsof various diagnostic tools or references to other parts of themanual where information on the location and removal ofcomponents may be obtained.


In order to perform most diagnostic routines, a Breakout Boxand a DVOM are required. See 3.12 BREAKOUT BOX:TSM/HFSM.


Job/Time CodesSome charts may contain warranty job/time codes. Dealershiptechnicians filing warranty claims should use the job/time codevalues printed in bold text underneath the appropriate repair.

Reprogramming ECMDiagnostic charts frequently suggest ECM replacement. In theevent an ECM needs to be replaced, it must be reprogrammed

using a computer-based diagnostic package called DIGITALTECHNICIAN II (Part No. HD-48650). See your dealer. Pass-word learn procedure must also be performed. See3.23 TSM/HFSM: PASSWORD LEARN.

INITIAL DIAGNOSTICS




Diagnostic Tips• If odometer reads "BUS Er" with the Ignition Switch turned

to IGNITION (Engine Stop Switch at RUN with the engineoff), check data bus for an open or short to groundbetween data link connector [91A] terminal 3 and ECMconnector [78B] terminal 5, HFSM connector [30B] terminal3, speedometer connector [39B] terminal 2 on XL, ortachometer (if equipped) connector [108B] terminal 2.

• Check for an open diagnostic test terminal between datalink connector [91A] terminal 3 and TSM/HFSM connector[30B] terminal 3. With Ignition Switch turned ON, serialdata bus voltage should be typically 0.6-0.8 volts. Therange of acceptable voltage is 0-7.0 volts.

• To identify intermittents, wiggle wire harness while per-forming steps in the diagnostic check charts.


1. Connect BREAKOUT BOX (Part No. HD-42682) betweenwire harness connector [39B] on XL, and connector [108B]on XR and speedometer connector [39A] on XL, ortachometer connector [108B] on XR using INSTRUMENTHARNESS ADAPTERS (Part No. HD-46601). See2.5 BREAKOUT BOX: SPEEDOMETER/TACHOMETER.

2. Compare TSM/HFSM system behavior to symptoms inTable 3-6.

Table 3-6. Symptoms That May Not Set Diagnostic Trouble Codes

SOLUTIONSYMPTOM

HFSM Fails to Disarm.HFSM: Fails to disarm

Will Not Cancel Upon Turn Completion.TSM/HFSM: Turn signal will not cancel

Cancels Erratically.TSM/HFSM: Turn signal cancels erratically

Flash at Double Normal Rate, All Bulbs Work.TSM/HFSM: Turn signal flashes double normal rate, all bulbsgood

DTCs B1121, B1122, and B1141, Will Not Flash, 4-Way FlashersInoperable (Part 1 of 4)

TSM: Turn signals will not flash

DTC B1141, Will Not Flash, No CodesHFSM: Symptom - Will not flash. No codes or DTC B1141

HOME


Other DTCsSee 2.5 BREAKOUT BOX: SPEEDOMETER/TACHOMETER

for any DTCs related to the speedometer.


Speedometer

12V(Switched)

12V ACCFuse

12V BATTFuse

12V INSTRFuse

12V IGNFuse

ECM

Data LinkConnector

12V(Switched)

12V(Switched)

12V(Batt)

Tachometer (not present on all models)

TSM/TSSM/HFSM

Ser

iald

ata

3

2

1

4

[78]

[39B][39A]

[108B][108A]

[20A][20B]

[30B][30A]

[91A]

71 62 12

71 62 12

1 3

5

2

1 3

12

122

1 2 5 6 7

1 2 5 6 71 7

Igni

tion

Ser

iald

ata

Bat

tery

Acc

esso

ryG

roun

d

Igni

tion

Ser

iald

ata

Bat

tery

Bat

tery

Igni

tion

Ser

iald

ata

Gro

und

Acc

esso

ryG

roun

d

652

1 7652

BK

BK

BK

BK

BK

BK

GYGY

GY

O/W O/W

O/W

O/W

O

O

O

O

R

LGN/V

LGN

/VLG

N/V

LGN

/V

LGN/V

LGN/V

LGN

/V

BN/GY

BN/GY

BN

/GY

BN

/GY

BN

/GY

BN/GY

R/GY

R/BK

R/BK

em01181

Figure 3-11. Initial Diagnostic Check (XL)

HOME


BK

BK

BK

GY GY

O/W

O/W

O/W

O/W

O

R

BN

/GY

BN

/GY

BN

/GY

BN

/GY

BN/GY

LGN

/V BK

BK

GY

BK

O/WO

OO

BN

/GY

LGN

/V

LGN

/V

LGN

/V

LGN/V

LGN

/V

LGN

/V

R/BK

R/BK

R/GY

1 2 3 12

1 2 3 12

1 2 5 76

1 2 5 76

C B A D

C B A DS

eria

lDat

a

Bat

tery

Acc

esso

ryG

roun

d

Igni

tion

Ser

ialD

ata

Bat

tery

Bat

tery

Igni

tion

Ser

ialD

ata

Gro

und

Acc

esso

ryG

roun

d

Speedometer

TSM/TSSM/HFSM

Tachometer

To ACCY Fuse

To BATT Fuse

To INSTR Fuse

To IGN Fuse

12V ACCYFuse

12V BATTFuse

12V INSTRFuse

12V IGNFuse

3

1

2

4

Ground

Serial Data

Power

Data LinkConnector

21 6 7 12

21 6 7 12

ECM

Ser

ialD

ata

5

5

GND1

GND1

GND1[78B][78A]

[108A][108B]

[20A][20B]

[39A][39B]

[30A][30B]

[91A]

em01304

Figure 3-12. Initial Diagnostic Check (XR)



Under console12-place MolexInstruments[20]

Under battery12-place DeutschTSM/HFSM[30]




HOME




On battery strap, behind left side cover4-place DeutschData link connector[91]


HOME



Does enginestart?










YES



NOUnable to enter

diagnostic mode.

NONo DTCsdisplayed.

With ignition switch OFF, pressand release trip odometer reset

switch.Does odometer display appear

with backlighting?


Table 3-6.

YES NO



YES NO



ground.

YES NO





battery fuse.

YES NO



1

2

fc01962_en


HOME





YES NO







YES


YES NO



YES NO



YES




1

NO



YES NO



YES NO

Locate andrepair




andinstrument fuse.

1

fc01961_en

NO

Go toInitial Diagnostic

Check (Part 3 of 3).

HOME





YES


harnesses.Is intermittent present?

YES NO

Locate andrepair

intermittent.

No troublefound.

NOSpeedometer inoperative

(no vehicle speed).


Is debris present?

YES


NO

Check for damaged wiring/looseconnection between VSS and

ECM.Is wiring damage/ loose

connection present?

YESNO


Replacespeedometer.

NOTachometer Inoperative

(no engine speed).

See 2.4 SPEEDOMETER/TACHOMETER.

2

fc01960_en

XLXR

Go toSpeedometerInoperative

(XR).

HOME


Speedometer Inoperative (XR)



YESNO

YES NO


YES NO



harness.



YES NO


wire.

fc01931_en



NOYES

1



present?

NO



YES



YES


on (BK) wire.

NO YES


NO

Replacespeedometer.


Is debris present?

YES


YES




connection present?

NO

NO

Replacespeedometer.


(Part 1 of 3).

HOME



GENERALThe speedometer on XL, and tachometer on XR, are capableof displaying and clearing speedometer, tachometer,TSM/HFSM, and Electronic Control Module (ECM) DiagnosticTrouble Codes (DTCs) (diagnostic mode).

DIAGNOSTICS

Diagnostic Tips• For a quick check of speedometer on XL, and tachometer

on XR functions, a "WOW" test can be performed. SeeFigure 3-13 and Figure 3-14. Press and hold trip odometerreset switch then turn ignition switch ON. Release tripodometer reset switch. See Figure 3-15. Backgroundlighting should illuminate, gauge needles should sweeptheir full range of motion, and indicator lamps (battery,security, low fuel, and check engine) should illuminate.

• If speedometer on XL, or tachometer on XR, fails "WOW"test, check for battery, ground, ignition, trip odometer resetswitch, and accessory wiring to speedometer on XL, ortachometer on XR. If any feature in the speedometer isnon-functional, see 2.2 INITIAL DIAGNOSTIC CHECK:ODOMETER.



2. To clear DTCs for the selected module, press the tripodometer reset switch for more than 5 seconds when aDTC is displayed. This procedure will clear all DTCs forthe selected module.

ed02816


OFFACC. IGNITION

3

1

2ed02814



12

34

5

ed01721


Figure 3-15. Warning Lamps (Typical)

HOME



1While holding trip odometer resetswitch in, turn ignition switch to


RUN position.

Release trip odometer reset switch.Does “diag” appear?

YES

”P” flashing.




than 5 seconds.



”S” flashing.


”SP” flashing.


reset switch.


reset switch.

”T” flashing.


seconds.


seconds.




CHECK: ODOMETER.

YES

YES

NO

NO

NO

Deviceresponse?










TACHOMETER.


DTCdisplayed.


2

”b” flashing.




reset switch.

fc01804_en

HOME


3.12BREAKOUT BOX:TSM/HFSM

GENERAL



The BREAKOUT BOX (Part No. HD-42682) splices into themain harness. Used in conjunction with a DVOM, it allows cir-cuit diagnosis of wiring harness and connections without havingto probe with sharp objects.

INSTALLATIONNOTE

For HFSM: Disarm security system, then remove MAXIFUSEwhile the system remains disarmed.

1. Remove left side cover and battery. See Service Manual.

2. See Figure 3-16. Reach under battery tray and lift TSM/HFSM from cavity in bottom of tray.

3. See Figure 3-17. Disconnect harness connector(s) fromTSM/HFSM:

a. For HFSM: Depress latches on antenna connector[208B] and remove from antenna connector [208A](4).

b. Depress latches on main harness connector [30B]and remove from main connector [30A] (1).

4. Route main harness connector [30B] back down throughcavity and out left side of vehicle under battery tray.

5. For HFSM: Route antenna connector [208B] down throughcavity and out left side of vehicle under battery tray.

6. Reinstall battery.

7. See Figure 3-18. Attach Breakout Box to connectors:

a. Mate gray socket housing on Breakout Box withTSM/HFSM connector [30A].

b. Mate gray pin housing on Breakout Box with vehicleharness connector [30B].

8. For HFSM: Mate antenna connector [208B] to HFSM.

ed02825

Figure 3-16.TSM/HFSM Location

4

3

2

1

ed02831

1. Main connector [30A]2. Pin 13. Pin 124. Antenna connector [208A] (HFSM only)

Figure 3-17.TSM/HFSM Connector(s)

2

3

1

ed02832

1. TSM/HFSM2. Tester harness connectors3. Vehicle's TSM/HFSM harness connector [30B]

Figure 3-18. Breakout Box:TSM/HFSM

REMOVAL1. See Figure 3-17. For HFSM: Depress latches on antenna

connector [208B] and disconnect from HFSM antennaconnector [208A] (4).

HOME


2. Disconnect Breakout Box from vehicle:

a. Depress latches and detach gray Breakout Box socketconnector from TSM/HFSM main harness connector[30A] (1).

b. See Figure 3-18. Detach gray Breakout Box connectorfrom TSM/HFSM main harness connector [30B] (3).

3. Remove battery. Route TSM/HFSM main harness con-nector [30B] up through cavity in bottom of battery tray.

4. For HFSM:

a. Route antenna harness connector [208B] up throughcavity in bottom of battery tray.

b. Mate antenna connector [208B] to HFSM.

5. Mate TSM/HFSM main harness connector [30B] to TSM/HFSM.

6. Position TSM/HFSM with connector(s) facing toward rearof vehicle. Lower TSM/HFSM down into cavity in bottomof battery tray.

7. Install battery, MAXIFUSE and left side cover. See ServiceManual.

NOTE

Vehicle will not start with TSM/HFSM disconnected or incor-rectly mounted.

Table 3-8.TSM/HFSM Connector [30B]

FUNCTIONTERMINALFUNCTIONTERMINAL

Right turn switch input7Battery1

Left turn switch input8Ignition2

Start relay control9Serial Data3

Clutch switch10Neutral switch4

Alarm signal11Left turn feed5

Ground12Right turn feed6

HOME


3.13FAILS TO DISARM (HFSM ONLY)

GENERALIf the HFSM does not respond or responds weakly (limitedrange or will not consistently disarm with fob within normalrange), follow the flowchart.

ed02826

Figure 3-19. HFSM and Antenna

JOB/TIME CODESDealership technicians filing warranty claims should use thejob/time codes printed in bold text underneath the appropriaterepair.

DIAGNOSTICS

Diagnostic Tips• Verify that the hands-free antenna or a cell phone is not

within 3.0 in. (80.0 mm) of key fob.

• Interference from physical surroundings may affect RFtransmission. Place fob next to motorcycle or movemotorcycle to a new location and retest.

• See Figure 3-19.Verify that antenna is in OE location andthat seat has not been replaced with a metal base seat.

• Check for damage to antenna wire.

• See Figure 3-20. Verify fob battery (1) voltage is at least2.9 volts. See 3.24 HFSM MAINTENANCE.

• Fob serial number (2) is located inside fob. Open fob bytwisting a thin blade in the thumbnail slot between fobhalves.


1. After a battery disconnect, the HFSM will not enter theconfiguration mode on the first attempt. All attempts toassign a fob or enter the configuration mode will requireat least two attempts.

1

2

ed02051

1. Battery2. Fob serial number

Figure 3-20. Open Fob: HFSM

HOME


Hands FreeAntenna

HFSM

15 AmpBatteryFuse

30 AmpMAXIFUSE

To ignitionswitch

Tran

smit

Ant

enna

BTr

ansm

itA

nten

naA

Rec

eive

Ant

enna

Gro

und

Bat

tery

Battery BK

BK

BK

O/Y

O/Y

Y/B

K

BN

/GY

BN/GYR

R R

RRBK

1 12

1 12

– +

21

3

3

21

21

21

[30A][30B]

[208A][208B]

[209A]

[209B]To ECMfuse

em01151

Figure 3-21. Antenna Circuit: HFSM



Under battery12-place DeutschHFSM[30]

Under battery4-place DeutschHFSM[208]

Under seat2-place MolexSecurity antenna[209]

HOME


HFSM Fails to Disarm

Does any assigned fob work?

YES NO

Check battery on non-functional fob.Is battery voltage greater

than 2.9 volts?

Check for continuity between [208B]terminal 1 and end of (Y/BK) wire

(pull back conduit to exposeunterminated end of wire).


YES NO

Replace fob. Replace battery.

6756 6755

1

YES NO

Check for continuitybetween [208B] terminal 1

and ground.Is continuity present?

Locate and repair open wirebetween connectors [208B]

and end of (Y/BK) wire.

YES NO

Locate and repairshort to ground.

Replace HFSM.Learn password and

perform set-up.

6879 6757

6879

NOTEThe fob for the HFSM must be assigned using DIGITAL TECHNICIAN II(Part No. HD-48650). This can also validate fob operation whenconnected to the motorcycle.

fc01127_en

HOME


3.14DTC B0563

GENERALThe TSM/HFSM continually checks the battery voltage duringIGN/OFF and IGN/RUN power modes. If the voltage exceeds16.0 Volts for more than 5.0 ± 0.5 seconds, the TSM/HFSMsets DTC B0563.

DIAGNOSTICS

Diagnostic Tips• This DTC may set when the vehicle is placed on a battery

charger, on fast charge, for a long period of time.

• The HFSM does not illuminate the security lamp when thisDTC is set.

Diagnostic NotesSee 1.7 CHARGING SYSTEM tests to correct. Problem maybe faulty voltage regulator.

HOME


3.15TSM/HFSM:TURN SIGNAL ERRORS AND DTCS

GENERALThe turn signals will automatically cancel based on either thespeed/acceleration of the vehicle or upon turn completion. See3.1 TURN SIGNAL OVERVIEW.

TSM/HFSM: For turn signal diagnostics based on symptoms,refer to Table 3-10.

TSM DTCs Only: Refer to Table 3-11.

HFSM DTCs Only: Refer to Table 3-12.

Table 3-10.Turn Signal Errors:TSM/HFSM

START WITH FLOWCHARTSYMPTOMDTC

Will Not Cancel Upon Turn CompletionWill not cancel on turn completionN/A

Cancels ErraticallyCancels erraticallyN/A

Flash at Double Normal Rate, All Bulbs WorkFlash at double normal rate while allbulbs are working

N/A

Table 3-11.Turn Signal DTCs:TSM Only


DTCs B1121, B1122, and B1141, Will Not Flash, 4-Way Flashers Inoper-able (Part 1 of 6)

Turn signals will not flash, 4-wayflashers inoperable

B1121

B1122

B1141

Table 3-12.Turn Signal DTCs: HFSM Only


DTCs B1121 and B1122, Turn Signal Lamp Open CircuitLeft turn signal openB1121

Right turn signal openB1122

DTCs B1123 and B1124Left turn signal short-to-groundB1123

Right turn signal short-to-groundB1124

DTCs B1125 and B1126Left turn signal short-to-voltageB1125

Right turn signal short-to-voltageB1126

DIAGNOSTICS




Job/Time CodesDealership technicians filing warranty claims should use thejob/time code printed in bold text underneath the appropriaterepair in the diagnostic flowcharts.

Diagnostic Tips• TSM Only: DTCs B1121 and B1122 will illuminate the

security lamp. DTC B1141 will not illuminate the securitylamp.

• HFSM Only: DTCs B1121, B1122, B1123, B1124, B1125,and B1126 will illuminate the security lamp.

• TSM/HFSM: When an over current or short-to-groundcondition is detected, it will turn off the turn lamp outputs.

HOME


Sta

rter

Rig

htFr

ont

Turn

Lam

p

IGN

AC

CY

15A

15A

[31A

]

Igni

tion

Sw

itch

[7A

]

BK

Bat

tery

EC

M

15A

15A

BE/G

Y

BN/G

Y

R/BK

R

R

R

Sec

urity

Sire

n

BN/G

YBKLGN/

BN

TN/G

N

AJDA

BICB

Sta

rtR

elay

TN/G

N

GY

GY O

LGN/

V

LGN/

V

(opt

iona

l)

O/W

O/W

LGN/

BN

BA CBA C V

V

V

BN/G

Y

BN

BN

BN

W/B

NW

/V

W/VBK

W/B

K

BE/G

Y

R/BK

R/G

Y

R/G

Y

BK/R

R

R

R/BK

GN

GN

BK

BK

BK

[142

B]

[142

A]

[78B

]

[30B

]

Pow

er

Sig

nal

Gro

und

BK

[5]

30A

mp

MAX

IFUS

E

BA

GN

D1

Pow

ertr

ain

Gro

und

Poi

nt

TN

AC

C−

BAT

T−

IGN

−

[78A

]

2 5 10 13 28 31

2 5 10 13 28 31

I Q C P R

87 87A

30 85 86

5 4 3 2 1

EC

M

[24B

]

BK/RBK

BK/R

TS

M/

HF

SM

[61B

]

Hor

nS

witc

hH

eadl

amp

Hi/L

oS

witc

hLe

ftTu

rnS

witc

h

[24A

][9

4B]

[94A

]

Left

Han

dC

ontr

ols

Rea

rtu

rnsi

gnal

s,X

L12

00N

only

Rea

rtu

rnsi

gnal

s,ex

cept

XL

1200

N

Clu

tch

Sw

itch

O/W

GYW/BKW/BNBK/R

Rig

htTu

rnS

witc

hE

ngin

eS

top

Sw

itch

Sta

rtS

witc

hS

top

Lam

pS

witc

h

[22A

]

Rig

htH

and

Con

trol

s

O/W

W/V

BK/RBK

R

Fus

eblo

ck

Top

view

Top

view

[119

]

Acce

ssor

ies

Ligh

ts

Igni

tion

Fuel

Pum

p

Star

tRLY

Syst

emRL

Y

ECM

Batte

ry

Spar

e

P&A

IGN

Inst

rum

ents

Spar

eI B A

Sys

tem

Rel

ay

Spar

e(XL

) ENG

CTL(

XR)

Ope

n

[119

B]

[128

]

65

43

1

65

43

1

[142

A]

65

2

BN

TN

BK

V

Left

Indi

cato

rN

eutr

al

O

Rig

htIn

dica

tor

BK

Bat

tery

BN

VBK

Rig

htR

ear

Turn

Lam

p

Left

Rea

rTu

rnLa

mp

Tail

Lam

pC

onve

rter

Mod

ule

[19B

]

BK BKV V

[18B

]

25

6

25

6

25

6

1 2

1 2 31234

1 21 2 1 2

Rig

htR

ear

Turn

Lam

p

Left

Rea

rTu

rnLa

mp

[19B

][1

9A]

BK BKVBK V/BN

VBK V

[18B

][1

8A]

1 2 1 2

1 2 1 2

[94B

]

[94A

]

[19A

]

[18A

]

[93A

]

[7B

]

To tail/

brak

ela

mpLe

ftFr

ont

Turn

Lam

p

BK

V

BK

BKV

BN

[31B

]

BKBN

R/BK

BKGN/

O

35

68

12

35

68

12

BN

VBK

25

6

25

6

25

6

[7B

]

65

21

65

21

[22B

]

GY

O/W

W/BNW/BK

BK/R

INS

TR

15A

GH

BK

OG

N/O

BE/G

Y

W/B

K

K T E S U

87 87A

30 85 86

5 4 3 2 1

BN

V

[20A

][2

0B]

BK

BK

Bat

tery

Red

Ban

d

21 43 65 87 109 1211

21 43 65 87 109 1211

[30A

]

Bat

tery

Igni

tion

VS

S/S

eria

lDat

aLi

nkN

eutr

alS

witc

hLe

ftTu

rnF

eed

Rig

htTu

rnF

eed

Rig

htTu

rnS

witc

hIn

put

Left

Turn

Sw

itch

Inpu

tS

tart

Rel

ayC

ontr

olC

lutc

hS

witc

hA

larm

Sig

nal

Gro

und

21 321 3

Rec

eive

Ant

enna

XM

ITA

nten

naA

XM

ITA

nten

naB

2121

Ant

enna

’A’

Ant

enna

’B’

O/Y BK

O/Y BK

Han

dsFr

eeA

nten

na[2

09B

][20

9A]

[208

A]

[208

B]

TN

TN

Neu

tral

Sw

itch

[136

]

Sys

tem

Rel

ay

Ser

ialD

ata

Link

Pow

erG

roun

d

Sw

itche

dP

ower

Pow

erG

roun

d

EKTS

U

I CQP

RM

O

GH

AB

15A

15A

15A

PR

IJ

CD

15A

15A

15A

MO

GH

AB

15A

15A

15A

KL F

15A

15A

E

15

78

15

78

Y/B

K

em01312

Figure 3-22.Turn Signal Circuit

HOME




On battery strap, behind left side cover2-place Metri-Pack, blackMAXIFUSE[5]

Under seat6-place MultilockRear lighting[7]

Inside tail lamp lens2-place MultilockLeft rear turn signal[18]

Inside tail lamp lens2-place MultilockRight rear turn signal[19]


Under fuel tank6-place MolexRight handlebar controls[22]

Under fuel tank8-place MolexLeft handlebar controls[24]


Under fuel tank6-place MultilockFront turn signals[31]

Behind left side doorSpade terminalsFuse block[61B]


Inside tail lamp lens6-place Multilock, blackTail lamp power in[94]

Fuse/relay block, behind left side cover5-place Amp, spade ter-minals

Relay/fuse block[119]

Stater solenoidLocking spade terminal,white

Starter solenoid[128]

Right side frame, beneath gear casecover

1-place molded jumper, blackNeutral switch[136]

Under frame3-place Packard, blackSecurity siren[142]

Under battery4-place Deutsch, grayHFSM antenna connector[208]

Crankcase housing, top rearRing terminalSecurity antenna[209]


1. Gain access to vehicle's TSM/HFSM:

a. Remove battery. See Service Manual for procedure.

b. Unplug and remove TSM/HFSM from battery tray.

c. Reroute wiring harness so TSM/HFSM may bereconnected while removed from vehicle

d. Reconnect TSM/HFSM.

2. Perform the following procedure:

a. See Figure 3-23. Position TSM/HFSM in same orient-ation it is mounted on vehicle. Turn Ignition Switchon. Turn 4-way flashers on by depressing both leftand right turn signal switches simultaneously. TurnIgnition Switch off; 4-way flashers should continue toflash.

b. Tilt TSM/HFSM greater than 45 degrees to the left.

c. Repeat step a.

d. Tilt TSM/HFSM greater than 45 degrees to the right.

3. To enable diagnostic mode, see 3.9 CHECKING FORDIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES.

4. Connect BREAKOUT BOX (Part No. HD-42682) (gray)between TSM/HFSM connector [30A] and wiring harnessconnector [30B]. See 3.12 BREAKOUT BOX:TSM/HFSM.


6. Connect gray HARNESS CONNECTOR TEST KIT (PartNo. HD-41404-B) to connector [22] (right) or connector[24] (left).

7. Replace HFSM if DTC is current (lamp ON continuously,cleared codes return during operation). If DTC is historic,check for intermittents.

HOME


1 2

ed01792

1. Left 45 degrees2. Right 45 degrees

Figure 3-23.Tilting:TSM/HFSM

HOME


Will Not Cancel Upon Turn Completion

Is TSM/HFSM mounted properly?

YES NO

Mount correctly.

Check if TSM/HFSM is configured forsolo or side car operation. See 3.3

HDSSS ACTUATION.Does it have the proper configuration?

YESNO

Select propervehicle

configuration.

Do 4-way flashers cancelin both directions?

YES NO

Operate motorcycle at a speedgreater than 7 MPH (11 km/h) in astraight line. Activate either turn

signal. Turn signals should cancelafter 20 flashes.

Do turn signals cancel?

Replace TSM/HFSM.Perform setup and

password learn.

6773

YES NO

Does speedometerregister vehicle

speed?

YES

Replace TSM/HFSM.Perform password learn

and setup.

NO

Refer to 2.2 INITIALDIAGNOSTIC CHECK:

ODOMETER.

6773

2

3

fc01950_en

1

Go to CancelsErratically.

HOME


Cancels Erratically

Check for voltage between Breakout Box terminal 8 (Gray) and ground at BreakoutBox terminal 12 (Gray): with left turn signal switch depressed, wiggle harnessbetween TSM/HFSM and left handlebar switches while monitoring for voltage

fluctuations or changes in turn signal flash pattern.

Check for voltage between Breakout Box terminal 7 (Gray) and ground at BreakoutBox terminal 12 (Gray): with right turn signal switch depressed, wiggle

harnessbetween TSM/HFSM and right handlebar switcheswhile monitoring forvoltage fluctuations or changes in turn signal flash pattern.

Are voltage fluctuations present?

YES

Locate and repairintermittent open.

NO

Check for voltage between Breakout Box terminal 8 (Gray) and groundat Breakout Box terminal 12 (Gray): with left turn signal switch NOTdepressed, wiggle harness between TSM/HFSM and left handlebar

switches while monitoring for voltage fluctuations or turn signalactivation.

Check for voltage between Breakout Box terminal 7 (Gray) and groundat Breakout Box terminal 12 (Gray): with right turn signal switch NOTdepressed, wiggle harness between TSM/HFSM and right handlebarswitches while monitoring for voltage fluctuations or turn signal flash

pattern.Are voltage fluctuations present?

YES

Locate and repairintermittent short

to voltage.

Turn ignition switch OFF.

Check for continuity between Breakout Box terminal8 (Gray) and ground at Breakout Box terminal 12

(Gray): with left turn signal switch depressed, wiggleharness between TSM/HFSM and left handlebar

switches.

Check for continuity between Breakout Box terminal7 (Gray) and ground at Breakout Box terminal 12

(Gray): with right turn signal switch depressed, wiggleharness between TSM/HFSM and right handlebar

switches.Is continuity present at any time?

NO

YES NO


to ground.

System OK. Review turn signalcancellation function with customer. SeeTURN SIGNAL FUNCTIONS under 3.1

TURN SIGNAL OVERVIEW.

5

5

4

1

fc01951_en

6855

6856

6857

HOME


Flash at Double Normal Rate, All Bulbs Work

Determine correct part number for all installed turn signal bulbs and verifyagainst parts installed on motorcycle.

Is correct parts installed?

YES NO

Check for corrosionon bulbs and/or sockets.

Is corrosion present?

Replace withcorrect bulbs.

6820

NOYES

Remove corrosion with a wirebrush. Install ELECTRICAL

CONTACT LUBRICANT (PartNo. 99861-02) in bulb sockets.Do lamps flash at normal rate?

Check for corrosionon all lamp connection

terminals.Is corrosion present?

YES NO

SystemOK.

6821

Clean or replace bulb.Do lamps flashat normal rate?

YES NO

SystemOK.

Replacelamp

assembly.

6822 6823

YES NO

Clean corrosion fromwires and terminals.

Do lamps flash atnormal rate?

Replace TSM/HFSM.Learn password (if

needed) and performsetup.

6824

YES

SystemOK.

6822

NO

Replace TSM/HFSMLearn password (if


6824

fc01130_en

HOME


DTCs B1121, B1122, and B1141, Will Not Flash, 4-Way Flashers Inoperable (Part 1 of 6)

Turn ignition switch ON.Are turn signal lamps on continuously?

YES NO

Check for voltage on Breakout Boxterminal 5 (Gray) (left turn signals) or

terminal 6 (Gray) (right turn signals) withTSM disconnected from Breakout Box.


YESall except XL

1200NNO


Replace TSM. Learnpassword andperform setup.

Activate 4-way flashers.Do any lamps illuminate?

YES NO

Is Connector [30]mated fully?

NOYES

Place red meter lead atterminal 1 (Gray) andblack meter lead at

terminal 12 (Gray) ofBreakout Box.

Is battery voltagepresent?

Mateconnector.

NOYES

Move red meter lead toBreakout Box terminal 2.


NO

Check for voltage atignition fuse.

Is battery voltage presenton both terminals?

NO

YES

4

6790 6791

4

6792

YES

Locate and repairopen on gray wire

between ignition fuseand TSM.

6793

YESXL 1200N only

Unplug connectors [18] and [19] at tail lampconverter module. Check for continuity

between terminals 12 and 6 (right B1124)or 12 and 5 (left B1123) of Breakout Box

(Gray).Is continuity present?

YES NO

YES NO

Unplug connector [7] at tail lampconverter module. Check forvoltage between terminals 12

and 6 (right B1124) or 12 and 5(left B1123) Breakout Box

(Gray).Is voltage present?

Locate and repair short tovoltage between tail lamp

converter module andturn signal.

Locate and repair short tovoltage between

connector [30] and taillamp converter module.

Replace tail lampconverter module.

fc01952_en

6790

67906809

Go to DTCs B1121, B1122,and B1141, Will Not Flash, 4-

Way Flashers Inoperable(Part 2 of 6).

See 4.10 NO ECMPOWER.

Go to DTCs B1121, B1122, andB1141, Will Not Flash, 4-Way

Flashers Inoperable (Part 5 of 6).



HOME



Continued from DTCs B1121, B1122, and B1141, Will Not Flash,4-Way Flashers Inoperable (Part 1 of 6).Inspect bulbs on side that will not flash.

Are the bulbs OK?

YES NO

Place jumper wire betweenterminals 2 and 6 of Breakout Box.

Do the right turn signals (front and rear) illuminate?

Replace bulbsas necessary.

6796

YES

Place a jumper wirebetween terminals 1 and 5

of Breakout Box.Do the left turn signals (front

and rear) illuminate?

NO

Check for continuity between terminal 6 of Breakout Box and right frontturn lamp and also between right front lamp housing and ground.


YES

Check for continuity between terminal 6of Breakout Box and right rear lamp and

also between right rear lamp housingand ground.

Is continuity present? Ground 6797Signal 6798

NO

Locate and repair openbetween connector [30]

or ground and front lamp.YES NO

Check for continuity between terminal 6 ofBreakout Box and terminal 2 of connector

[19A] and also between terminal 2 ofconnector [19A] and ground.


YES NO

Locate and repair openbetween connector [19B]

and rear lamp.

Check for continuity between terminal 6 ofBreakout Box and terminal 2 of connector

[7A] and also between terminal 6 ofconnector [7A] and ground.


6809

XL 1200N?

NOYES

YES NO

Replace TSM/HFSM. XL 1200N?

6791

NOYES


or ground and rear lamp.

Ground 6797Signal 6798

YES NO


Locate and repair open between connector[30] or ground and connector [7A].



fc01953_en

Go to DTCs B1121, B1122,and B1141, Will Not Flash, 4-Way Flashers Inoperable (Part

4 of 6).

Go to DTCs B1121, B1122,and B1141, Will Not Flash, 4-Way Flashers Inoperable (Part

1 of 6).

Go to DTCs B1121, B1122,and B1141, Will Not Flash,4-Way Flashers Inoperable

(Part 3 of 6).

HOME



Continued from DTCs B1121, B1122, and B1141, Will Not Flash, 4-WayFlashers Inoperable (Part 2 of 6).

Check for continuity between terminal 5 of Breakout Box and left front lamp andalso between left front lamp housing and ground.


YES NO

Locate and repair openbetween connector [30] or

grond and front lamp.

YES NO

YES

Check for continuity between terminal 5 of Breakout Boxand terminal 2 of connector [18A] and also between

terminal 2 of connector [18A] and ground.Is continuity present?


NO



YES NO

6809

YES NO

6791


Locate and repair openbetween connector[30] or ground and

connector [7A].Ground 6797

Signal 6798


Check for continuity between terminal 5 of BreakoutBox and left rear lamp and also between left rear lamp

housing and ground.Is continuity present?





and rear lamp.


fc01954_en

HOME



Continued from DTCs B1121, B1122, and B1141, Will NotFlash, 4-Way Flashers Inoperable (Part 2 of 6).

Remove turn signal bulbs, Unplug connector [20]. Check forcontinuity between terminals 12 and 5 (left) of Breakout Box

(gray).


YES NO

Unplug connector [31]. Check for continuity betweenterminals 12 and 6 (right) or 12 and 5 (left) of Breakout Box

(gray).Is continuity present?

NO

Locate and repair short toground between

connector [31] and frontturn signals.

6810

Unplug connectors [18] and [19] at tail lamp converter module.Check for continuity between terminals 12 and 6 (right) or 12

and 5 (left) of Breakout Box (gray).Is continuity present?

YES NO

YES NO

Unplug connectors [7] at tail lampconverter module. Check for continuity

between terminals 12 and 6 (right) or 12and 5 (left) of Breakout Box (gray).


Locate and repair short toground between tail lamp


Locate and repair short to groundbetween connector [30] and tail lamp

converter module.


YES

6810

6810 6809

fc01955_en

Go to DTCs B1121,B1122, and B1141, Will

Not Flash, 4-WayFlashers Inoperable

(Part 2 of 6).

HOME



Continued from DTCs B1121, B1122, and B1141, Will Not Flash,4-Way Flashers Inoperable (Part 1 of 6).

Check resistance to ground on Breakout Box terminal 12 (Gray).Is resistance less than 1 ohm?

YES

Check for 12 volts at both terminals of 15amp battery fuse.

Is proper voltage present at both terminals?

YES

Repair open in (BN/GY) wirebetween battery fuse and TSM.

6806

NO

NO

1 Terminal.

Repair poorground.

6805

Neither terminal.

Replacefuse.

6807

Repair open between 30 AmpMAXIFUSE and fuse block.

6808

fc01956_en

HOME



Continued from DTCs B1121, B1122, and B1141,Will Not Flash, 4-Way Flashers Inoperable (Part 1

of 6).

Check for battery voltage at Breakout Box terminal7 (gray) with right turn signal

depressed and terminal 8 (gray) with left turn signaldepressed.


YES

Replace TSM.Learn password and

perform set-up.

NO

6791

4

Check for battery voltage on terminal 1connector [22B] (right), or connector

[24B] (left).Is battery voltage present?

7

YES NO

With turn signal switch depressed on side under test,check for continuity between terminal 1 and terminal 5

on connector [22A] (right), or connector [24A] (left).Is continuity present?

Locate and repair open (O/W)wire between terminal 1 on connector

[22B] (right), or connector[24B] (left) and accessory fuse.

6814 – right6812 – left

YES NO

Locate and repair open wirebetween terminal 5 on connector[22B] (right), or connector [24B](left) and TSM connector [30].

Replace turn signalswitch or repair wiring to

turn signal switch.

6813 – right6810 - left

6811

fc01957_en

5

HOME


DTCs B1121 and B1122,Turn Signal Lamp Open Circuit

Inspect bulbs on side that will not flash.Are the bulbs OK?

YES NO

Replace failedbulbs as

necessary.

Place jumper wire between terminals1 and 6 (right, B1122) or 1 and 5 (left, B1121)

on Breakout Box(gray).

Do the respective turn signals illuminate?

YES NO

Replace HFSM.Learn passwordand perform set-

up.

4

6807

Check for continuity between breakoutbox terminal 5 (left) or terminal 6 (right)

and front or rear lamps.Is continuity present?

YES NO

Repair openground circuit.

Repair wire betweenconnector [30B] and

turn signal lamp.

6808

6805

fc01135_en

6790

HOME



Remove turn signal bulbs. Unplug connector [20]. Check forcontinuity between terminals 12 and 6 (right, B1124) orterminals 12 and 5 (left, B1123) of Breakout Box (Gray).


YES NO

Unplug connector [31]. Check forcontinuity between terminals 12 and 6

(right, B1124) or terminals 12 and 5 (left,B1123) of Breakout Box (Gray).


NO

Locate and repair short toground between connector[31] and front turn signals.

6791

Unplug connectors [18] and [19] at TailLamp Converter Module. Check for

continuity between terminals 12 and 6(right B1124) or 12 and 5 (left B1123) of

Breakout Box (Gray).Is continuity present?

YES NO

YES NO

Unplug connector [7] at Tail LampConverter Module. Check for continuity

between terminals 12 and 6 (right,B1124) or 12 and 5 (left, B1123) of

Breakout Box (Gray).Is continuity present?

Locate and repair short toground between Tail

Lamp Converter Moduleand turn signal.


connector [30] and TailLamp Converter Module.

Replace Tail LampConverter Module.

YES

6810

68106809

Replace HFSM. Learnpassword and perform

set-up.

XL 1200N?

6810

YES NO

Locate and repairshort to ground.

6810

fc01136_en

HOME



Unplug connector [30] from the HFSM. Check for voltagebetween terminals 12 and 6 (right, B1126) or terminals 12

and 5 (left, B1125) of Breakout Box (Gray).Is voltage present?

YES NO

Unplug connector [31]. Check for voltagebetween terminals 12 and 6 (right, B1126)

or terminals 12 and 5 (left, B1125) ofBreakout Box (Gray).Is voltage present?

NO

Locate and repair short to voltagebetween connector [31] and front

turn signals.

6791

Unplug connectors [18] and [19] at tail lamp convertermodule. Check for voltage between terminals 12 and 6(right B1126) or 12 and 5 (left B1125) of Breakout Box

(Gray).Is voltage present?

YES NO

YES NO

Unplug connector [7] at tail lamp converter module. Checkfor voltage between terminals 12 and 6 (right, B1126) or

12 and 5 (left, B1125) of Breakout Box (Gray).Is voltage present?

Locate and repair short tovoltage between tail lampconverter module and turn

signal.

Locate and repair short to voltagebetween connector [30] and tail

lamp converter module.


YES

6790

6790 6809


set-up.

XL 1200N?

6790

YES NO


6790

fc01137_en

6

HOME


3.16DTC B1131, B1132 (HFSM ONLY)

GENERALNOTE

This section applies only to those vehicles equipped with theoptional security system.

See Figure 3-24. An alarm cycle is activated when the HFSMis connected, the siren has been armed by the HFSM and asecurity event occurs. See 3.6 WARNINGS AND ALARMS.Under normal armed operation, the siren input (terminal "B")is driven low by the HFSM to trigger the audible alarm. Whenthe siren input is driven high by the HFSM the audible alarmstops.

ed02047

Figure 3-24. Security Siren

DIAGNOSTICS




Diagnostic Tips• If the siren is armed and the internal siren battery is dead,

shorted, disconnected, or has been charging for a period

longer than 24 hours, the siren will respond with threechirps on arming instead of two.

• The internal siren battery may not charge if the vehicle'sbattery is less than 12.5 volts.

• If the siren does not chirp two or three times on a validarming command from the HFSM, the chirp function hasbeen disabled, the siren is either not connected, notworking, or the siren wiring was opened or shorted whilethe siren was disarmed.

• If the siren enters the self-driven mode where it is poweredfrom the siren internal nine-volt battery, the turn-signallamps will not alternately flash. If the HFSM activates thesiren, the turn-signal lamps will flash. If the siren has beenarmed and a security event occurs, and the siren is in self-driven mode, the siren will alarm for 20 to 30 seconds andthen turn off for 5 to 10 seconds. This alarm cycle will berepeated ten times if the siren is in the self-driven mode.

• If the siren does not stop alarming after it has been armed,then either the HFSM output or siren input may be shortedto ground, or the siren vehicle battery connection is openor shorted to ground, or the siren vehicle ground connec-tion is open, or a security event has occurred. See3.6 WARNINGS AND ALARMS for a description of alarmfunctions.


1. Use BREAKOUT BOX (Part No. HD-42682) and HAR-NESS CONNECTOR TEST KIT (Part No. HD-41404-B),gray pin probe and patch cord. See 3.12 BREAKOUTBOX: TSM/HFSM.

2. Use HARNESS CONNECTOR TEST KIT (Part No. HD-41404-B), gray socket probe and patch cord.

3. Having the correct multimeter ohm scale is important forthis test. Some meters may read infinity for high ohmvalues. If this is the case, check your ohm scale and retest.

Table 3-14. Siren Alarm Output DTCs


DTCs B1131 and B1132Alarm output lowB1131

Alarm output highB1132

HOME


R RR

BN/GY

BN

/GY

BN/GY

LGN/BN

LGN

/BN

1

A

B

C

A

B

C

1211

1 1211

– +

[30A]

HFSM

Bat

tery

Ala

rmsi

gnal

Gro

und

[30B]

15 AmpBattery Fuse

30 AmpMAXIFUSE

[142A] [142B]

SecuritySiren

(Optional)

BK

BK

BK

Battery

GND 1

Engine CaseGround Point

To ignitionswitch

To ECMfuse

em01149

Figure 3-25. Smart Siren Circuit



Electrical panel behind fender exten-sion

12-place DeutschHFSM[30]

Electrical panel behind fender exten-sion

3-place PackardSecurity siren[142]

HOME



Check for battery voltage at siren sensor connector [142B]. With ignition ON,measure voltage between terminal C (BK) and terminal A (BN/GY).


YES NO

With ignition OFF, measure resistance betweensiren connector [142B] terminal B and Breakout Box

terminal 11 (gray).Is resistance less than 1 ohm?

With ignition OFF, check for continuity between siren connector[142B] terminal 3 and Breakout Box terminal 12. Check for continuity

between siren connector [142B] terminal A and Breakout Boxterminal 1.


1 1

YES NO

Measure resistance between BreakoutBox terminal 11 and chassis ground.

Is resistance less than 1 ohm?

Locate and repairopen on (LGN/BN)

wire.

YES NO

Locate and repairshort between (BN/GY)

and (BK) wires.

Repairopen wire.

YES NO

Locate and repairgrounded (LGN/BN)

wire.

Disconnect siren from Breakout Box. Measure resistancebetween siren connector [142A] terminal B and C.

Is resistance between 120,000-200,000 ohms with sirendisconnected?

YES

Connect siren to a known goodmotorcycle. Arm and activate sirento verify operation. Disarm siren.

Did siren operate correctly?

YES


setup.

NO

ReplaceSiren.

NO

ReplaceSiren.

Clear DTCs using odometer self-diagnostics. See 3.11ODOMETER SELF-DIAGNOSTICS. Confirm proper operationwith no check engine lamp.

2

3

fc01806_en

HOME


3.17DTC B1134

GENERALWith the HFSM (if equipped) disarmed, Ignition Switch turnedto IGNITION, and Engine Stop Switch set to RUN, (seeFigure 3-26) the start relay is grounded. Battery voltage isapplied to the start relay and coil which are grounded throughthe TSM/HFSM. DTC B1134 is set when that ground is notestablished through the TSM/HFSM.


DESCRIPTIONDTC

Starter output highB1134

DIAGNOSTICS




1. Connect BREAKOUT BOX (Part No. HD-42682), gray towire harness connector [30] leaving TSM/HFSM discon-nected. See 3.12 BREAKOUT BOX: TSM/HFSM.

ed02837

Figure 3-26. Start Relay

HOME


Start Relay

Fuse Block

To Starter ButtonOn Right Handlebar

15 AmpBatteryFuse

30 AmpMAXIFUSE

IgnitionSwitch

TSM/HFSM

Bat

tery

Sta

rtR

elay

Con

trol

Gro

und

1 9 12

1 9 12

IBA

R

RR R R

R/BK R/BK

BK/R

BN

/GY

BN/GY

TN

/GN

TN/GN

BK

BK

Battery

[22]


GND 1

8685

3087A87

12

345

RP

CQI

[30B][30A]

[119A][119B]

em01318

Figure 3-27. Starter TSM/HFSM Circuits





Under left side cover5-place AmpStart relay[119]

HOME


DTC B1134

Remove start relay.Check for voltage on Breakout Box terminal 9 (Gray).

Is voltage present?

YES

Locate and repairshort to voltage

on (TN/GN) wire.

NO

Install start relay.Is voltage present on

Breakout Boxterminal 9 (Gray)?

YES

Replacestart relay.

NO

Replace TSM/HFSM.Learn password and

perform setup.

1


fc01807_en

HOME


3.18DTCS B1135, B1136, B1141, AND B1142

DIAGNOSTICS

DTC B1135 Accelerometer FaultDTC B1135 indicates a failure which requires replacement ofthe TSM/HFSM.

NOTE

When DTC B1135 is set, the tip-over engine shutdown, HFSMtamper alarm and bank angle sensors are disabled. Thesecurity lamp will also illuminate when this code is set.

DTC B1136 ACCELEROMETER TIP-OVERSELF-TEST FAULT AND DTC B1142INTERNAL FAULTDTCs B1136 and B1142 indicates a failure which requiresreplacement of the HFSM.

DTC B1141 IGNITION SWITCH OPEN/LOW




DTC B1141: Ignition Switch Open/Low is a symptom of WillNot Flash and can be diagnosed using the flowcharts.


1. Connect BREAKOUT BOX (Part No. HD-42682) (gray)between TSM/HFSM connector [30A] and wiring harnessconnector [30B]. See 3.12 BREAKOUT BOX:TSM/HFSM.

2. Use HARNESS CONNECTOR TEST KIT (Part No. HD-41404-B), gray terminal probe and patch cord.
























HOME


Sta

rter

Rig

htFr

ont

Turn

Lam

p

IGN

AC

CY

15A

15A

[31A

]

Igni

tion

Sw

itch

[7A

]

BK

Bat

tery

EC

M

15A

15A

BE/G

Y

BN/G

Y

R/BK

R

R

R

Sec

urity

Sire

n

BN/G

YBKLGN/

BN

TN/G

N

AJDA

BICB

Sta

rtR

elay

TN/G

N

GY

GY O

LGN/

V

LGN/

V

(opt

iona

l)

O/W

O/W

LGN/

BN

BA CBA C V

V

V

BN/G

Y

BN

BN

BN

W/B

NW

/V

W/VBK

W/B

K

BE/G

Y

R/BK

R/G

Y

R/G

Y

BK/R

R

R

R/BK

GN

GN

BK

BK

BK

[142

B]

[142

A]

[78B

]

[30B

]

Pow

er

Sig

nal

Gro

und

BK

[5]

30A

mp

MAX

IFUS

E

BA

GN

D1

Pow

ertr

ain

Gro

und

Poi

nt

TN

AC

C−

BAT

T−

IGN

−

[78A

]

2 5 10 13 28 31

2 5 10 13 28 31

I Q C P R

87 87A

30 85 86

5 4 3 2 1

EC

M

[24B

]

BK/RBK

BK/R

TS

M/

HF

SM

[61B

]

Hor

nS

witc

hH

eadl

amp

Hi/L

oS

witc

hLe

ftTu

rnS

witc

h

[24A

][9

4B]

[94A

]

Left

Han

dC

ontr

ols

Rea

rtu

rnsi

gnal

s,X

L12

00N

only

Rea

rtu

rnsi

gnal

s,ex

cept

XL

1200

N

Clu

tch

Sw

itch

O/W

GYW/BKW/BNBK/R

Rig

htTu

rnS

witc

hE

ngin

eS

top

Sw

itch

Sta

rtS

witc

hS

top

Lam

pS

witc

h

[22A

]

Rig

htH

and

Con

trol

s

O/W

W/V

BK/RBK

R

Fus

eblo

ck

Top

view

Top

view

[119

]

Acce

ssor

ies

Ligh

ts

Igni

tion

Fuel

Pum

p

Star

tRLY

Syst

emRL

Y

ECM

Batte

ry

Spar

e

P&A

IGN

Inst

rum

ents

Spar

eI B A

Sys

tem

Rel

ay

Spar

e(XL

) ENG

CTL(

XR)

Ope

n

[119

B]

[128

]

65

43

1

65

43

1

[142

A]

65

2

BN

TN

BK

V

Left

Indi

cato

rN

eutr

al

O

Rig

htIn

dica

tor

BK

Bat

tery

BN

VBK

Rig

htR

ear

Turn

Lam

p

Left

Rea

rTu

rnLa

mp

Tail

Lam

pC

onve

rter

Mod

ule

[19B

]

BK BKV V

[18B

]

25

6

25

6

25

6

1 2

1 2 31234

1 21 2 1 2

Rig

htR

ear

Turn

Lam

p

Left

Rea

rTu

rnLa

mp

[19B

][1

9A]

BK BKVBK V/BN

VBK V

[18B

][1

8A]

1 2 1 2

1 2 1 2

[94B

]

[94A

]

[19A

]

[18A

]

[93A

]

[7B

]

To tail/

brak

ela

mpLe

ftFr

ont

Turn

Lam

p

BK

V

BK

BKV

BN

[31B

]

BKBN

R/BK

BKGN/

O

35

68

12

35

68

12

BN

VBK

25

6

25

6

25

6

[7B

]

65

21

65

21

[22B

]

GY

O/W

W/BNW/BK

BK/R

INS

TR

15A

GH

BK

OG

N/O

BE/G

Y

W/B

K

K T E S U

87 87A

30 85 86

5 4 3 2 1

BN

V

[20A

][2

0B]

BK

BK

Bat

tery

Red

Ban

d

21 43 65 87 109 1211

21 43 65 87 109 1211

[30A

]

Bat

tery

Igni

tion

VS

S/S

eria

lDat

aLi

nkN

eutr

alS

witc

hLe

ftTu

rnF

eed

Rig

htTu

rnF

eed

Rig

htTu

rnS

witc

hIn

put

Left

Turn

Sw

itch

Inpu

tS

tart

Rel

ayC

ontr

olC

lutc

hS

witc

hA

larm

Sig

nal

Gro

und

21 321 3

Rec

eive

Ant

enna

XM

ITA

nten

naA

XM

ITA

nten

naB

2121

Ant

enna

’A’

Ant

enna

’B’

O/Y BK

O/Y BK

Han

dsFr

eeA

nten

na[2

09B

][20

9A]

[208

A]

[208

B]

TN

TN

Neu

tral

Sw

itch

[136

]

Sys

tem

Rel

ay

Ser

ialD

ata

Link

Pow

erG

roun

d

Sw

itche

dP

ower

Pow

erG

roun

d

EKTS

U

I CQP

RM

O

GH

AB

15A

15A

15A

PR

IJ

CD

15A

15A

15A

MO

GH

AB

15A

15A

15A

KL F

15A

15A

E

15

78

15

78

Y/B

K

em01312

Figure 3-28.Turn Signal Circuit

HOME


DTC B1141, Will Not Flash, No Codes (Parts 1 of 2)

Turn ignition switch to IGNITION.Activate 4-way flashers.

Do any turn signals illuminate?

YES NO

Connector [30]fully mated?

YES NO

Place red meter lead atterminal 1 (Gray) and black meter

lead at terminal 12 (Gray) ofbreakout box.


YES

Place red meter lead at terminal2 (Gray) of breakout box.


NO

Check resistance to ground onbreakout box terminal 12 (Gray).Is resistance less than one ohm?

YES NO

Check for battery voltageat both terminals of ignition

fuse. Is ignition voltagepresent at both

terminals?

YES NO

Locate and repairopen on (GY) wire

between ignition fuseand HFSM.

Go to 4.10 NO ECMPOWER.

Mate connector.

YES NO

Check for battery voltage atboth terminals of battery

fuse.Is battery voltage

present at both terminals?

Locate and repair openor poor ground circuit.

1

6805

6793

YES

Repair open on (BN/GY) wire betweenbattery fuse and

HFSM.

NO

One terminal

Replace fuse.

Neither terminal

Repair openbetween MAXIFUSE

and fuse block.68066807

6808

fc01958_en

6792

Go to DTC B1141,Will Not Flash, NoCode (Part 2 of 2).

Go to DTC B1141,Will Not Flash, NoCode (Part 2 of 2).

HOME


DTC B1141, Will Not Flash, No Codes (Parts 2 of 2)

Continued from DTC B1141, Will NotFlash, No Code (Part 1 of 2).

Check for battery voltage at breakoutbox terminal 7 (Gray) with right turn

signal depressed and terminal 8 (Gray)with left turn signal depressed.


YES

Replace HFSM. Learn passwordand perform set-up.

NO

Check for battery voltage on terminal1 connector [22B] (right), or connector


YES NO

With turn signal switch depressed on sideunder test, check for continuity betweenterminal 1 and terminal 5 on connector[22A] (right), or connector [24A] (left).


Locate and repair open (O/W) wirebetween terminal 1 on connector[22B] (right), or connector [24B}

(left) and accessory fuse.

YES NO

Locate and repair open wirebetween terminal 5 on connector[22B] (right), or connector [24B](left) and HFSM connector [30].


turn signal switch.

68116813 – right

6810 - left

6814 – right6812 - left

6791

1

2

fc01959_en

HOME


3.19DTC B1143, B1144, B1145 (HFSM ONLY)

GENERAL



DTCs B1143, B1144 and B1145 will set when faults occur tothe security antenna circuit used to transmit to the fob. Referto Table 3-19.

DTC B1143: Security AntennaShort-to-Ground1. Disconnect antenna connector [208] from HFSM.

2. Using the black male of HARNESS CONNECTOR TESTKIT (Part No. HD-41404-B) attach it to connector [208B].

3. Measure resistance between [208B] terminal 2, 3 andground. Is the resistance greater or less than 1 ohm?

a. If the resistance is less than 1 ohm, locate and repairshort-to-ground. Use job code 6879.

b. If the resistance is greater than 1 ohm, replace theHFSM, learn password and perform set-up. Use jobcode 6791.

DTC B1144: Security AntennaShort-to-Voltage1. With the ignition ON, disconnect antenna connector [208]

from HFSM.

2. Using the black male of HARNESS CONNECTOR TESTKIT (Part No. HD-41404-B) attach it to connector [208B].

3. Check the voltage between [208B] terminal 2, 3 andground. Is there voltage present?

a. If there is voltage present, locate and repair short-to-voltage. Use job code 6879.

b. If there is not voltage present, replace the HFSM,learn password and perform set-up. Use job code6791.

Table 3-19. Security Antenna DTCs

DIAGNOSTICSCONDITIONDTC

DTC B1143: Security Antenna Short-to-GroundSecurity antenna short-to-groundB1143

DTC B1144: Security Antenna Short-to-VoltageSecurity antenna short-to-voltageB1144

DTC B1145Security antenna openB1145

DIAGNOSTICS




1. Use black male HARNESS CONNECTOR TEST KIT (PartNo. HD-41404-B) to connector [208B].

2. If DTC is current (lamp on continuously, cleared codesreturn during operation), replace HFSM. If DTC is historic,check for intermittents.

3. Connect light blue male HARNESS CONNECTOR TESTKIT (Part No. HD-41404-B) to connector [209B] and blackmale HARNESS CONNECTOR TEST KIT (Part No. HD-41404-B) to connector [208B].

HOME


Hands FreeAntenna

HFSM

15 AmpBatteryFuse

30 AmpMAXIFUSE

To ignitionswitch

Tran

smit

Ant

enna

BTr

ansm

itA

nten

naA

Rec

eive

Ant

enna

Gro

und

Bat

tery

Battery BK

BK

BK

O/Y

O/Y

Y/B

K

BN

/GY

BN/GYR

R R

RRBK

1 12

1 12

– +

21

3

3

21

21

21

[30A][30B]

[208A][208B]

[209A]

[209B]To ECMfuse

em01151

Figure 3-29. Security Antenna Circuit



Electrical panel behind fender extension12-place DeutschHFSM[30]

Electrical panel behind fender extension4-place DeutschHFSM[208]

Under seat2-place MolexSecurity antenna[209]

HOME


DTC B1145

Check for resistance between connector[208B] terminals 2 and 3.

Is resistance between 3.7K ohms and 5.7 K ohms?

YES NO

Replace HFSM. Learnpassword and perform set-up.

Check for continuity between[208B] terminal 3 and [209B] terminal

2, and also between [208B]terminal 2 and [209B] terminal 1.


1

3

6791

2

YES NO

Replace securityantenna.

Locate and repair open wirebetween connectors [208B]

and [209B].6878

6879

fc01144_en

HOME


3.20DTC B1154, B1155

DIAGNOSTICS



Diagnostic TipsDTCs B1154 and B1155 will set when either the clutch switchcircuit or the neutral switch circuit is shorted to ground atspeeds greater than 10 MPH (16 km/h) for more than 60seconds. Refer to Table 3-21.

Table 3-21. Clutch/Neutral Switch DTCs

SYMPTOMDTC

Clutch switch short-to-groundB1154

Neutral switch short-to-groundB1155


1. Connect BREAKOUT BOX (Part No. HD-42682) to HFSM.3.12 BREAKOUT BOX: TSM/HFSM.

2. If DTC is current (lamp on continuously, clear codes returnduring operation), replace HFSM. If DTC is historic, checkfor intermittents.

3. A reading of several hundred ohms is normal due to theneutral indicator lamp (LED).

HOME


8

8

7

7

Battery

TSM/HFSM

Clutch Switch

30 AmpMAXIFUSE

15 AmpInstruments

Fuse

NeutralIndicatorLamp

4 10

4 10

Neu

tral

Sw

itch

Clu

tch

Sw

itch

6 8

6 8

TN

TN

TN

BK

BK

TN

TN

BK

BK

OO

O

R RR

R

BK/R

BK

/RB

KB

K/R

BK

/R

R/BKIBA


NeutralSwitch

To ECM

IgnitionSwitch


GND 1[30B][30A]

[136B][136A]

[20A][20B]

[24A][24B]

em01319

Figure 3-30. Clutch and Neutral Interlock Circuits






HOME


DTC B1154

Connect Breakout Box HD-42682 to the mainharness, leaving the connector [30] disconnected.

Check for continuity between terminal 10 (Gray) (+)and terminal 12 (Gray) (-).


YES NO

Disconnect connector [24]. Check forcontinuity between terminal 10 (Gray)

(+) and terminal 12 (Gray) (-) onBreakout Box.



1

2

6791

YES NO

Locate and repair short to groundon (BK/R) wire in wirein main wiring harness

between [30B] and [24B).

Locate and repairshort-to-ground in

left handlebar switchwiring.

5861 5861

NOTEThis DTC may occur if the vehicle is ridden with clutch disengaged(pulled in) at speeds greater than 10 MPH (16 km/h)for more than 60 seconds (coasting down a long mountain road).

fc01145_en

HOME


DTC B1155

With the transmission in 1st or 2nd gear, connectBreakout Box HD-42682 to the main harness,

leaving the HFSM disconnected. Measurecontinuity between terminal 4 (Gray) and terminal

12 (Gray).Is continuity (less than 10 ohms) present?

YES NO

Disconnect neutral switch [136]. Measurecontinuity between terminal 4 (Gray) and terminal

12 (Gray) on breakout box.Is continuity (less than 10 ohms) present?


1

2

6791

3

3

YES NO

Locate and repair short toground on (TN) wire inmain wiring harness.

Replace neutral switch.

58625157

fc01146_en

HOME


3.21DTC U1016, U1255

GENERALThe serial data connector provides a means for the ECM (seeFigure 3-32 for XL, and Figure 3-33 for XR), TSM/HFSM, andspeedometer and tachometer to communicate their currentstatus. When all operating parameters on the serial data busare within specifications, a state of health message is sentbetween the components.





CONDITIONDTC

Loss of all ECM serial data (state ofhealth)

U1016


ed02835

Figure 3-31. ECM Location

DIAGNOSTICS





1. Connect BREAKOUT BOX (Part No. HD-42682) (gray)between TSM/HFSM connector [30A] and wire harnessconnector [30B]. See 3.12 BREAKOUT BOX:TSM/HFSM.

2. Connect BREAKOUT BOX (Part No. HD-43876) betweenwire harness and ECM. See 4.7 BREAKOUT BOX: EFI.

HOME


Speedometer

12V(Switched)

12V ACCFuse

12V BATTFuse

12V INSTRFuse

12V IGNFuse

ECM

Data LinkConnector

12V(Switched)

12V(Switched)

12V(Batt)

Tachometer (not present on all models)

TSM/TSSM/HFSM

Ser

iald

ata

3

2

1

4

[78]

[39B][39A]

[108B][108A]

[20A][20B]

[30B][30A]

[91A]

71 62 12

71 62 12

1 3

5

2

1 3

12

122

1 2 5 6 7

1 2 5 6 71 7

Igni

tion

Ser

iald

ata

Bat

tery

Acc

esso

ryG

roun

d

Igni

tion

Ser

iald

ata

Bat

tery

Bat

tery

Igni

tion

Ser

iald

ata

Gro

und

Acc

esso

ryG

roun

d

652

1 7652

BK

BK

BK

BK

BK

BK

GYGY

GY

O/W O/W

O/W

O/W

O

O

O

O

R

LGN/V

LGN

/VLG

N/V

LGN

/V

LGN/V

LGN/V

LGN

/V

BN/GY

BN/GY

BN

/GY

BN

/GY

BN

/GY

BN/GY

R/GY

R/BK

R/BK

em01181


HOME


BK

BK

BK

GY GY

O/W

O/W

O/W

O/W

O

R

BN

/GY

BN

/GY

BN

/GY

BN

/GY

BN/GY

LGN

/V BK

BK

GY

BK

O/WO

OO

BN

/GY

LGN

/V

LGN

/V

LGN

/V

LGN/V

LGN

/V

LGN

/V

R/BK

R/BK

R/GY

1 2 3 12

1 2 3 12

1 2 5 76

1 2 5 76

C B A D

C B A D

Ser

ialD

ata

Bat

tery

Acc

esso

ryG

roun

d

Igni

tion

Ser

ialD

ata

Bat

tery

Bat

tery

Igni

tion

Ser

ialD

ata

Gro

und

Acc

esso

ryG

roun

d

Speedometer

TSM/TSSM/HFSM

Tachometer

To ACCY Fuse

To BATT Fuse

To INSTR Fuse

To IGN Fuse

12V ACCYFuse

12V BATTFuse

12V INSTRFuse

12V IGNFuse

3

1

2

4

Ground

Serial Data

Power

Data LinkConnector

21 6 7 12

21 6 7 12

ECM

Ser

ialD

ata

5

5

GND1

GND1

GND1[78B][78A]

[108A][108B]

[20A][20B]

[39A][39B]

[30A][30B]

[91A]

em01304







Back of speedometer display5-place PackardSpeedometer (XR)[39]


HOME




On battery strap, behind left side cover4-place DeutschData link connector[91]


HOME



Can you read ECM hardware part number?See 3.11 ODOMETER SELF-DIAGNOSTICS.


While wiggling harness, check continuitybetween terminal 3 (Gray) of

TSM/HFSM Breakout Box and terminal5 of ECM Breakout Box.


Check continuity betweenterminal 3 (Gray) of TSM/HFSMBreakout Box and terminal 5 of

ECM Breakout Box.Is continuity present?

1

2


1

2

YES

Clear codes. Test ride.Did DTC U1016 return?

YES


password.

NO


NO

No trouble found.

YES


password.

NO


fc01808_en

HOME


3.22DTC U1300, U1301 OR BUS ER

DIAGNOSTICSThe typical serial data voltage range is 0 volts (inactive) to 7volts (active). Due to the short pulse, voltages will be muchlower on a DVOM. In analog mode, a DVOM reading serialdata will show continuous voltage when active, typically 0.6-0.8 volts. The range for acceptable operations is 0-7.0 volts.

Diagnostic Tips• If serial data is shorted, these Diagnostic Trouble Codes

(DTCs) will automatically cause the check engine lamp toilluminate. The odometer will read "BUS Er" in this condi-tion.



ed01340

Figure 3-34. Data Link Connector [91A]


START WITH FLOWCHARTDESCRIPTIONDTC

4.11 STARTS, THEN STALLSSerial data lowU1300

4.11 STARTS, THEN STALLSSerial data open/highU1301

HOME


3.23TSM/HFSM: PASSWORD LEARN

GENERALIf the ECM or TSM/HFSM is faulty, follow the instructions inthe service manual for ECM or TSM/HFSM replacement.Then,to determine if password learn is necessary, refer to Table 3-26.

Table 3-26. Password Learn

IS PASSWORD LEARNNECESSARY?

DEVICE REPLACED

YesECM

No *TSM

YesTSM/HFSM

* If a TSM has been replaced by a HFSM, or a HFSM hasbeen replaced by a TSM, password learn is necessary.

PASSWORD LEARNING



To perform password learning procedure, refer to Table 3-27.When finished, continue with all instructions under 3.3 H-DSSSACTUATION.

Always perform all appropriate instructions under 3.3 H-DSSSACTUATION after TSM/HFSM replacement or removal.

NOTE

Fob assignment must be performed at an authorized Harley-Davidson dealer using DIGITAL TECHNICIAN II (Part No. HD-48650).

Table 3-27. Setting TSM/HFSM and ECM Password

NOTESCONFIRMATIONACTIONNO.

With Ignition Switch turned off,Check Engine Lamp andSecurity Lamp will be off.

Ignition must be turned off for at least 15 seconds.

Install new TSM/HFSM or ECM. Perform all steps under3.3 H-DSSS ACTUATION.

1

Set Engine Stop Switch to RUN.2

TSM/HFSM enables startrelay.

Verify Check Engine Lampand Security Lamp illuminateand then turn off.

Turn Ignition Switch ON.3

Password has not beenlearned. ECM sets DTCP1009.

Engine starts and stalls.Check Engine Lamp illumin-ates and stays on.

Attempt normal start one time.4

ECM enters PasswordLearning mode for tenminutes. Do not cycle IgnitionSwitch or interrupt vehiclepower or Password Learn willbe unsuccessful.

Security Lamp illuminates.Wait ten seconds. Security Lamp will illuminate and stayon.

5

This takes ten minutes.Wait until Security Lamp turns off.6

ECM must not be allowed toshutdown.

Quickly (within two seconds) turn Ignition SwitchOFF-ON.

7




9




11

Turn Ignition Switch OFF. Wait 15 seconds beforeturning Ignition Switch on. Turn Ignition Switch ON andstart engine to confirm successful Password Learnprocedure. Clear DTCs.

12

Perform all steps under 3.3 H-DSSS ACTUATION.13

HOME


3.24HFSM MAINTENANCE

GENERALThe HFSM uses a battery in the fob and siren. These are theonly parts requiring periodic maintenance.

HANDS-FREE FOB

ScheduleReplace the fob battery every year.

Battery Replacement1. See Figure 3-35. Open the fob case.

a. Place a thin blade in the thumbnail slot (1) betweenthe 2 halves of the case.

b. Slowly twist the blade.

2. Replace battery (2).

a. Remove the original battery.

b. Install a new battery with the positive (+) side down.Use a Panasonic® 2032 or equivalent.

3. With O-ring (3) in place, align case halves and snap casehalves together.

1

2

3

1

ed02055

1. Thumbnail slot2. Battery (Panasonic 2032)3. O-ring

Figure 3-35. Open Fob: HFSM

SMART SIREN (IF INSTALLED)

ScheduleThe siren's internal 9 volt battery is rechargeable and does notneed to be replaced on a regular basis. Battery life undernormal conditions is approximately three to six years.

NOTES

• See Figure 3-36 and Figure 3-37. Early style siren willwork with both TSSM and HFSM. Late style siren will onlywork with HFSM.


Battery Replacement: Early Style Siren1. Disarm system and remove siren.

2. See Figure 3-36. Remove battery cover.

a. Place the siren module on a flat and sturdy table withthe potted section (area with epoxy covering circuitboard) facing up and towards you.

b. Position a knife blade at a 45 degree angle to the longside of the siren case. Insert the knife blade betweenthe siren case and battery cover at one of the twoaccessible corners of the battery cover. Keep theblade slightly higher towards the battery cover as thishelps keep the blade away from the battery seal.

c. Slowly twist the blade towards the battery cover andthe cover will pop off.

NOTES• For protection against corrosion, battery terminals and

battery clip are covered with a special grease. Do not wipeaway this substance. Apply all available existing greaseto terminals on new battery.

• Only a 9 volt nickel metal hydride battery should be usedin the siren.

3. Replace battery by removing old battery from polarizedbattery clip. Install a new 9 volt nickel metal hydride bat-tery.

4. Reinstall battery cover.

a. Carefully replace the rubber seal.

b. Align battery cover with case placing round cornerson cover away from connector [142A]. Snap coverinto place.

5. Install siren and check operation. If siren is working prop-erly, it will respond with two chirps after receiving the armcommand.

Battery Replacement: Late Style Siren1. Disarm system and remove siren.

2. See Figure 3-37. With a small screwdriver or pick, pushthe catches (1) in through the two slots (2) in the end ofthe siren to release the battery cover (3).

HOME





3. Replace battery (4) by removing old battery from polarizedbattery clip.

4. Recharge and re-install or install a new 9 volt nickel metalhydride battery.

5. Reinstall battery cover (3).

a. Carefully replace the rubber seal (5) on the cover.

b. Align battery cover with case placing round cornerson cover away from connector [142A] (6).

c. Snap cover into place.


1 23

ed03016

1. Cover2. Battery3. Connector [142A]

Figure 3-36. Battery Compartment (Early Style Siren)

4

5

6

3

1

2

ed02958

1. Catch2. Slot3. Cover4. 9 Volt battery5. Rubber seal6. Connector [142A]

Figure 3-37. Siren Battery Compartment (Late Style Siren)

HOME



NOTES

TABLE OF CONTENTS

SUBJECT............................................................................................................................PAGE NO.4.1 SPECIFICATIONS.....................................................................................................................4-14.2 EFI SYSTEM.............................................................................................................................4-34.3 EFI DIAGNOSTIC INTRODUCTION.........................................................................................4-54.4 CHECKING FOR DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES: EFI.........................................................4-64.5 INITIAL DIAGNOSTIC CHECK: EFI..........................................................................................4-94.6 ODOMETER SELF-DIAGNOSTICS........................................................................................4-204.7 BREAKOUT BOX: EFI.............................................................................................................4-224.8 WIGGLE TEST........................................................................................................................4-234.9 ENGINE CRANKS, BUT WILL NOT START............................................................................4-244.10 NO ECM POWER..................................................................................................................4-314.11 STARTS, THEN STALLS.......................................................................................................4-364.12 FUEL SYSTEM ELECTRICAL TEST....................................................................................4-424.13 SYSTEM RELAY CHECK......................................................................................................4-504.14 IDLE AIR CONTROL.............................................................................................................4-554.15 MISFIRE AT IDLE OR UNDER LOAD...................................................................................4-604.16 DTC P0107, P0108, P0112, P0113.......................................................................................4-664.17 DTC P0117, P0118...............................................................................................................4-734.18 DTC P0122, P0123...............................................................................................................4-774.19 DTC P0131, P0132, P0134, P0151, P0152, P0154..............................................................4-824.20 DTC P0261, P0262, P0263, P0264.......................................................................................4-874.21 DTC P0373, P0374...............................................................................................................4-934.22 DTC P0501, P0502...............................................................................................................4-964.23 DTC P0562, P0563.............................................................................................................4-1004.24 DTC P0603, P0605.............................................................................................................4-1044.25 DTC P0661, P0662.............................................................................................................4-1054.26 DTC P1009, P1010.............................................................................................................4-1094.27 DTC P1351, P1352, P1354, P1355.....................................................................................4-1144.28 DTC P1501, P1502.............................................................................................................4-1194.29 DTC U1064, U1255.............................................................................................................4-1244.30 DTC U1097, U1255.............................................................................................................4-1294.31 FUEL PRESSURE TEST.....................................................................................................4-134

EN

GIN

E M

AN

AG

EM

EN

T


4.1SPECIFICATIONS

SPECIFICATIONS

Table 4-1. General Specifications

DATAIGNITION

1000 ± 50 RPMIdle speed

12 mmSpark plug size

0.038-0.043 in (0.97-1.09 mm)Spark plug gap

0.032-0.038 in (0.81-0.97 mm)Spark plug gap (XR)

Harley-DavidsonNo. 6R12 (no substitute)

Spark plug type

Harley-DavidsonNo. 10R12X

Spark plug type (XR)

0.3-0.7 ohmsIgnition coil primary res-istance at room temper-ature

1500-2400 ohmsIgnition coil secondaryresistance at room tem-perature

Table 4-2. Fuse Ratings

RATING (AMPERES)ITEM

15ECM fuse

15Fuel pump fuse

15Ignition fuse

15Instruments fuse

15Accessory fuse

15Battery fuse

15Lights fuse

15P&A ignition fuse

30Main fuse

15Engine Control

HOME

2009 Sportster Diagnostics: Engine Management 4-1

13

6

7

5

4

3

1

23

8

11

10

9

1214

ed02838

8.1. Accessories fuseECM fuse2. 9.Fuel pump fuse Battery fuse

10.3. Lights fuseSpare4. 11.Start relay P&A ignition fuse

12.5. OpenSystem relay6. 13.Ignition fuse MAXIFUSE

14.7. Spare fuse (XL) - Engine Control (XR)Instruments fuse

Figure 4-1. Fuses and Relays

HOME

4-2 2009 Sportster Diagnostics: Engine Management

4.2EFI SYSTEM

GENERALThe engine management system consists of the followingcomponents:

• Electronic Control Module (ECM).

• Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor.

• Combination Intake Air Temperature (IAT)/ManifoldAbsolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor (TMAP).

• Idle Air Control (IAC).

• Throttle Position (TP) Sensor.

• Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS).

• Turn Signal Module (TSM) or optional, factory-installedTurn Signal Security Module (TSSM) (Japan/Korea) orHands-Free Security Module (HFSM). This includes anintegrated Bank Angle Sensor (BAS).

• Ignition Coil.

• Jiffy Stand Sensor (HDI).

• Oxygen Sensors.

• Active Intake Solenoid (HDI).

The ECM is mounted under the seat. It computes the sparkadvance for proper ignition timing based on sensor inputs fromCKP, TMAP and TP sensors, and regulates the low-voltagecircuits between battery and ignition coil.

The ECM contains all of the solid state components used inthe ignition system. The dwell time for the ignition coil is alsocalculated in the microprocessor and is dependent upon batteryvoltage. The programmed dwell is an added feature to giveadequate spark at all speeds. (The ECM has added protectionagainst transient voltages, continuous reverse voltage protec-tion, and damage due to jump starts.) The ECM is fully

enclosed to protect it from vibration, dust, water or oil.This unitis a non-repairable item. If it fails, it must be replaced.

The CKP sensor is located in the front left side of the crank-case. The CKP sensor generates an AC signal which is sentto the ECM where it is used to reference engine position (TDC)and speed. It functions by taking readings off the 30 teeth onthe left side flywheel (two teeth are missing to establish a ref-erence point).

The TMAP sensor is located on top of the intake manifold.TheTMAP sensor monitors the intake manifold pressure (vacuum)and intake air temperature and sends the information to theECM where the module adjusts the spark timing and fuel curvefor optimum performance.

The BAS is within the TSM/TSSM/HFSM. If the vehicle tipsover, the engine will be shut off. Once the sensor is tripped,the motorcycle must be uprighted, turned off and then on againbefore the engine can be restarted. This is communicatedacross the data bus.

Front and rear coils fire each spark plug independently (onecylinder at a time - no wasted spark).The coil also has an extraterminal to monitor current on the coil secondary circuit. Thisis used for knock detection and combustion diagnostics.

The ignition system gives a spark near top dead center forstarting. At RPM and loads above this, the system gives aspark advance that varies between 0 and 50.

The IAT, ET, TP and oxygen sensors are used to provideinformation to the ECM to fine tune spark and fuel delivery.The VSS is used as an input for idle speed control.

The oxygen sensors monitor the exhaust gas for oxygen con-tent.The fuel/air mixture is then adjusted to maintain an optimalair/fuel ratio.

TROUBLESHOOTINGSee the diagnostic charts for troubleshooting information.

HOME


IgnitionSwitch

B

A

I

10

11

29

19

21

2

30CKP (+)CKP (-)

System Relay

Rear Coil

Front Coil

Battery

Front Injector

Active Intake

Rear Injector

IAC (A) Low

IAC (B) High

IAC (B) Low

IAC (A) High

Switch Power

Intake Air Temp

MAP Sensor Input

Engine Temp

5V Sensor PowerTPS Input

Oxygen Sensor A

5V Sensor Ground

Oxygen Sensor B

Serial Data Link

VSS InputGround

Ground

12

31

13

26

25

1424

6

7

28

18

36

35

17

A

B

C

D

A

B

C

D

5

32

4

CKP

ECM

23

8

12

3

4

12

3

4

1

35

12

35

12

14 14

11 11

713

7

10 10

6 6

13

8 8

9 9

4 4

1 1

2 2

12

3

1234

1234

A

BC

ABC

A

B

A

B

12

3310

11

29

19

21

20 20

2

30

12

31

13

26

25

1424

6

7

28

18

36

35

17

5

23

8

33

2

2

1

1

2

2

1

1

ABC

ABC

3

12

4 4

A

B

A

B

7 7

A

B

C

D

A

B

C

D

2

2

3

3

12

SystemRelay

Spark Plugs

Ignition Coil

BatteryFrontInjector

RearInjector

IdleAirControl

TMAPSensor

Front O2Sensor

O2Sensor

Tospeedometerandtachometer

Data LinkConnector

EngineStopSwitch

TPSensor

ETSensor

TSM/TSSM/HFSM

VehicleSpeedSensor

Igni

tion

Ser

iaD

ata

Fuel Pump


15 AmpFuel Pump

Fuse

15 AmpIgnition Fuse

15 AmpEngine Control

Fuse

15 AmpECM Fuse

30 AmpMAXIFUSE

R R

R

RR R

R

O

BK BKR

BK

GY

GY

GY GY

GYBK BK

BK

BK

BK

BK

BK

GN/O

GN/OW/BK

Y/GN

Y/GN

Y/GN Y/GN Y/GN

Y/GN

Y/BE

BE/O

Y/BE

BE/O

R/BK

R/B

K

R/BK

R/BK

Y/GN

Y/GN O/GN

BN/R

BK/O

W/BK

BN/R

BK/O

BK/W

BK/W

W/BK W/BK

PK/O

BK/R

PK/YPK/Y

GY/VGY/V GY/V

BK/W BK/W BK/W

BK/W

PK

/O

BK

/W

BK

/W

W/Y

W/Y

W/YW/Y

V/W V/W V/W

R/W

R/WR/W R/W R/W

BE/GY

LGN/V LGN/V LGN/V

LGN

/V

LGN/V

PK

/GN

PK/GN

LGN/Y

LGN/R

LGN/R

LGN

/R

V/W

LGN/Y LGN/Y LGN/Y

BK/PK

BE/GN

BN/R

BK/O

GY/O GY/O GY/O

GY/O

BK/PK

BE/GN

GN/GYGN/GY

BE/GY

BE/GY

GN/GY

GN/GY

BE/GN

BK/PK

BK/BEBK/BE

Fuse Block

GND 1

GND 1

GND 1

ActiveIntake

Solenoid

[30B][30A]

[178B]

[178A]

[137A][137B]

[79A][79B]

[85A][85B]

[87A][87B]

[80A][80B]

[88A][88B]

[90A][90B]

[65A][65B]

[22A][22B]

[20A][20B]

[84A][84B]

[145B][145A]

[141B][141A]

[91A]

[78B][78A]

8685

3087A87

12

345

US

ETK

21

21

[119A][119B]

[83A][83B]

BE

GY

/BK

BE

GY

/BK

[138A][138B]

em00399

Figure 4-2. EFI System Circuit

HOME


4.3EFI DIAGNOSTIC INTRODUCTION

SYSTEM PROBLEMSAll system problems fall into at least one of three general cat-egories.

No StartThe engine cranks over freely, but will not start. This does notinclude situations where the engine will not crank, such as asecurity disabled starter, dead battery, etc. This conditionassumes that all obvious checks (fuel in tank, etc.) have beenmade.

Poor PerformanceThe engine starts but there are performance problems. Theseproblems may include poor fuel economy, rough idle, enginemisfire, engine hesitation, severe spark knock, etc.

Check Engine LampSee Figure 4-3.The check engine lamp indicates the ElectronicControl Module (ECM) has determined a fault condition exists.There may also be starting or performance problems.

ed02839

Figure 4-3. Check Engine Lamp (Typical)

RESOLVING PROBLEMSTo resolve system problems, five basic steps are involved. Inorder of occurrence, they are:

1. Check for DTCs by using odometer self-diagnostics. See4.4 CHECKING FOR DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES:EFI.

2. Retrieve DTCs by using odometer self-diagnostics. See4.6 ODOMETER SELF-DIAGNOSTICS.



5. After repairs are performed, the work must be validated.This involves clearing the DTCs and confirming propervehicle operation as indicated by the lack of DTCs.

HOME


4.4CHECKING FOR DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLECODES: EFI

CHECK ENGINE LAMPTo diagnose system problems, start by observing the behaviorof the check engine lamp.

NOTES


• When the Ignition Switch is turned ON, the check enginelamp will illuminate for approximately four seconds andthen turn off.

• If the check engine lamp is not illuminated at Key ON orif it fails to turn OFF after the initial four-second period,then see 4.6 ODOMETER SELF-DIAGNOSTICS.

• If the check engine lamp comes on late (after 20 seconds),the problem is likely a serial data bus failure. Test forDiagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs) using odometer selfdiagnostics. See 4.6 ODOMETER SELF-DIAGNOSTICS.

1. See Figure 4-5. After lamp turns off after being illuminatedfor the first four-second period, one of three situations mayoccur.

a. The lamp remains off. This indicates there are nocurrent fault conditions or stored DTCs currentlydetected by the Electronic Control Module (ECM).

b. The lamp stays off for only four seconds and thencomes back on for an eight-second period. Thisindicates a code is stored, but no current DTC exists.


2. See 4.4 CHECKING FOR DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLECODES: EFI, Code Types for a complete description ofDTC formats.

NOTE

Some DTCs can only be fully diagnosed during actuation. Forexample, a problem with the ignition coil will be considered acurrent fault even after the problem is corrected, since the ECMwill not know of its resolution until after the coil is exercised byvehicle start sequence. In this manner, there may sometimesbe a false indication of the current trouble code.

OFFACC. IGNITION

3

1

2ed02814



HOME


ON

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

Key On

Key On

Key On


Lamp OFF




4 Sec.

4 Sec.

4 Sec.

4 Sec.

8 Sec.

4 Sec.

em01046

Figure 4-5. Check Engine Lamp Operation

CODE TYPES



There are two types of DTCs: current and historic. If a DTC isstored, it can be read using either a computer-based diagnosticpackage called DIGITAL TECHNICIAN II (Part No. HD-48650)or odometer self-diagnostics. See 4.6 ODOMETER SELF-DIAGNOSTICS.

NOTES

• To differentiate between current and historic DTCs, acomputer-based diagnostic package called DIGITALTECHNICIAN II (Part No. HD-48650) must be employed.

• All DTCs reside in the memory of the ECM, TSM/TSSM/HFSM, speedometer or tachometer until the DTC iscleared by use of the odometer self-diagnostics. See4.6 ODOMETER SELF-DIAGNOSTICS.

• A historic DTC is also cleared after a total of 50 trips haselapsed. A trip consists of a start and run cycle. After the50 trip retention period, the DTC is automatically erasedfrom memory providing that no subsequent faults of thesame type are detected in that period.


HistoricIf a particular problem happens to resolve itself, the activestatus problem is dropped and it becomes a historic DTC ratherthan a current DTC.

Historic DTCs can only be retrieved using a computer-baseddiagnostic package called DIGITAL TECHNICIAN II (PartNo. HD-48650).

Historic DTCs are stored for 50 ignition cycles after any DTCwas last set as current to assist in the diagnosis of intermittentfaults. On the 50th cycle, the DTC will clear itself. The checkengine lamp will not indicate the existence of only historicDTCs.

It is important to note that historic DTCs will exist wheneverthe system indicates the existence of a current fault. See4.4 CHECKING FOR DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES: EFI,Multiple Diagnostic Trouble Codes if multiple DTCs are found.

Diagnostic charts are designed for use with current DTCs andas a result they frequently suggest part replacement. Whendiagnosing a historic DTC the charts can be helpful but shouldnot lead to part replacement without verification the part isfaulty.




The engine management system provides two levels of dia-gnostics.


• The second mode requires using the odometer self dia-gnostics. Speedometer, tachometer (if equipped),TSM/TSSM/HFSM and ECM DTCs can be accessed andcleared. See 4.6 ODOMETER SELF-DIAGNOSTICS.

HOME


MULTIPLE DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODESWhile it is possible for more than one fault to occur and setmore than one DTC, there are several conditions which mayresult in one fault setting multiple DTCs:

Serial data DTCs (U1016, U1064, U1097, U1255, U1300 andU1301) may be accompanied by other DTCs. Always correctthe serial data DTCs before resolving the other DTCs.

Refer to Table 4-7. This table gives most ECM DTCs a priorityranking.

HOME


4.5INITIAL DIAGNOSTIC CHECK: EFI

GENERAL



To locate faulty circuits or other system problems, follow thediagnostic flowcharts in this section. For a systematic approach,always begin with 4.5 INITIAL DIAGNOSTIC CHECK: EFI,General. Read the general information and then work your waythrough the flowchart box by box.



In order to perform most diagnostic routines, a Breakout Boxand a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) are required. See4.7 BREAKOUT BOX: EFI.


Reprogramming ECMDiagnostic charts frequently suggest ECM replacement. In theevent an ECM needs to be replaced, it must be reprogrammedusing a computer-based diagnostic package called DIGITALTECHNICIAN II (Part No. HD-48650). See your dealer. Pass-word learn procedure must also be performed. See3.23 TSM/HFSM: PASSWORD LEARN.

INITIAL DIAGNOSTICS




General InformationThe diagnostic check is an organized approach to identifyinga problem caused by an electronic control system malfunction.

Diagnostic Tips• If odometer reads "BUS Er" with the ignition switch turned

ON (engine stop switch at RUN with the engine off), checkdata bus for an open or short to ground. between data linkconnector [91A] terminal 3 and ECM connector [78B] ter-minal 5, TSM/TSSM/HFSM connector [30B] terminal 3,speedometer connector [39B] terminal 2 (XL), terminal C(XR) or tachometer (if equipped) connector [108B] terminal2.

• Check for an open data test terminal between data linkconnector [91A] terminal 3 and TSM/TSSM/HFSM con-nector [30B] terminal 3.With ignition key turned ON, serialdata bus voltage should be typically 0.6-0.8 volts. Therange of acceptable voltage is 0-7.0 volts.

• To identify intermittents, wiggle instrument and/or vehicleharness while performing steps in the Diagnostic Checkcharts.


1. Compare engine behavior to symptoms tables.

a. Starts hard. Refer to Table 4-4.

b. Hesitates, stumbles, surges, misfires and/or sluggishperformance. Refer to Table 4-5.

c. Engine exhaust emits black smoke or fouls plugs.Refer to Table 4-6.

2. Connect BREAKOUT BOX (Part No. HD-42682) andINSTRUMENT HARNESS ADAPTERS (Part No. HD-46601) between wire harness and speedometer on XL,and tachometer on XR . See 2.5 BREAKOUT BOX:SPEEDOMETER/TACHOMETER

All EFI diagnostic codes are listed in Table 4-7.

Other DTCsSee 3.10 INITIAL DIAGNOSTIC CHECK: TSM/HFSM for anycodes related to the TSM, TSSM or HFSM.

See 2.2 INITIAL DIAGNOSTIC CHECK: ODOMETER for anycodes related to the speedometer or tachometer.

HOME


Table 4-3.Typical Scan Values for Engine Data

HOTIDLE

MAX.VALUE

MIN.VALUE

ITEM

10.3-13.3 in. Hg (35-45 kPa)104 kPa10 kPaMAP sensorTMAPsensor 5.1 Volts0 Volt

104-140° F (40-60° C)248° F (120° C)3° F (-16° C)IAT Sensor

2.0-3.5 Volts5.0 Volts0.0 Volts

0%1000TP sensor

0.2-1.0 Volt4.5 Volts0.2 Volt

20-50 steps1550IAC pintle

10005600800RPM

230-300° F (110-150° C)464° F (240° C)3° F (-16° C)ET sensor

0.5-1.5 Volts5.0 Volts0.0 Volt

2-4 ms50 ms0INJ PW front

2-4 ms50 ms0INJ PW rear

10-15°50°0Advance front

10-15°50°0Advance rear

0 MPH (km/h)1200VSS

13.4 Volts1510Battery voltage

RunRunOffENG RUN

10001250800Idle RPM

NOTE

Hot idle specifications are with stock exhaust, the engineoperating at 1000 RPM and an engine temperature of approx-

imately 260 °F (127 °C). Idle settings may be changed with theidle set procedure. See the service manual.

Table 4-4. Engine Starts Hard

SOLUTIONCAUSE

1.7 CHARGING SYSTEM, Troubleshooting.Battery discharged

4.15 MISFIRE AT IDLE OR UNDER LOAD.Spark plugs

4.15 MISFIRE AT IDLE OR UNDER LOAD.Spark plug wires

4.15 MISFIRE AT IDLE OR UNDER LOAD.Ignition coil

See Section 3 in the Service Manual.Valve sticking

Drain and refill with fresh fuel.Water or dirt in fuel system

4.10 NO ECM POWER.Loss of battery power to ECM terminal 31*

* Codes will not clear (although they appear to).

Table 4-5. Engine Performance Problems

SOLUTIONCAUSE

A low IAC count may also indicate an air leak.Manifold leakNOTE: When manifold leak is large enough, IAC will close to 0and code P0505 will set.

4.16 DTC P0107, P0108, P0112, P0113.TMAP sensor plugged or not operating properly

HOME


Table 4-5. Engine Performance Problems

SOLUTIONCAUSE

Drain and refill with fresh fuel.Water or dirt in fuel system

4.15 MISFIRE AT IDLE OR UNDER LOAD.Spark plugs

See Throttle Cable Adjustment in the service manual.Throttle plate not opening fully

See the service manual.Low fuel pressure

Table 4-6. Engine Exhaust Emits Black Smoke or Fouls Plugs

SOLUTIONCAUSE

See Air Cleaner Filter in the Service Manual.Clogged air filter

4.16 DTC P0107, P0108, P0112, P0113.TMAP sensor plugged or not operating properly

Table 4-7. EFI Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC) and Fault Conditions

SOLUTIONFAULT CONDITIONDTCRANKING

4.24 DTC P0603, P0605ECM flash errorP06051

4.24 DTC P0603, P0605ECM EEPROM errorP06032

4.11 STARTS, THEN STALLSSerial data bus shorted low/open/high"BUS Er"3

4.11 STARTS, THEN STALLSECM serial data lowU13004

4.11 STARTS, THEN STALLSECM serial data open/highU13015

4.11 STARTS, THEN STALLSTSM/TSSM/HFSM serial data lowU13006

4.11 STARTS, THEN STALLSTSM/TSSM/HFSM serial data open/highU13017

4.11 STARTS, THEN STALLSspeedometer/tachometer serial data lowU13008

4.11 STARTS, THEN STALLSspeedometer/tachometer serial data open/highU13019

4.29 DTC U1064, U1255Loss of TSM/TSSM/HFSM serial data at ECMU106410

4.29 DTC U1064, U1255Loss of TSM/TSSM/HFSM serial data atspeedometer

U106411

3.21 DTC U1016, U1255Loss of all ECM serial data (state of health) atTSM/TSSM/HFSM

U101612

3.21 DTC U1016, U1255Loss of all ECM serial data (state of health) atspeedometer

3.21 DTC U1016, U1255Loss of vehicle speed

3.21 DTC U1016, U1255Loss of vehicle inhibit motion

3.21 DTC U1016, U1255Loss of powertrain security status

4.30 DTC U1097, U1255Loss of speedometer serial data atTSM/TSSM/HFSM

U109713

3.21 DTC U1016, U1255Missing response at TSM/TSSM/HFSMU125514

4.30 DTC U1097, U1255Missing response at speedometerU125515

4.13 SYSTEM RELAY CHECKSystem relay contacts openP100316

4.13 SYSTEM RELAY CHECKSystem relay coil high/shortedP100217

4.13 SYSTEM RELAY CHECKSystem relay coil open/lowP100118

4.13 SYSTEM RELAY CHECKSystem relay contacts closedP100419

4.26 DTC P1009, P1010Incorrect passwordP100920

HOME


Table 4-7. EFI Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC) and Fault Conditions


4.26 DTC P1009, P1010Missing password (starts then stalls)P101021

4.21 DTC P0373, P0374CKP sensor intermittentP037322

4.21 DTC P0373, P0374CKP sensor synch errorP037423

4.18 DTC P0122, P0123TP sensor open/lowP012224

4.18 DTC P0122, P0123TP sensor highP012325

4.25 DTC P0661, P0662Jiffy stand sensor lowP150126

4.25 DTC P0661, P0662Jiffy stand sensor highP150227

4.16 DTC P0107, P0108, P0112, P0113MAP sensor open/lowP010728

4.16 DTC P0107, P0108, P0112, P0113MAP sensor highP010829

4.17 DTC P0117, P0118ET sensor voltage lowP011730

4.17 DTC P0117, P0118ET sensor open/highP011831

4.18 DTC P0122, P0123IAT sensor voltage lowP011232

4.18 DTC P0122, P0123IAT sensor open/highP011333

4.27 DTC P1351, P1352, P1354, P1355Front ignition coil open/lowP135134

4.27 DTC P1351, P1352, P1354, P1355Rear ignition coil open/lowP135435

4.27 DTC P1351, P1352, P1354, P1355Front ignition coil high/shortedP135236

4.27 DTC P1351, P1352, P1354, P1355Rear ignition coil high/shortedP135537

4.20 DTC P0261, P0262, P0263, P0264Front injector open/lowP026138

4.20 DTC P0261, P0262, P0263, P0264Rear injector open/lowP026339

4.20 DTC P0261, P0262, P0263, P0264Front injector highP026240

4.20 DTC P0261, P0262, P0263, P0264Rear injector highP026441

4.23 DTC P0562, P0563Battery voltage lowP056242

4.23 DTC P0562, P0563Battery voltage highP056343

4.22 DTC P0501, P0502VSS sensor lowP050144

4.22 DTC P0501, P0502VSS sensor highP050245

4.19 DTC P0131, P0132, P0134, P0151,P0152, P0154

Loss of idle speed controlP050546

4.25 DTC P0661, P0662Intake solenoid low/openP066147

4.25 DTC P0661, P0662Intake solenoid high/shortedP066248

4.19 DTC P0131, P0132, P0134, P0151,P0152, P0154

Front O2 sensor low (lean O2)P013149

4.19 DTC P0131, P0132, P0134, P0151,P0152, P0154

Rear O2 sensor low (lean)P015150

4.19 DTC P0131, P0132, P0134, P0151,P0152, P0154

Front O2 sensor high (rich)P013251

4.19 DTC P0131, P0132, P0134, P0151,P0152, P0154

Rear O2 sensor high (rich)P015252

4.19 DTC P0131, P0132, P0134, P0151,P0152, P0154

Front O2 sensor open/not respondingP013453

4.19 DTC P0131, P0132, P0134, P0151,P0152, P0154

Rear O2 sensor open/not respondingP015454

HOME


BK

BK

BK

GY GY

GY

O/W

O/W

O/W

O/W

O

O

O

R

BN

/GY

BN

/GY

BN

/GY

BN/GY

BN

/GY

LGN

/V BK

BK

BK

O/WO

O

BN

/GY

LGN

/V

LGN

/V

LGN

/V

LGN/V

LGN

/V

LGN

/V

R/BK

R/BK

R/GY

1 2 3 12

1 2 3 12

1 2 5 76

1 2 5 76

1 2 5 6 7

1 2 5 6 7

Igni

tion

Ser

iald

ata

Bat

tery

Acc

esso

ryG

roun

d

Igni

tion

Ser

ialD

ata

Bat

tery

Bat

tery

Igni

tion

Ser

ialD

ata

Gro

und

Acc

esso

ryG

roun

d

Speedometer

TSM/TSSM/HFSM


To ACCY Fuse

To BATT Fuse

To INSTR Fuse

To IGN Fuse

12V ACCYFuse

12V BATTFuse

12V INSTRFuse

12V IGNFuse

3

1

2

4

Data LinkConnector

21 6 7 12

21 6 7 12

ECM

Ser

ialD

ata

5

5

GND1

GND1

GND1[78B][78A]

[30A][30B]

[20A][20B]

[108A][108B]

[39A][39B]

[91A]

Ground

Serial Data

Power

em01120

Figure 4-6. Diagnostic Check (XL)

HOME


BK

BK

BK

GY GY

O/W

O/W

O/W

O/W

O

R

BN

/GY

BN

/GY

BN

/GY

BN

/GY

BN/GY

LGN

/V BK

BK

GY

BK

O/WO

OO

BN

/GY

LGN

/V

LGN

/V

LGN

/V

LGN/V

LGN

/V

LGN

/V

R/BK

R/BK

R/GY

1 2 3 12

1 2 3 12

1 2 5 76

1 2 5 76

C B A D

C B A DS

eria

lDat

a

Bat

tery

Acc

esso

ryG

roun

d

Igni

tion

Ser

ialD

ata

Bat

tery

Bat

tery

Igni

tion

Ser

ialD

ata

Gro

und

Acc

esso

ryG

roun

d

Speedometer

TSM/TSSM/HFSM

Tachometer

To ACCY Fuse

To BATT Fuse

To INSTR Fuse

To IGN Fuse

12V ACCYFuse

12V BATTFuse

12V INSTRFuse

12V IGNFuse

3

1

2

4

Ground

Serial Data

Power

Data LinkConnector

21 6 7 12

21 6 7 12

ECM

Ser

ialD

ata

5

5

GND1

GND1

GND1[78B][78A]

[108A][108B]

[20A][20B]

[39A][39B]

[30A][30B]

[91A]

em01304





Under battery tray12-place DeutschTSM/TSSM/HFSM[30]




HOME




Under left side cover4-place DeutschData link connector[91]


HOME



Does enginestart?










YES



NOUnable to enter

diagnostic mode.

NONo DTCsdisplayed.


backlighting?


Table 3-6.

YES NO



YES NO



ground.

YES NO





battery fuse.

YES NO



1

2

fc01963_en


HOME





YES NO







YES


YES NO



YES NO



YES




2

NO



YES NO



YES NO

Locate andrepair




andinstrument fuse.

2

fc02006_en

NO


Check (Part 3 of3).

HOME





YES



YES NO

Locate andrepair

intermittent.

No troublefound.


(no vehicle speed).


Is debris present?

YES


NO



connection present?

YESNO


Replacespeedometer.


(no engine speed).


2

fc01960_en

XLXR


(XR).

HOME





YESNO

YES NO


YES NO



harness.



YES NO


wire.

fc01931_en



NOYES

1



present?

NO



YES



YES


on (BK) wire.

NO YES


NO

Replacespeedometer.


Is debris present?

YES


YES




connection present?

NO

NO

Replacespeedometer.


(Part 1 of 3).

HOME



GENERALThe speedometer on XL and the tachometer on XR are capableof displaying and clearing speedometer, tachometer,TSM/TSSM/HFSM, and ECM trouble codes (DTCs) (diagnosticmode).

DIAGNOSTICS

Diagnostic Tips• For a quick check of speedometer on XL and the tacho-

meter on XR functions, a "WOW" test can be performed.See Figure 4-9. Press and hold trip odometer reset switchthen turn ignition switch ON. Release trip odometer resetswitch. Background lighting should illuminate, speedometeron XL and the tachometer on XR the needle should sweepits full range of motion, and indicator lamps (sixth gear,check engine, low fuel, battery and security) should illu-minate.

• If speedometer on XL and the tachometer on XR fails"WOW" test, check for battery, ground, ignition, trip odo-meter reset switch and accessory to speedometer. If anyfeature in the speedometer is non-functional, see 2.2 INI-TIAL DIAGNOSTIC CHECK: ODOMETER.




12

34

5

ed01721


Figure 4-8. Warning Lamps (Typical)

OFFACC. IGNITION

3

1

2ed02814



HOME



1While holding trip odometer resetswitch in, turn ignition switch to


RUN position.

Release trip odometer reset switch.Does “diag” appear?

YES

”P” flashing.




than 5 seconds.



”S” flashing.


”SP” flashing.


reset switch.


reset switch.

”T” flashing.


seconds.


seconds.




CHECK: ODOMETER.

YES

YES

NO

NO

NO

Deviceresponse?










TACHOMETER.


DTCdisplayed.


2

”b” flashing.




reset switch.

fc01804_en

HOME


4.7BREAKOUT BOX: EFI

GENERAL



The BREAKOUT BOX (Part No. HD-43876) splices into themain harness. Used in conjunction with a digital volt/ohmmeterDVOM, it allows circuit diagnosis of wiring harness and connec-tions without having to probe with sharp objects.

NOTE

See wiring diagrams for ECM terminal functions.

INSTALLATION



1. Remove seat to gain access to ECM.

2. See Figure 4-10. Press latch (1) on ECM connector (2) toseparate pin and socket halves [78].

3. See Figure 4-11. Attach BREAKOUT BOX (Part No. HD-43876) (1) between ECM (2) and ECM wiring harness.

a. Attach BREAKOUT BOX (Part No. HD-43876) pinconnector (3) to ECM harness socket connector [78B](4).

b. Attach BREAKOUT BOX (Part No. HD-43876)socketconnector (5) to ECM pin connector [78A] (6).

1

2

ed02840

1. Latch2. ECM connector [78B]

Figure 4-10. ECM Location (Typical)

3

2

6

5

4

1

ed02841

1. Breakout Box2. ECM3. Breakout Box pin connector4. ECM harness socket connector [78B]5. Breakout Box socket connector6. ECM pin connector [78A]

Figure 4-11. Installed Breakout Box (Typical)

REMOVAL



1. See Figure 4-11. Depress latch on BREAKOUT BOX (PartNo. HD-43876) socket connector (5). Detach connectorfrom ECM pin connector [78A] (6).

2. Detach BREAKOUT BOX (Part No. HD-43876) pin con-nector (3) from ECM harness socket connector [78B] (4).

3. Reattach ECM harness connector to ECM.

4. Install seat.

After installing seat, pull upward on seat to be sure it islocked in position. While riding, a loose seat can shiftcausing loss of control, which could result in death orserious injury. (00070b)

HOME


4.8WIGGLE TEST

GENERALThe wiggle test indicates the presence of intermittents in awiring harness.

PROCEDURE



NOTE

When diagnosing Electronic Control Module (ECM) connec-tions, use a BREAKOUT BOX (Part No. HD-43876) to simplifythe procedure. See 4.7 BREAKOUT BOX: EFI.

1. See Figure 4-12. Connect digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM)to wiring harness between the suspect connections. SetDVOM to read voltage changes.

2. Start motorcycle engine and run at idle.

3. Shake or wiggle harness to detect intermittents. If intermit-tents are present, radical voltage changes will register onthe DVOM.

sm00202

Figure 4-12. Fluke 78 Multimeter (DVOM)

HOME


4.9ENGINE CRANKS, BUT WILL NOT START

GENERALIf the starter will not crank the engine, the problem is not EFIrelated. See

• CHAPTER 1 - STARTING / CHARGING.

• CHAPTER 3 - TSM/HFSM.

• Appendix E - TSM/TSSM (Japan/Korea).

DIAGNOSTICS


SPARK TESTERHD-26792

FUEL INJECTOR TEST LAMPHD-34730-2C



IGNITION COIL CIRCUIT TESTADAPTER

HD-44687

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM ANALYZERMCR-101 HD


1. Check for DTCs. See 4.4 CHECKING FOR DIAGNOSTICTROUBLE CODES: EFI, Retrieving Diagnostic TroubleCodes.

2. Check the condition of the battery. Perform a voltage testand recharge if below 12.6V. Check battery connectionsand perform either a conductance test using ELECTRICALSYSTEM ANALYZER (Part No. MCR-101 HD) , or a loadtest. Replace the battery if necessary. See Battery in theservice manual.

3. Connect BREAKOUT BOX (Part No. HD-43876). See4.7 BREAKOUT BOX: EFI.

4. Remove spark plug cable from spark plug.

a. Visually check condition of plug.

b. See Figure 4-13. Attach cable to SPARKTESTER (Part No. HD-26792). Clip tester to cylinderhead bolt.

c. While cranking engine, look for spark. Repeat pro-cedure on other spark plug cables.

NOTEEngine will not spark with both spark plugs removed. Whenchecking for spark, use SPARK TESTER (Part No. HD-26792)with both plugs installed.


6. Typically, when IAC is not functioning, the engine will notstart unless throttle is opened and the engine will stallwhen throttle is closed.

7. See Figure 4-14. Plug IGNITION COIL CIRCUIT TESTADAPTER (Part No. HD-44687) and FUEL INJECTOR

TEST LAMP (Part No. HD-34730-2C) into Breakout Boxterminals 13 and 11. Start engine. If lamp flashes, noproblem is found. Repeat for Breakout Box terminals 13and 29.

8. Use HARNESS CONNECTOR TEST KIT (Part No. HD-41404-B), brown socket probe and patch cord.

Diagnostic TipsCheck TP sensor value with a DVOM. If TP sensor is equal toor greater than 3.8 volts, system is in "clear flood" mode andengine will not start. While spark is present, fuel is shut off.Problem can be mechanical, such as throttle cables stuck

ed02012

Figure 4-13. Spark Tester

ed02013

Figure 4-14. Ignition Coil Circuit Test

HOME


IgnitionSwitch

B

A

I

10

11

29

19

21

2

30CKP (+)CKP (-)

System Relay

Rear Coil

Front Coil

Battery

Front Injector

Active Intake

Rear Injector

IAC (A) Low

IAC (B) High

IAC (B) Low

IAC (A) High

Switch Power

Intake Air Temp

MAP Sensor Input

Engine Temp

5V Sensor PowerTPS Input

Oxygen Sensor A

5V Sensor Ground

Oxygen Sensor B

Serial Data Link

VSS InputGround

Ground

12

31

13

26

25

1424

6

7

28

18

36

35

17

A

B

C

D

A

B

C

D

5

32

4

CKP

ECM

23

8

12

3

4

12

3

4

1

35

12

35

12

14 14

11 11

713

7

10 10

6 6

13

8 8

9 9

4 4

1 1

2 2

12

3

1234

1234

A

BC

ABC

A

B

A

B

12

3310

11

29

19

21

20 20

2

30

12

31

13

26

25

1424

6

7

28

18

36

35

17

5

23

8

33

2

2

1

1

2

2

1

1

ABC

ABC

3

12

4 4

A

B

A

B

7 7

A

B

C

D

A

B

C

D

2

2

3

3

12

SystemRelay

Spark Plugs

Ignition Coil

BatteryFrontInjector

RearInjector

IdleAirControl

TMAPSensor

Front O2Sensor

O2Sensor

Tospeedometerandtachometer

Data LinkConnector

EngineStopSwitch

TPSensor

ETSensor

TSM/TSSM/HFSM

VehicleSpeedSensor

Igni

tion

Ser

iaD

ata

Fuel Pump


15 AmpFuel Pump

Fuse

15 AmpIgnition Fuse


Fuse

15 AmpECM Fuse

30 AmpMAXIFUSE

R R

R

RR R

R

O

BK BKR

BK

GY

GY

GY GY

GYBK BK

BK

BK

BK

BK

BK

GN/O

GN/OW/BK

Y/GN

Y/GN

Y/GN Y/GN Y/GN

Y/GN

Y/BE

BE/O

Y/BE

BE/O

R/BK

R/B

K

R/BK

R/BK

Y/GN

Y/GN O/GN

BN/R

BK/O

W/BK

BN/R

BK/O

BK/W

BK/W

W/BK W/BK

PK/O

BK/R

PK/YPK/Y

GY/VGY/V GY/V

BK/W BK/W BK/W

BK/W

PK

/O

BK

/W

BK

/W

W/Y

W/Y

W/YW/Y

V/W V/W V/W

R/W

R/WR/W R/W R/W

BE/GY

LGN/V LGN/V LGN/V

LGN

/V

LGN/V

PK

/GN

PK/GN

LGN/Y

LGN/R

LGN/R

LGN

/R

V/W

LGN/Y LGN/Y LGN/Y

BK/PK

BE/GN

BN/R

BK/O

GY/O GY/O GY/O

GY/O

BK/PK

BE/GN

GN/GYGN/GY

BE/GY

BE/GY

GN/GY

GN/GY

BE/GN

BK/PK

BK/BEBK/BE

Fuse Block

GND 1

GND 1

GND 1

ActiveIntake

Solenoid

[30B][30A]

[178B]

[178A]

[137A][137B]

[79A][79B]

[85A][85B]

[87A][87B]

[80A][80B]

[88A][88B]

[90A][90B]

[65A][65B]

[22A][22B]

[20A][20B]

[84A][84B]

[145B][145A]

[141B][141A]

[91A]

[78B][78A]

8685

3087A87

12

345

US

ETK

21

21

[119A][119B]

[83A][83B]

BE

GY

/BK

BE

GY

/BK

[138A][138B]

em00399

Figure 4-15. EFI System Circuit

HOME




Under fuel tank12-place Molex, blackInstruments[20]

Under battery12-place Deutsch, grayTSM/TSSM/HFSM[30]


Right side of frame behind neck-Ignition switch[33]

Right rear top of crankcase3-place PackardVSS[65]


Front of left crankcase2-place Mini-DeutschCKP sensor[79]

4-place Packard, blackTMAP sensor[80]

Back of coil4-place DelphiIgnition coil[83]

Top of intake manifold2-place Delphi, blackFront injector[84]

Top of intake manifold2-place Delphi, blackRear injector[85]

Top of induction module4-place Delphi, blackIAC[87]

Behind air cleaner backing plate3-place Delphi, blackTP sensor[88]

Above induction module, right side2-place Delphi, blackET sensor[90]

On battery strap, behind left side cover4-place Deutsch, grayData link connector[91A]



On H-bracket2-place Amp, blackRear oxygen sensor[137]

Electrical caddie behind voltage regu-lator

2-place Amp, blackFront oxygen sensor[138]

Forward of relay/fuse blocks4-place Molex, blackFuel pump and low fuel switch[141]

Under seat16-place Molex, blackEngine harness[145]

Rear of air box2-place AmpActive Intake Solenoid (HDI)[178]

HOME


Engine Cranks, But Will Not Start (Part 1 of 4)

Fresh fuel in tank?

NOTERefer to IGNITION COIL in the service manual for proper coil terminal location.

Are spark plug wires firmly connected to proper coil terminals?

Add fuel /connectspark plugs.

YES NO

2

1

3

YES NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

Check for DTCs.Are DTCs found?

Refer to Table 4-7. Start withthe lowest ranking DTC.

Is TSM/TSSM/HFSM mountedin proper orientation?

Install TSM/TSSM/HFSM properly.Check battery connections

and voltage.Is voltage above 12.6V?

Does battery pass conductancetest or load test?

Was battery allowed to discharge?Was battery drawn down by starting

problem?Recharge battery.

Turn ignition key ON and engine stop switch toRUN.

Did fuel pump run for 2 seconds and checkengine lamp illuminate for 4 seconds?

Replace battery.

No pump,light OK.

See4.12 FUEL SYSTEMELECTRICAL TEST.

No light or pump

See 4.10 NO ECM POWER.

Connect Breakout Box to ECM [78]. Measurevoltage to Breakout Box with DVOM at terminal 13

(+) and terminal 2 (-). Crank engine for greaterthan 2 seconds to insure proper system operation.

Is 6-12 volts present continuously?

Go to Engine Cranks, ButWill Not Start (Part 4 of 4).

fc02008_en

NONO

Go to Engine Cranks, ButWill Not Start (Part 2 of 4).

HOME




YES NO

4

5

6

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

Continued from Engine Cranks, But Will Not Start (Part 1 of 4).

Install fuel pressure gauge (Part No. HD-41182). See service manual. While crankingengine (for more than 2 seconds to ensure proper system operation), verify that fuel

pressure rises to 55-62 PSI (380-427 kPa).Is adequate fuel pressure present?

Check spark plug condition, replace if fouled.Reinstall spark plugs before checking spark.Check spark at both plugs while cranking.

Is spark present?

Incorrect pressure. Seeservice manual.

Verify connector is securely attached to each injector.If so, disconnect fuel injector connector and attach

fuel injector test lamp (HD-34730-2C). Crank engine.Does lamp flash?

Check battery voltage at terminal A (+) of coilconnector [83B] using DVOM.

Is battery voltage present for 2 seconds afterkey ON?

Monitor IAC pintle for 10 secondsafter turning ignition OFF.

Does pintle extend and then retractduring 10 second key OFF

reset procedure?

Correct problems withfuel injectors. See 4.20

DTC P0261, P0262,P0263, P0264.

Open in (Y/GN) wirebetween splice for fuelpump wire and ignition

coil.Repair open.

Check engine compression.Is compression within

specifications?

See 4.14 IDLEAIR CONTROL.

Replace pluggedfuel injector(s).

Seeservice manual.

fc02009_en

Go to EngineCranks, But Will

Not Start(Part 3 of 4).

HOME



Clear DTCs using odometer self-diagnostics. See4.6 ODOMETER SELF-DIAGNOSTICS. Confirmproper operation with no check engine lamp.

YES NO

YES

YES

YES

YES

NO

NONO

NO

Continued from Engine Cranks, But Will NotStart (Part 2 of 4).

Perform coil circuit test.Does lamp flash?

Check coil connections.Are connections OK?

Disconnect ECM connector [78]. Inspect for damagedterminals, terminals backed out or corroded.

Are terminal problems present?

Test spark plug cable resistance.See 4.15 MISFIRE AT IDLE OR

UNDER LOAD.Is resistance OK?

Repair.Repair terminal

damage.

Reconnect.Does problem still

exist?

Replace sparkplug cables.

Replacecoil.

Problemfixed.

fc02010_en

7

Go to EngineCranks, But Will

Not Start(Part 4 of 4).

HOME




8

YES NO

YES

YES

YES YES

NO

NO

NO

Continued from Engine Cranks, But Will Not Start (Part 3 of 4).

Check connectors for moisture and corrosion. Check CKP sensor and harness wiresfor chafing. Connect DVOM to ECM terminals 12 and 30 on Breakout Box and set it for

AC volts. Crank engine.Does DVOM read 1 VAC minimum?

Replace ECM.Reprogram andlearn password.

Disconnect CKP connector [79]. Checkconnectors for moisture and corrosion.

Check wires for chafing.Is connector or wire damage present?

Connect DVOM to terminals 1 and 2of [79A]. Crank engine.

Does DVOM read 1 VAC minimum?

Check for continuity between terminal 30 onBreakout Box and terminal 1 of connector [79B].


Locate and repair open on(BK) wire between terminal 2 ofconnector [79B] and terminal 12

on Breakout Box.

Locate and repair open on(R) wire between terminal 1

of connector [79B] andterminal 30 on Breakout Box.

Loose sensor at crankcase.Check for contamination or

damage.Tighten sensor.

Replace crank position sensor.See service manual.

With meter still connected,check for resistance.

Is resistance 600-1200 ohms?

Replace CKPsensor.

NO

fc02011_en

HOME


4.10NO ECM POWER

GENERAL

No Spark/No Check Engine Lamp at Key OnConstant power is supplied to the ECM through terminal "31".The ECM turns on when power is applied to terminal "13" ofconnector [78]. The ECM goes through an initializationsequence every time power is removed and re-applied to ter-minal "13". The only visible part of this sequence is the checkengine lamp. Upon starting, the check engine lamp will illu-minate for 4 seconds and then (if parameters are normal) goout.

If battery power is absent at ECM terminal "31":

• DTCs cannot be cleared. Tool will show them as clearedbut will be present next time ignition key is cycled.

• ECM cannot be re-flashed.

• Vehicle will start but IAC pintle will not reset at key OFF.Eventually pintle will be out of position causing perform-ance problems.

NOTE

The key ON sequence also activates the idle air control motor.If power from terminal "31" is disrupted (blown fuse, etc.)always turn the key OFF wait 10 seconds then turn the keyON to reset the motor to the default position.

DIAGNOSTICS






2. Use HARNESS CONNECTOR TEST KIT (Part No. HD-41404-B), gray probes and patch cords.

HOME


13

6

7

5

4

3

1

23

8

11

10

9

1214

ed02838


10.3. Lights fuseSpare fuse (XL), Engine Control Fuse (XR)4. 11.Start relay P&A ignition fuse

12.5. OpenSystem relay6. 13.Ignition fuse MAXIFUSE7. Instruments fuse


HOME


I B A

4 3

4 3

BK

BK

BK

GY

GY

GY

R

R

R R

BE/GY

BE

/GY

BE/GY

W/BK

W/B

KW

/BK

R/BK

R/B

K

31

13

10

28

31

13

10

28

IgnitionSwitch

15 AmpIgnition Fuse

15 AmpECM Fuse

To SystemRelay

ToTSM/TSSM/HFSM

30 AmpMAXIFUSE

Engine StopSwitch

Battery

Switch Power

Ground

Ground

ECM

GND 1

Battery

[22B][22A]

[78B][78A]

em00262

Figure 4-17. ECM Power Circuit Diagram




Under seat36-place PackardElectronic Control Module (ECM)[78]

Engine crankcaseRing terminalECM ground[GND 1]

HOME


No ECM Power (Part 1 of 2)

Check ECM and ignition fuse.Are fuses OK?

YES NO

Disconnect ECM connector [78]. Inspectfor damaged terminals, terminals backed

out or corrosion.Are terminal problems present?

YES NO

Repair terminaldamage.

Reconnect.Does problem still exist?

YES NO

With ignition ON, probe ECM terminal 13 onBreakout Box with a circuit test lamp connected

to ground.Does test lamp illuminate?

Problemfixed.

YES NO

Probe ECM terminal 31 onBreakout Box with test lamp

connected to ground.Does test lamp illuminate?

Locate and repair shortto ground.

Replace 15 amp fuse.

YES NO

Probe ECM terminals 10 and28 on Breakout Box with test

lamp connected to +12V(battery positive terminal).Does test lamp illuminate?

1

Probe red wire terminal in15 amp ECM fuse holderwith test lamp connected

to ground.Does test lamp illuminate?

YES NO


password.

Repair open in(BK) wire between

connector [78B] andground 1.

YES NO

Repair open in(BE/GY)

wire between fuseholder and ECMconnector [78].

Repair open in (R) wirebetween 30 amp mainfuse and 15 amp fuse

holder.

fc01967_en

Go to No ECMPower (Part 2 of 2).

HOME


No ECM Power (Part 2 of 2)

Continued from No ECM Power (Part 1 of 2).

With ignition ON, measure voltage at terminal 3 (GY) of connector [22B].Is battery voltage present?

YES NO

With ignition OFF and engine stop switch in RUN position, measureresistance at terminals 3 and 4 of connector [22A].

Is resistance less than one ohm?

Repair open (GY) wire betweenconnector [22] and fuse.

YES NO

Repair open circuit on (W/BK) wirebetween ECM and connector [22A].

Repair/Replace engine stopswitch or wiring.

2


fc01826_en

HOME


4.11STARTS,THEN STALLS

GENERAL

Diagnostic Trouble Codes U1300, U1301, orBUS ERThe typical serial data voltage range is 0 volt (inactive) to 7volts (active). Due to the short pulse, voltages will be muchlower on a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM). In analog mode, aDVOM reading serial data will show continuous voltage whenactive, typically 0.6-0.8 volt. The range for acceptable opera-tions is greater than 0 and less than 7.0 volts.

NOTE

Problems in the fuel system or idle air control system may alsocreate this symptom.


DESCRIPTIONDTC



ed01340


DIAGNOSTICS



Diagnostic Tips• If serial data is shorted, these codes will automatically trip

the check engine light.



1. Use HARNESS CONNECTOR TEST KIT (Part No. HD-41404-B), black socket probes and patch cord.

2. Unplug the neutral switch connector [136]. Using a DVOM,test for continuity to ground. When the transmission is inneutral, continuity should exist. When the transmission isin gear, there should not be continuity to ground throughthe neutral switch.

HOME


BK

BK

BK

GY GY

GY

O/W

O/W

O/W

O/W

O

O

O

R

BN

/GY

BN

/GY

BN

/GY

BN/GY

BN

/GY

LGN

/V BK

BK

BK

O/WO

O

BN

/GY

LGN

/V

LGN

/V

LGN

/V

LGN/V

LGN

/V

LGN

/V

R/BK

R/BK

R/GY

1 2 3 12

1 2 3 12

1 2 5 76

1 2 5 76

1 2 5 6 7

1 2 5 6 7

Igni

tion

Ser

iald

ata

Bat

tery

Acc

esso

ryG

roun

d

Igni

tion

Ser

ialD

ata

Bat

tery

Bat

tery

Igni

tion

Ser

ialD

ata

Gro

und

Acc

esso

ryG

roun

d

Speedometer

TSM/TSSM/HFSM


To ACCY Fuse

To BATT Fuse

To INSTR Fuse

To IGN Fuse

12V ACCYFuse

12V BATTFuse

12V INSTRFuse

12V IGNFuse

3

1

2

4

Data LinkConnector

21 6 7 12

21 6 7 12

ECM

Ser

ialD

ata

5

5

GND1

GND1

GND1[78B][78A]

[30A][30B]

[20A][20B]

[108A][108B]

[39A][39B]

[91A]

Ground

Serial Data

Power

em01120


HOME


BK

BK

BK

GY GY

O/W

O/W

O/W

O/W

O

R

BN

/GY

BN

/GY

BN

/GY

BN

/GY

BN/GY

LGN

/V BK

BK

GY

BK

O/WO

OO

BN

/GY

LGN

/V

LGN

/V

LGN

/V

LGN/V

LGN

/V

LGN

/V

R/BK

R/BK

R/GY

1 2 3 12

1 2 3 12

1 2 5 76

1 2 5 76

C B A D

C B A DS

eria

lDat

a

Bat

tery

Acc

esso

ryG

roun

d

Igni

tion

Ser

ialD

ata

Bat

tery

Bat

tery

Igni

tion

Ser

ialD

ata

Gro

und

Acc

esso

ryG

roun

d

Speedometer

TSM/TSSM/HFSM

Tachometer

To ACCY Fuse

To BATT Fuse

To INSTR Fuse

To IGN Fuse

12V ACCYFuse

12V BATTFuse

12V INSTRFuse

12V IGNFuse

3

1

2

4

Ground

Serial Data

Power

Data LinkConnector

21 6 7 12

21 6 7 12

ECM

Ser

ialD

ata

5

5

GND1

GND1

GND1[78B][78A]

[108A][108B]

[20A][20B]

[39A][39B]

[30A][30B]

[91A]

em01304









HOME






HOME


DTCs U1300, U1301, or BUS Er (Part 1 of 2)

Fresh gasoline in tank?

YES NO

Add gasoline.

YES.DTC P1009,P1010 found.

See 4.26 DTC P1009,P1010.

YES NO

Check fuel pressure whilecranking engine. See service

manual.Is fuel pressure OK?

Check for DTCs using 4.6 ODOMETERSELF-DIAGNOSTICS.

Are DTCs found?

Will engine start with throttleopened partially and stall when

throttle closed?

See 4.14 IDLE AIRCONTROL.

YES.U1300 or U1301

codes found.

NO.No codes found.

YES.BUS Er is present.

Speedometer on XL ortachometer on XR will notcommunicate with other

modules.

YES NO

Fuel pressure problem.See service manual.

Tap lightly on fuelinjectors.

Does problem still exist?

YES NO

Replace fuel injectors.Does problem still exist?

SystemOK.

YES NO


password.

SystemOK.


With the ignition switch ON and the enginestop switch in the Run position and the jiffy

stand down.Does the odometer display “SIdE StAnd”?

YES NO

Turn the ignition switch OFF. Raise the jiffy stand. Turn the ignition ONwith the enigine stop switch in the RUN position.

Does the odometer display “SIdE StAnd”?

YES

YESYES

YES

NO

NONO

NO

Inspect the jiffy stand sensor forcorrect mounting and clearanceto jiffy stand tab (4.5mm) max.Is switch mounted correctly?

Check for an open in theneutral switch circuit.

Is there an open?

Replace jiffystand sensor.

Test seutral switch.Is neutral switch

operating properly?

Install jiffystand sensor

correctly.

Correct openin circuit.

Replace TSM/TSSM.


fc01968_en

2

Go to DTC U1300,U1301, or BUS Er

(Part 2 of 2).

HOME


DTCs U1300, U1301, or BUS Er (Part 2 of 2)

Continued from DTCs U1300, U1301, or BUS Er (Part 1 of 2) .

Set Engine Stop switch to RUN. Turn ignition key ON.Is BUS Er present?

YES NO

Turn ignition key OFF.Disconnect ECM at connector

[78]. Turn ignition key ON.Is BUS Er present?

Turn ignition key OFF. While wigglingharness, check for continuity to ground at

terminal 3 of connector [91A].Is continuity to ground present at any time?

YES NO

Turn ignition key OFF.Disconnect TSM/TSSM/HFSM at

connector [30]. Turn ignition key ON.Is BUS Er present?

Replace ECM.Reprogram and perform

password learn.

YES

Is vehicle equippedwith a tachometer?

NO


Perform passwordlearn.

YES

Turn ignition key OFF. Disconnect tachometerat connector [108]. Turn ignition key ON.

Is BUS Er present?

NO

YES NO

Turn ignition key OFF. Disconnect speedometer atconnector [39] (XL), or tachometer [108] (XR).

Replace tachometer.

Check for continuity to ground atterminal 3 of connector [91A].

Is continuity to ground present?

YES


NO

Turn ignition switch ON.Check for voltage at terminal

3 of connector [91A].Is voltage present?

YES


NO


YES NO


to ground.

Turn ignition switch ON. While wigglingharness, check for voltage at terminal 3 of

connector [91A].Is voltage present at any time?

YES NO


to voltage.

No problemfound.

1

1


fc01969_en

XL XR

Turn ignition key OFF. Disconnect speedometer atconnector [39] Turn ignition key ON.

Is BUS Er present?

YES NO

Replace speedometer.

HOME


4.12FUEL SYSTEM ELECTRICAL TEST

GENERALWith the Ignition Switch ON and the Engine Stop Switch atRUN, the Electronic Control Module (ECM) will energize thesystem relay to complete the circuit to the in-tank fuel pump.It will remain on as long as the engine is cranking or running,and the ECM is receiving ignition reference pulses from theCKP sensor. If there are no reference pulses, the ECM will de-energize the system relay within 2 seconds after ignition is ONor engine has stalled, or immediately after the ignition is shutOFF.

The fuel pump delivers fuel to the injectors. The pressure reg-ulator is where the system pressure is controlled. Excess fuelflow is bypassed into the fuel tank through the pressure regu-lator. When the engine is stopped, the pump can be turned onby applying battery voltage and ground to the fuel pump con-nector [141A]. See Figure 4-21. The fuel pump connector islocated forward of the fuse blocks. Improper fuel system pres-sure may contribute to one or all of the following symptoms.

• Engine cranks, but won't run.

• Engine cuts out (may feel like ignition problems).

• Hesitation, loss of power and poor fuel economy.

NOTE

After turning ignition OFF, you must wait 10 seconds beforeturning the ignition back ON to get the fuel pump to reprime.This time out period is necessary for the fuel pump and IAC toreset.

ed02836

Figure 4-21. Fuel Pump Connector [141]

DIAGNOSTICS





1. Turns on fuel pump if wiring is OK. If pump runs, problemis in basic fuel delivery.

2. Use HARNESS CONNECTOR TEST KIT (Part No. HD-41404-B), gray probe and patch cord.


4. Use HARNESS CONNECTOR TEST KIT (Part No. HD-41404-B), purple pin probe and patch cord.

HOME


13

6

7

5

4

3

1

23

8

11

10

9

1214

ed02838


10.3. Lights fuseSpare fuse (XL), Engine Control Fuse (XR)4. 11.Start relay P&A ignition fuse

12.5. OpenSystem relay6. 13.Ignition fuse MAXIFUSE7. Instruments fuse


HOME


10

19

21

2System Relay

Front Injector

Rear Injector

Battery

Switch Power

Ground

Ground

31

13

28

10

19

21

2

31

13

28

AB

1

4

AB

AB

AB

1

4

13

7

8

13

7

8

GND 1

GND 1

4 3

4 3

E

K

TS U

I

C

QP R

M O

G H

A B

15A

15A

15A

Spare Start Relay System Relay

Fuel Pump

ECM

M O

G H

A B

15A

15A

15A

Spare

Instr

Ignition

P R

I J

C D

15A

15A

15A

Lights

Battery

Accessories

K L

S U

E F

15A

15A

Open

Spare (XL)ENG CTL (XR)

P&A Ign

SystemRelay

Fuse Block

15 AmpFuel Pump

Fuse

15 AmpECM Fuse

30 AmpMAXIFUSE

15 AmpIGN Fuse

Front Injector

Rear Injector

ECM

FuelPump

Fuse BlocksTop View Top View

IgnitionSwitch

EngineStop

Switch

W/Y W/Y W/YW/Y

R

R

R

R

R

BE/GY

GN/GY GN/GY GN/GY

BE/GYBE/GY

Y/GN

Y/GN

Y/GN

Y/GN

Y/GN

Y/GN

GN/OGN/O

R/BK R/BK

W/BK

W/BK

BKBK

BK

BK

GY

GYBK

BK

O/GYO/GY

W/B

K

GY

W/B

K


[22B][22A]

[85A][85B]

[84A][84B]

[78B][78A]

[141B][141A]

[145B][145A]

Battery

8685

3087A87

12

345

US

ETK

[119A][119B]

IgnitionSwitch

ABI

em01313

Figure 4-23. Fuel Pump Circuit







Under left side cover5-place AmpSystem relay[119]

HOME




Left side, in front of fuse/relay blocks4-place MolexFuel pump[141]

Under seat16-place MolexEngine harness[145]

HOME


Fuel System Electrical Test (Part 1 of 4)

YES NO

YES NO

Check for 12 volts at terminals 1 (+) and 4 (-) offuel pump connector [141A] during first 2-3

seconds after key ON.Is voltage present?

YES NO

Check for corroded connectionsor loose connectors between

fuel pump and pump connector[141B].

Are poor connections present?

Check for continuity toground on [141A] terminal 4.


NOYES

With key OFF, check for openpump circuit. Connect ohmmeter

between connector [141B] (O/GY) wireand connector [141B] (BK) wire.


Repair asnecessary.

Is ECM fuse OK?

Is fuel pump fuse OK?

NOYES

Remove fuel pump.Check for continuity

across fuel pumpterminals.

Does meter readcontinuity?

Check pumpconnections and repair

as required. If good,replace fuel pump.

NOYES

Check for openingin wiring.

Replacefuel pump.

NOYES

Locate and repairopen on (BK) wirebetween [141A]

and ground.

1

2

fc01970_en

Go to Fuel SystemElectrical Test (Part

2 of 4).

Go to Fuel SystemElectrical Test(Part 4 of 4).

Go to 4.10 NOECM POWER.

HOME



YES NO

NOYES

Continued from Fuel System Electrical Test (Part 1 of 4).

Is 12 volts present at terminal 87 of system relay (with relay inplace) during first two seconds after key on?

Locate and repair open betweenterminal 1 of [141A] and terminal 87

of system relay.

Is 12 volts present at terminal30 of system relay?

With ignition and engine stopswitch ON.

Is 12 volts present atterminal 86 of system relay.

Locate and repair open on (BE/GY) wirebetween ECM fuse and terminal 30 of

system relay.

NOYES

Locate and repair open on(W/BK) wire to system relay.

fc01971_en

Go to Fuel SystemElectrical Test(Part 3 of 4).

HOME



YES NO

NOYES


Probe system relay connector terminal 85 with a test light to 12 volts.Does test light illuminate for 2 seconds after key ON?

Replace SystemRelay.

Probe Breakout Box terminal 2 with atest light connected to 12 volts.

Does test light illuminate for 2 secondsafter key ON?

Locate and repair openon (GN/O) wire.

Replace ECM. Reprogramand learn password.

3

fc01207_en

HOME



YESNO

NOYES


Check for intermittent short to ground on terminal 1 ofconnector [141A].

Is a short to ground present?

Repair short toground on (O/GY) wire

and replace fuse.

Reconnect fuel pump connector [141] and install fuel pressure gauge.See service manual.

With fuel system intact and battery fully charged, remove fuel pumpfuse.

Connect DVOM across fuel pump fuse terminals using probe.Place male positive probe in H slot. Turn key ON. With pump running,

check current and fuel pressure.Is current draw under 4.5 amps and fuel pressure between 55-62 PSI

(380-425 kPA)?

Replace fuse.Substitute known good relay for system relay. Test

for current draw across fuel pump fuse.Is current draw less than 4.5 amps?

4

NOYES

Current draw now in range. Replacesystem relay and replace fuse.

Replace fuelpump and replace fuse.

fc01208_en

HOME


4.13SYSTEM RELAY CHECK

GENERAL

System RelaySee Figure 4-24. With the ignition switch ON and the enginestop switch at RUN, the ECM will energize the system relay tocomplete the circuit to the in-tank fuel pump, ignition coil, andfuel injectors. They will remain powered as long as the engineis cranking or running, and the ECM is receiving ignition refer-ence pulses from the CKP sensor. If there are no referencepulses, the ECM will de-energize the system relay within 2seconds after ignition is ON or engine has stalled, or immedi-ately after the ignition is shut OFF.


DESCRIPTIONDTC

System relay coil open/lowP1001

System relay coil high/shortedP1002

System relay contacts openP1003

System relay contacts closedP1004

ed02845

Figure 4-24. System Relay

DIAGNOSTICS






2. Connect BREAKOUT BOX (Part No. HD-43876) to ECM.See 4.7 BREAKOUT BOX: EFI.












HOME


SystemRelay

Front Injector

Rear Injector

15 AmpECM Fuse

15 AmpFuel Pump

Fuse

30 AmpMAXIFUSE

15 AmpIGN Fuse

Engine StopSwitch

Igni

tion

TSM/TSSM/HFSM

FuelPump

IgnitionCoil

Battery

System Relay

Front Injector

Rear Injector

Rear Coil

Front Coil

Battery

Switch Power

Ground

Ground

BK

BK

GY

BK

GY

BKBK

GY

GY

W/Y W/YW/Y

R

R

R RR

GN/GY GN/GYGN/GY

BE/GY BE/GY

BE/GYGN/O

Y/G

N

Y/BE

BE/O

Y/BE

BE/O

R/BK R/BK

W/BK

GN/O

Y/GN

O/GYO/GYY/GN

Y/GN

Y/GN

W/B

KW

/BK

Y/GN

Y/GN

Y/GN

W/BK

10

19

21

2

31

13

28

AB

AB

AB

AB

1

4

1

4

13

7

8

13

7

8

[145A] [145B]

2

2

11

29

10

19

21

2

31

13

28

11

29

A

B

C

D

ECM

A

B

C

D

4 3

4 3

Fuse Block

GND 1

GND 1


[22B][22A]

[30B][30A]

[83A][83B]

[119A][119B]

[85A][85B]

[84A][84B]

[141B][141A]

[78B][78A]

8685

3087A87

12

345

US

ETK

B

A

I

IgnitionSwitch

em00263

Figure 4-25. System Relay Circuit

HOME


DTCs P1001 and P1003

Check for battery voltage at terminal 87 of system relay (with relayinstalled) during first 2-3 seconds after key ON.

Is battery voltage (10-13 volts) present for 2-3 seconds after key ON?

YES

System relay OK. Measure resistance(with relay removed) between terminal

87 of the system relay and coilconnector [83B] at terminal A.

Is resistance less than 0.5 ohm?

YES NO

Recheck connections.Wiggle harness whilerepeating test. Repair

intermittent.

Find and repairconnection or

open wire (Y/GN).

YES NO

With ignition ON, check for10-13 volts at terminal 86 of

the system relay.Is voltage present?

Check for continuity toground on (BE/GY) wire.


Check for 10-13 volts atterminal 30 of the system relay.

Is voltage present?

2

1No voltage or voltage always

present.

YESNO

Measure resistancebetween terminal 85 of

system relay andterminal 2 on Breakout

Box.Is resistance less than

0.5 ohm?

Is ignitionfuse good?

YES NO

Find and repairopen between fuse

and relay.

Repair shortto ground and

replaceECM fuse.

YES NO

Check for continuity toground

on terminal 2 on BreakoutBox.


Locate andrepair open on(GN/O) wire.

YES NO

Repair shortto ground and replace

ignition fuse.

Find and repairopen on (W/BK) wire

between connector [22]and relay.

YES NO

Repair shortto ground.

Replace system relay. Doesfuel pump run for the first 2

seconds after key ON?

YES

SystemOK.


NO


fc01828_en

NO

HOME


DTC P1002

Remove system relay. Checkfor voltage on terminal 2 of

Breakout Box.Is voltage present?

YES NO

Remove Breakout Boxconnector from ECM.

Is voltage still present onterminal 2?

YES NO

Repair short to voltage on(GN/O) wire.

Replace ECM.Reprogram and learn password.

Replacesystem relay.


fc01829_en

2

HOME


DTC P1004

Check for poor connections, damaged terminals, poorground or wires reversed at fuel pump.

Do any of these conditions exist?

YES NO

Repair.

Condition: Fuel pump continuesto run with key OFF. Remove

system relay.Does pump continue to run?


YES NO

Replace short tovoltage on (Y/GN) wire.

ReplaceSystem Relay.

fc01830_en

HOME


4.14IDLE AIR CONTROL

GENERAL



IAC OperationThe ECM controls engine idle speed by moving the Idle AirControl (IAC) to open or close a passage around the throttleplate. It does this by sending voltage pulses to the proper motorwinding of the IAC. This causes the pintle to move in or out ofthe IAC a given distance for each pulse received.

• To increase idle speed, the ECM retracts the pintle,allowing more air to flow through the throttle body.

• To decrease idle speed, the ECM extends the pintle,allowing less air to flow through the throttle body.

The IAC position is measured in steps. This can be done onlyby using the DIGITAL TECHNICIAN II (Part No. HD-48650).

• A high number of steps represents a retracted pintle andopen passage around throttle plate. This correlates withan increase in the amount of air flowing through the throttlebody.

• Zero steps represents a fully extended pintle. A zeroreading indicates an abnormal condition in which the pintlehas been fully extended and has consequently closed thepassage around throttle plate.

Each time the ignition is turned off, the ECM resets the IAC bysending enough pulses to extend the pintle and effectivelyclose the throttle body. The fully extended value is the ECMreference point. A given number of steps are then calculatedby the ECM for use in setting the proper idle speed and IACposition.

NOTE

Warm idle speed is controlled by the ECM and can be adjustedonly by using the DIGITAL TECHNICIAN II (Part No. HD-48650).

Diagnostic Trouble Code P0505: Loss ofIdle Speed ControlLoss of idle speed control will result if the idle RPM is 200 frompreset idle speed and IAC motor is at zero or maximum forgreater than 5 seconds. This code may occur with others for

a multiple code situation. Resolve the other codes first to cor-rect.


DESCRIPTIONDTC

Loss of idle speed controlP0505

DIAGNOSTICS




Diagnostic TipsEngine idle speed can be adversely affected by the following:

• A loss of idle speed control does not necessarily imply theIAC actuator or wiring has failed. It can be caused by anumber of conditions such as an intake air leak, improperlyadjusted throttle stop (factory set) or a misfiring cylinder.

• Leaking injectors will cause fuel imbalance and poor idlequality due to different air/fuel ratios in each cylinder. Tocheck for leaky injectors, first remove the air cleaner. SeeAir Cleaner in the service manual. Then, with the throttlewide open, turn key ON for 2 seconds and then OFF for2 seconds five consecutive times. Replace the fuel injectorif there is any evidence of raw fuel in the bores. See FuelInjectors in the service manual.

• Vacuum leaks.To check for vacuum, see Intake Leak Testin the service manual.

• Contaminated fuel.

• Excessive oil in the crankcase (oil sumping).

• TP sensor reading of greater than 1% (possible throttlecable misadjustment) or battery voltage reading of lessthan 9 volts or a VSS greater than 0 will disable idle speedcontrol.

• If there is a loss of battery power at ECM terminal 31,vehicle will start but IAC pintle will not reset at key OFF.Eventually pintle will be out of position causing perform-ance problems.


1. When the engine is stopped, the IAC pintle extends andthen retracts to a fixed "Park" position for increased air-flow and idle speed during the next engine start sequence.This key OFF reset procedure takes 10 seconds to per-form.

HOME


2. Test lamp behavior may follow two patterns. The color ofthe lights is not relevant to IAC operation.

a. Normal behavior: At key ON, test lights will altern-ately flash and then remain steady on to confirm ECMsignals. At key OFF lights alternately flash and go outafter 10 second reset procedure.

b. Problem indicated: One or more lights fail to illu-minate during key ON/key OFF cycle.

NOTEThere is a remote possibility that one of the circuits is shortedto voltage which would have been indicated by a steady light.Disconnect ECM and turn the ignition ON. Probe terminals tocheck for this condition.

3. Connect BREAKOUT BOX (Part No. HD-43876) to EFIwire harness only, leaving ECM disconnected. See4.7 BREAKOUT BOX: EFI.


5. Repair faulty ECM connection or replace ECM. If ECMrequires replacement, see ECM in the service manual.

ed02020

Figure 4-26. IAC Test Lamp (Part No. HD-41199-3)

ed02850

Figure 4-27. IAC Connector (typical)

ed02851

Figure 4-28. IAC Pintle (typical)

HOME


A

17 18 35 36

17 18 35 36

B C D

A B C D

2 1 9 4

2 1 9 4

[87A][87B]

[145A]

ECM

[145B]

[78A]

[78B]

IACMotor

IAC

(A)

HI

IAC

(B)

HI

IAC

(B)

LOW

IAC

(A)

LOW

BE

/GN

BE

/GN

BN

/R

BN

/R

BK

/PK

BK

/PK

BK

/O

BK

/O

em01204

Figure 4-29. IAC Circuit




Beneath fuel tank4-place DelphiIAC[87]


HOME


DTC P0505 (Part 1 of 2)

YES NO

NOYES

Remove air cleaner cover and element.Is throttle valve completely closed?

Monitor IAC pintle for 10 seconds after turning ignition OFF.Does pintle extend and then retract during 10 second key OFF

reset procedure?

Lubricate andadjust throttle

cables.

Check intake manifold for leaks,see service manual.

Are leaks found?

Disconnect IAC and connect test lamp. See Figure 4-32. Turnignition key ON for 2 seconds, then turn ignition key OFF for 10

seconds.Check test lamp during key ON/OFF cycle.

NOYES

Check fuelpressure.

See servicemanual.

Repair intakeleak.

Normalbehavior.

Problemindicated.

Remove test lamp.Connect Breakout Box to connector[78B] leaving ECM disconnected.

Check terminal 31 for battery voltage.Is battery voltage present?

YES NO

Using DVOM, measure resistancebetween IAC connector [87B]

and Breakout Box.

Does each wire measure 0.5 ohms or less?

IACABCD

ECMto 35to 36to 18to 17

WIRE COLORBE/GNBN/R

BK/PKBK/O

YESNO

YESNO

Turn ignition ON. With ECM still disconnected, check voltage on all fourterminals at connector [87B].

Is voltage present?

Repair poor connection atconnectors [87B] or [78B] or repair

open wire in harness.

Repair shortto voltage.


Repair faulty IACconnection or IAC assembly.

Go to 4.10 NO ECM POWER.3

4

4

2

1

fc01972_en

Go to DTC P0505(Part 2 of 2).

3

HOME


DTC P0505 (Part 2 of 2)

YES NO

NOYES

Continued from DTC P0505 (Part 1 of 2).

Turn ignition OFF. Measure resistance between each terminal on connector [87B] and ground.

Is resistance greater than 1 megohm for all terminals?

Inspect ECM connections.Are connections OK?


Replace ECM.Reprogram and learn password.

Repair ECMconnections.

5

4


fc01973_en

HOME


4.15MISFIRE AT IDLE OR UNDER LOAD

GENERAL

Misfire at Idle or Under Load• Battery condition and connections may also cause misfires.

See Battery in the service manual for more information.

• Fuel system problems may also cause misfires. See theservice manual and then see symptom tables under4.5 INITIAL DIAGNOSTIC CHECK: EFI.

• Mechanical problems with the engine may cause misfires.See service manual for more information.

• Vehicle modifications including intake and exhaust maycause misfires.

DIAGNOSTICS






Wipe up spilled fuel and dispose of rags in a suitablemanner. An open spark around gasoline could cause afire or explosion, resulting in death or serious injury.(00518b)


NOTEEngine will not spark with both spark plugs removed. Whenchecking for spark, use SPARK TESTER (Part No. HD-26792)with both plugs installed.

2. See Figure 4-30. A SPARK TESTER (Part No. HD-26792)must be used to verify adequate secondary voltage(25,000 volts) at the spark plug.

a. Turn ignition switch OFF.

b. Remove spark plug cable from spark plug. Visuallycheck plug condition.

c. Attach cable to SPARK TESTER (Part No. HD-26792). Clip tester to cylinder head bolt.

d. While cranking engine, watch for spark to jump testergap on leads.

e. Reinstall and repeat procedure on other spark plugcable.

Table 4-18. Spark Plug Cables

REARFRONTSPECIFICATION

19.37-19.636.25-6.6Length in.

492-499158-168Length mm

4842-130872159-3086Resistance-ohms

3. Perform spark plug cable resistance test.

a. Remove spark plug cable from spark plug and ignitioncoil. For best results, use a needle nose pliers forremoval/installation on coil. Gently grasp cable asclose to terminals as possible.

b. Using an ohmmeter, touch probes to terminals oneach end plug cable.

c. Compare resistance values to Table 4-18. Replacecables not meeting specifications. Reinstall and repeatprocedure on other spark plug cable.

4. If carbon tracking is evident on outside of coil towers,replace ignition coil and inspect spark plug cables. Cablesmust be clean and tight. Excessive cable resistance orfaulty connections can cause coil damage.

5. This test can also be performed by substituting a knowngood coil for one causing the no spark condition. The coildoes not require full installation to be functional. Verifyfaulty coil by performing resistance test. See ignition coilin the service manual.

6. Use HARNESS CONNECTOR TEST KIT (Part No. HD-41404-B) , red pin probe and patch cord to relay and graypin probe and patch cord to the coil connector [83B].

ed02012

Figure 4-30. Spark Tester

HOME


SystemRelay

Front Injector

Rear Injector

15 AmpECM Fuse

15 AmpFuel Pump

Fuse

30 AmpMAXIFUSE

15 AmpIGN Fuse

FuelPump

IgnitionCoil

Battery

System Relay

Front Injector

Rear Injector

Rear Coil

Front Coil

Battery

Switch Power

Ground

Ground

BK

BK

GY

BKBK

GY

GY

W/Y W/YW/Y

R R

R

R

R

GN/GY GN/GYGN/GY

BE/GY BE/GY

BE/GYGN/O

Y/G

N

Y/BE

BE/O

Y/BE

BE/O

R/BK R/BK

W/BK

GN/O

Y/GN

O/GYO/GYY/GN

Y/GN

Y/GN

W/B

KW

/BK

Y/GN

Y/GN

Y/GN

W/BK

10

19

21

2

31

13

28

AB

AB

AB

AB

1

4

1

4

13

7

8

13

7

8

11

29

10

19

21

2

31

13

28

11

29

A

B

C

D

ECM

A

B

C

D

4 3

4 3

Fuse Block

GND 1

GND 1

[22B][22A]

[83A][83B]

[119A][119B]

[85A][85B]

[84A][84B]

[141B][141A]

[145B][145A]

[128B][128A]

[78B][78A]

8685

3087A87

12

345

US

ETK

BK

BK

StarterMotorEngine Stop

Switch

B

A

I

IgnitionSwitch

em00264

Figure 4-31. Ignition Coil Circuit Diagram









HOME




Starter solenoidLocking spade terminal,white


Left side, in front of fuse/relay blocks4-place MolexFuel pump[141]


HOME


Misfire at Idle or Under Load (Part 1 of 3)

Is fuel contaminated?

YES NO

Drain and flushtank. Refill with

fresh fuel.

Connect Breakout Box. Measure resistancebetween terminal 10 of ECM and battery

negative and terminal 28 of ECM andbattery negative. Resistance should be less

than 1 ohm.Is it?

YESNO

Use spark tester to checkcables.

Did spark jump tester gap?

Locate and repair poorground connection.

YES NO

Check for:• Faulty, worn or cracked spark plug(s).• Plug fouling due to engine

mechanical fault.• Faulty or poor connection at plug or coil.

Check resistance of each spark plugcable that did not fire the spark tester.

Also, check for faulty plug wireconnections and wires for carbon

tracking.Are spark plug cables OK?

YESNO

Coils should be freeof carbon tracking.

Are they?

Replacefaulty spark plug cables.

YES

Switch coil with unitknown to be good.

Re-perform spark test.

Did spark jump gapduring engine cranking?

NO

Replaceignition coil.

YES

Original ignition coilis faulty.

Replace ignition coil.

NO

1

2

3

4

2

5

fc01215_en

Go to Misfire At Idle OrUnder Load(Part 2 of 3).

HOME



Continued from Misfire at Idle or Under Load (Part 1 of 3).

Measure resistance between relay terminal 87 and coil connector [83B]terminal A (Y/GN) wire. Wiggle harness.

Is resistance continuously less than 0.5 ohms?

YES NO

Reassemble coil and fuel tank. Measurevoltage drop between battery (positive

lead) and terminal 87 (negative lead) onSystem Relay with engine running.Is voltage drop less than 1.0 volt?

Find source ofintermittent and

repair.

YES

Problem fuel related. Refer to Table4-5. Engine Performance Problems

under 4.5 INITIAL DIAGNOSTICCHECK: EFI.

NO

Repeat voltage drop test after moving negativelead to terminal 30.

With engine running, is voltage drop lessthan 1.0 volt?

YES

Replace systemrelay.

NO

Repeat voltage drop test aftermoving negative lead to 15 amp ECM

fuse (BE/GY) wire.With engine running, is voltage drop less than 1.0

volt?

YES NO

Repair (BE/GY) wire.

Repeat voltage drop test aftermoving negative lead to 15 amp ECM

fuse (R) wire.With engine running, is voltage drop less

than 1.0 volt?

YES

Replace 15 ampECM fuse.

NO

6

fc01216_en

Go to Misfire at Idle orUnder Load (Part 3 of 3).

HOME



Continued from Misfire at Idle or Under Load (Part 2 of 3).

Repeat voltage drop test after moving negative lead to 30 ampmain fuse (left side).

With engine running, is voltage drop less than 1.0 volt?

YES

Check terminalor repair wire.

NO

Repeat voltage drop test aftermoving negative lead to 30 amp main

fuse (right side).With engine running, is voltage drop less

than 1.0 volt?

YES NO

Check terminalor replacemain fuse.

Repeat voltage drop test aftermoving negative lead to starter motor

battery terminal.With engine running, is voltage drop less

than 1.0 volt?

YES NO

Repair wirebetween main

fuse and startermotor.

Repair or replacebattery cable.

fc01217_en

HOME


4.16DTC P0107, P0108, P0112, P0113

GENERALSee Figure 4-32.The Temperature Manifold Absolute Pressure(TMAP) sensor provides the functions of both an Intake AirTemperature (IAT) sensor and a Manifold Absolute Pressure(MAP) sensor in one unit.

The TMAP sensor is supplied 5 volts from ECM terminal "14"and sends IAT and MAP signals back to ECM terminals "7"and "25" respectively.

MAP SignalThe MAP signal varies in accordance with engine vacuum andatmospheric barometric pressure. Changes in barometricpressure are influenced by weather and altitude.

IAT SignalThe IAT portion of the TMAP sensor is a thermistor device,meaning that at a specific temperature, it will have a specificresistance across its terminals. As this resistance varies, sodoes the voltage on terminal "7" of the ECM.

• At high temperatures, the resistance of the IAT sensor isvery low, which effectively lowers the signal voltage onterminal "7".

• At low temperatures, the resistance is very high, allowingthe voltage to rise close to 5 volts.

The ECM monitors this voltage to compensate for variousoperating conditions.


DESCRIPTIONDTC

MAP sensor open/lowP0107

MAP sensor highP0108

IAT sensor voltage lowP0112

IAT sensor open/highP0113

ed02852

Figure 4-32.TMAP Sensor (Typical)

DIAGNOSTICS


VACUUM PUMPHD-23738



Diagnostic Tips: MAP Sensor• DTC P0107 or P0108 will set if the MAP sensor signal is

out of range. DTC P0108 can only be detected with theengine running.

• MAP sensor output check. Using the VACUUMPUMP (Part No. HD-23738), apply a vacuum to the pres-sure port of the TMAP sensor. The MAP signal voltageshould lower as the vacuum is applied.

• The TMAP, Jiffy Stand, and TP sensors are connected tothe same reference line (+5V Vref). If the reference linegoes to ground or open, multiple codes will be set (DTCP0107, P0108, P0122, P0123).

Diagnostic Notes: MAP SensorEach reference number below correlates to a circled numberon the flowchart(s).


2. Use HARNESS CONNECTOR TEST KIT (Part No. HD-41404-B), gray pin probes and patch cords.

HOME


Diagnostic Tips: IAT SensorCheck the following conditions:

• Poor connection: Inspect ECM and harness connector[78] for backed out terminals, improper mating, inoperativelocks, improperly formed or damaged terminals, poor ter-minal- to-wire connection and damaged harness.

• Perform 4.8 WIGGLE TEST to locate intermittents: Ifconnections and harness check out OK, use a DVOM tocheck the IAT sensor voltage reading while moving relatedconnectors and wiring harness. If the failure is induced,the IAT sensor voltage reading will change.

• Shifted sensor: Refer to Table 4-21. This table may beused to test the intake air temperature sensor at varioustemperature levels in order to evaluate the possibility of ashifted (out-of-calibration) sensor which may result indriveability problems.

• An intermittent may be caused by a poor connection,rubbed through wire insulation or an inoperative wire insidethe insulation.

NOTE

All voltage and resistance values are approximate (20%).Measure IAT sensor resistance between ECM terminal 7 andsystem ground (ECM terminal 26).

Table 4-21. Bosch TMAP Air Temp

DEG FVOLTsOHMSDEG C

-44.715614-20

144.59426-10

324.358870

504.0379110

683.6251120

773.4206325

863.2171530

1042.7120040

1222.385150

1401.961260

1581.544670

1761.2329.580

1941.0246.290

2120.8186100

Diagnostic Notes: IAT SensorEach reference number below correlates to a circled numberon the flowchart(s).

1. Connect BREAKOUT BOX (Part No. HD-43876) to EFIwire harness only (leave ECM disconnected). See4.7 BREAKOUT BOX: EFI.


3. Use HARNESS CONNECTOR TEST KIT (Part No. HD-41404-B), gray socket probes and patch cords.

4. Replace TMAP sensor. See the service manual.

HOME


To TP Sensor

ECM

To TP Sensor

TMAPSensor

IAT

5VS

enso

rP

ower

MA

PIm

put

5VS

enso

rG

roun

d

V/W

R/W

R/WR

/W

V/W

LGN

/Y

LGN

/Y

BK

/W

V/W

R/W

LGN

/Y

BK

/W

V/W

R/W

LGN

/Y

BK

/WBK/W

BK/W

BK/R

BK

/W

To ET and O2 Sensors

To Jiffy Stand SensorR/W

To VSS

3 14 5 11

3 14 5 11

1 2 3 4

1 2 3 4

14 25 267

14 25 267

[145B][145A]

[78A][78B]

[80A]

[80A]

em01206

Figure 4-33.TMAP Sensor Circuit




Top of induction module (XL), Side ofinduction module (XR)

4-place PackardTMAP sensor[80]

Under seat16-place MolexEngine Harness[145]

HOME


DTCs P0107 and P0108 (Part 1 of 2)

Connect Breakout Box. Withignition ON, measure voltage

between terminal 25 andterminal 26 on Breakout Box.

With key ON, engine OFF, voltagemust be between 3.5 and 5.0 volts.

With key ON, engine running,voltage must be between 1.5-3.0

volts at hot idle.Does voltage fit specifications?

YES NO

Perform 4.8 WIGGLE TESTto check for intermittents.

Intermittents present?

YES

Go to DTCs P0107 and P0108(Part 2 of 2).

Wiggle harness while watchingDVOM.

NO

Replace TMAP sensor. Clear DTCs androad test.

Did the check engine lamp illuminate andset DTC P0107 or P0108?

YES

Install original TMAP sensor.Replace ECM (reprogram,

relearn) and road test againto verify.

NO

Systemnow OK.


1

fc01974_en

Go to DTCs P0107and P0108 (Part 2

of 2).

HOME



Continued from DTCs P0107 andP0108 (Part 1 of 2).

Check the 5 volt reference supply at theTMAP sensor connector [80B]. With

ignition ON, measure voltage betweenterminal 3 (R/W) and terminal 1 (BK/W).

Is voltage approximately 5.0 volts?

YESNO.

Greaterthan 6V.

Connect Breakout Box to connector [78B]leaving ECM disconnected. Check continuitybetween TMAP connector [80B] terminal 3

and Breakout Box terminal 14. Then measurecontinuity between TMAP connector [80B]terminal 1 and Breakout Box terminal 26.


NO.Less

than 4.5V.

Locate short to 12volts on (R/W)

wire in wire harness.Repair as necessary.

Connect Breakout Box to connector [78B]leaving ECM disconnected.

OPEN CHECK:Measure resistance between TMAP

connector [80B] terminal 4 and BreakoutBox cavity 25.


YES NO

SHORT CHECK:Measure resistance

between TMAP connectorterminal 4 and chassis

ground.Is resistance greater than

1 megohm?

Locate and repairopen on (V/W)

wire.

YES

Replace TMAP sensor.See service manual.

NO

Locate and repairgrounded (V/W)

wire.

YES

Check resistance betweenTMAP connector [80B]

terminal 3 andBreakout Box terminal 26.Is resistance greater than

1 megohm?

NO

Repairopen wire.

YES NO


Locate and repair shortbetween (R/W) and (BK/

W) wires.

Clear DTCs using odometer self-diagnostics. See 4.6 ODOMETERSELF-DIAGNOSTICS. Confirm proper operation with no checkengine lamp.

2

22

2

fc01975_en

HOME



Connect Breakout Box to connector [78B]leaving ECM disconnected. With engine atroom temperature (60-90° F or 16-32° C),

use a DVOM to measure resistance acrossterminal 7 and 26 on Breakout Box. Ifengine is warm, refer to Table 4-21.

Is resistance between 1.5k ohms and 5.0kohms at room temperature?

YES NO

Connect ECM to Breakout Box.Perform 4.8 WIGGLE TEST to

check for intermittents.Are intermittents present?

YES

While wiggling harness, performsteps marked by BOLD

ASTERISKS under DTCs P0112and P0113 (Part 2 of 2).

Repair as necessary.

NO

Disconnect TMAP sensor connector [80]. Turnignition ON. Using a DVOM, measure thevoltage between ECM terminal 7 (positive)

and terminal 26 (negative) on Breakout Box. Isvoltage approximately 5 volts?

YESNO. Less than

4.7 volts.NO

Replace TMAP sensor, clear codesand road test.

Did check engine lamp illuminateand set DTC P0112 or P0113?

With TMAP sensor disconnected,disconnect ECM from Breakout Box.

Measure resistance betweenBreakout Box terminal 7 and terminal 10

or 28.Is resistance less than 1 megohm?

Unplug ECM leaving Breakout Boxconnected at vehicle harness.

Measure voltage betweenBreakout Box terminal 7 and

terminals 10 or 28.Is voltage 0 volts?

YES NO YES NO YES NO

Install original IATsensor, replace ECM,

perform passwordlearning and road test.

SystemOK.

Repair short toground on

(LGN/Y) wire.

Replace ECM.Reprogram

andlearn

password.

ReplaceECM.

Reprogramandlearn

password.

Examine IATsignal wire(LGN/Y) for

short to voltageand repair.

At some point in the flowchart you may be instructed to jump directly to a the box with the boldasterisk. Disregard the asterisk (but not the instruction box) if your normal progression throughthe chart brings you to this location.

Clear DTCs using odometer self-diagnostics. See 4.6 ODOMETERSELF-DIAGNOSTICS. Confirm proper operation with no checkengine lamp.

1

1 1

fc01976_en

Go to DTCs P0112 andP0113 (Part 2 of 2).

HOME



Continued from DTCs P0112 and P0113 (Part 1 of 2).

Disconnect TMAP sensor connector [80B] and examine for damage.Is connector OK?

YES

Repairconnector.

NO

Using a DVOM, measure the resistance between TMAP sensorconnector [80B] terminal 2 and ECM terminal 7 on Breakout Box.


YES

Using a DVOM, measure the resistance between TMAP sensorconnector [80B] terminal 1 and ECM terminal 26 on Breakout Box.


YES

Using a DVOM, measure the resistance between ECM terminal 7and terminal 26 on Breakout Box.

Is resistance greater than 1.0 megohm?

YES

Using a DVOM, measure the resistance between ECM terminal 7 onBreakout Box and ground.


YES

Remove TMAP sensor and measure resistance across the 1 and 2terminals of the TMAP sensor Directly with sensor at room

temperature (60-90° F or 16-32° C),Is resistance between 2.0k ohms and 5.0k ohms?

YES

Perform 4.8 WIGGLE TEST on steps marked with a BOLDASTERISK above to locate intermittents.


2

2

3

NO

Examine (LGN/Y) wire in harnessfor open circuit and repair.

NO

Examine (BK/W) wire in harnessfor open circuit and repair.

NO

Examine (LGN/Y) and (BK/W)wires in harness for short between

these two circuits and repair.

NO

Examine harnessfor short to ground

and repair.

NO

ReplaceTMAP sensor.

4

At some point in the flowchart you may beinstructed to jump directly to a the box with thebold asterisk. Disregard the asterisk (but not theinstruction box) if your normal progressionthrough the chart brings you to this location.


fc01977_en

HOME


4.17DTC P0117, P0118

GENERAL

ET SensorThe ECM supplies and monitors a voltage signal (terminal "6")to one side of the Engine Temperature (ET) sensor. The otherside of the ET sensor is connected to a common sensor ground(terminal "26") of the ECM.

See Figure 4-34. The ET sensor is a thermistor device, whichmeans that at a specific temperature it will have a specificresistance across its terminals. As this resistance varies, sodoes the voltage (terminal "6").

• At high temperatures, the resistance of the sensor is verylow, which effectively lowers the signal voltage on terminal"6".

• At low temperatures, the resistance is very high, allowingthe voltage to rise close to 5 volts.

The ECM monitors this voltage to compensate for variousoperating conditions. The ECM also uses the sensor input asa reference for determining IAC pintle position.

ed02853

Figure 4-34. Engine Temperature Sensor


DESCRIPTIONDTC

ET sensor voltage lowP0117

ET sensor open/highP0118

DIAGNOSTICS




Diagnostic TipsOnce the engine is started, the ET voltage should lower steadilyin two stages.

Check the following conditions:

• Poor connection: Inspect ECM and harness connector[78] for backed out terminals, improper mating, inoperativelocks, improperly formed or damaged terminals, poor ter-minal- to-wire connection and damaged harness.

• Perform 4.8 WIGGLE TEST to locate intermittents: Ifconnections and harness check out OK, use a DVOM tocheck the engine temperature sensor voltage readingwhile moving related connectors and wiring harness. Ifthe failure is induced, the engine temperature sensorvoltage reading will change.

• Shifted sensor: Refer to Table 4-24. This table may beused to test the engine temperature sensor at varioustemperature levels in order to evaluate the possibility of ashifted (out-of-calibration) sensor which may result indriveability problems.

• An intermittent may be caused by a poor connection,rubbed through wire insulation or an inoperative wire insidethe insulation.

NOTE

All voltage and resistance values are approximate (±20%).Measure ET sensor resistance between ECM terminal 6 andsystem ground (ECM terminal 26).

Table 4-24. ET Sensor Table

TEMP °FHOTVOLTAGE

COLDVOLTAGE

RESIST-ANCE

TEMP °C

-44.998936-20

144.856102-10

324.5329570

504.32000010

683.91251120

773.61000025

863.4804530

1042.9530440

1222.4357750

1401.9247060

1581.5173970

1764.01.2124680*

1943.70.9907.790*

2123.4671.2100

* Between 80-90 °C the ECM changes scaling. Voltages forECT sensor will shift scales in that range.This provides propersensor resolution for all temperatures.


HOME


1. Connect BREAKOUT BOX (Part No. HD-43876) to EFIwire harness only (leave ECM disconnected). See4.7 BREAKOUT BOX: EFI.


3. Use HARNESS CONNECTOR TEST KIT (Part No. HD-41404-B), gray socket probes and patch cords.

4. Replace ET sensor. See the service manual.

1

6

ET

Sen

sor

Inpu

t

5VS

enso

rG

roun

d

26

6 26

2

1 2

ECM

ETSensor

To TP, TMAP Sensors And Jiffy Stand Sensor

PK

/Y

BK

/W

BK/W

BK

/W

PK

/Y

[78B][78A]

[90A][90B]

em01207

Figure 4-35. ET Sensor Circuit




Above throttle body, right side2-place DelphiET sensor[90]

HOME



Connect Breakout Box to connector[78B] leaving ECM disconnected. Withengine at room temperature (60-90° For 16-32° C), use a DVOM to measureresistance across terminals 6 and 26on Breakout Box. If engine is warm,

refer to Table 4-24.Is resistance between 8.0k ohms and

20k ohms?

YES NO

Connect ECM to Breakout Box.Perform 4.8 WIGGLE TEST to

check for intermittents.Are intermittents present?

YES

While wiggling harness, performsteps marked by BOLD

ASTERISKS under DTCs P0117and P0118 (Part 2 of 2).


NO

Disconnect ET sensor connector[90]. Turn ignition ON. Using aDVOM, measure the voltage

between terminal 6 (positive) andterminal 26 (negative) on Breakout

Box.Is voltage approximately 5 volts?

YESNO. Less than

4.7 volts.NO. Greater than

5.3 volts.

Replace ET sensor, clear DTCsand road test.

Did check engine lamp illuminateand set DTC P0117 or P0118?

With ET sensor disconnected,disconnect ECM connector [78B].

Measure resistance between terminal 6and terminals 10 or 28.

Is resistance less than 1 megohm?

Unplug ECM leaving Breakout Boxconnected at vehicle harness.

Measure voltage between terminal6 and terminals 10 or 28.

Is voltage 0 volts?

YES NO YES NO YES NO

Install originalET sensor,

replace ECM,perform

password learningand road test.

SystemOK.

Repair short toground onPK/Y wire.


andlearn

password.


andlearn

password.

Examine ET signalwire (PK/Y) forshort to voltage

and repair.

At some point in the flowchart you may be instructed to jump directly to athe box with the bold asterisk. Disregard the asterisk (but not the instructionbox) if your normal progression through the chart brings you to this location.


1

fc01978_en


HOME




Disconnect ET sensor connector [90B] and examine for damage.Is connector OK?

YES

Repairconnector.

NO

Using a DVOM, measure the resistancebetween ET sensor connector [90B] terminal 1 and

ECM terminal 6 on Breakout Box.Is resistance less than 1.0 ohm?

YES

Using a DVOM, measure the resistancebetween ET sensor connector [90B] terminal 2 and

ECM terminal 26 on Breakout Box.Is resistance less than 1.0 ohm?

YES

Using a DVOM, measure the resistance between ECMterminal 6 and terminal 26 on Breakout Box.


YES

Using a DVOM, measure the resistance between ECMterminal 6 on Breakout Box and ground.Is resistance greater than 1.0 megohm?

YES

Remove ET sensor and measure resistance across the terminals of the ETsensor directly. Again, with sensor at room temperature (60-90° F or 16-32° C).

Is resistance between 8.0k ohms and 20k ohms?

YES

Perform 4.8 WIGGLE TEST on steps marked with aBOLD ASTERISK above to locate intermittents.


2

2

3

NO

Examine (PK/Y) wire in harnessfor open circuit and repair.

NO

Examine (BK/W) wire in harnessfor open circuit and repair.

NO

Examine (PK/Y) and (BK/W) wiresin harness for short between these

two circuits and repair.

NO

Examine harnessfor short to ground

and repair.

NO

ReplaceET sensor.

4

At some point in the flowchart you may be instructed to jump directly to a the boxwith the bold asterisk. Disregard the asterisk (but not the instruction box) if yournormal progression through the chart brings you to this location.


fc01979_en

HOME


4.18DTC P0122, P0123

GENERAL

TP SensorThe ECM supplies a 5 Volt signal (terminal 14) to the TPsensor. The TP sensor sends a signal back to the ECM (ter-minal 24). The returned signal varies in voltage according tothrottle position.

• At idle (closed throttle), the signal is typically in the rangeof 0.20-0.80 Volts.

• At wide open throttle, the signal is normally 4.0-4.9 Volts.

A DTC P0122 or P0123 will set if the TP sensor voltage signaldoes not fall within the acceptable range.

NOTE

When servicing the TP sensor connector on XR models only,apply Harley-Davidson Electrical Contact Lubricant to the TPsensor connector terminals prior to connecting the TP sensor.


DESCRIPTIONDTC

TP sensor open/lowP0122

TP sensor highP0123

ed02854

Figure 4-36.TP Sensor Location (XL)

ed01768

Figure 4-37.TP Sensor Location (XR)

DIAGNOSTICS




Diagnostic TipsThe DVOM reads throttle position in volts. Voltage shouldincrease at a steady rate as the throttle is moved from idle towide open. A short to ground or open on the (GY/V) or (R/W)wires also will result in a DTC P0122. A short to ground or openon the (R/W) wire (+5v REF) sets multiple codes as describedbelow.

NOTES

The TMAP, Jiffy Stand, and TP sensors are connected to thesame reference line (+5V Vref). If the reference line goes toground or open, multiple codes will be set (DTC P0107, P0108,P0122, P0123, P1501, P1502). Start with the trouble codehaving the lowest ranking value.

Check for the following conditions:

• Poor Connection: Inspect ECM and harness connector[78B] for backed out terminals, improper mating, inoper-ative locks, improperly formed or damaged terminals, poorterminal- to-wire connection and damaged harness.

• Perform 4.8 WIGGLE TEST to locate intermittents: Ifconnections and harness check out OK, monitor TP sensorvoltage using a DVOM while moving related connectors

HOME


and wiring harness. If the failure is induced, the TP sensorvoltage reading will change.

• TP sensor scaling: Observe the TP sensor voltage displaywhile opening the throttle with engine stopped and IgnitionSwitch ON. Display should vary from closed TP sensorvoltage (when throttle is closed) to greater than 4.0 volts(when throttle is held wide open). As the throttle is slowlymoved, the voltage should change gradually without spikesor low voltages being observed.

• Check TP sensor voltage reading with DVOM. If TP sensoris equal to or greater than 3.8 volts then the system is in"clear flood" mode and engine will not start. While sparkis present, fuel is shut off. Problem can be mechanical,such as stuck throttle cables.


1. Connect a BREAKOUT BOX (Part No. HD-43876) betweenEFI wire harness and ECM before measuring voltage. See4.7 BREAKOUT BOX: EFI. Using a DVOM to measurevoltage, take reading across terminal 24 (positive lead)and terminal 26 (negative lead) on BREAKOUT BOX (PartNo. HD-43876).

2. Replace TP sensor. See the service manual.


R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

BK

/W

BK/W

BK/W

BK

/WB

K/W

BK

/W

GY

/V

GY

/VG

Y/V

GY

/V

3 5 12

3 5 12

BA C

BA C

To TMAP Sensor

TPSensor

To ET And O2 Sensors

To TMAP Sensor

R/W To Jiffy Stand Sensor

To VSS

14

5VS

enso

rP

ower

5VS

enso

rG

roun

d

TP

Sen

sor

Inpu

t

26

14 26

24

24

ECM

BK/R

[78B][78A]

[145B][145A]

[88A][88B]

em01208

Figure 4-38.TP Sensor Circuit

HOME





Behind air cleaner housing3-place DelphiTP sensor[88]


HOME



With ignition key ON, measure TP sensor voltage while gradually opening throttle.Does voltage increase steadily with no spikes or low voltages from 0.2-0.8 volts at idle (closed

throttle) to 4.0-4.9 volts at wide open throttle?

YES NO

Voltage isgreater than.

Voltage is lowerthan or spikes

observed.

Unplug TP sensor connector [88B]and measure voltage between

terminal B (+) and terminal A (-)with ignition ON.

Is reading 4.8-5.0 volts?

YES NO

Disconnect ECM from BreakoutBox. Check resistance between

ECM terminal 24 on Breakout Boxto chassis ground.

Is resistance greater than 1megohm?

Measure resistancebetween TP sensor

connector [88B]terminal B to ECM terminal

14 on Breakout Box.Is resistance less than 1.0

ohm?

NO

Find short toground on (GY/V)

signal wire.

YES

ReplaceTP sensor.

NO

Repair openin (R/W) wire.

YES

Repair openin (BK/W) wire.

Check engine lamp ONcontinuously and

DTC P0122 or P0123the only one set?

YES


NO

Perform 4.8 WIGGLETEST to check for

intermittents.Are intermittents present?

NO

Replace TP sensor, clearcodes and road test.

Did check engine lampilluminate and set DTC

P0122 or P0123?

YES

While wiggling harness,



YES NO

Install originalTP sensor, replace ECM

(reprogram and learnpassword) and road test.

SystemOK.

1

2

2


fc01980_en

Go to DTCsP0122 and P0123

(Part 2 of 2).

HOME




With ignition key OFF, disconnect ECM connector [78B]. Turn ignition keyON.

Is voltage greater than 0 volts across terminal 24 and terminal 26 onBreakout Box?

YES

Repair shortbetween (GY/V) signal

wire and 12 volts.

NO

Measure resistance between ECM terminal 24on Breakout Box and TP sensor connector [88B]

terminal C.Is resistance less than 0.5 ohm?

YESNO

Measure resistance from TP sensorconnector [88B]

terminal C to terminal B.Is resistance less than 1.0 megohm?

Repair open(GY/V)

signal wire.

NOYES

Repair shortbetween (R/W)

and (GY/V) signalwire.

ReplaceTP sensor.

3

3

2


fc01981_en

HOME


4.19DTC P0131, P0132, P0134, P0151, P0152, P0154

GENERAL

Oxygen SensorSee Figure 4-39. The Oxygen (O2) sensor provides a signalto the ECM which indicates whether the engine is running richor lean.

• A DTC P0131 (front) or P0151 (rear) is set when the ECMdetects an excessively lean condition for a specified lengthof time. DTCs may also set if O2 sensor fails.

• A DTC P0132 (front) or P0152 (rear) is set when the ECMdetects an excessively rich condition for a specified lengthof time. DTCs may also set if O2 sensor fails.

• A DTC P0134 is set when the front O2 sensor circuit isopen or sensor is too cold to respond. A DTC P0154 isset when the rear O2 sensor circuit is open or sensor istoo cold to respond.

When the air/fuel mixture is ideal, approximately 14.6 parts airto 1 part fuel, the voltage will be approximately 0.45V.


DESCRIPTIONDTC

Front O2 sensor low or engine running leanP0131

Engine running richP0132

Front O2 sensor open/not responding/highP0134

Rear O2 sensor low or engine running leanP0151

Engine running richP0152

Rear O2 sensor open/not responding/highP0154

ed02856

Figure 4-39. Oxygen Sensor

DIAGNOSTICS




Diagnostic TipsDiagnostic codes for the O2 sensor may be seen during thevehicle break-in period. The O2 sensor diagnostic codes willnot illuminate the check engine lamp for current or historiccodes and will only be indicated by DIGITAL TECHNICIANII (Part No. HD-48650) or odometer self-diagnostics. If thediagnostic codes are reported during the break-in period, clearor ignore the codes until the break-in period is completed. Allhistoric O2 sensor diagnostic codes are to be ignored andcleared.

The DVOM displays the signal from the O2 sensor in volts.This voltage will have an average value tending towards lean,rich or ideal value depending on operating temperature of theengine, engine speed and throttle position. An open/short tovoltage or short to ground in the (PK/O) wire (front) and(PK/GN) wire (rear) will cause the engine to run rich (short toground) or lean (short to voltage) until fault is detected. Oncefault is detected, vehicle will run in open loop.

Check for the following conditions:

• Poor connection. Inspect the ECM harness connector[78], fuel injector connectors [84, 85] and O2 sensor con-nector wiring for backed out terminals, improper mating,inoperative locks, improperly formed or damaged ter-minals, poor terminal-to-wire connection and damagedharness.

• Dirty/stuck open injectors. The motorcycle may run lean(dirty/clogged injectors) or rich (stuck open injectors) ifthere is an injector problem. This could also cause poorfuel economy and performance.

• Loose oxygen sensor. If the O2 sensor is loose, engineperformance may be affected. This could also show upas a slow changing O2 sensor voltage.

• Loose/leaking exhaust. This can cause a poor groundconnection for sensor or allow fresh air into the exhaustsystem. If fresh air enters exhaust system, the O2 sensorwill read a lean condition, causing the system to go rich.

• Engine misfire. See 4.15 MISFIRE AT IDLE OR UNDERLOAD.


1. Connect a BREAKOUT BOX (Part No. HD-43876) betweenEFI wire harness and ECM before measuring voltage. See4.7 BREAKOUT BOX: EFI.

2. 5 volts is typical for a cold engine. Once the O2 sensorsare up to operating temperature, typical voltage is 0.45volt.

3. See Intake Leak Test in the service manual.

HOME


BE

GY

/BK

BE

GY

/BK

PK

/GN

PK

/O

BK

/W

BK

/W

BK

/W

BK/W BK/W

8

Fron

toxy

gen

sens

orin

put

5Vse

nsor

grou

nd

Rea

rox

ygen

sens

orin

put

26

8 26

23

23

ECM

[78A]

[78B]

[138A]

[138B]

[137A]

To ET sensor

[137B]

Front OxygenSensor

Rear OxygenSensor

1 2

1 2

1 2

1 2

em01209

Figure 4-40. Oxygen Sensor




H-bracket2-place AmpRear O2 sensor[137]

Voltage regulator electrical caddy2-place AmpFront O2 sensor[138]

HOME


DTCs P0131, P0132, P0134, P0151, P0152, and P0154 (Part 1 of 3)

Disconnect O2 sensor from harness. Connect DVOM to terminal 8 (front, +)and terminal 26 (-), 23 (rear, +) and terminal 26 (-) of connector [78] (gray).

Turn ignition ON. Observe O2 voltage.Is voltage approximately 5.0 volts?

YES NO.0 volts.

NO.Voltage is greater

than 5 volts.

Install Breakout Box (HD-43876)leaving ECM [78] disconnected

from the Breakout Box. Check forcontinuity to ground on terminal 8

(front) or terminal 23 (rear). Iscontinuity present?

Install Breakout Box (HD-43876)leaving ECM [78] disconnected

from the Breakout Box.Is voltage present?

YES NO YES NO

Locate and repairshort to ground on

(PK/O) (front) and/or(PK/GN) (rear) wire.

Replace ECM.See service manual.

Inspect (PK/O) (front)and/or (PK/GN) (rear)

wire for shorts tovoltage and repair.

Replace ECM.See service manual.

1

1

Clear DTCs using odometer self-diagnostics. See 4.6ODOMETER SELF-DIAGNOSTICS Confirm properoperation with no check engine lamp

1

2

fc01982_en

Go to DTCs P0131, P0132,P0134, P0151, P0152, and

P0154 (Part 2 of 3).

HOME



Continued from DTCs P0131, P0132, P0134, P0151,P0152, and P0154 (Part 1 of 3).

Turn ignition OFF and reconnect O2 sensor. Turnignition ON and start engine. Allow engine to reach

operating temperature.With engine idling, does voltage at terminal 8 (+) andterminal 26 (-) (front) and terminal 23 (+) and terminal

26 (-) (rear) quickly fluctuate between 0 and 1.0volts?

NO.0.0-0.4 volts.

NO.0.6-1.0 volts.

NO.Slow or no change.

YES

Perform an FUELPRESSURE TEST. See

service manual.Is pressure too low?

Perform an FUELPRESSURE TEST. See

service manual.Is pressure too high?

Check for continuitybetween terminal 8 [78]

(front) and terminal 1[138] (front) or terminal

23 [78] (rear) andterminal 1 [137] (rear).Is continuity present?

YESNO

Repair lowpressure problem.

See servicemanual.

Check for restricted fuelfilter or fuel line.

Is there a restrictionpresent?

YESNO

Replace fuelpressure regulator.

See servicemanual.

Check forinjectors stuckopen. See 4.20

DTC P0261, P0262,P0263,

P0264. Retest.

YES NO

Replace O2sensor.

See servicemanual.

Repair openon (PK/O) (front)and/or (PK/GN)

(rear) wire.

YESNO

Replace fuel lineor filter.

Check for air leaksat induction

module.Is an air leak

present?

YES

Repair airleaks.

NO

Fuel injectors may bedirty.

See service manual.


3

Go to DTCs P0131,P0132, P0134,

P0151, P0152, andP0154 (Part 3 of 3).

HOME



Continued from DTCs P0131, P0132, P0134, P0151, P0152, and P0154 (Part 2 of 3).

Check for intermittents by performing 4.8 WIGGLE TEST starting from beginning of chart.Are there intermittents present?

YES NO

Repairas necessary.

Replace O2 sensor. See service manual. Clear codesand road test. Check for DTCs. Did O2 sensor seta P0131, P0132, P0134, P0151, P0152 or P0154?

YES NO

Install original O2 sensor and replace ECM.See service manual.

Road test again to verify.

Systemnow OK.


HOME


4.20DTC P0261, P0262, P0263, P0264

GENERAL

Fuel InjectorsThe fuel injectors are solenoids that allow pressurized fuel intothe intake tract.The injectors are timed to the engine cycle andtriggered sequentially. The power for the injectors comes fromthe system relay. The system relay also provides power forthe fuel pump and the ignition coil.The ECM provides the pathto ground to trigger the injectors.

NOTE

ECM fuse and system relay failures or wiring harness problemswill cause 12 volt power to be lost to both injectors, ignitioncoils and fuel pump.


DESCRIPTIONDTC

Front injector open/lowP0261

Front injector highP0262

Rear injector open/lowP0263

Rear injector highP0264

DIAGNOSTICS





1. See the service manual for all service information.

2. Use HARNESS CONNECTOR TEST KIT (Part No. HD-41404-B), purple pin probe and patch cord.

3. Connect a BREAKOUT BOX (Part No. HD-43876) betweenEFI wire harness and ECM. See 4.7 BREAKOUT BOX:EFI.

ed02060

Figure 4-41. Fuel Injector Test Lamp (Part No. HD-34730-2C)

HOME


SystemRelay

Front Injector

Rear Injector

15 AmpECM Fuse

15 AmpFuel Pump

Fuse

30 AmpMAXIFUSE

15 AmpIGN Fuse

Igni

tion

TSM/HFSM

FuelPump

IgnitionCoil

Battery

System Relay

Front Injector

Rear Injector

Rear Coil

Front Coil

Battery

Switch Power

Ground

Ground

BK

BK

GY

BK

GY

BKBK

GY

GY

W/Y W/YW/Y

R

R

R RR

GN/GY GN/GYGN/GY

BE/GY BE/GY

BE/GYGN/O

Y/G

N

Y/BE

BE/O

Y/BE

BE/O

R/BK R/BK

W/BK

GN/O

Y/GN

O/GYO/GYY/GN

Y/GN

Y/GN

W/B

KW

/BK

Y/GN

Y/GN

Y/GN

W/BK

10

19

21

2

31

13

28

AB

AB

AB

AB

1

4

1

4

13

7

8

13

7

8

[145A] [145B]

2

2

11

29

10

19

21

2

31

13

28

11

29

A

B

C

D

ECM

A

B

C

D

4 3

4 3

Fuse Block

GND 1

GND 1


[22B][22A]

[30B][30A]

[83A][83B]

[119A][119B]

[85A][85B]

[84A][84B]

[141B][141A]

[78B][78A]

8685

3087A87

12

345

US

ETK

Engine StopSwitch

em00265

IgnitionSwitch

B

A

I

Figure 4-42. Fuel Injector Circuit



Under fuel tank6-place Molex, blackRight hand controls[22]



Back of coil, under fuel tank4-place Delphi, blackIgnition coil[83]

Beneath fuel tank2-place DelphiFront injector[84]

Beneath fuel tank2-place DelphiRear injector[85]

HOME








HOME


DTCs P0261, P0262, P0263, and P0264 (Part 1 of 3)

Is wire bail on connector securelyattached to the fuel injector?

1

YES NO

Reconnect.Using Fuel Injector TestLamp, crank engine.

Does lamp flash?

YES

Recheck connections.Perform 4.8 WIGGLE TEST

to check for intermittents.Are intermittents present?

NO

Check terminal A (Y/GN) wire on injectorconnector to ground.

Is battery voltage on 2 seconds after keyON?

YES

Repairintermittent.

NO

Measure resistance of suspectinjector across injector terminals.

Is resistance 10.0-25.0 ohms?

YES

Check for looseor corroded terminals

in harness.

NO

Replaceinjector.

2

1

NO

Check for battery voltage atterminal 87 of system

relay during first 2 seconds afterkey ON.


YES

NOYES

System relay OK. Measureresistance between terminal

87 of system relay andterminal A (Y/GN) wire at

injector connector.Is resistance less than 0.5

ohm?

YES NO

Perform 4.8 WIGGLETEST to check for

intermittents. Repairas necessary.

Find and repairbad connectionor open wire.

2


Go to DTCs P0261,P0262, P0263 and

P0264(Part 2 of 3).

Go to DTCs P0261,P0262, P0263 and

P0264(Part 3 of 3).

HOME



Continued from DTCs P0261, P0262, P0263 andP0264 (Part 1 of 3).

FRONT INJECTOR: DTC P0261 or P0262.

Measure resistance between Breakout Box terminal21 (W/Y) wire and terminal B of front injector

connector [84B].

Continued from DTCs P0261, P0262, P0263 andP0264 (Part 1 of 3).

REAR INJECTOR: DTC P0263 or P0264.

Measure resistance between Breakout Box terminal19 (GN/GY) wire and terminal B of rear injector

connector [85B].

2

3

2

3

Is resistanceless than 0.5 ohm?

YES NO

Check for continuity betweenterminal 10 and ground.


Repair open orpoor connection.

Front injector codes:Check continuity between terminal

21 and terminal 10 or,Rear injector codes:

Check continuity between terminal19 and terminal 10.


NO

Repair open.

YES


NO

Check for voltage with key on.

Front injector codes: Check Breakout Box terminal 21.

Rear injector codes: Check Breakout Box terminal 19.

Is voltage present after 2 seconds?

YES NO



and learn password.

Clear DTCs using odometer self-diagnostics. See4.6 ODOMETER SELF-DIAGNOSTICS. Confirmproper operation with no check engine lamp. fc01986_en

YES

HOME



Continued from DTCs P0261, P0262, P0263, and P0264 (Part 1 of 3).Check for battery voltage at terminal 30 of the system relay.


YES NO

Check for battery voltage at terminal86 of the system relay.


YES

Measure resistance betweenterminal 86 of the system

relay and ECM terminal 13 onBreakout Box.


YES

Measure resistance betweenterminal 85 of the system relay

and ECM terminal 2 on BreakoutBox.


YES

Install known good relay.Does fuel pump run for first2 seconds after key ON?

YES

Replacerelay.

Find and repair open on(BE/GY) wire between

fuse and relay.

NO

See 4.10 NO ECMPOWER.

NO

Find and repairopen on (W/BK)

wire.

NO

Find and repairopen on (GN/O)

wire.

NO

Reinstall originalrelay. Replace ECM.

Reprogram andlearn password.


3

fc01987_en

HOME


4.21DTC P0373, P0374

GENERAL

CKP SensorSee Figure 4-43. The Crankshaft Position (CKP) sensor (1) islocated on the front of the left engine crankcase. The sensorharness connector [79] (3) is located under a protective boot(2) behind the front left frame downtube.

If the CKP sensor signal is weak or absent, DTC P0373 orP0374 will be set.

NOTE

If signal is not detected or cannot synchronize (DTC P0374),engine will not start.

2 1

3

ed02855

1. CKP sensor2. Protective boot3. Connector [79] (under boot)

Figure 4-43. CKP Sensor Location (typical)


DESCRIPTIONDTC

CKP sensor intermittentP0373

CKP sensor synch errorP0374

DIAGNOSTICS




Diagnostic TipsEngine must be cranked for more than five seconds withoutCKP signal to set code.


1. Connect BREAKOUT BOX (Part No. HD-43876) to ECMwire harness only (leave ECM disconnected). See4.7 BREAKOUT BOX: EFI.

2. One megohm is very high resistance.

3. Use HARNESS CONNECTOR TEST KIT (Part No. HD-41404-B), brown socket probes and patch cords.

4. For testing purposes, install sensor without running wiringalong normal path. Disconnect and route wiring properlyif system is now OK.

HOME


BK

BK

BK

BK

BK

R

BKR

1 2

1 2[79B]

CKPSensor

[79A]

[78B]

[78A]

12

CK

Pse

nsor

(-)

CK

Pse

nsor

(+)

Gro

und

30

12

10

Gro

und

10 30

28

28

ECM

[GND1]

em01211

Figure 4-44. CKP Sensor Circuit




Front of left crankcase2-place Mini-DeutschCKP sensor[79]

HOME



Connect Breakout Box to harness only, leaving ECM disconnected. Measure resistancebetween terminals 30 and 28 and between terminals 12 and 28 on Breakout Box.

Is resistance more than 1 megohm?

YES NO

Check for intermittent connection, pinched ordamaged wires, and loose CKP sensor fasteners.

Are there conditions found?

Disconnect connector [79]. LeavingECM disconnected, measure resistance

between terminals 12 and 28 andterminals 30 and 28 on Breakout Box.

Is resistance less than 1 megohm?YES

Repair asnecessary.

NO

Connect DVOM to terminals 12 and 30on Breakout Box. Set DVOM to AC volts and crank

engine.Does DVOM read 1 VAC minimum during cranking?

NO

Connect DVOM at terminals 1 and 2 ofconnector [79A].

Does DVOM read 1 VAC minimum whilecranking?

With DVOM still connected,check for intermittents using

4.8 WIGGLE TEST.Intermittents present?

YES

Repair asnecessary.

YES

Install known goodCKP sensor. Clearcodes and retest.

DTC P0373 orP0374 set?

NO YES

Check for continuitybetween terminal 1 ofconnector [79B] and

terminal 30 on BreakoutBox.


NO

Replace CKPsensor. See

service manual.

YES NO

Reinstall originalCKP sensor.


Replace CKPsensor.

YESNO

Repair open on (BK)wire between terminal 2of connector [79B] and

terminal 12 ofconnector [78B].

Repair open on (R)wire between terminal 1of connector [79B] and

terminal 30 ofconnector [78B].

YES

Repair short toground on R or

BK wire betweenconnectors [78B]

and [79B].

NO

Replace CKPsensor. See

service manual.


1

2

3

4

fc01850_en

HOME


4.22DTC P0501, P0502

GENERAL

Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS)See Figure 4-45. The VSS is powered and monitored by theECM. The ECM processes the vehicle speed signal andtransmits this signal to the TSM/TSSM/ HFSM and speedo-meter over the serial data circuit.


DESCRIPTIONDTC

VSS lowP0501

VSS high/openP0502

ed02857

Figure 4-45. Vehicle Speed Sensor and Connector

NOTE

The MAP, TP, jiffy stand, and VSS sensors are connected tothe same reference line (+5V Vref). If the reference line goesto ground or open, multiple codes will be set (DTC P0107,P0108, P0122, P0123, P0501, P0502, P01501, P01502). Startwith the trouble code having the lowest ranking value.

DIAGNOSTICS





1. The speedometer has a built-in diagnostic mode. See2.3 ODOMETER SELF-DIAGNOSTICS.

2. Use HARNESS CONNECTOR TEST KIT (Part No. HD-41404-B), black pin probe and patch cord.


HOME


[39B]

BK

BK

R/W

BK/BE

LGN

/V

LGN

/VLG

N/V

LGN

/V

BK

/BE

BK/R

R/W

Tachometer-XRSpeedometer-XL

Speedometer-XR

VehicleSpeedSensor

7

7

2

LGN/V C

A

B

C

A

B

C

2XR XL

TSM/TSSM/HFSM

GND 1

TP AndJiffy Stand Sensor

Dat

abu

s

5

Ser

ialD

ata

Link

Veh

icle

Spe

edS

enso

rIn

put

5VS

enso

rP

ower

33

5

10

Gro

und

10 33

14

14

ECM

[108A][108B]

[39A][39B]

[78A][78B]

[20A][20B]

[65B][65A]

em01314

Figure 4-46. Vehicle Speed Sensor






Rear of transmission case3-place DelphiVSS[65]



HOME



1

YES NO

2

2

3

NO

NO

NOYES

NO

YES

YES


Inspect connector [65].Is connector mated properly?

Remove and inspect VSS. Inspect for debris and clean ifnecessary. Place odometer into diagnostic mode and clear

DTCs. Connect all circuits and ride motorcycle forapproximately 1.0 mile (1.6 km). Check for speedometer

function.Is speedometer functioning properly?

Mate connector [65].

System OK.

Check for continuity between terminalA of connector [65B] (BK/R) wire and

ground.Is continuity present?

Check for continuity between terminal Aof connector [65B] (BK/R) wire and

terminal 14 of Breakout Box.Is continuity present?

Check for continuity between terminal Cof connector [65B] (BK) wire and ground.


Locate and repair open on(R/W) and (BK/R) wires

between [78B] and [65B].

Repair open on (BK) wire betweenconnector [65B] and ground.

Repair short to ground.

YES

fc01988_en

Go to DTCsP0501 and P0502

(Part 2 of 2).

HOME




3

YES NO

2

YES

YES

NONO NO

NO


Check for continuity between terminal B of connector [65B] (BK/BE) wire andterminal 33 of Breakout Box.


Check for voltage at terminal 33 on breakoutbox. DVOM should read 4-6 volts when gear toothabsent and 0-1 volts when gear tooth is present.

Does voltage fall within specifications?

Locate and repair open on(BK/BE) wire between [78B]

and [65B].

No voltage fluctuation fromhigh (4-6 volts) to low (0-1

volts).

Battery voltage ispresent.

Voltage fluctuates from high(4.6 volts) to low (0-1 volts).


Locate and repair short tovoltage on (BK/BE) wire


Measure resistance betweenground and terminal 33 on

breakout box.Is resistance less than 100

ohms?

Replace VSS.

Locate and repair short toground on (BK/BE) wire



No voltagepresent.

fc01989_en

HOME


4.23DTC P0562, P0563

GENERAL

Battery VoltageSee Figure 4-48. Battery voltage is monitored by the ElectronicControl Module (ECM) (terminal "13"). If the battery voltagefails to meet normal operating parameters, a code is set.

NOTE

When either Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) P0562 or P0563is set, the battery icon in the speedometer on XL, tachometeron XR, will illuminate.

• DTC P0562 is displayed when battery voltage is less than12.2 volts at idle and voltage does not increase whenengine speed is greater than 2000 RPM.

• DTC P0563 is displayed when battery positive voltage isgreater than 15.0 volts for more than 4 seconds.

NOTES

• Warm idle speed will be automatically increased if batteryvoltage is low at idle.

• TSM/TSSM/HFSM problems may also set DTC P0562 orP0563.


DESCRIPTIONDTC

Battery voltage lowP0562

Battery voltage highP0563

ed02845

Figure 4-47. System Relay

DIAGNOSTICS



Diagnostic Tips• Low voltage generally indicates a loose wire, corroded

connections, battery and/or a charging system problem.

• A high voltage condition may be caused by a faulty voltageregulator.


1. Was battery allowed to discharge or be drawn down by astarting problem?

a. Yes. Charge battery.

b. No. See 1.7 CHARGING SYSTEM, Troubleshooting.


3. Use DVOM with RPM Pick-up to check RPM on vehicleswithout tachometers.

4. This checks for voltage drops in the ECM circuit.

a. Place (+) probe to battery positive terminal.

b. Place (-) probe to (W/BK) terminal on Breakout Box.

5. Problem is most likely the ground connection at the frame.

HOME


BK

GY

GY

GY

BK

BK

R R R

R

R

BE/GY

BE/GY BE/GY

GN/O GN/O

Y/GN

W/BK

W/BK

W/B

KW

/BK

R/BKR/BK

2

31

13

10

28

2

31

13

10

28

System Relay

ECM

Battery

4 3

4 3

Switch Power

30 AmpMAXIFUSE

Battery

IgnitionSwitch

To Fuel Pump Fuse

I - IGN

B - BATT

A - ACC

15 AmpIGN Fuse

15 AmpECM fuse

Ground

Ground


GND 1

SystemRelay

Fuse Block

[119A][119B]

8685

3087A87

12

345

US

ETK

[22B][22A]

[78B][78A]

Engine StopSwitch

em00266

Figure 4-48. Ignition Power Circuit






HOME




2

YES NO

3

4

5

1

YES

YES

YES

YES

YES

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

Perform charging system tests.Is charging system OK?

With ignition ON, measure voltage dropbetween battery positive (+) terminaland Breakout Box terminal “13” (-).


Repair charging system.See 1.7 CHARGING

SYSTEM.

Connect Breakout Box. Measure voltage onBreakout Box between terminal 13 (+) and

terminal 10 (-) and again between terminal 13and terminal 28 (-) with engine running at

2000 RPM or higher for 10 seconds or longer.Is voltage above 11.0 volts?

SystemOK.

1

Repair open on (W/BK)wire between [22B]

and [78B] or terminals.

Locate andrepairbad

connection.

Problem is intermittent.Perform 4.8 WIGGLE TEST.

Locate andrepair bad connection.

With ignition ON, measure resistancebetween ignition fuse and connector

[22B] terminal 3.Is resistance greater than 1 ohm?

Check for voltage drop between batterynegative (-) terminal and terminal 10 (+)on Breakout Box connector and betweenbattery negative (-) terminal and terminal

28 on Breakout Box.Is voltage drop greater than 0.5 volt?

With ignition OFF, measure resistancebetween Breakout Box terminal 13

and connector [22B] terminal 4.Is resistance greater than 1 ohm?

Inspect [22] forcorrosion or loose

wires.If above conditions are

not present, replaceengine stop switch.

fc01990_en

Go to DTCs P0562and P0563 (Part 2

of 2).

HOME




YES NO

YES

YES

YES

NO

NO

NO


With ignition ON, measure voltage drop between battery positive (+) terminal and(GY) terminal on 15 amp ignition fuse (-).


With ignition ON, measure voltage dropbetween battery positive (+) terminal and(R/BK) terminal at 15 amp ignition fuse.


With ignition ON, measure voltage dropbetween battery positive (+) and both fuse

terminals (-).Is voltage drop greater than 0.5 volt?

With ignition ON, measure voltage dropbetween battery positive (+) terminal and

one fuse terminal (-).Is voltage drop greater than 0.5 volt?

High resistance betweenmain fuse and battery.

Replace wire or terminals.

Replace GY wireor terminals.

Replace fuse orfuse terminals.

Replace ignitionswitch or terminals.

Replace main fuse.

fc01991_en

HOME


4.24DTC P0603, P0605

GENERAL



ECM FailureRefer to Table 4-38. The DTCs listed indicate a failure whichrequires replacement of the ECM. See the Service Manual forreplacement information.

NOTE

After replacing ECM, reprogram, perform password learningprocedure and clear codes. ECM must be reprogrammed usingthe DIGITAL TECHNICIAN II (Part No. HD-48650). See yourdealer. Password learn procedure must also be performed.See 3.23 TSM/HFSM: PASSWORD LEARN.


DESCRIPTIONDTC

ECM EEPROM errorP0603

ECM flash errorP0605

DIAGNOSTICSThese codes are set under two conditions.

• If DTC P0603 or P0605 occur during normal operation,replace ECM. Reprogram and learn password.

• If DTC P0603 or P0605 occur during or after reprogram-ming, perform the following:

DTC P06031. Clear DTCs.

2. Power down the vehicle. Wait 10 seconds.

3. Turn ignition ON.

4. Replace ECM if codes reappear.

DTC P06051. Clear DTCs.

2. Power down the vehicle.

3. Attempt to reprogram ECM using correct calibration.

4. Restart vehicle. If code reappears, replace ECM.

HOME


4.25DTC P0661, P0662

GENERAL

Active Intake Solenoid (HDI XR Models Only)The active intake solenoid regulates the amount of air thatenters the air cleaner. The active intake solenoid opens whenvehicle speed exceeds 45 MPH (70 km/h) with 50% or greaterthrottle opening. Once open, active intake will close whenvehicle speed falls below 40 MPH (65 km/h). The power forthe active intake solenoid comes from the engine control fuse.The ECM provides the path to ground to trigger the activeintake solenoid.


DESCRIPTIONDTC

Active intake solenoid open/lowP0661

Active intake high/shortedP0662

DIAGNOSTICS





1. See the service manual for all service information.

2. Connect a BREAKOUT BOX (Part No. HD-43876) betweenEFI wire harness and ECM. See 4.7 BREAKOUT BOX:EFI

3. Use HARNESS CONNECTOR TEST KIT (Part No. HD-41404-B), purple terminal probe and patch cord.

HOME


20

10

28

2

1

6

10

6

10

2

1

20

10

28

ECM

ActiveIntake

Solenoid

Battery

30 AmpMAXIFUSE

GND 1

Ignition Switch


Fuse

Active Intake Solenoid HDI

Ground

Ground

BK

BK

BK

R R

R

LGN/R

LGN/R

GY/OGY/O

R/BK

RR/B

K

[145B][145A][78B][78A]

AC

C−

BAT

T−

IGN

−

I B A

[178A][178B]

em01307

Figure 4-49. Active Intake Solenoid Circuit




Rear of air box2-place AmpActive Intake Solenoid (HDI)[178]

HOME



Is connector securely attached to theactive intake solenoid?

YES

1

Reconnect.

Turn active intake solenoid on bygrounding terminal 20 on breakout box.Solenoid should activate immediatelyafter ignition switch is turned to IGN.

Does it?

YES NO

Recheck connections. Perform4.8 WIGGLE TEST to check for

intermittents.Are intermittents present?

Check terminal 1 (LGN/R) wire onactive intake solenoid connector

[178B] to ground.Is voltage equivalent to battery voltageafter ignition switch is turned to IGN?

YES NO

Measure resistance ofactive intake solenoid

across solenoid terminals.Is resistance 16-20 ohms?

Repairintermittent.

NO

YES NO

Check for looseor corroded terminals

in harness.

Replaceactive intake

solenoid.

YES NO

Inspect enginecontrol fuse.Is fuse OK?

Locate and repairbad connection

or open on (LGN/R)wire between engine

control fuse andconnector [178B].

3

YES NO

Check for 12 volts at terminal Lof fuse block after ignitionswitch is turned to IGN.


YES NO

Replacefuse.

Locate and repairopen on (R/BK) wire to

engine control fuse.


2

fc01992_en

Go to DTCsP0661 and

P0662(Part 2 of 2).

HOME




Measure resistance between Breakout Boxterminal 20 (GY/O) wire and terminal 2 of active intake solenoid connector [178B].


YES NO

Measure resistance between groundand Breakout Box terminal 20.

Is resistance less than 1000 ohms?

Repair open orpoor connection.

YES NO

Repair short to ground on(GY/O) wire.

Disconnect connectors [178] and [78]. Checkfor voltage at Breakout Box terminal 20 with

ignition switch turned to IGN.Is voltage present?

Locate and repairshort to voltage on

(GY/O) wire.

YES NO


and learn password.


2

3

fc01993_en

HOME


4.26DTC P1009, P1010

GENERAL

Password ProblemThe ECM and TSM/TSSM/HFSM exchange passwords duringoperation. An incorrect password or missing password will seta diagnostic code.

NOTE

If the TSM/TSSM/HFSM is not connected to the wiring harness,the vehicle will not start.


DESCRIPTIONDTC

Incorrect passwordP1009

Missing passwordP1010

DIAGNOSTICS





1. DTC P1009 may be set if a recent ECM orTSM/TSSM/HFSM replacement did not follow the correctpassword assignment procedure. See 3.23 TSM/HFSM:PASSWORD LEARN for details.

2. Use HARNESS CONNECTOR TEST KIT (Part No. HD-41404-B), black socket probes and patch cord.


4. Historic codes DTC U1300 or DTC U1301 would also havebeen set. Clear codes.

5. See the service manual for TSM/TSSM/HFSM replace-ment. See 3.23 TSM/HFSM: PASSWORD LEARN for thepassword learning procedure.

ed01340


sm01275

Figure 4-51.TSM/TSSM/HFSM

HOME


BK

BK

BK

GY GYG

Y

O/W

O/W

O/W

O/W

O

O

O

R

BN

/GY

BN

/GY

BN

/GY

BN/GY

BN

/GY

LGN

/V BK

BK

BK

O/WO

O

BN

/GY

LGN

/V

LGN

/V

LGN

/V

LGN/V

LGN

/V

LGN

/V

R/BK

R/BK

R/GY

1 2 3 12

1 2 3 12

1 2 5 76

1 2 5 76

1 2 5 6 7

1 2 5 6 7

Igni

tion

Ser

iald

ata

Bat

tery

Acc

esso

ryG

roun

d

Igni

tion

Ser

ialD

ata

Bat

tery

Bat

tery

Igni

tion

Ser

ialD

ata

Gro

und

Acc

esso

ryG

roun

d

Speedometer

TSM/TSSM/HFSM


To ACCY Fuse

To BATT Fuse

To INSTR Fuse

To IGN Fuse

12V ACCYFuse

12V BATTFuse

12V INSTRFuse

12V IGNFuse

3

1

2

4

Data LinkConnector

21 6 7 12

21 6 7 12

ECM

Ser

ialD

ata

5

5

GND1

GND1

GND1[78B][78A]

[30A][30B]

[20A][20B]

[108A][108B]

[39A][39B]

[91A]

Ground

Serial Data

Power

em01120


HOME


BK

BK

BK

GY GY

O/W

O/W

O/W

O/W

O

R

BN

/GY

BN

/GY

BN

/GY

BN

/GY

BN/GY

LGN

/V BK

BK

GY

BK

O/WO

OO

BN

/GY

LGN

/V

LGN

/V

LGN

/V

LGN/V

LGN

/V

LGN

/V

R/BK

R/BK

R/GY

1 2 3 12

1 2 3 12

1 2 5 76

1 2 5 76

C B A D

C B A D

Ser

ialD

ata

Bat

tery

Acc

esso

ryG

roun

d

Igni

tion

Ser

ialD

ata

Bat

tery

Bat

tery

Igni

tion

Ser

ialD

ata

Gro

und

Acc

esso

ryG

roun

d

Speedometer

TSM/TSSM/HFSM

Tachometer

To ACCY Fuse

To BATT Fuse

To INSTR Fuse

To IGN Fuse

12V ACCYFuse

12V BATTFuse

12V INSTRFuse

12V IGNFuse

3

1

2

4

Ground

Serial Data

Power

Data LinkConnector

21 6 7 12

21 6 7 12

ECM

Ser

ialD

ata

5

5

GND1

GND1

GND1[78B][78A]

[108A][108B]

[20A][20B]

[39A][39B]

[30A][30B]

[91A]

em01304







Back of speedometer5-place PackardDisplay (XR)[39]


HOME






HOME




YES NOYES

YES YES

YES

YES

YES

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

45

5

5

1

5

4

5 2

2

2

3

Which diagnostic troublecode was set?

DTC P1010. No password.Are there any U-codes

set?

DTC P1009. Bad password. Perform passwordlearn. See 3.25 TSM/HFSM: PASSWORD LEARN.

Does DTC P1009 still exist?

Remove ECM connector [78]. Checkfor continuity to ground at data link

connector [91A] terminal 3.Is continuity present?

Replace TSM/TSSM/HFSMand relearn password.

System OK?

SystemOK.

Troubleshootlowest U-code.


SystemOK.

Reinstall original TSM/TSSM/HFSM.Replace ECM.Reprogram and

relearn password.


Check for battery voltage on terminal 3.Is battery voltage present?

Test data link connector [91A]terminal 3 against Breakout Box

terminal 5 for continuity.Is continuity present?

Replace TSM/TSSM/HFSM andrelearn password.

Is system OK?

Reinstall original TSM/TSSM/HFSM.Replace ECM. Reprogram and

relearn password.

SystemOK.

Inspect terminalsfor damage or repairopens as necessary.

NO

fc01857_en

HOME


4.27DTC P1351, P1352, P1354, P1355

GENERAL

Ignition CoilIgnition coil DTCs will set if the ignition coil primary voltage isout of range. This could occur if there is an open coil or lossof power to the coil. If front and rear DTCs are set simultan-eously, it is likely a coil power failure or a coil failure.

The coil receives power from the system relay at the sametime that the fuel pump and injectors are activated.The systemrelay is active for the first 2 seconds after the ignition switch isturned ON and then shuts off until RPM is detected from theCKP sensor, at which time it is reactivated. The ECM isresponsible for turning on the system relay by providing theground to activate the relay, which in turn powers the coil.


DESCRIPTIONDTC

Front ignition coil open/lowP1351

Front ignition coil high/shortedP1352

Rear ignition coil open/lowP1354

Rear ignition coil high/shortedP1355

DIAGNOSTICS





IGNITION COIL CIRCUIT TESTADAPTER

HD-44687


1. Use HARNESS CONNECTOR TEST KIT (Part No. HD-41404-B), gray pin probes and patch cord.

NOTEGently connect test lamp to connector [83B]. Forcefully insertingtest lamp will result in ignition connector terminal damage.

2. See Figure 4-54. Plug IGNITION COIL CIRCUIT TESTADAPTER (Part No. HD-44687) and FUEL INJECTORTEST LAMP (Part No. HD-34730-2C) into Breakout Box.Note that cranking the engine with test lamp in place ofthe ignition coil can sometimes cause a DTC P1351,P1352, P1354 or P1355. This condition is normal anddoes not by itself indicate a malfunction. DTCs must becleared if this condition occurs.

3. Connect BREAKOUT BOX (Part No. HD-43876) betweenEFI wire harness and ECM. See 4.7 BREAKOUT BOX:EFI.

4. Use HARNESS CONNECTOR TEST KIT (Part No. HD-41404-B), gray socket probes and patch cord.

ed02013

Figure 4-54. Ignition Coil Circuit Test

4321

ed02859

1. Pin A: coil primary battery+2. Pin B: coil primary battery+3. Pin C: coil B primary4. Pin D: coil A primary

Figure 4-55. Ignition Coil Connector Terminals

HOME


SystemRelay

Front Injector

Rear Injector

15 AmpECM Fuse

15 AmpFuel Pump

Fuse

30 AmpMAXIFUSE

15 AmpIGN Fuse

Igni

tion

TSM/HFSM

FuelPump

IgnitionCoil

Battery

System Relay

Front Injector

Rear Injector

Rear Coil

Front Coil

Battery

Switch Power

Ground

Ground

BK

BK

GY

BK

GY

BKBK

GY

GY

W/Y W/YW/Y

R

R

R RR

GN/GY GN/GYGN/GY

BE/GY BE/GY

BE/GYGN/O

Y/G

N

Y/BE

BE/O

Y/BE

BE/O

R/BK R/BK

W/BK

GN/O

Y/GN

O/GYO/GYY/GN

Y/GN

Y/GN

W/B

KW

/BK

Y/GN

Y/GN

Y/GN

W/BK

10

19

21

2

31

13

28

AB

AB

AB

AB

1

4

1

4

13

7

8

13

7

8

[145A] [145B]

2

2

11

29

10

19

21

2

31

13

28

11

29

A

B

C

D

ECM

A

B

C

D

4 3

4 3

Fuse Block

GND 1

GND 1


[22B][22A]

[30B][30A]

[83A][83B]

[119A][119B]

[85A][85B]

[84A][84B]

[141B][141A]

[78B][78A]

8685

3087A87

12

345

US

ETK

Engine StopSwitch

em00265

IgnitionSwitch

B

A

I

Figure 4-56. Ignition Coil Circuit









HOME







HOME



2

NOYES


1

3

4

Disconnect coil connector [83]. Measurevoltage on terminal A of wire harness.

Is voltage equal to battery voltage duringfirst 2 seconds after key ON?

Use Breakout Box and testlight for the next inspection.

Front coil codes: Check betweenECM terminal 29 and ECM terminal 13.

Rear coil codes: Check betweenECM terminal 11 and ECM terminal 13.

Does test lamp flash when engine is cranked?

Measure coil resistance.

Front coil codes: Check betweencoil terminal A and terminal D.

Rear coil codes: Check betweencoil terminal A and terminal C.

Is resistance 0.3-0.7 ohms?

Measure voltage at systemrelay terminal 30 (BE/GY) during

first 2 seconds after key ON.Is voltage equivalent to battery

voltage?

Check for multiple codes. SeeMULTIPLE DIAGNOSTIC

TROUBLE CODES under 4.4CHECKING FOR DIAGNOSTIC

TROUBLE CODES: EFI.

Repair open wire orconnection on (BE/GY)

wire.

Replace coil. Seeservice manual.

YES

YESYES

NO

NONO

fc01994_en

Go to DTCs P1351,P1352, P1354, andP1355 (Part 2 of 2).

Go to DTCs P1351,P1352, P1354, andP1355 (Part 2 of 2).

HOME



1

YES NO

Clear DTCs using odometer self -diagnostics. See 4.6ODOMETER SELF -DIAGNOSTICS. Confirm properoperation with no check engine lamp.

3

Perform 4.8 WIGGLE TESTto check for intermittents.Are intermittents present?

Repair open wireor connection.

Repairintermittent.

NOYES

YES NO

Check for continuity to ground.

Front coil codes: CheckBreakout Box terminal 29.

Rear coil codes: CheckBreakout Box terminal 11.


Check for voltage.

Front coil codes: CheckBreakout Box terminal 29.

Rear coil codes: CheckBreakout Box terminal 11.

Is voltage present?



Continued from DTCs P1351, P1352, P1354, andP1355 (Part 1 of 2).

Using Breakout Box, measure resistance betweenECM and coil terminals as follows.

COIL

TERMINAL

D

(BE/O wire)

C

(Y/BE wire)

BREAKOUTBOX

TERMINAL

29

11

DTC

P1351/

P1352

P1353/

P1354

Is resistance less than 0.5 ohms?


YES NO

fc01995_en

HOME


4.28DTC P1501, P1502

GENERAL

Jiffy Stand Sensor (HDI)The jiffy stand sensor utilizes a Hall effect sensor to monitorjiffy stand position. When the jiffy stand is fully retracted thesensor picks up the presence of the metal tab mounted to thejiffy stand. The metal tab is moved away from the sensor asthe jiffy stand is extended.When the jiffy stand is extended theengine will start and run only if the TSM/TSSM/HFSMdetermines the transmission is in neutral. Otherwise the enginewill start and stall.This is done by monitoring the neutral switchinput to the TSM/TSSM/HFSM and communicating that inputover the serial data circuit to the ECM.

The jiffy stand sensor also has a Fail Enable Mode.This modeallows the engine to start and run if the system recognizes aproblem with the jiffy stand sensor circuit. If a problem existsor if the transmission is put in gear with the jiffy stand extendedthe odometer will display "SIdE Stand". Code P1501 or P1502will set if the jiffy stand sensor circuits are out of range.

See Figure 4-57. The jiffy stand sensor is powered and mon-itored by the ECM. The ECM (terminal 14) supplies the 5Vreference to the jiffy stand sensor connector [133] (terminal 1).See Figure 4-58. The jiffy stand sensor (terminal 2) sends asignal back to the ECM (terminal 9). This signal is how theECM determines if the jiffy stand is retracted or extended.Thejiffy stand sensor (terminal 3) is grounded through the Power-train Ground Point [GND 1].

NOTE

The ECM supplies not only the jiffy stand sensor but also theVSS, the TP sensor, and the TMAP sensor with a 5V referencesignal from terminal 14.


DESCRIPTIONDTC

Jiffy Stand Sensor lowP1501

Jiffy Stand Sensor highP1502

DIAGNOSTICS


1. Unplug the neutral switch connector [136]. Using a DVOM,test for continuity to ground. When the transmission is inneutral, continuity should exist. When the transmission isin gear, there should not be continuity to ground throughthe neutral switch.

2. See the service manual for TSM/TSSM/HFSM replace-ment. See 3.23 TSM/HFSM: PASSWORD LEARN,Password Learning for the password learning procedure.

3. When the jiffy stand is retracted, voltage on terminal 9should be approximately 1.5-2V. When the jiffy stand isextended, the voltage on terminal 9 should be approxim-ately 4-4.5V.

ed01247

Figure 4-57. Jiffy Stand Sensor

ed01248

Figure 4-58. Jiffy Stand Sensor Connector

HOME


BK

BK

BK

R/W

R/W

R/W

GN

/BN

9

Jiffy

stan

dse

nsor

inpu

t

Gro

und

5Vse

nsor

pow

er

28

9 28

14

14

ECM

1 2 3

1 2 3

[133A]

To TMAP and TP sensor

To VSS

[GND1]

[133B]

Jiffy StandSensor

[78B]

[78A]

BK/R

em01216

Figure 4-59. Jiffy Stand Sensor Circuit




Left along frame toward front of engine3-place MolexJiffy Stand Sensor[133]

HOME


Side Stand Displayed on Odometer

NOYES


1

Is the transmission in neutral?

Check for DTCs.Are any DTCs present?

Go to STARTS THENSTALLS Diagnostics.

Replace jiffy standsensor.

Test neutral switch.Is neutral switch operating

correctly?

Is neutral lamp ON?Go to appropriate DTC

Diagnostics.

YES

YES

YES

NO

NO

NO

2

Doses the enginestart then stall?

Place transmission inneutral.

Measure continuity between [131B] (TN)wire and [30B].


Inspect the jiffy stand sensor and the jiffy standfor correct mounting and clearance to jiffy stand

tab (4.5mm) max.Is switch and stand mounted correctly?

YES NO YES

YES

NO

NO

Install jiffy standsensor or jiffy stand

correctly.

Locate and repair openin neutral switch

circuit.



fc01860_en

HOME


DTC P1501

NOYES


Disconnect jiffy stand sensor connector. Turn ignition switch on.Make sure the engine stop switch is in the RUN position. Test

terminal 1 of connector [133B] for voltage.Is voltage present?

Locate and repair open in(R/W) wire between[133B] and [78B].

Replace jiffy standsensor.

Disconnect connector [78] ECM. Test circuit terminal 9connector [78B] for continuity to ground.


Replace ECM.Locate and repair short to

ground.

YES

YES

NO

NO

Check for DTCs.Did DTC P1501 clear or go to history

and P1502 set as a current DTC?

fc01861_en

HOME


DTC P1502

NOYES


Disconnect jiffy stand sensor connector. Test for continuity between connector [133B]terminal 3 and ground.Is continuity present?

Locate andrepair open.

Is voltageapproximately 5V?

Turn off ignition switch. Test for continuity fromconnector [133B] terminal 1 to ground.


Test for continuityfrom connector

[133B] terminal 1 toconnector [78B]

terminal 14.Is continuity present?


YES

YES

NO

NO

Turn ignition switch on withengine stop switch in RUN. Test

for voltage on terminal 1connector [133B]

Is voltage present?

YES NO


Replace ECM.

YES NO

Disconnect ECM. Measurevoltage at terminal 9 (+) onBreakout Box to ground (-).

Is voltage present?

NO YES


Replace ECM.

Turn off ignition switch. ConnectECM Breakout Box (Part No. HD-

43876) to wiring harness connector[78B] leaving ECM connector [78A]

disconnected. Test for continuityfrom connector [78B] terminal 9 to

connector [133B] terminal 2Is continuity present?

NOYES

YES NO


Connect ECM Breakout Box (Part No.HD-43876) to ECM connector [78A].Connect jiffy stand sensor connector[133]. Test terminal 9 of the Breakout

Box for voltage with the jiffy standretracted and extended.

Are the voltages within the specification?

Replace ECM.Replace jiffy stand

sensor.

fc01862_en

3

HOME


4.29DTC U1064, U1255

GENERAL

Loss of TSM/TSSM/HFSM Serial DataThe serial data connector provides a means for the ElectronicControl Module (ECM), TSM/TSSM/HFSM and speedometeron XL, and tachometer on XR, to communicate their currentstatus. When all operating parameters on the serial data linkare within specifications, a state of health message is sentbetween the components. A Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)U1064 indicates that the TSM/TSSM/HFSM is not receivingthis state of health message. A DTC U1255 indicates that nomessages were present during power up of the current keycycle. A DTC U1064 indicates that there was communicationon the data bus since power up, but communication was lostor interrupted during that key cycle.


DESCRIPTIONDTC

Loss of TSM/TSSM/HFSM serial dataU1064


DIAGNOSTICS



INSTRUMENT HARNESS ADAPTERHD-46601


1. Connect BREAKOUT BOX (Part No. HD-42682) as fol-lows:

a. Mate black socket housing on Breakout Box withspeedometer connector [39A] on XL, and tachometerconnector [108A] on XR, using INSTRUMENT HAR-NESS ADAPTER (Part No. HD-46601).

b. Mate black pin housing on Breakout Box withspeedometer harness connector [39B] on XL, andtachometer connector [108B] on XR, using INSTRU-MENT (Part No. HD-46601).

c. Mate gray socket housing on Breakout Box withTSM/TSSM/HFSM connector [30A].

d. Mate gray pin housing on Breakout Box with harnessconnector [30B].

HOME


BK

BK

BK

GY GY

GY

O/W

O/W

O/W

O/W

O

O

O

R

BN

/GY

BN

/GY

BN

/GY

BN/GY

BN

/GY

LGN

/V BK

BK

BK

O/WO

O

BN

/GY

LGN

/V

LGN

/V

LGN

/V

LGN/V

LGN

/V

LGN

/V

R/BK

R/BK

R/GY

1 2 3 12

1 2 3 12

1 2 5 76

1 2 5 76

1 2 5 6 7

1 2 5 6 7

Igni

tion

Ser

iald

ata

Bat

tery

Acc

esso

ryG

roun

d

Igni

tion

Ser

ialD

ata

Bat

tery

Bat

tery

Igni

tion

Ser

ialD

ata

Gro

und

Acc

esso

ryG

roun

d

Speedometer

TSM/TSSM/HFSM


To ACCY Fuse

To BATT Fuse

To INSTR Fuse

To IGN Fuse

12V ACCYFuse

12V BATTFuse

12V INSTRFuse

12V IGNFuse

3

1

2

4

Data LinkConnector

21 6 7 12

21 6 7 12

ECM

Ser

ialD

ata

5

5

GND1

GND1

GND1[78B][78A]

[30A][30B]

[20A][20B]

[108A][108B]

[39A][39B]

[91A]

Ground

Serial Data

Power

em01120


HOME


BK

BK

BK

GY GY

O/W

O/W

O/W

O/W

O

R

BN

/GY

BN

/GY

BN

/GY

BN

/GY

BN/GY

LGN

/V BK

BK

GY

BK

O/WO

OO

BN

/GY

LGN

/V

LGN

/V

LGN

/V

LGN/V

LGN

/V

LGN

/V

R/BK

R/BK

R/GY

1 2 3 12

1 2 3 12

1 2 5 76

1 2 5 76

C B A D

C B A DS

eria

lDat

a

Bat

tery

Acc

esso

ryG

roun

d

Igni

tion

Ser

ialD

ata

Bat

tery

Bat

tery

Igni

tion

Ser

ialD

ata

Gro

und

Acc

esso

ryG

roun

d

Speedometer

TSM/TSSM/HFSM

Tachometer

To ACCY Fuse

To BATT Fuse

To INSTR Fuse

To IGN Fuse

12V ACCYFuse

12V BATTFuse

12V INSTRFuse

12V IGNFuse

3

1

2

4

Ground

Serial Data

Power

Data LinkConnector

21 6 7 12

21 6 7 12

ECM

Ser

ialD

ata

5

5

GND1

GND1

GND1[78B][78A]

[108A][108B]

[20A][20B]

[39A][39B]

[30A][30B]

[91A]

em01304

Figure 4-61. Serial Circuit Data (XR)








HOME




Behind left side cover4-place DeutschData link connector[91]


HOME



Can you read TSM/TSSM/HFSM hardware part number?See 4.6 ODOMETER SELF-DIAGNOSTICS.

Install Breakout Box on speedometer.While wiggling harness, check for continuity

between terminal 3 (gray) and terminal 2(black) of Breakout Box.


Install Breakout Box on speedometer on XL,tachometer on XR.

Check for continuity between terminal 3 (gray)and terminal 2 (black) of Breakout Box


Replace TSM/TSSM/HFSM.Learn password.



Clear DTCs. Test ride.Does DTC U1064 return?

No trouble found.Replace TSM/TSSM/HFSM.

Learn password.

1

YES

NO


NO

NO

YESYES

YES

NO or “No Rsp”

1

fc01863_en

HOME


4.30DTC U1097, U1255

GENERAL

Loss of Speedometer Serial DataThe serial data connector provides a means for the speedo-meter on XL, and tachometer on XR, Electronic Control Module(ECM) and TSM/TSSM/HFSM to communicate their currentstatus. When all operating parameters on the serial data linkare within specifications, a state of health message is sentbetween the components. A Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)U1097 indicates that the speedometer on XL, and tachometeron XR, is not capable of sending this state of health message.A DTC U1255 indicates that no messages were present duringpower up of the current key cycle. A DTC U1097 indicates thatthere was communication on the data bus since power up, butcommunication was lost or interrupted during that key cycle.


DESCRIPTIONDTC

Loss of all speedometer serial data (stateof health)

U1097

Missing message at speedometerU1255

DIAGNOSTICS




INSTRUMENT HARNESS ADAPTERHD-46601

NOTE

If DTC is historic and not current, wiggle wire harness whileperforming voltage and continuity tests to identify intermittents.


1. Connect BREAKOUT BOX (Part No. HD-43876) to wireharness connector [78B]. Leave ECM [78A] disconnected.See 4.7 BREAKOUT BOX: EFI.

2. Connect BREAKOUT BOX (Part No. HD-42682) (black)to wire harness connector [39B] on XL, and connector[108B] on XR, using INSTRUMENT (Part No. HD-46601).Leave speedometer [39A] on XL, and connector [108A]on XR, disconnected. See 2.5 BREAKOUT BOX:SPEEDOMETER/TACHOMETER.

ed02819

Figure 4-62. Speedometer Connector [39] on XL, andtachometer connector [108A] on XR (Typical)

HOME


BK

BK

BK

GY GYG

Y

O/W

O/W

O/W

O/W

O

O

O

R

BN

/GY

BN

/GY

BN

/GY

BN/GY

BN

/GY

LGN

/V BK

BK

BK

O/WO

O

BN

/GY

LGN

/V

LGN

/V

LGN

/V

LGN/V

LGN

/V

LGN

/V

R/BK

R/BK

R/GY

1 2 3 12

1 2 3 12

1 2 5 76

1 2 5 76

1 2 5 6 7

1 2 5 6 7

Igni

tion

Ser

iald

ata

Bat

tery

Acc

esso

ryG

roun

d

Igni

tion

Ser

ialD

ata

Bat

tery

Bat

tery

Igni

tion

Ser

ialD

ata

Gro

und

Acc

esso

ryG

roun

d

Speedometer

TSM/TSSM/HFSM


To ACCY Fuse

To BATT Fuse

To INSTR Fuse

To IGN Fuse

12V ACCYFuse

12V BATTFuse

12V INSTRFuse

12V IGNFuse

3

1

2

4

Data LinkConnector

21 6 7 12

21 6 7 12

ECM

Ser

ialD

ata

5

5

GND1

GND1

GND1[78B][78A]

[30A][30B]

[20A][20B]

[108A][108B]

[39A][39B]

[91A]

Ground

Serial Data

Power

em01120


HOME


BK

BK

BK

GY GY

O/W

O/W

O/W

O/W

O

R

BN

/GY

BN

/GY

BN

/GY

BN

/GY

BN/GY

LGN

/V BK

BK

GY

BK

O/WO

OO

BN

/GY

LGN

/V

LGN

/V

LGN

/V

LGN/V

LGN

/V

LGN

/V

R/BK

R/BK

R/GY

1 2 3 12

1 2 3 12

1 2 5 76

1 2 5 76

C B A D

C B A D

Ser

ialD

ata

Bat

tery

Acc

esso

ryG

roun

d

Igni

tion

Ser

ialD

ata

Bat

tery

Bat

tery

Igni

tion

Ser

ialD

ata

Gro

und

Acc

esso

ryG

roun

d

Speedometer

TSM/TSSM/HFSM

Tachometer

To ACCY Fuse

To BATT Fuse

To INSTR Fuse

To IGN Fuse

12V ACCYFuse

12V BATTFuse

12V INSTRFuse

12V IGNFuse

3

1

2

4

Ground

Serial Data

Power

Data LinkConnector

21 6 7 12

21 6 7 12

ECM

Ser

ialD

ata

5

5

GND1

GND1

GND1[78B][78A]

[108A][108B]

[20A][20B]

[39A][39B]

[30A][30B]

[91A]

em01304









HOME




Behind left side cover4-place DeutschData link connector[91]


HOME



1

YES

NO


YES

YES

YESNO

NO

1

22

IMPORTANT:Always start from

4.5 INITIAL DIAGNOSTIC CHECK: EFI.

Can you read ECM hardware part number?See 4.6 ODOMETER SELF-DIAGNOSTICS.

While wiggling harness, check for continuity between ECMBreakout Box terminal 5 and speedometer Breakout Box

terminal 2 (black).Is continuity present?

Check for continuity betweenECM Breakout Box terminal 5and speedometer Breakout

Box terminal 2 (black).Is continuity present?

Replacespeedometer on XL,tachometer on XR.

Repair openon

(LGN/V) wire.

Clear DTCs. Test Ride.Did DTC U1097 return?

Repair intermittent on(LGN/V) wire.

No trouble found.Replace speedometer.

NO or “No rsp”

fc01864_en

HOME


4.31FUEL PRESSURE TEST

GENERALThe fuel pump delivers fuel through the fuel line, to a cavity inthe induction module. This cavity directs the fuel to the fuelinjectors and pressure regulator. The pressure regulator con-trols the fuel pressure by passing excess fuel back to the fueltank. Improper fuel pressure may contribute to one of the fol-lowing symptoms:

• cranks, but won't run

• cut out (may feel like ignition problem)

• hesitation, loss of power, or poor fuel economy

If incorrect fuel pressure is suspected, perform a fuel pressuretest. See the service manual for the required tools and pro-cedure for performing a fuel pressure test.

DIAGNOSTICSPerform a fuel pressure test. See the service manual.The fuelpressure should remain steady between 55-62 PSI (380-425KPa). If pressure does not hold steady, follow either the lowfuel pressure or high fuel pressure procedure, depending onthe symptom.

Low Fuel Pressure1. Check the fuel filter or pump inlet screen for restrictions.

If the concern is found, clean the pump inlet screen orreplace the fuel filter.

2. If the concern was not corrected, inspect for a:

• restricted pressure line or flex hose between the fuel tankand the test gauge.

• faulty fuel pump.

• restricted check valve fitting assembly.

• leak inside the tank caused by faulty coupling hose orconnection, such as a hose at the filter or pump. Thiscondition can be identified, if the fuel level in the tank islow, by a ringing sound inside the tank during the first 2seconds after key on.This is caused by the high pressurefuel spraying against the inside of the tank.

• faulty fuel pressure regulator.

Once the concern is located, repair as needed.

High Fuel Pressure1. Inspect the check valve fitting assembly and the fuel tank.

If the concern is found correct as needed.

2. If the concern was not corrected, replace the fuel regulator.

HOME


TABLE OF CONTENTS

SUBJECT............................................................................................................................PAGE NO.A.1 AMP MULTILOCK CONNECTORS..........................................................................................A-1A.2 DELPHI CONNECTORS..........................................................................................................A-6A.3 DEUTSCH 1-PLACE ELECTRICAL CONNECTORS...............................................................A-8A.4 DEUSCH ELECTRICAL CONNECTORS.................................................................................A-9A.5 DEUTSCH STANDARD TERMINALS.....................................................................................A-13A.6 DEUTSCH MINI-TERMINAL CRIMPS...................................................................................A-14A.7 DEUTSCH SOLID BARREL TERMINALS..............................................................................A-15A.8 RELAY AND FUSE BLOCKS..................................................................................................A-17A.9 150 METRI-PACK CONNECTORS.........................................................................................A-18A.10 280 METRI-PACK CONNECTORS.......................................................................................A-20A.11 480 METRI-PACK CONNECTORS.......................................................................................A-22A.12 630 METRI-PACK CONNECTORS.......................................................................................A-23A.13 800 METRI-PACK CONNECTORS.......................................................................................A-24A.14 METRI-PACK TERMINALS...................................................................................................A-26A.15 MOLEX CONNECTORS.......................................................................................................A-28A.16 PACKARD ECM CONNECTOR............................................................................................A-30A.17 PACKARD MICRO-64 CONNECTORS................................................................................A-32A.18 SEALED SPLICE CONNECTORS.......................................................................................A-35

AP

PE

ND

IX A

CO

NN

EC

TOR

RE

PAIR


A.1AMP MULTILOCK CONNECTORS

AMP MULTILOCK CONNECTOR REPAIR


AMP MULTILOCK CRIMPERHD-41609

GeneralAMP Multilock connectors are found between wire harnessesand component wiring and may be either floating or anchoredto the frame with attachment clips.

See Figure A-1. Attachment clips (1) on the pin housings arefitted to T-studs on the motorcycle frame. The T-studs identifyOE connector locations. To maintain serviceability, alwaysreturn connectors to OE locations after service.

Obtain the necessary tools to repair the connector and ter-minals.

NOTE

For terminal crimping use the AMP MULTILOCKCRIMPER (Part No. HD-41609).

Separating Pin and Socket Housings1. If necessary, slide connector attachment clip T-stud to the

large end of the opening.

2. See Figure A-1. Depress the release button (2) on thesocket terminal side of the connector and pull the sockethousing (3) out of the pin housing (4).

Mating Pin and Socket Housings1. Hold the housings to match wire color to wire color.

2. Insert the socket housing into the pin housing until it snapsin place.

3. If OE location is a T-stud, fit large opening end of attach-ment clip over T-stud and slide connector to engage T-stud to small end of opening.

23

1

4

sm00002

1. Attachment clip2. Release button3. Socket housing4. Pin housing

Figure A-1. AMP Multilock Connector

Removing Terminals from Housing1. See Figure A-2. Bend back the latch (1) to free one end

of secondary lock (2) then repeat on the opposite end.Hinge the secondary lock outward.

2. Look in the terminal side of the connector (opposite thesecondary lock) and note the cavity next to each terminal.

3. Insert a pick or pin into the terminal cavity until it stops.

NOTEIf socket/pin terminal tool is not available, a push pin/safety pinor a Snap-on pick (Part No. TT600-3) may be used.

4. Press the tang in the housing to release the terminal.

a. Socket: Lift the socket tang (8) up.

b. Pin: Press the pin tang (7) down.

NOTEA "click" is heard if the tang is released.

5. Gently tug on wire to pull wire and terminal from cavity.

HOME

2009 Sportster Diagnostics: Appendix A Connector Repair A-1

5

2

7

1

3

61

24

8

sm00013

1. Latch2. Secondary lock open3. Pin housing4. Socket housing5. Pin terminal6. Socket terminal7. Tang (pin)8. Tang (socket)

Figure A-2. AMP Multilock Connector: Socket and PinHousings

Inserting Terminals into HousingNOTE

See Figure A-3. Cavity numbers are stamped into the sec-ondary locks of both the socket and pin housings. Match thewire color to the cavity number found on the wiring diagram.

1. Hold the terminal so the catch faces the tang in thechamber. Insert the terminal into its numbered cavity untilit snaps in place.

NOTES• Up and down can be determined by the position of the

release button, the button is the top of the connector.

• On the pin side of the connector, tangs are positioned atthe bottom of each cavity, so the slot in the pin terminal(on the side opposite the crimp tails) must face downward.

• On the socket side, tangs are at the top of each cavity, sothe socket terminal slot (on the same side as the crimptails) must face upward.

2. Gently tug on wire end to verify that the terminal is lockedin place.

3. Rotate the hinged secondary lock inward until tabs fullyengage latches on both sides of connector.

– AMP

1 2 3

– AMP

1 2 3 4 5 6

5 6 7 8 9 10

4321

1

2

3

sm00005

1. 3-place housing2. 6-place housing3. 10-place housing

Figure A-3. AMP Multilock Connector: Cavity Numbers onSecondary Locks (Socket Housings Shown)

Preparing Wire Leads for Crimping1. Strip 5/32 in. (4.0 mm) of insulation from the wire lead.

HOME

A-2 2009 Sportster Diagnostics: Appendix A Connector Repair

2. See Figure A-2 and Figure A-5. Select the pin/socket ter-minals from the parts catalog and identify the insulationcrimp tails (1) and the wire crimp tails (2) and the groovefor the crimp tool locking bar (3).

3. Identify the wire lead gauge and the corresponding crimpertool and nesting die. Refer to Table A-1.

Table A-1. AMP Multilock Connector: Crimp Tool WireGauge/Nest

NESTWIRE GAUGE

Front20

Middle16

Rear18

5

2

7

1

3

61

24

8

sm00013

1. Latch2. Secondary lock open3. Pin housing4. Socket housing5. Pin terminal6. Socket terminal7. Tang (pin)8. Tang (socket)

Figure A-4. AMP Multilock Connector: Socket and PinHousings

HOME


2

3

1sm00001

1. Insulation crimp tail2. Wire crimp tail3. Locking bar groove

Figure A-5. AMP Multilock Connector: Socket Terminal

Crimping Terminals to LeadsNOTE

Crimping with an Amp Multilock tool is a one step operation.One squeeze crimps both the wire core and the insulation tails.

1. See Figure A-6. Squeeze the handles to cycle the AMPMULTILOCK CRIMPER (Part No. HD-41609) to the fullyopen position (1).

2. Raise locking bar by pushing up on bottom flange (2).

NOTESee Figure A-2 and Figure A-5. Hold the terminal with theinsulation crimp tail (1) facing up.The tool will hold the terminalby the locking bar groove (3) and crimp the wire crimp tail (2)around the bare wire of the stripped lead and the insulationcrimp tail around the insulation.

3. See Figure A-6. With the insulation crimp tail facingupward, insert terminal (pin or socket) (3) through thelocking bar, so that the closed side of the terminal restson the nest of the crimp tool.

4. Release locking bar to lock position of contact (4). Whencorrectly positioned, the locking bar fits snugly in the spaceat the front of the core crimp tails.

5. Insert stripped end of lead (5) until ends make contact withlocking bar.

6. Verify that wire is positioned so that wire crimp tailssqueeze bare wire strands, while insulation crimp tails foldover the wire lead insulation.

7. Squeeze handle of crimp tool until tightly closed. Toolautomatically opens when the crimping sequence is com-plete.

8. Raise up locking bar (7) and remove crimped terminal.

4

6

7

3

1

2

5

8

sm00007

1. Open position2. Locking bar flange3. Insert contact4. Release locking bar5. Insert lead6. Squeeze7. Raise locking bar8. Remove crimped terminal

Figure A-6. AMP Multilock Connector:Terminal CrimpingProcedure

Inspecting Crimped TerminalsSee Figure A-7. Inspect the wire core crimp (2) and insulationcrimp (1). Distortion should be minimal.

HOME


1

2

sm00008

1. Insulation crimp2. Wire core crimp

Figure A-7. AMP Multilock Connector:Terminal Crimp

HOME


A.2DELPHI CONNECTORS

DELPHI CONNECTOR REPAIR

GeneralDelphi connectors are embossed with the brand name, Delphi,on the housing latch.

Separating Pin and Socket HousingsSee Figure A-8. Bend back the external latch(es) slightly andseparate pin and socket halves of connector.

Mating Pin and Socket HousingsPush pin and socket halves of connector together until externallatch(es) engage.

Removing Socket TerminalsNOTE

Although the parts of the different Delphi connectors vary inappearance, the instructions which follow will work for all. Theonly exception is the oil pressure sender connector [139B], theterminals of which are removed like the Packard push-to-seatconnectors. Therefore, see A.9 150 METRI-PACK CON-NECTORS to remove/install terminals in this connector.

1. See Figure A-9. If present, free one side of wire lock (1)from ear on wire end of socket housing, then release theother side. Release wires from channels in wire lock andremove from socket housing.

2. Use a fingernail to pry colored terminal lock (2) loose andthen remove from mating end of socket housing.

3. Using a thin flat blade, like the unsharpened edge of ahobby knife, gently pry tang (3) outward away from ter-minal, and then tug on wire to back terminal out wire endof chamber. Do not pull on wire until tang is released orterminal will be difficult to remove.

Installing Socket TerminalsNOTE

For wire location purposes, alpha or numeric characters arestamped into the wire end of each socket housing.

1. Gently push tang on socket housing inward towardchamber. With the open side of the terminal facing thetang, push terminal into chamber at wire end of sockethousing.

2. Gently tug on wire to verify that terminal is locked and willnot back out of chamber. If necessary, use fingernail topush tang into engagement with terminal.

3. Install colored terminal lock onto mating end of sockethousing.

4. If present, seat wires in separate channels of wire lockand then push channels inside chambers at wire end ofsocket housing. Fully installed, slot on each side of wirelock engages ear on socket housing.

sm00014

Figure A-8. Delphi Connector: Socket Housing Latch

HOME


2

3

1

sm00015

1. Remove wire lock2. Remove terminal lock3. Pry tang outward

Figure A-9. Delphi Connector: Removing Socket Terminals

HOME


A.3DEUTSCH 1-PLACE ELECTRICAL CONNECTORS

DEUTSCH 1-PLACE CONNECTOR REPAIR

Separating Pin and Socket HousingsDepress external latch and separate the pin and socket hous-ings of the Deutsch one place connector found on voltageregulators.

Mating Pin and Socket HousingsOrient the housings so the latch faces the catch and push thehousings together until it clicks.

Removing Socket TerminalsNOTE

Rough handling or careless storage can result in tool damage.Exercise care to avoid cracking or breaking the thin plasticconstruction.

1. Pull rear wire seal from back of housing and slide downvoltage regulator cable to move out of the way.

2. See Figure A-10. Using terminal pick tool (Deutsch®114008) (1), install tool onto voltage regulator cable sothat the tapered end is in the wire end of the housing (2).

3. Push tool into wire end of housing until it bottoms. Gentlytug on housing to pull from terminal (3).

4. Remove tool from voltage regulator cable.

Installing Socket Terminals1. Insert terminal into wire end of housing until it "clicks" in

place. Verify that terminal will not back out of housing. Aslight tug on the voltage regulator cable will confirm thatit is properly locked in place.

2. Fit rear wire seal into back of housing.

1

2

3

sm00016

1. Deutsch terminal pick tool (114008)2. Tool installed in housing3. Terminal removed from housing

Figure A-10. Deutsch 1-Place Connector: RemoveSocket/Pin Housing

HOME


A.4DEUSCH ELECTRICAL CONNECTORS

DEUTSCH CONNECTOR REPAIR


DEUTSCH CONNECTOR SERVICEKIT

HD-41475

FLAT BLADE L-HOOKHD-41475-100

GeneralDeutsch connectors are colored coded for location purposes.Those connectors associated with left side accessories, suchas the front and rear left turn signals, are gray. All other con-nectors, including those associated with right side accessories,are black.

NOTE

A DEUTSCH CONNECTOR SERVICE KIT (Part No. HD-41475) contains a selection of wire seals, internal seals, sealplugs, secondary locking wedges, attachment clips andsocket/pin terminals. Also included is a compartmented storagebox, carrying case and a FLAT BLADE L-HOOK (Part No. HD-41475-100) is used for the removal of all types of lockingwedges.

Separating Pin and Socket HousingsSee Figure A-10. To separate the connector halves, depressthe external latch(es) (1) on the socket housing (2) whilerocking the pin (3) and socket housings.

NOTES

• Generally, the socket housing is found on the accessoryside, while the pin housing is plumbed to the wiring har-ness.

• Two-, three-, four- and six-place Deutsch connectors haveone latch on the connector.

• Eight- and twelve-place connectors have a latch on eachside. Simultaneously press both latches to separate theconnector.

Mating Pin and Socket Housings1. Align the connectors to match the wire lead colors.

a. For One External Latch: Two-, three-, four- and six-place Deutsch connectors have one external latch onthe socket half of the connector. To fit the halves ofthe connector together, the latch on the socket sidemust be aligned with the latch cover on the pin side.

b. For Two External Latches: (8-place and 12-place)Align the tabs on the socket housing with the grooveson the pin housing.

2. Insert socket housing into pin housing until it snaps orclicks into place.

For Two External Latches: (8-place and 12-place) Iflatches do not click (latch), press on one side of the con-nector until that latch engages, then press on the oppositeside to engage the other latch.

3. If necessary, fit the attachment clip to the pin housing.

4. Place large end of slot on attachment clip over T-stud onframe. Push assembly forward to engage small end ofslot.

2

3

1

1

sm00017

1. External latch2. Socket housing3. Pin housing

Figure A-11. Deutsch Connector

Removing Socket Terminals1. See Figure A-12. Insert a small screwdriver between the

socket housing and locking wedge in-line with the groove(in-line with the pin holes if the groove is absent).Turn thescrewdriver 90 degrees to pop the wedge up and removethe secondary locking wedge.

2. See Figure A-15. Use a pick or small screwdriver todepress terminal latches inside socket housing and backout sockets through holes in rear wire seal.

NOTE

If wire leads require new terminals, see the instructions forcrimping terminals.

Installing Socket Terminals1. Match wire lead color to connector cavity.

2. See Figure A-14. Fit rear wire seal (1) into back of sockethousing (2), if removed.

3. Grasp wire lead (3) approximately 1.0 in. (25.4 mm) behindthe socket terminal. Gently push socket through hole inwire seal into its chambers until it "clicks" in place.

4. A tug on the wire will confirm that it is properly locked inplace.

HOME


NOTESeal plugs (6) are installed through the wire seals of unusedchambers. If removed, seal plugs must be replaced to seal theconnector.

5. Install internal seal (4) on lip of socket housing, if removed.

6. Insert tapered end of secondary locking wedge (5) intosocket housing and press down until it snaps in place.Thewedge fits into the center groove within the socket housingand holds the terminal latches tightly closed.

NOTES• See Figure A-13.While rectangular wedges do not require

a special orientation, the conical secondary locking wedgeof the 3-place connector must be installed with the arrow(1) pointing toward the external latch.

• If the secondary locking wedge does not slide into theinstalled position easily, verify that all terminals are fullyinstalled in the socket housing. The lock indicates whenterminals are not properly installed by not entering its fullyinstalled position.

sm00009

Figure A-12. Deutsch Connector: Remove SecondaryLocking Wedge

2

1

sm00018

1. Arrow on socket locking wedge2. Arrow on pin locking wedge

Figure A-13. Deutsch Connector: 3-Place Locking Wedges

HOME


DEU

TSC

H

6

1

2

3

4

5

sm00010

1. Wire seal2. Socket housing3. Wire lead4. Internal seal5. Secondary locking wedge6. Seal plug

Figure A-14. Deutsch Connector: 2, 3, 4 and 12-PlaceSocket Housings

Removing Pin Terminals1. Use the hooked end of a stiff piece of mechanics wire, a

needle nose pliers or the FLAT BLADE L-HOOK (PartNo. HD-41475-100) to remove the secondary lockingwedge.

2. Gently depress terminal latches inside pin housing andback out pins through holes in wire seal.

NOTES

• If wire leads require new terminals, see the instructionsfor crimping terminals.

• If it should become necessary to replace a pin or sockethousing, please note that the 8-place and 12-place grayand black connectors are not interchangeable. Since loc-

ation of the alignment tabs differ between the black andgray connectors, plugs or receptacles must be replacedby those of the same color.

• When replacing both socket and pin housings, then theblack may be substituted for the gray, and vice versa. Thesocket and pin housings of all other connectors are inter-changeable, that is, the black may be mated with the gray,since the alignment tabs are absent and the orientationof the external latch is the same.

sm00019

Figure A-15. Deutsch Connector: Depress Terminal Latchand Back Out Pin

Installing Pin Terminals1. See Figure A-16. Fit wire seal (1) into back of pin housing

(2).

2. Grasp wire lead approximately 1.0 in. (25.4 mm) behindthe pin terminal (3). Gently push pin through holes in wireseal into its respective numbered chamber until it "clicks"in place.

NOTEA tug on the wire lead will confirm that a pin is locked in place.

3. Insert tapered end of secondary locking wedge (4) intopin housing and press down until it snaps in place.

NOTES

• The wedge fits in the center groove of the pin housing andholds the terminal latches tightly closed.

• See Figure A-13.While rectangular wedges do not requirea special orientation, the conical secondary locking wedgeof the 3-place connector must be installed with the arrow(2) pointing toward the external latch.

• If the secondary locking wedge does not slide into theinstalled position easily, verify that all terminals are fullyinstalled in the pin housing. The lock indicates when ter-minals are not properly installed by not entering its fullyinstalled position.

HOME


DEU

TSC

H

1

2

3

4

sm00020

1. Wire seal2. Pin housing3. Pin terminal4. Locking wedge

Figure A-16. Deutsch Connector: 2, 3, 4 and 12-Place PinHousings

Crimping TerminalsIdentify which of the types of Deutsch terminals are used withthe connector and follow the corresponding crimping instruc-tions. Refer to Table A-2.

Table A-2. Deutsch Connector:Terminal Crimping Instructions

CRIMPING INSTRUCTIONSTYPE

A.5 DEUTSCH STANDARD TERMINALSStandard (with crimp tails)

A.7 DEUTSCH SOLID BARREL TERMINALSMini Terminal (solid barrel)

A.6 DEUTSCH MINI-TERMINAL CRIMPSMini Terminal (with crimp tails)

HOME


A.5DEUTSCH STANDARD TERMINALS

DEUTSCH STANDARD TERMINAL CRIMPS


DEUTSCH TERMINAL CRIMP TOOLHD-39965-A

Preparing Wire Leads for Crimping1. Use a shop gauge to determine gauge of wire lead.

2. Strip lead removing 5/32 in. (4.0 mm) of insulation.

Crimping Terminal to Lead1. See Figure A-17. Squeeze the handles of the DEUTSCH

TERMINAL CRIMP TOOL (Part No. HD-39965-A) to openthe jaws. Push the locking bar (1) up.

2. Insert (2) terminal (socket/pin) through hole of the lockingbar, so that the rounded side of the contact barrel rests inthe nest (concave split level area) with the crimp tailsfacing upward. To match the wire gauge to the crimp tooldie, refer to Table A-3.

3. Release locking bar to lock terminal in die.

NOTEIf the crimp tails are slightly out of vertical alignment, the crimptool automatically rotates the terminal so that the tails face

straight upward. When positioned, the locking bar fits snuglyin the space between the contact band and the core crimp tails.

4. Insert stripped wire core between crimp tails until endsmake contact with locking bar.Verify that wire is positionedso that short pair of crimp tails squeeze bare wire strands,while long pair folds over the insulation.

5. Squeeze handle of crimp tool until tightly closed. Toolautomatically opens after the terminal is crimped.

6. Raise locking bar up and remove wire lead and terminal.

Inspecting CrimpsInspect the wire core and insulation crimps. Distortion shouldbe minimal.

Table A-3. Deutsch Standard Terminal Crimp:Wire GaugeTo Die

CRIMP TOOL DIEWIRE GAUGE (AWG)

Front20

Middle16-18

2

5

4

6

1

3

sm00021

4.1. Insert stripped leadOpen jaws and raise locking bar2. 5.Insert terminal in locking bar Squeeze crimper

6.3. Raise locking bar and remove terminalRelease locking bar to lock terminal in die

Figure A-17. Crimping a Deutsch Standard Terminal

HOME


A.6DEUTSCH MINI-TERMINAL CRIMPS

DEUTSCH MINI TERMINAL CRIMPS


PACKARD TERMINAL CRIMPERHD-38125-7

Preparing Wire Leads for CrimpingStrip wire lead removing 5/32 in. (4.0 mm) of insulation.

Crimping a Mini Terminal to Wire Lead1. See Figure A-18. Compress the handles of PACKARD

TERMINAL CRIMPER (Part No. HD-38125-7) until theratchet (2) automatically opens.

NOTEAlways perform core crimp before insulation crimp.

2. Position the core crimp on die E (1) of the crimper. Besure the core crimp tails are facing the forming jaws.

3. Gently apply pressure to handles of tool until crimpers justsecure the core crimp tails.

4. Insert stripped wire core stands between crimp tails. Pos-ition wire so that short pair of crimp tails squeeze barewire strands, while long pair squeeze over the insulation.

5. Squeeze handle of crimper until tightly closed. Tool auto-matically opens when the crimping sequence is complete.

NOTEIf the crimper does not open, it can be opened by squeezingthe ratchet trigger (2).

6. Position the insulation crimp on nest C of the crimper. Besure the insulation crimp tails are facing the forming jaws.

7. Squeeze handle of crimp tool until tightly closed. Toolautomatically opens when the crimping sequence is com-plete.

Inspecting CrimpsInspect the core and insulation crimps. Distortion should beminimal.

2

1

sm00022

1. E die2. Crimper ratchet trigger

Figure A-18. Packard Terminal Crimper (HD-38125-7)

HOME


A.7DEUTSCH SOLID BARREL TERMINALS

DEUTSCH SOLID BARREL TERMINALCRIMPS


ELECTRICAL CRIMPER TOOLHD-42879

Preparing Wire Leads For CrimpingFor size 20, 16 and 12 contacts, wire ranges 26-12 AWG.

Strip wire lead removing 1/4 in. (6.4 mm) of insulation.

Adjusting Crimper Tool1. See Figure A-19. Squeeze the ELECTRICAL CRIMPER

TOOL (Part No. HD-42879) handles to cycle the crimptool to open.

2. Remove locking pin (1) from selector knob (2).

3. Raise selector knob and rotate until selected wire sizestamped on wheel is aligned with "SEL. NO." arrow (3).

4. Loosen knurled locknut (4) and turn adjusting screw (5)clockwise (in) until it stops.

Crimping a Barrel Contact To Wire Lead1. See Figure A-20. Turn tool over and drop contact barrel

(1) into indentor cover (2) hole with the wire end out.

2. Turn adjusting screw counterclockwise (out) until contactis flush with bottom of depression in indentor cover.Tighten knurled locknut.

3. Slowly squeeze handles of crimp tool until contact iscentered between the four indentor points (3).

4. Insert bare wire core strands of stripped wire lead (4) intocontact barrel. Squeeze handle of crimp tool until tightlyclosed. Tool automatically opens when the crimpingsequence is complete.

5. Remove wire lead with crimped contact from indentor.

NOTETool must be readjusted when changing contact size/type.

6. Install pin to lock selector knob.

Inspecting CrimpsInspect the crimp. All core wire strands are to be crimped inthe barrel.

This

HA

ND

toolm

ustnot

be

used

inany

pow

ere

d

"PR

ES

S''

as

defin

ed

by

OS

HA

CFR

1910.2

11

(46)

2

4

5

1

3

sm00023

1. Locking pin2. Selector knob3. SEL. NO. arrow4. Knurled locknut5. Adjusting screw

Figure A-19. Electrical Crimper Tool (HD-42879)

HOME


HDT - 48 - 00JDG360-1

HEMET RYAN AIRPORT, P.O. BOX 878

HEMET, CA. 92343-0161 (714) 929-1200

INDUSTRIAL PRODUCTS DIVISION

HDT - 48 - 00JDG360-1

HEMET RYAN AIRPORT, P.O. BOX 878

HEMET, CA. 92343-0161 (714) 929-1200

INDUSTRIAL PRODUCTS DIVISION

2

1

3

4

3

sm00024

1. Contact barrel2. Indentor cover3. Indentor point4. Stripped wire lead

Figure A-20. Deutsch Solid Barrel

HOME


A.8RELAY AND FUSE BLOCKS

FUSE BLOCK REPAIR

Removing Socket Terminals1. See Figure A-21. To remove secondary locks, insert end

of small flat blade screwdriver (1) under lip of lockingwedge (2) and gently pry up secondary lock.

NOTEFor best results, start with locking wedge on outboard side ofsecondary lock.

2. Looking into chamber at top of fuse block, note the tangnext to each socket terminal.

3. Using a thin flat blade, like that on a hobby knife, gentlypush tang away from terminal, and then tug on wire toback terminal out.

Installing Socket Terminals1. Match the wire lead color to the fuse block terminal cavity.

NOTES• Refer to the main harness wiring diagram for wire lead

color codes.

• See Figure A-22. The main fuse block terminal cavity isidentified as alpha (1) and numeric (2) coordinates. Referto the main harness wiring diagram for fuse block terminalcavity coordinates.

2. With the open side of the socket terminal facing the tang,push lead into chamber at the wire end of the fuse block.A click is heard when the terminal is properly engaged.

3. Gently tug on the wire to verify that the terminal is lockedin place and will not back out of the chamber.

4. Install the secondary locks. With the locking wedgespositioned above the tangs in each chamber, slide flatside of secondary lock into slot (between rows), and pushdown until it bottoms.

Crimping TerminalsTerminals are crimped twice; once over the wire core and asecond time over the insulation/seal.

A correctly crimped terminal may require different crimpingdies found on separate crimpers.

NOTE

The wiring diagram indicates when one socket terminal is becrimped to two wire leads.

1

2

sm00025

1. Pry up secondary lock2. Lip of locking wedge

Figure A-21. Fuse Block: Remove Secondary Locks

3

A C

D

E

F

G

H

J1

2

4B

1

2

sm00026

1. Alpha2. Numeric

Figure A-22. Fuse Block: Coordinates (typical)

HOME


A.9150 METRI-PACK CONNECTORS

150 METRI-PACK CONNECTOR REPAIR

GeneralMetri-Pack connectors are embossed with the initials (P.E.D.).

There are two types of connectors in this series:

• Pull-to-Seat

• Push-to-Seat

Separating Pin and Socket HousingsBend back the external latch slightly and separate the pin andsocket halves of the connector.

Mating Pin and Socket HousingsAlign the wire colors and push the pin and socket halves of theconnector together.

Removing Socket Terminal1. See Figure A-23 for pull-to-seat connector or Figure A-24

for push to seat connector. Remove wire lock (1) from wireend of socket housing on push-to-seat type connectors.

NOTEFor best results, free one side of wire lock first and then releasethe other side.

2. Find the locking tang in the mating end of the connector.

NOTEThe tangs are always positioned in the middle of the chamberand are on the same side as the external latch.

3. Gently insert a safety pin into the chamber about 1/8 in.(3.2 mm).

a. For pull-to-seat: Stay between the terminal and thechamber wall and pivot the end of the pin toward theterminal body.

b. For push-to-seat: There is a small opening for thepin.

4. When a click is heard, remove the pin and repeat theprocedure.

NOTEThe click is the sound of the tang returning to the locked posi-tion as it slips from the point of the pin.

5. Pick at the tang until the clicking stops and the pin seemsto slide in deeper than it had previously. This is an indica-tion that the tang has been depressed.

NOTEOn those terminals that have been extracted on multipleoccasions, the click may not be heard, but pivot the pin as ifthe click was heard at least 3 times.

6. Remove the pin.

a. For pull-to-seat: Push on the lead to extract the ter-minal from the mating end of the connector.

b. For push-to-seat: Pull on the lead to draw the ter-minal out the wire end.

Inserting Socket TerminalNOTE

For wire location purposes, alpha characters are stamped intothe socket housings.

1. See Figure A-23 for pull-to-seat connector or Figure A-24for push to seat connector. Using a thin flat blade, like thaton a hobby knife, carefully bend the tang outward awayfrom the terminal body.

2. Gently pull or push on the lead to install the terminal backinto the chamber. A click is heard when the terminal isproperly seated.

3. Gently pull or push on the lead to verify that the terminalis locked in place.

For push-to-seat: See Figure A-24. Seat wires in separatechannels of wire lock and then push channels insidechambers at wire end of socket housing. Fully installed,slot on each side of wire lock engages ear on sockethousing.

HOME


4

2

3

1

sm00027

1. Locate tang in chamber2. Pivot pin to depress tang3. Push to remove4. Raise tang to install

Figure A-23. 150 Metri-Pack Connector: Pull-to-Seat

3

4

2

1

sm00028

1. Remove wire lock2. Pivot pin to depress tang3. Pull to remove4. Raise tang to install

Figure A-24. 150 Metri-Pack Connector: Push-to-Seat

HOME




GeneralSee Figure A-25. Called Packard connectors, Metri-Pack seriesconnectors are embossed with the initials (P.E.D.)

Separating Pin and Socket HousingsDepress the wireform and use a rocking motion to detach thesocket connector half.

Mating Pin and Socket HousingsAlign the groove in the socket housing with the tab in the pinhousing. Push the pin and socket halves of the connectortogether until the latch clicks.

Removing Socket Terminals1. See Figure A-26. Pry rubber seal from wire end of con-

nector and move seal down wires (1) toward conduit. Holdthe connector so that the wireform is facing down.

2. Looking into the wire end of the connector, insert the pointof a safety pin (2) between the top of the terminal and theinside chamber wall.

3. Push safety pin completely into chamber while watchingterminal on mating end of connector. When terminal isobserved moving forward slightly, tang is depressed.Remove safety pin.

NOTERepeat as necessary until the terminal can be pushed out ofthe connector.

4. Push on wire end of the lead to extract the terminal fromthe mating end of the connector.

5. If necessary, crimp new terminals on wires. SeeA.14 METRI-PACK TERMINALS, Metri-Pack TerminalCrimps.

Installing Socket TerminalsNOTE

Terminal cavities are lettered on the socket housing. To matchthe wire lead colors to the terminal cavity, refer to the wiringdiagram.

1. See Figure A-26. Using a thin flat blade, like a hobby knife(4), carefully bend the tang outward away from the terminalbody.

2. Gently pull on the wire lead (5) to draw the terminal backinto the chamber. The tang faces opposite the wireformas it enters the chamber.

NOTEA "click" is heard when the terminal is properly seated.

3. Push on lead to verify that terminal is locked in place.

4. Fit rubber wire seal back into wire end of connector.

Crimping TerminalsIf necessary, crimp new terminals on the wire leads. Refer toA.14 METRI-PACK TERMINALS, Metri-Pack Terminal Crimps.

sm00029

Figure A-25. 280 Metri-Pack Connector (P.E.D.)

HOME


3

5

2

4

1

sm00030

1. Pry rubber seal from connector2. Insert safety pin to depress tang3. Push on lead to remove terminal4. Raise tang with X-Acto knife5. Pull on lead to draw terminal into chamber

Figure A-26. 280 Metri-Pack Connector: Remove/InstallSocket Terminal

HOME




GeneralA 480 Metri-Pack (P.E.D.) connector is frequently used for theB+ (battery voltage) connector to power P&A accessories.

Referred to as Packard connectors, Metri-Pack connectors areembossed with the initials P.E.D.

See Figure A-27. An AFL housing (5) is used on many igni-tion/light switches. The secondary lock (4) must be openedbefore removing the terminal from the housing.

Separating Pin and Socket HousingsNOTE

Cut any cable strap anchoring the wire conduits of the pin(accessory connector housing) and the socket (B+) housing.

See Figure A-27. Using small flat blade screwdriver, pressbutton (1) on pin housing (red wire) side of the connector andpull apart the pin and socket housings.

Mating Pin and Socket HousingsOrient the latch on the socket housing to the button catch onthe pin housing and press the housings together.

Removing Socket Terminals1. See Figure A-27. Bend back the latch (2) slightly and free

one side of secondary lock, then repeat to release theopposite side. Rotate the secondary lock outward on hingeto access terminal in chamber of connector housing.

2. On the mating end of the connector, note the tang in thesquare shaped opening centered next to the terminal.Gently insert the point of a stick pin or large safety pin intothe opening (3) between the tang and the chamber walluntil it stops.

3. Pivot the end of the pin toward the terminal body to pressthe tang.

4. Remove the pin and then pull terminal out of the wire endof connector housing.

5. If necessary, crimp new terminals on wires. SeeA.14 METRI-PACK TERMINALS.

Installing Socket Terminals1. Carefully bend the tang outward away from the terminal

body.

2. With the tang on the same side as the square shapedopening in the mating end of the connector housing, feedterminal into wire end of connector housing until it "clicks"in place.

3. Verify that terminal will not back out of the chamber. Aslight tug on the cable will confirm that it is locked.

4. Rotate the hinged secondary lock inward until latches fullyengage tabs on both sides of connector housing.

NOTE

If removed, install new anchored cable strap in O.E. location.Tighten cable strap to capture conduit of both accessory con-nector and B+ connector approximately 1.0 in. (25.4 mm) fromhousings.

1

2

4

3

5

sm00031a

1. Button on pin housing2. Secondary lock latch3. Opening between tang and chamber wall4. Secondary Lock (shown open)5. AFL housing

Figure A-27. 480 Metri-Pack Connector: Remove SocketTerminal

HOME





SNAP-ON PICKSNAP-ON TT600-3

GeneralReferred to as Packard connectors, Metri-Pack 630 seriesconnectors are embossed with the initials P.E.D.

Separating Pin and Socket HousingsNOTE

If necessary, remove connector from barbed anchor or otherretaining device.

Bend back the external latch slightly and separate pin andsocket halves of the connector.

Mating Pin and Socket HousingsOrient the latch to the catch and push the pin and socket halvesof the connector together until the latch "clicks".

NOTE

If removed, install connector on barbed anchor or other OEretaining device.

Removing Socket Terminal1. Bend back the latch slightly and free one side of the sec-

ondary lock. Repeat the step to unlatch the other side.

2. Rotate the secondary lock outward on hinge to view theterminals in the chambers of the connector housing. Thelocking tang is on the side opposite the crimp tails and

engages a rib in the chamber wall to lock the terminal inplace.

3. Moving to the mating end of the connector, take note ofthe small opening on the chamber wall side of each ter-minal.

4. Insert SNAP-ON PICK (Part No. SNAP-ON TT600-3) intoopening until it stops. Pivot the end of the pick toward theterminal to depress the locking tang.

5. Remove the pick and gently tug on the wire to pull theterminal from the wire end of the connector. Repeat stepsif the terminal is still locked in place.

6. If necessary, crimp new terminals on wires. Refer toA.14 METRI-PACK TERMINALS.

Installing Socket TerminalNOTE

Refer to the wiring diagrams to match wire lead colors to alphacharacters molded into the secondary locks of each connectorhousing.

1. Using a thin flat blade, like that of a hobby knife, carefullybend the tang outward away from the terminal body.

2. With the tang facing the chamber wall, push the lead intothe chamber at the wire end of the connector. A click isheard when the terminal is properly seated.

3. Gently tug on the wire end to verify that the terminal islocked in place and will not back out of the chamber.

4. Rotate the hinged secondary lock inward until tabs fullyengage latches on both sides of connector.

HOME



DELPHI MAIN FUSE HOUSING REPAIR

GeneralA Delphi Main fuse connector completes the circuit throughthe main fuse.

Removing Main Fuse1. See Figure A-28. Depress latches on main fuse cover (1)

and then slide cover off of connector (2).

2. Holding the connector (fuse holder), pull the main fuse outof the connector.

Installing Main Fuse1. Insert the blade terminals of the main fuse into the sockets

of the connector and press the main fuse into the con-nector.

2. Slide the cover over the fuse until the cover clicks intoplace.

NOTE

If removed from an OE attachment such as a grooved fuseblock cover, engage cover and slide into place.

Removing Socket Terminals1. See Figure A-29. Gently pull socket housing to disengage

slots (1) on secondary lock (2) from tabs (3) on sockethousing. Free secondary lock from cables and set aside.

2. Take note of the opening on one side of the socket ter-minal. Gently insert flat blade of pick (Snap-On TT600-5)or small screwdriver into opening (4) until it stops. Pivotthe pick toward the terminal body and hold in position.

3. Tug on cable to pull socket from wire end of sockethousing. A firm tug is necessary to overcome the resist-ance of the rubber seal.

4. Repeat to remove remaining socket terminal.

Installing Socket Terminals1. See Figure A-30. Carefully bend tang outward away from

the terminal body.

2. Feed socket into wire end of socket housing until it clicksin place. Verify that socket will not back out of chamber.A slight tug on the cable will confirm that it is locked.

3. Push rubber seal into wire end of socket housing.

4. Repeat to install remaining socket terminal.

5. Install secondary lock onto cables and then push onto wireend of socket housing until slots engage tabs on sides ofsocket housing.

1

2

sm00032

1. Main fuse cover2. Delphi main fuse housing

Figure A-28. Delphi Connector Housing: Main Fuse

HOME


3

4

12

sm00033

1. Secondary lock slot2. Secondary lock3. Tab4. Insert flat blade into opening

Figure A-29. Delphi Main Fuse Housing: Remove SocketTerminals

sm00034

Figure A-30. Delphi Main Fuse Housing: Bend Tang

HOME


A.14METRI-PACK TERMINALS

METRI-PACK TERMINAL CRIMPS


PACKARD TERMINAL CRIMP TOOLHD-38125-6


PACKARD CRIMPING TOOLHD-38125-8

Matching Terminal To CrimperMetri-Pack connectors embossed with the initials P.E.D. requirePackard crimp tools to crimp terminals to wire leads.

Terminals are crimped twice to a wire lead, once over the wirecore and a second time over the insulation/seal.

See Figure A-31. A completed crimp may require two differentcrimping dies found on PACKARD TERMINAL CRIMPTOOL (Part No. HD-38125-6) and/or PACKARD TERMINALCRIMPER (Part No. HD-38125-7).The terminal (pin or socket)and the wire lead gauge will determine the core crimp die andthe insulator/seal die.

NOTE

The PACKARD CRIMPING TOOL (Part No. HD-38125-8) willalso crimp sealed splice connectors in wire gauge sizes 18-20,14-16 and 10-12.

Preparing Wire LeadUse a wire striper to strip off the insulation and expose 5/32in. (4.0 mm) of wire core.

Crimping Wire CoreNOTE

Metri-Pack terminal crimps require two steps. Always performCrimping Wire Core before Crimping Insulation/Seal.

1. Squeeze and release handles until ratchet automaticallyopens.

2. Identify the corresponding sized nest for the core crimp.

3. Position the core crimp in the die. Be Sure the core crimptails are facing the forming jaws.

4. Gently squeeze the handles until crimpers just secure thecore crimp tails.

5. Insert stripped wire between crimp tails. Verify that wireis positioned so that short pair of crimp tails squeeze corewire strands, while long pair is positioned over the insula-tion or seal material.

6. Squeeze handles tightly closed. Release grip and the toolwill automatically open.

1

2

3

sm00035

1. HD-38125-6 sealed terminals2. HD-38125-7 non-sealed terminals3. HD-38125-8 non-sealed terminals

Figure A-31. Metri-Pack Terminal Crimp Tools

Crimping Insulation/SealNOTE

Always perform Crimping Wire Core before Crimping Insu-lation/Seal.

HOME


1. See Figure A-32. Identify the correct die for the insula-tion/seal crimp (2).

2. Position the insulation/seal crimp in the nest. Be sure theinsulation/seal crimp tails are facing the forming jaws.

3. Squeeze handle of crimp tool until tightly closed. Toolautomatically opens when the crimp is complete.

Inspecting Crimps1. See Figure A-32. Inspect the wire core crimp (1).The tails

should be folded in on the wire core without any distortionor excess wire strands.

2. Inspect the insulation (2) or seal (3) crimp.The tails of theterminal should be wrapped around the insulation withoutdistortion.

3

2 1

sm00036

1. Wire core crimp2. Insulation crimp3. Seal crimp

Figure A-32. Metri-Pack Connector: Inspect Core andInsulation/Seal Crimps

HOME


A.15MOLEX CONNECTORS

MOLEX CONNECTOR REPAIR


MOLEX ELECTRICAL CONNECTORTERMINAL REMOVER

HD-48114

Separating Pin and Socket HousingsSee Figure A-33. Depress the latch while pulling the pin andsocket housings apart.

Mating Pin and Socket Housings1. Orient the latch on the pin housing to the latch pocket on

the socket housing so the rails on the outside of the pinhousings lines up with the tunnels on the socket housing.

2. Press the housings together until the latch clicks.

Removing Terminals1. Pull the secondary lock up, approximately 3/16 in. (4.8

mm), until it stops.

a. Socket Housing: See Figure A-34. Use a smallscrewdriver in the pry slot. The slot next to theexternal latch provides a pivot point.

b. Pin Housing: See Figure A-35. Use needle nosepliers to engage the D-holes in the center of the sec-ondary lock.

NOTEDo not remove the secondary lock from the connector housing.

2. See Figure A-36. Insert MOLEX ELECTRICAL CON-NECTOR TERMINAL REMOVER (Part No. HD-48114)into the pin hole next to the terminal until the tool bottoms.

a. Socket Housing: The pin holes are inside the ter-minal openings.

b. Pin Housing: The pin holes are outside the pins.

3. Pressing the terminal remover to the bottom of the pinhole, gently pull on the wire to remove wire terminal fromits cavity.

Installing Terminals1. See Figure A-37. From the wiring diagram, match the wire

color to its numbered terminal cavity.

NOTECavity numbers (1) are stamped on the housing at the endsof the cavity rows. The cavity number can be determined bycounting the cavities up or down along the row from eachstamped number.

2. Orient the terminal so that the tang (2) opposite the opencrimp engages the slot (3) in the cavity.

3. Push the terminal into the cavity.

4. Gently tug on wire to verify that the terminal is capturedby the secondary lock.

5. With all terminals installed, push the secondary lock intothe socket housing to lock the wire terminals into thehousing.

sm00040

Figure A-33. Molex Connector: Latch

sm00041

Figure A-34. Molex Connector: Secondary Lock Pry Slot(Socket Housing)

HOME


sm00042

Figure A-35. Molex Connector: Secondary Lock D-Holes(Pin Housing)

sm00043

Figure A-36. Molex Connector:Terminal Remover(HD-48114)

13

2

sm00044

1. Cavity number2. Tang3. Cavity slot

Figure A-37. Molex Connector: Pin Cavities and WireTerminal

HOME


A.16PACKARD ECM CONNECTOR

PACKARD 100W CONNECTOR REPAIR

GeneralA Packard 100W connector connects the electronic controlmodule (ECM) to the main harness.

NOTE

For vehicles with 73-pin connectors, see A.17 PACKARDMICRO-64 CONNECTORS and A.14 METRI-PACK TER-MINALS.

Separating Socket Housing From ECMSee Figure A-38. While pressing the connector into the ECM,press the thumb lever (1) against the connector until the latch(2) pops out of the catch (3) on the ECM.

Mating Socket Housing To ECMPush the connector into the ECM until the latch is captured bythe catch on the ECM.

Removing Socket Terminal1. See Figure A-39. Gently press latch (1) on each side of

the clear plastic secondary lock (2) and remove. For bestresults, release one side at a time.

2. Carefully cut cable strap (3) to free strain relief collar (4)from conduit (5).

3. See Figure A-40. Using a thin blade, gently pry at seamat back of socket housing to release three plastic pins (1)from slots in housing. Separate and spread halves ofsocket housing.

4. Push on wire lead to free terminal from chamber.

Installing Socket Terminal1. From inside socket housing, gently pull on wire to draw

terminal into chamber.

2. Exercising caution to avoid pinching wires, press halvesof socket housing together until three plastic pins fullyengage slots in housing.

3. Install new cable strap in groove of strain relief collarcapturing cable conduit.

4. With the two ribs on the secondary lock on the same sideas the external latch, install over terminals until latcheslock in place.

Crimping TerminalsIf necessary, crimp new terminals on wire leads. SeeA.14 METRI-PACK TERMINALS.

2

3

1

sm00037

1. Thumb lever2. Latch3. Catch (ECM)

Figure A-38. Packard 100W to ECM (Typical)

HOME


1

3

5 1

4

2

sm00038

1. Latch2. Secondary lock3. Cable strap4. Strain relief collar5. Conduit

Figure A-39. Packard 100W Connector 2

1

1

1

sm00039

1. Pins2. Socket terminal

Figure A-40. Packard 100W Connector: Separate Halvesof Socket Housing

HOME


A.17PACKARD MICRO-64 CONNECTORS

PACKARD MICRO-64 CONNECTOR REPAIR


PACKARD MICRO-64 TERMINALREMOVER

HD-45928

PACKARD MICRO-64 TERMINALCRIMPER

HD-45929

GeneralPackard Micro-64 connectors are frequently found onspeedometers, tachometers and the ECM of Touring Models.For pin 73 of these ECMs, see A.9 150 METRI-PACK CON-NECTORS.

Separating Pin and Socket HousingsBend back the external latches slightly and separate the pinand socket housings.

Mating Pin and Socket HousingsOrient the wire lead colors and push the pin and socket hous-ings of the connector together until the latches click.

Removing Terminal1. See Figure A-43. Locate the head of the secondary lock

(1) on one side of the connector housing.

2. Insert the blade of a small screwdriver between the centerear of the lock and the connector housing and gently pryout lock.When partially removed, pull lock from connectorhousing.

3. Locate pin hole (2) between terminals on mating end ofconnector.

4. See Figure A-44. Obtain the PACKARD MICRO-64 TER-MINAL REMOVER (Part No. HD-45928).

5. See Figure A-42. Push the adjacent terminals all the wayinto the connector housing and then insert tool into holeuntil it bottoms.

6. Leaving the tool installed, gently tug on wires to pull eitherone or both terminals from wire end of connector. Removetool.

sm00046

Figure A-41. Packard Micro 64 Terminal Remover(HD-45928)

sm00048

Figure A-42. Packard Micro 64 Connector: Insert Tool andRemove Terminal

HOME


Installing Terminal1. Insert terminal into its respective numbered chamber on

wire end of connector. No special orientation of the ter-minal is necessary.

NOTESee Figure A-43. For wire location purposes, the corners ofthe socket housing are stamped (3) with the numbers 1, 6, 7and 12, representing terminals 1-6 on one side, and 7-12 onthe other.

2. Bottom the terminal in the chamber and then gently tugon the wire to verify that it is locked in place.

NOTEOnce the terminal is removed it may not lock in place whenfirst reinstalled. Until the lock engages, move the terminal backand forth slightly while wiggling the lead.

3. Since the terminal remover tool releases two terminalssimultaneously, repeat step 2 on the adjacent terminaleven if it was not pulled from the connector housing.

4. With the center ear on the head of the secondary lockpinfacing the mating end of the connector, push secondarylock in until head is flush with the connector housing.

Preparing Wire Leads for CrimpingStrip lead removing 1/8 in. (3.0 mm) of insulation.

Crimping Terminals1. Inspect new socket terminal for bent or deformed contact

and crimp tails. Replace as necessary.

2. See Figure A-45. Squeeze the handles of the PACKARDMICRO-64 TERMINAL CRIMPER (Part No. HD-45929)to cycle the tool to the fully open position (1).

3. Raise locking bar and barrel holder by pushing up onbottom tab with index finger (2).

4. With the crimp tails facing upward, insert terminal throughlocking bar into front hole in barrel holder (20-22 gaugewire) (3).

5. Release locking bar to lock position of contact. Whencorrectly positioned, the locking bar fits snugly in the spaceat the front of the core crimp tails and the closed side ofthe terminal rests on the outer nest of the crimp tool.

6. Insert wires between crimp tails until ends make contactwith locking bar. Verify that wire is positioned so that widepair of crimp tails squeeze bare wire strands, while thenarrow pair folds over the insulation material.

7. Squeeze handle of crimp tool until tightly closed (4). Toolautomatically opens when the crimping sequence is com-plete.

8. Raise locking bar and barrel holder to remove contact.

Inspecting CrimpsInspect the quality of the core and insulation crimps. Distortionshould be minimal.

1 2 3 4 5 6

7 8 9 10 11 12

1 6

7 12

1

23

sm00047

1. Secondary lock2. Pin hole3. Stamped number

Figure A-43. Packard Micro 64 Connector: Housing

sm00045

Figure A-44. Packard Micro 64 Terminal Crimper (HD-45929)

HOME


3

1

2

4

sm00049

1. Open position2. Raising locking bar3. Insert terminal4. Crimp terminal

Figure A-45. Packard Micro 64 Connector:Terminal inCrimper

HOME


A.18SEALED SPLICE CONNECTORS

SEALED SPLICE CONNECTOR REPAIR


ROBINAIR HEAT GUNHD-25070


ULTRA TORCH UT-100HD-39969

HEAT SHIELD ATTACHMENTHD-41183

GeneralSplice connectors and several OE ring terminal connectorsuse heat shrink covering to seal the connection.

Preparing Wire LeadsNOTE

If adjacent wires are to be spliced, stagger the splices so thatthe sealed splice connectors will not touch each other but arelocated at different positions along the length of the wires.

1. Using a shop gauge, identify the gauge of the wire.

2. Match the wire gauge to a sealed splice connector by colorand part number. Refer to Table A-4.

3. Using a wire stripper, cut and strip a length of insulationoff the wire ends. Refer to Table A-4 for the strip length.

Table A-4. Sealed Splice Connectors

STRIP LENGTHPART NO.COLORWIRE GAUGE

3/8 in. (9.5 mm)70585-93Red18-20(0.5-0.8 mm)

3/8 in. (9.5 mm)70586-93Blue14-16(1.0-2.0 mm)

3/8 in. (9.5 mm)70587-93Yellow10-12(3.0-5.0 mm)

NOTE

If any copper wire strands are cut off of the wire core, trim theend and strip the wire again in a larger gauge stripper.

Splicing Wire LeadsNOTE

See Figure A-47. The connector is crimped twice - one sideand then the other.

1. See Figure A-46. Open the PACKARD CRIMPINGTOOL (Part No. HD-38125-8) ratchet by squeezing thehandles closed.

2. Match the connector color to the wire gauge crimp die inthe jaws and insert one end of the sealed connector.

3. Gently squeeze the handles until the connector is held inthe jaws.

4. See Figure A-47. Feed the stripped end of a wire into theconnector until the wire stops inside the metal insert (1).

5. Squeeze the handles tightly closed to crimp the lead inthe insert (2). The tool automatically opens when thecrimping is complete.

6. Slide the connector to the other half of the metal insert.Insert the stripped wire lead (1) until it stops, and crimpthe lead in the insert (2).

Be sure to follow manufacturer's instructions when usingthe UltraTorch UT-100 or any other radiant heating device.Failure to follow manufacturer's instructions can cause afire, which could result in death or serious injury. (00335a)

• Avoid directing heat toward any fuel system component.Extreme heat can cause fuel ignition/explosion resultingin death or serious injury.

• Avoid directing heat toward any electrical system com-ponent other than the connectors on which heat shrinkwork is being performed.

• Always keep hands away from tool tip area and heat shrinkattachment.

7. Use an ULTRA TORCH UT-100 (Part No. HD-39969), ora ROBINAIR HEAT GUN (Part No. HD-25070) with aHEAT SHIELD ATTACHMENT (Part No. HD-41183), toheat the connector from the center of the crimp (3) out toeach end.

NOTE

It is acceptable for the splice to rest against the heat shrinktool attachment.

Inspecting SealsSee Figure A-47. Allow the splice to cool and inspect the seal.The insulation should appear smooth and cylindrical. Meltedsealant will have extruded out the ends (4) of the insulation.

HOME


1

2

3

sm00050

1. Red connector die2. Blue connector die3. Yellow connector die

Figure A-46. Packard Crimping Tool (HD-38125-8)

1

1

4

2

2

4

3

sm00051

1. Wire lead in metal insert2. Crimp metal insert3. Center of crimp4. Melted sealant

Figure A-47. Sealed Splice Connector

HOME


TABLE OF CONTENTS

SUBJECT............................................................................................................................PAGE NO.B.1 CONNECTORS........................................................................................................................B-1B.2 WIRING DIAGRAMS.................................................................................................................B-3

AP

PE

ND

IX B

WIR

ING


B.1CONNECTORS

CONNECTOR LOCATIONS

Function/LocationRefer to Table B-1. On the motorcycle, a connector can beidentified by its function and location.

Place and ColorThe place (number of wire cavities of a connector housing)and color of the connector can also aid identification.

Connector NumberOn wiring diagrams and in service/repair instructions, con-nectors are identified by a number in brackets.

Repair InstructionsRefer to Table B-1. The repair instructions in Appendix A areby connector type.

Table B-1. 2009 Sportster Connector Locations


On battery strap, behind left sidecover

2-place Metri-Pack, blackMAXIFUSE[5]

Under seat6-place Multilock, blackTail lamp harness to main harness[7]

Inside tail lamp lens2-place Multilock, whiteLeft rear turn signal[18]

Inside tail lamp lens2-place Multilock, blackRight rear turn signal[19]

Under fuel tank12-place Molex, blackInstruments[20]

Under fuel tank6-place Molex, blackRight hand controls[22]

Under fuel tank8-place Molex, grayLeft hand controls and horn[24]


Under fuel tank6-place Molex, blackFront turn signals[31]

Right side of frame behind neck-Ignition switch[33]

Under fuel tank4-place Multilock, blackHeadlamp[38]

Back of speedometer12-place Packard Micro-64, blackSpeedometer (XL)[39]

Back of speedometer5-place PackardTachometer (XR)[39]

In front of engine crankcase2-place Lyall, blackVoltage regulator to stator[46]

Behind left side coverSpade terminalsFuse block[61]

Right rear top of crankcase3-place Packard, blackVehicle Speed Sensor (VSS)[65]

In front of engine crankcase2-place Lyall, blackVoltage regulator (DC output)[77]

Under seat36-place Packard, grayElectronic Control Module (ECM)[78]

Front of left crankcase2-place Deutsch, blackCrankshaft Position (CKP) sensor[79]

Top of intake manifold4-place Packard, blackTemperature Manifold AbsolutePressure (TMAP) sensor

[80]

Back of coil, under fuel tank4-place Delphi, blackIgnition coil[83]



Top of induction module4-place Delphi, blackIdle Air Control (IAC)[87]

Behind air cleaner backing plate3-place Delphi, blackThrottle Position (TP) sensor[88]

Above induction module, right side2-place Delphi, blackEngine Temperature (ET) sensor[90]

On battery strap, behind left sidecover

4-place Deutsch, grayData link connector[91]

Inside tail lamp lens4-place Multilock, blackTail lamp[93]


Back of tachometer12-place Packard Micro-64, grayTachometer[108]

Fuse/relay block, behind left sidecover

5-place Amp, spade terminalsRelay/fuse block[119]

HOME

2009 Sportster Diagnostics: Appendix B Wiring B-1

Table B-1. 2009 Sportster Connector Locations


Oil pressure switch, under oil filtermount

90° post terminal, blackOil pressure switch[120]

Stop lamp switch, under battery traySpade terminals, blackRear stoplight switch[121]

Between cylinders, left side90° spade terminals, blackHorn[122]

Starter solenoidLocking spade terminal, whiteStarter solenoid[128]

Left side along frame toward frontof engine

3-place, blackJiffy Stand Sensor (HDI)[133]

Right side frame, beneath gearcasecover


On H-bracket2-place Amp, blackRear oxygen sensor[137]

Electrical caddie behind voltageregulator

2-place Amp, blackFront oxygen sensor[138]



Under seat16-place Molex, blackEngine harness[145]

Under seat1-place Packard, grayB+ connector[160]

Right side behind air box2-placeActive intake solenoid[178]

Under seat3-place Molex, blackFuel sender resistor assembly[200]


Under seat2-place Molex, blackSecurity antenna[209]

Crankcase housing, top rearRing terminalPowertrain ground[GND1]

HOME

B-2 2009 Sportster Diagnostics: Appendix B Wiring

B.2WIRING DIAGRAMS

WIRING DIAGRAM INFORMATION

Wire Color CodesWire traces on wiring diagrams are labeled with alpha codes.Refer to Table B-2.

For Solid Color Wires: See Figure B-1. The alpha codeidentifies wire color (3).

For Striped Wires: The code is written with a slash (/) betweenthe solid color code and the stripe code (4). For example, atrace labeled GN / Y is a green wire with a yellow stripe.

Wiring Diagram SymbolsSee Figure B-1. On wiring diagrams and in service/repairinstructions, connectors are identified by a number in brackets(1). The letter (2) inside the brackets identifies whether thehousing is a socket or pin housing.

A=Pin: The letter A after a connector number and the pinsymbol (6) identifies a pin housing.

B=Socket: The letter B after a connector number and thesocket symbol (5) identifies a socket housing.

Other symbols found on the wiring diagrams include the symbolfor a diode (7), a symbol for a wire-to-wire connection (8), asymbol verifying that no connection (9) between two wire tracesexists, symbols for actual (10) and virtual (11) splices, and asymbol identifying two wires that are twisted together (12).

Actual splices (10) are splices where two wires are connectedtogether at a specific location along a wire.Virtual splices (11)are splices shown connected anywhere along a wire, usuallyused in a wiring or schematic diagram for clarity.

9

12

1 2

1 2

8

11

10

7

6

53 4

TN

TN

WW

GN

/YG

N/Y

1 2 4

1 2 4

[21A]

[21B]

ed01711

1. Connector number2. Terminal code (A=pin, B=socket)3. Solid wire color4. Striped wire color5. Socket symbol6. Pin symbol7. Diode8. Connection9. No connection10. Physical splice11. Virtual splice12. Twisted pair

Figure B-1. Connector/Wiring Diagram Symbols (typical)

Table B-2. Wire Color Codes

WIRE COLORALPHA CODE

BlueBE

BlackBK

BrownBN

GreenGN

GrayGY

Light GreenLGN

OrangeO

PinkPK

RedR

TanTN

VioletV

WhiteW

YellowY

HOME

2009 Sportster Diagnostics: Appendix B Wiring B-3

2009 SPORTSTER WIRING DIAGRAMS Refer to the table below for wiring diagram information.

Wiring Diagram ListLOCATIONDIAGRAM

Figure B-2Main Harness (XL): 2009 Sportster DOM. and INT. Models

Figure B-3Indicator Lamps and Controls (XL): 2009 Sportster DOM. and INT. Models

Figure B-4Starting and Charging: 2009 Sportster DOM. and INT. Models

Figure B-5Engine Management (1 of 2) (XL): 2009 Sportster DOM. and INT. Models

Figure B-6Engine Management (2 of 2) (XL): 2009 Sportster DOM. and INT. Models

Figure B-7Lights (1 of 2) (XL): 2009 Sportster DOM. and INT. Models

Figure B-8Lights (2 of 2) (XL): 2009 Sportster DOM. and INT. Models

Figure B-9Horn and Instruments (XL): 2009 Sportster DOM. and INT. Models

Figure B-10Security (1 of 2) (XL): 2009 Sportster DOM. and INT. Models

Figure B-11Security (2 of 2) (XL): 2009 Sportster DOM. and INT. Models

Figure B-12Main Harness (XR): 2009 Sportster DOM. and INT. Models

Figure B-13Indicator Lamps and Controls (XR): 2009 Sportster DOM. and INT. Models

Figure B-14Engine Management (1 of 2) (XR): 2009 Sportster DOM. and INT. Models

Figure B-15Engine Management (2 of 2) (XR): 2009 Sportster DOM. and INT. Models

Figure B-16Lights (1 of 2) (XR): 2009 Sportster DOM. and INT. Models

Figure B-17Lights (2 of 2) (XR): 2009 Sportster DOM. and INT. Models

Figure B-18Horn and Instruments (XR): 2009 Sportster DOM. and INT. Models

Figure B-19Security (1 of 2) (XR): 2009 Sportster DOM. and INT. Models

Figure B-20Security (2 of 2) (XR): 2009 Sportster DOM. and INT. Models

HOME

B-4 2009 Sportster Diagnostics: Appendix B Wiring

E

K

TS U

I

C

QP RM O

G H

A B

P R

I J

C D

M O

G H

A B

K L

S U

FE

IGN 15A

Fuel Pump15A

IgnitionSwitch

[33]

Battery 15A

ECM 15A

[5]30 Amp

MAXIFUSE

B A

GND1


EngineCase

GroundPoint

IGN − IBATT – B

ACC – A

ECM

TSM/TSSM/HFSM

Fuseblocks Top ViewTop View

[119]

ACCESSORIES

LIGHTS

IGNITION

FUEL PUMP


ECM

BATTERY

SPARE

P&A IGN

INSTRUMENTS

SPARE

SystemRelay

SPARE

OPEN

Idle Air Control (A) HiIdle Air Control (B) Low

Injector Rear

Injector Front

Battery

Idle Air Control (B) HiIdle Air Control (A) Low

To instruments andindicator lamps

[61]

To Right HandControls

StartRelay

Starter

Redband

Access 15A

P&A IGNV15A

To Left HandControls

P&ABattery

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12

1 12 2

121 2

Data LinkConnector

Jiffy StandSensor

IgnitionCoil

1 2 3 4

Pow

er

Coi

lRea

r

Coi

lFro

nt

Pow

er

D C B A

D C B A

ToEngineHarness

CBA

To VehicleSpeed Sensor

FrontO2

Sensor

EngineTemperature

Sensor

RearO2

Sensor

HDIOnly

INSTR 15A

To Fuel PumpAnd Sender

ASSY1 2 3

1 2 3

1 2 34

1 2 3 41 2 3 4 5 61 2 3 4 5 6

Spare 15A

To FrontTurn Signals

ToHeadlamp

Lights 15A

Spare 15A

Spare 15A

1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 67 8

A

BC

A

BC

PowerSignal

Ground

21

21 Antenna ’A’

Antenna ’B’

Hands Free Antenna

To RearLighting

Fuel SenderResistor Assy

240

240

OilPressureSending

UnitNeutralSwitchB A

1

Battery

BatteryIgnition

Serial DataNeutral SwitchLeft Turn Feed

Right Turn FeedRight Turn Switch Input

Left Turn Switch InputStart Relay Control

Clutch SwitchAlarm Signal

Ground

Receive AntennaXMIT Antenna AXMIT Antenna B

System Relay

Serial DataEngine Temperature

Intake Air TemperatureOxygen Sensor (A)

Jiffy Stand Sensor (HDI)Ground

Coil RearCrank POS Sensor (–)

Switched Power5V Sensor Power

Oxygen Sensor (B)Throttle POS Sensor Input

Map Sensor Input5V Sensor Ground

GroundCoil Front

Crank POS Sensor (+)

Vehicle Speed Sensor Input

123456789

101112

123456789

101112

123

123

2

56789

1011121314

171819

21

23242526

28293031

33

3536

2

56789

1011121314

171819

21

23242526

28293031

33

3536

12345

789

11121314

CrankPositionSensor(Ckp)

2 1

2 1

RearStop Lamp

Switch

ABBK

BK

BK

BK

BK

BK

BK

BK

BK BK

BK

GY

BE

BK

BK

BK

GN

GN

TN

TN

R W

1 2 3

1 2 3

BK

BE

BE

R/W

GN

/BN

GN/BN

GN/GY

GN/GY

PK/GN

PK

/GN

BE/GY

BE/GY

BE/GY

BN/GY

GY

/BE

GY

/BEBE/GN

BE/GN

BK/BE

BK/BE

[38B] [31B][22A][20A]

SecuritySiren

(Optional)

HFSM Only

SOCKET CONNECTOR(B SIDE)

PIN CONNECTOR(A SIDE)To

Horn[122A]

SWITCHPOSITION

RED/BLACK

RED RED/GRAY

OFFACC.IGNITION



To ChargingSystem. SeeStarting And

ChargingSheet

2 1

2 1[7B][24A]

[65A]

[145B]

TN

TN

BN

BK

BK

GY

GY

BK

BK

BK

BK

BE

BE

BN

GY

BK

BK

BK

BK

BK

BK

BE

BE

BN

BK BK

Y/W

R/W

R/W

W/Y

W/Y

V/W

V/W

W/V

O/Y

O/W

Y/R

Y/W

BK

Y/R

Y/WO/W

O/W

O/W

O/W

O/W

O/W

R/Y

R/Y

R/Y

W/V

O

RB

K R

YY V

W

W

V

V

BNV

R

R

O

R

R

R

R

R

R

W

LGN

/V

LGN

/V

LGN/V

LGN/Y

LGN/Y

LGN/V

TN/GN

TN/GN

LGN/BN

LGN/BN

BN

/GY

BN/GY

BN/GY

GN

/Y

GN

/Y

Y/GN

Y/GN

Y/G

N

Y/G

N

O/GY Y/GN

Y/B

K

Y/B

K

BK/R

Y/BK

Y/BE

Y/B

E

W/BN

W/B

N

O/GNO/GN

PK/Y

PK

/Y

W/BK

W/BK

W/B

KBK/O

BK/O

BE/O

BE

/O

BN/R

BN/R

BK/R

BK

/R

BK/R

BK/R

BK

/R

BK/R

BK/R

BK/R

BK/R

R/GY

R/GY

BK/R

O/G

Y

GY/V

GY/V

BK/V

BK/V

BK/W

BK/W

BK

/W

BK

/W

BK

/W

PK/O

PK

/O

[38A] [31A][141A]

[24B]

[136B][136A]

[120B][120A]

[122B]

[121B][121A]

[20B] [83A][83B][79A]

[79B]

[22B][200A][200B]

[209A][209B]

[160B]

[208B][208A]

[78B][78A]

[65B]

[30B][30A]

[142B][142A]

[133B][133A]

[137B][137A]

[138B][138A] [90B]

[90A]

[7A]

[91A]

[128]

[145A]

15A

15A

15A

15A

15A

15A

15A

15A

15A

15A

15A

[61B]

[119B]

8685

3087A87

12

345

RP

CQI

8685

3087A87

12

345

US

ETK

M O

G H

M O

K L

G H

F E

A B

A B

D C

J I

R P

et01153

Figure B-2. Main Harness (XL): 2009 Sportster DOM. and INT. Models

Figure B-2.Figure B-2.Main Harness (XL): 2009 Sportster DOM. and INT. ModelsMain Harness (XL): 2009 Sportster DOM. and INT. Models

Hand Controls,Left

Horn Switch

Headlamp Hi/Lo Switch

Left Turn Switch

Clutch Switch

Hand Controls,Right

O/W

R/Y

GYW/B

KW

/BN

BK/R

O/W Y BE W W/V

Y/BK

123456

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

BK/R

BK

[22A]

[24A]

Speedometer

Tachometer

BN/GYO/W

BNWV

OLGN/V

TN

GN/

Y

BK BK BKO O

BK

Configuration for XL1200R

IgnitionSerial data

BatteryAccessory

GroundTrip odometer reset switch

Trip odometer reset switch

Fuel level

RPM x 100

IgnitionSerial data

BatteryAccessory

Ground

[39A] [39B]

[108A] [108B]

Speedometer

BN/GYO/W

LGN/V

BK

BK

O

O

BK

BK

BNWV

TNGN/Y

BN/GYO/W

LGN/V

Trip OdometerReset Switch


Y/W

Y/W [20A]

To mainharness

To mainharness

To mainharness

[20A]

To mainharness

BN/GYO/W

LGN/VO

BK

BNWV

TNGN/YY/W

[39A] [39B]

12

56789

11

12

567

12

456789

11

12

56789

11

12

567

12

456789

11

BK

BK

O

BK

BN/GYO/W

LGN/V

Y/W

123456789

10

12

123456789

10

12

BNWV TN

GN/

Y

BK BK BKO O

IgnitionSerial Data

Security LPBattery

AccessoryGround



Fuel level

Right Turn Switch

Engine Stop Switch

Start Switch


Configuration for all except XL1200R

Socket Connector

Pin Connector(A side)

(B side)

[24B]

[162]

[22B]

[20B]

[163]

[20B]

et01154

Figure B-3. Indicator Lamps and Controls (XL): 2009 Sportster DOM. and INT. Models

Figure B-3.Figure B-3.Indicator Lamps and Controls (XL): 2009 Sportster DOM.

and INT. ModelsIndicator Lamps and Controls (XL): 2009 Sportster DOM.

and INT. Models

Engine Stop SwitchStart Switch

Right HandControls

GND1

TSM/TSSM/HFSM

HFSM Only

6 4 3

6

12

4

9

10

12

12

4

9

10

12

3

Starter

Ignition 15A

Battery 15A

30 AmpMAXIFUSE

IgnitionSwitch

[61B]

B A


Battery

[119B]

Charging

30 AmpMain Fuse


SwitchPosition


Off

ACC.

Ignition



E

K

TS U

Start Relay System Relay

I

C

QP RM O

G H

A B

Fuel pump

Spare

ECM15A

15A

15AP R

I J

C D

Battery

Lights

Accessories15A

15A

15AM O

G H

A B

Instruments

Spare

Ignition15A

15A

15A

K L

S U

F

Spare

Open

P&A IGN15A

15AE

[119] [61]

1 2

Stator

1 2

VoltageRegulator

Battery

–+

B A

–+

GND1

1234

IGN − IBATT – BACC – A

Start Relay

RedBand

Fuse Blocks

Top viewTop view

[128]

W/B

K

NeutralSwitch

TN

TN

Left HandControls

Clutch Switch

7 8

7 8

BK

BK

/R

BK

TN

BK

BK

BK

BK

BK

BK

BK

BK

BK

BK

BK

BK

BK

BK

BK

GY

GY

GN

GN

GY

GY

BK

/R

BK/R BK/R

R/BK

R/BK

R/BK

BK

/RB

K/R

BatteryIgnition

Neutral Switch

Start Relay ControlClutch Switch

Chassis Ground


[163]

[33]

[162]

[5]

[5]

EngineCase

GroundPoint

BKEngine

CaseGroundPoint

R

R R

R

RR

R

R

RBN/GY BN/GY

TN/GN TN/GN

[136B][136A]

[46B][46A]

[24B][24A]

[22A][22B]

[77A][77B]

[30B][30A]

8685

3087A87

12

345

RP

CQI

A B

J I

[208A]

et00141

Figure B-4. Starting and Charging: 2009 Sportster DOM. and INT. Models

Figure B-4.Figure B-4.Starting and Charging: 2009 Sportster DOM. and INT. ModelsStarting and Charging: 2009 Sportster DOM. and INT. Models

BatteryIgnition

Serial data

Ground

Receive antennaXMIT antenna AXMIT antenna B

Idle air control (A) hiIdle air control (B) low

Injector rear

Injector front

Battery

Idle air control (B) hiIdle air control (A) low

System relay

Serial dataEngine temperature

Intake air temperatureOxygen sensor (A)

Jiffy stand sensor (HDI)Ground

Coil rearCrank pos sensor (–)

Switched power5V sensor power

Oxygen sensor (B)Throttle pos sensor input

Map sensor input5V sensor ground

GroundCoil front

Crank pos sensor (+)

Vehicle speed sensor input

IGN 15A

FuelPump 15A

IgnitionSwitch

[33]

Battery 15A

ECM 15AA

J

G

A

B

I

H

B

BK

30 AmpMAXIFUSE

B A

GND1

IGN − IBATT – B

ACC – A

ECM

TSM/TSSM/HFSM

[61B]

Fuse Blocks Top ViewTop View

[119]

Accessories

Lights

Ignition

Fuel Pump


ECM

Battery

Spare

P&A IGN

Instruments

Spare

SystemRelay

Spare

Open

[119B]


[61]

To right handcontrols

EngineHarness


4 32

23

1

23

1

12

23

1

23

1

2

567891011121314

171819

21

23242526

28293031

3536

2

567891011121314

171819

21

23242526

28293031

35

3333

36

21

34

12

2 1

2 1

6 7 10 12

1 2

1

1

12

2

2

DataLink

Connector

IgnitionCoil

D C B A

D C B A

Pow

er

Coi

lrea

r

Coi

lfro

nt

Pow

er

KTESU

8787A308586

54321

[133B]

[133A]

FrontO2

Sensor

RearO2

Sensor

HDIonly

INSTR 15AG H

To fuel pumpand sender

ASSY

1 2 3 4

Fuel SenderResistor ASSY

240

240

Battery

12345

789

11121314

12345

789

11121314

Idle AirControl

D C B A

D C B A

Intake AirTemperature/

Manifold AbsolutePressure Sensor

ThrottlePositionSensor

A B C D

A B C D

A

A

B

B

C

C

EngineTemperature

Sensor

2 1

2 1

RearInjector

FrontInjector

A BA B

A B A B

RBK

CrankPositionSensor(CKP)

RBK

1 2 3

1 2 3

SOCKET CONNECTOR(B side)

PIN CONNECTOR(A side)

E

K

TS U

I

C

QP RM O

G H

A B

15A

15A

15AP R

I J

C D

15A

15A

15AM O

G H

A B

15A

15A

15A

K L

S U

F

15A

15AE

SwitchPosition


OFFACC.IGNITION


Dot indicates continuity with redwire in switch position indicated

HFSM only

Jiffy StandSensor

BKR W

1 2 3

1 2 3

[5]

[20A]Page 2

[22A]Page 2 [141B]

Page 2

BN

/GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

BK

BK

BK

BK

BK

BK

BK

BK

BK

BE

BEBE

BK

BK

BK

BK

BK

W/Y

V/W

V/W

Y/W

Y/W

Y/W

Y/R

Y/R

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

W/Y

O

O

R

R

R

R

R

R RR

RB

K R

W

LGN/V

LGN/V

LGN/Y

LGN/V

LGN

/Y

LGN

/V

BN/GY

PK/GN

BN/GY

BE/GN

BE/GY

BE/GY

BE/GY

GN/BN

BK/PKGN/GY

GN

/BN

GN

/GY

PK

/GN

BK

/PK

BE

/GN

GY

/BE

GY

/BE

GY

/BE

GN/O

Y/BE

Y/GN

Y/GN

PK

/O

PK

/Y

GY

/V

O/G

Y

Y/G

N

Y/G

N

Y/G

N

Y/G

N

Y/B

E

BN

/R

BK

/W

BK

/W

BK

/W

BK

/O

BK

/W

BK

/W

BE/O

BK/W

BN/R

BE

/O

GY/V

W/BK

BK/O

W/BK

W/B

K

O/GY

R/BK

R/BK

R/BK

PK/Y

GN/O

PK/O

W/Y W/Y

V/W V/W

R/WR/W

LGN/Y LGN/Y

BK/PK BK/PK

BE/GNBE/GNGN/GY GN/GY

Y/GNY/GN

BK/OBK/O

BN/R BN/RBK/W BK/W

GY/V GY/V

EngineCase

GroundPoint

[141A]

[138B][138A] [90B]

[90A]

[87B][87A]

[80B][80A]

[88B][88A]

[137B][137A]

[20B] [83A][83B]

[79A][79B] [85A]

[85B]

[22B]

[84A][84B]

[200A][200B]

[91A]

[145B][145A]

[78B][78A]

[208A]

[30B][30A]

et01156

Figure B-5. Engine Management (1 of 2) (XL): 2009 Sportster DOM. and INT. Models

Figure B-5.Figure B-5.Engine Management (1 of 2) (XL): 2009 Sportster DOM. and

INT. ModelsEngine Management (1 of 2) (XL): 2009 Sportster DOM. and

INT. Models

Engine Stop Switch


Socket connector(B side)

Pin connector(A side)

TachometerIgnition

GY

W/B

K

34

Hand Controls,Right

[22A]

BN/GY

OLGN/V

BK


BN/GY

LGN/V

O

O

BK

BK

BN/GY

LGN/V

[20A]

To mainharness

To mainharness

[20A]

To mainharness

BN/GY

LGN/VO

BK

O

BK

BN/GY

LGN/V

2

67

12

2

67

12

Fuel Pump And Low Fuel Switch(In Fuel Tank)

[141B]

O Y/W

Y/R

BK

[86]

1 2 3 4

To main harness

SpeedometerIgnition

Serial data

Battery

Ground

RPM x 100

Serial data

Battery

Ground

[39A] [39B]

[108A] [108B]

Speedometer [39A] [39B]

12

5

7

IgnitionSerial data

Battery

Ground

12

5

7

12

5

7

12

5

7

12

5

7

12

5

7

[141A]

[162]

[20B]Page 1

[20B]Page 1

[22B]Page 1

et01157

Figure B-6. Engine Management (2 of 2) (XL): 2009 Sportster DOM. and INT. Models

Figure B-6.Figure B-6.Engine Management (2 of 2) (XL): 2009 Sportster DOM. and

INT. ModelsEngine Management (2 of 2) (XL): 2009 Sportster DOM. and

INT. Models

AB

IGN 15A

ACCY 15A

IgnitionSwitch

[33]

Battery 15AJ

D

A

I

C

B

30 AmpMAXIFUSE

B A

GND1



ECM

TSM/TSSM/HFSM

[61B]

Headlamp Hi/lo SwitchLeft Turn Switch

Left HandControls

Right Turn Switch


Right HandControls

Fuseblocks Top viewTop view

[119]

Accessories

Lights

Ignition

Fuel Pump


ECM

Battery

Spare

P&A IGN

Instruments

Spare

Spare

Open

25 1

25 1

6 5 4 3 2 1

To frontturn signals

To rear lighting

To instruments andIndicator lamps

[61]

RearStop Lamp

Switch

1 2 3 4 5 61 2 3 4 5

1 2 3 4 5

1 2 3 4 5 7 12

1 2 3 4

To headlamp

Lights 15AR P

Battery

123

5678

12

123

5678

12

5

10

28

5

10

28

HFSM only

SOCKET CONNECTOR

PIN CONNECTOR(A SIDE)

(B SIDE)E

K

TS U

I

C

QP RM O

G H

A B

15A

15A

15AP R

I J

C D

15A

15A

15AM O

G H

A B

15A

15A

15A

K L

S U

F

15A

15AE

SWITCHPOSITION

RED/BLACK

RED RED/GRAY

OFFACC.IGNITION



Serial data

Ground

Ground

BatteryIgnition

Serial data

Left turn feedRight turn feed

Right turn switch inputLeft turn switch input

Ground

1234

1234


[162]

[5]

[163]

page 2[31B]

[20A]page 2

[38B]page 2

[7B]page 2

GY

BK

BN

BN

W/V

O/W

V

W V

LGN

/V

LGN/V

BN

/GY

BN/GY

W/BN

BK

O/W

R/Y

O/W

R/Y

W/B

NW

/BN

BE

BE

BN

BK

BK

R

R R

R

R

V

R/GY

R/BK

R/BK

R/BK

R/GY

GY

BK

BE

BK

O/W

BN/GY

BE

BN

BK

O/W

O/W

O/W

R/Y

O/W

R/Y

V

BE

BE

BKO

/W

W/V

W/V

Y

Y

Y

WW

W

BK

BK

LGN/V


[31A]

[121B][121A][24B]

[24A]

[22A][22B]

[38A] [7A]

[20B]

[208B][208A]

[78B][78A]

[30B][30A]

et01158

Figure B-7. Lights (1 of 2) (XL): 2009 Sportster DOM. and INT. Models

Figure B-7.Figure B-7.Lights (1 of 2) (XL): 2009 Sportster DOM. and INT. ModelsLights (1 of 2) (XL): 2009 Sportster DOM. and INT. Models

Rear LightingConfiguration for all except XL1200N

[18A] [18B]

[40A] [40B]

[19A] [19B]

BK

BE

BEBE

BEBK

V

V

BE

BKV

BK

BNBE

BK

BE

BK

V

BE

BKV

V/BN

R/Y

O/W

Speedometer

Tachometer

BN/GYO/W

BNWV

LGN/V

BK

BK

BK

BK


[39A] [39B]

[108A] [108B]

Speedometer

BN/GYO/W

LGN/V

BK

BK

BNWV

BN/GYO/W

LGN/V

[20A]

Front Lighting

To mainharness

To mainharness

RightTurn

LeftTurn

[19B]

Rear LightingConfiguration for XL1200N only

BK

BK

V

V

[18B]

BKR/YBEBE

12

12

To mainharness

[20A]

To mainharness

BN/GYO/W

LGN/V

BK

BNWV

[39A] [39B]

BK

BN/GYO/W

LGN/V

To mainharness [7A]page 1

To mainharness

BNWVBK

BK

BK

R/Y

Serial data

BatteryAccessory

Ground

RPM x 100

Serial data

BatteryAccessory

Ground

2

567

2

567

Serial data

BatteryAccessory

Ground

2

567

2

567

2

12345

7

12

12345

7

12

567

2

567


R/Y

BK

BNO/W

V

BE

BK

BK

BEBE

BN

V

LeftTurn

RightTurn

Running lamps(DOM only)

BK

Position Lamp(HDI ONLY)

[38B]

O/WWYBK

123456

1234

[31B]

[93A] [93B]

[19A]

[18A]

[94A]

[94B]

[7B]

21

123

123456

21

123456

123

23

1

21

21

3

23

1

21

21

3

456

4321 1

234

HeadlampWYBK

O/W

BK

BEBN

BK

BEV

R/YBK

BN

O/WV BE

LeftTurn/

Taillamp

RightTurn/

Taillamp

TailLamp

ConverterModule

[7B]

123456

Highbeam

Lowbeam

Tail(DOM only)

Tail(HDI only)

LicensePlateLamp

[20B]page 1

[7A]page 1

[31A]page 1

[38A]page 1

[20B]page 1

BK

BN

BN

BK

BK

BK

BKO/W

O/W

VW

WV

LGN/VLGN/V

BN/GY

BN/GY

LGN/V

BK

BK

BK

BN

O/W

O/W

O/W

VW

BN

BK

BK

BK WV

LGN/V

LGN/V

LGN/V

BN/GY

BN/GY

BN/GY

BK

BK

BK

BK

BK

BK

BK

BN

BNBE

BEBE

BE

O/W

O/W

V

V

Y

Y

W

W

BK

BE

VBK

BK

BK

BK

BK

BNBE

BN

BE

BK

O/W

O/W

R/Y

R/Y

R/Y

R/Y

V

V

V

BEBE

et01159

Figure B-8. Lights (2 of 2) (XL): 2009 Sportster DOM. and INT. Models

Figure B-8.Figure B-8.Lights (2 of 2) (XL): 2009 Sportster DOM. and INT. ModelsLights (2 of 2) (XL): 2009 Sportster DOM. and INT. Models

Horn Switch

Left HandControls

TSM/TSSM/HFSM

Serial dataNeutral switch

Ground

Serial data

Ground

Ground

Speedometer

Tachometer


Trip ResetSwitch

Speedometer


To mainharness

[20A]

To mainharness

6789

12

1

6789

12

1

6789

12

1

ACCY 15A

IgnitionSwitch

[33]

D C

30 AmpMAXIFUSE

B A

GND1



ECM

[24B]

[61B]

[24A]


[119]

Accessories

Lights

Ignition

Fuel pump


ECM

Battery

Spare

P&A IGN

Instruments

Spare

Spare

Open


[61]

1 6

1 6

INSTR 15AG H

BatteryOilPressureSending

Unit

NeutralSwitch

IgnitionSerial data

AccessoryGround



RPM x 100

IgnitionSerial data

AccessoryGround

IgnitionSerial data

AccessoryGround



12

678

11

12

678

11

12

67

12

67

12

678

11

12

678

11

34

12

1234


1234

34

12

HFSM only


Socket connector


(B side)

E

K

TS U

I

C

QP RM O

G H

A B

15A

15A

15AP R

I J

C D

15A

15A

15AM O

G H

A B

15A

15A

15A

K L

S U

F

15A

15AE

SWITCHPOSITION


OFFACC.IGNITION



Horn

[20B]

[20A]

[5]

[163]

[20B]

5

10

28

5

10

28

BKBK

BK

BK

BKBK

BK

O/W

O/W

O/W

O

O

O O

O

LGN/V

LGN/V

LGN/V

BK

BK

BK

BK

BK

TN

TN

O/W

O/W

O/W

O

LGN/V

LGN/V

Y/B

KY

/BK Y

/BK

GN/Y

GN

/Y

BK

TN

TN

O/W R R

R

O R/BK

R/GY

GN

/Y

BK

BK

TN

TN

O/W

O

LGN/V

LGN/V

GN/Y

BK

TN

TN

O/W

O

OO

LGN/V

GN/Y

GN

/Y

R

R/GY

R/BK


[120B][120A]

[122B][122A]

[136B][136A]

[208B][208A]

[39B][39A]

[78B][78A]

[30B][30A]

[20B]

[39B][39A]

[20A]

[108B][108A]

et01160

Figure B-9. Horn and Instruments (XL): 2009 Sportster DOM. and INT. Models

Figure B-9.Figure B-9.Horn and Instruments (XL): 2009 Sportster DOM. and INT.

ModelsHorn and Instruments (XL): 2009 Sportster DOM. and INT.

Models

Left turn switch

Left HandControls

IGN 15A

ACCY 15A

IgnitionSwitch

[33]

Battery 15A

ECM 15A

SecuritySiren

(optional)

A

J

D

A

B

I

C

B

StartRelay

ABC

ABC

PowerSignal

Ground

BK

30 AmpMAXIFUSE

B A

GND1


IGN − I

BATT – BACC – A

IQCPR

8787A308586

54321

ECM

TSM/TSSM/HFSM

[61B]

Right Turn SwitchEngine Stop SwitchStart Switch

Right HandControls


[119]

Accessories

Lights

Ignition

Fuel pump


ECM

Battery

Spare

P&A IGN

Instruments

Spare

SystemRelay

Spare

Open

[119B]

6 5 4 3 1

6 5 4 3 1

6 5 2 1

6 5 2

To frontTurn signals

To Rear Lighting

To instruments andIndicator lamps

[61]

1 5

1 5

3 5 7 12

KTESU

8787A308586

54321

Starter

Battery

REDband

2211 Antenna ‘A’

Antenna ‘B’

Hands free antenna

Battery

123

BatteryIgnition

Serial data

Left turn feedRight turn feed

Right turn switch inputLeft turn switch input

Start relay control

Alarm signalGround


System relay

Serial data

Ground

Switched power

Ground

123

56789

1112

123

56789

1112

123

2

5

10

13

28

31

2

5

10

13

28

31

Socket connector


(B side)E

K

TS U

I

C

QP RM O

G H

A B

15A

15A

15AP R

I J

C D

15A

15A

15AM O

G H

A B

15A

15A

15A

K L

S U

F

15A

15AE

SWITCHPOSITION


OFFACC.IGNITION


Dot indicates continuity with redWire in switch position indicated

HFSM Only

[162]

[5]

[163]

[20A]Page 2

[31B]Page 2

[7B]Page 2

BN

BK

BK

GY

W/V

V

BN/GYLGN/BN

LGN/BN

BN/GY

TN/GN

LGN/V

W/BN

BK

BK

GN

GY

BK

BK

BK

O/W

W/V

O/W

W/V

O/W

O/Y

BKO/Y

R

R

R

R

R R

BK

BK

BK

BN

V

BN/GY

LGN/V

BE/GY

Y/BK

W/BK

R/GY

R/BK

R/BK

R/GY

GN/O

GN

TN/GN

BE/GY

BE/GY

BK/R

W/BKGN/O

R/BK

BK

BK

BN

GY

O/W

V

W/B

NW

/BK

BK

/R

GY

O/W

W/B

NW

/BK

BK

/R

BK

BN V

LGN

/V


[31A]

[24B][24A]

[22A][22B]

[20B]

[7A]

[209A][209B]

[128]

[208B][208A]

[78B][78A]

[142B][142A]

[30B][30A]

et01161

Figure B-10. Security (1 of 2) (XL): 2009 Sportster DOM. and INT. Models

Figure B-10.Figure B-10.Security (1 of 2) (XL): 2009 Sportster DOM. and INT. ModelsSecurity (1 of 2) (XL): 2009 Sportster DOM. and INT. Models

BK

V

BK

BKV

BN

[31B]

BKBN

12

56

BNVBK

[19B]

BK

BK

V

V

[18B]

12

123

4321

12

12

12

[94B][94A]

[19A]

[18A]

[93A]

[7B]

Totail/brakelamp

6 5 2

6 5 2

6 5 2

23

5

7

12

23

5

7

12


Front Turn Signals

RightTurn

LeftTurn

Serial data

Battery

Ground

RPM x 100

Serial data

Battery

Ground

2

5

7

2

5

7

Serial data

Battery

Ground

2

5

7

2

5

7

2

5

7

2

5

7

Rear turn signalsConfiguration for XL1200N only

To mainharness

From mainharness

[39A] [39B]

LGN/V

BN/GY

BK

BN/GY

LGN/V

BK

[108B][108A]

BNVBK

BK

Tachometer

Speedometer

BN/GY

LGN/V

BK

BN/GY

LGN/V

BK

BN

V

BN

V

From mainharness [7A]

page 1

[20A]

To mainharness

[20A]

To mainharness


LeftTurn

RightTurn

BNVBK

BK

Socket connector


(B side)

[39A] [39B]

LGN/V

BN/GY

BK

Speedometer

[18A] [18B]

[19A] [19B]

BKV

V

BKV

BK

BN

BK

V

BKV

[7B]

2

6 5 2

1

21

21

21

LEFTTURN/

TAILLAMP

RightTurn/

Taillamp

TailLamp

ConverterModule

Rear turn signalsConfiguration for all except XL1200N

[20B]page 1

[31A]page 1

[7A]page 1

[20B]page 1

et01162

Figure B-11. Security (2 of 2) (XL): 2009 Sportster DOM. and INT. Models

Figure B-11.Figure B-11.Security (2 of 2) (XL): 2009 Sportster DOM. and INT. ModelsSecurity (2 of 2) (XL): 2009 Sportster DOM. and INT. Models

E

K

TS U

I

C

QP RM O

G H

A B

15A

15A

15AP R

I J

C D

15A

15A

15AM O

G H

A B

15A

15A

15A

K L

S U

F

15A

15AE

IGN 15A

Fuel Pump15A

IgnitionSwitch

[33]

Battery 15A

ECM 15AA

J

G

A

B

I

H

B

[30B]

[5]30 Amp

MAXIFUSE

B A

[GND1]


EngineCase

GroundPoint

IGN − IBATT – B

ACC – A

[78A] [78B]ECM

TSM/TSSM/HFSM

[61B]


[119]

ACCESSORIES

LIGHTS

IGNITION

FUEL PUMP


ECM

BATTERY

SPARE

P&A IGN

INSTRUMENTS

SPARE

SystemRelay

ENGINE CONTROL

OPEN

[119B]Idle Air Control (A) HiIdle Air Control (B) Low

Injector Rear

Injector Front

Battery


To Instruments AndIndicator Lamps

[61]


StartRelay

IQCPR

8787A308586

54321

[128]

Starter

RedBand

Access 15AD C

P&A IGNV15AF E

To Left HandControls

P&ABattery

[160B]1 2 3 4 5 61 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12

1 12 2

121 2

[145A]

[91A]

DataLink

ConnectorJiffy Stand

Sensor

IgnitionCoil

1 2 3 4

D C B A

Powe

r

CoilR

ear

CoilF

ront

Powe

r

D C B A

ToEngineHarness

CBA

[65B]

To VehicleSpeed Sensor

[22B]

KTESU

8787A308586

54321

[20B]

[137B]

[133B]

[137A][133A]

[138B][138A]

FrontO2

Sensor

EngineTemperature

Sensor

RearO2

Sensor

HDIonly

INSTR 15AG H


ASSY

1 2 3 4 [141A]

Spare 15A


ToHeadlamp

M O

Lights 15AR P

EngineControl 15AK L

Spare 15AM O

[24B]1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 67 8

[31A]1 2 3 4 5 6

A

BC

A

BC

[142A] [142B]

PowerSignal

Ground

21

21 Antenna ’A’

Antenna ’B’

Hands Free Antenna

[209B]

[208A] [208B]

[7A]

To RearLighting

Fuel SenderResistor Assy

[200A]

240

240

1 2 3

1 2 3

[120B]

[120A]

OilPressureSending

Unit

NeutralSwitch

[136B]

[136A]

B A

1

Battery

[30A]

BatteryIgnition

Serial DataNeutral SwitchLeft Turn Feed

Right Turn FeedRight Turn Switch Input

Left Turn Switch InputStart Relay Control

Clutch SwitchAlarm Signal

Ground


System Relay




Coil RearCrank Pos Sensor (–)

Switched Power5V Sensor power

Oxygen Sensor (B)Throttle Pos Sensor Input


GroundCoil Front

Crank Pos Sensor (+)


123456789

101112

123456789

101112

123

123

2

56789

1011121314

171819

21

23242526

28293031

33

3536

2

56789

1011121314

171819

21Active Intake 2020

23242526

28293031

33

3536

123456789

1011121314

[79A]

CrankPositionSensor(Ckp)

2 1

2 1

[83A] 1 2 3 4 [38A]

RearStop Lamp

Switch

[121B]

[121A]AB

BK

BK

BK

BK

BK

BK

BK

BK

BK

GY

BE

BK

BK

BK

GN

GN

TN

TN

R W

1 2 3

1 2 3

BK

BE

BE

R/W

GN

/BN

GN/BN

GN/GY

GN/GY

PK/GN

PK

/GN

BE/GY

BE/GY

BE/GY

BN/GY

LGN/R

GY

/BE

GY

/BEBE/GN

BE/GNLGN/R

BK/BE

BK/BE

[38B] [31B][22A][20A]

SecuritySiren

(Optional)

[209A]

HFSM only

SOCKET CONNECTOR(B SIDE)


[122B]To

Horn[122A]

SWITCHPOSITION

RED/BLACK

RED RED/GRAY

OFFACC.IGNITION



To chargingsystem. Seestarting and

chargingsheet

2 1

2 1

[90B][90A]

[7B][24A]

[65A]

[145B]

[200B][83B]

[79B]

TN

TNB

N

BK

BK

GY

GY

BK

BK

BK

BK

BE

BE

BN

GY

BK

BK

BK

BK

BK

BK

BE

BE

BN

BK

BK

Y/W

R/W

R/W

W/Y

W/Y

V/W

V/W

W/V

O/Y

O/W

Y/R

Y/W

BK

Y/R

Y/WO/W

O/W

O/W

O/W

O/W

O/W

R/Y

R/Y

R/Y

W/V

O

RB

K R

YY V

W

W

V

VBNV

R

R

O

R

R

R

R

R

W

LGN

/V

LGN

/V

LGN/V

LGN/Y

LGN/Y

LGN/V

TN/GN

TN/GN

LGN/BN

LGN/BN

BN

/GY

BN/GY

BN/GY

GN

/Y

GN

/Y

Y/GN

Y/GN

Y/G

N

Y/G

N

O/GY Y/GN

Y/B

K

Y/B

K

BK/R

Y/BK

Y/BE

Y/B

E

W/BN

W/B

N

O/GNO/GN

PK/Y

PK

/Y

W/BK

W/B

K

BK/O

GY/O

BK/O

GY/O

BE/O

BE

/O

BN/R

BN/R

BK/R

BK

/R

BK/R

BK/R

BK

/R

BK/R

R/BK

BK/R

BK/R

BK/R

R/GY

R/GY

BK/R

O/G

Y

GY/V

GY/V

BK/V

BK/V

BK/W

BK/W

BK

/W

BK

/W

BK

/W

PK/O

PK

/O

et00119

Figure B-12. Main Harness (XR): 2009 Sportster DOM. and INT. Models

Figure B-12.Figure B-12.Main Harness (XR): 2009 Sportster DOM. and INT. ModelsMain Harness (XR): 2009 Sportster DOM. and INT. Models

Left HandControls

Horn Switch

Headlamp Hi/Lo Switch

Left Turn Switch

Clutch Switch

Right HandControls

O/W

R/Y

GY

W/B

KW

/BN

BK

/RO

/W YB

E WW

/VY

/BK

123456

BK

/R BK

Speedometer

Tachometer

BN/GYO/W

BN

WV

LGN/V

TN

GN

/Y

BK

BK

BKO O

BK

Configuration For XR

IgnitionSerial Data

BatteryAccessory

GroundTrip Odometer Reset Switch

Trip Odometer Reset Switch

Fuel Level

RPM x 100

Serial Data

BatteryAccessory

Ground


To MainHarness

To mainharness

To MainHarness

BN/GYO/W

LGN/VO

BK

BNWV

TNGN/Y

Y/W

12

56789

11

C

BAD

12

56789

11

C

BAD

GY

GY

O

BK

BN/GYO/W

LGN/V

Y/W

123456789

10

12

Right Turn Switch

Engine Stop Switch

Start Switch


SOCKET CONNECTOR


(B SIDE)

[24B]

[162]

[22B]

[20B]

[163]

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 [24A]

[22A]

[108B][108A]

[20A]

[39B][39A]

et00122

Figure B-13. Indicator Lamps and Controls (XR): 2009 Sportster DOM. and INT. Models

Figure B-13.Figure B-13.Indicator Lamps and Controls (XR): 2009 Sportster DOM.

and INT. ModelsIndicator Lamps and Controls (XR): 2009 Sportster DOM.

and INT. Models

BatteryIgnition

Serial Data

Ground


Idle Air Control (A) hiIdle Air Control (B) low

Injector Rear

Active IntakeInjector Front 21

20

23242526

28293031

33

3536

4321

191817

141312111098765

2

2120

23242526

28293031

33

3536

191817

141312111098765

2

Battery


System Relay




Coil RearCrank Pos Sensor (–)

Switched Power5V Sensor power

Oxygen sensor (B)Throttle pos sensor input


GroundCoil Front

Crank Pos Sensor (+)


IGN 15A

FuelPump 15A

IgnitionSwitch

[33]

Battery 15A

ECM 15AA

J

G

A

B

I

EngineControl 15AK L

H

B

BK

30 AmpMAXIFUSE

B A

[GND1]

IGN − IBATT – B

ACC – A

ECM

TSM/TSSM/HFSM

[61B]

Fuse Blocks Top ViewTop View

[119]

Accessories

Lights

Ignition

Fuel Pump


ECM

Battery

Spare

P&A IGN

Instruments

Spare

SystemRelay

Engine Control

Open

[119B]


[61]


EngineHarness


4 32 6 7 10 12

1 2

1

1

12

2

2

DataLink

Connector

IgnitionCoil

D C B A

D C B A

Pow

er

Coi

lRea

r

Coi

lFro

nt

Pow

er

[22B]

[20B]

FrontO2

Sensor

RearO2

Sensor

HDIonly

INSTR 15AG H


ASSY

1 2 3 4

[141A]

Fuel SenderResistor ASSY

240

240

Battery

[208A]

12345

789

11121314

12345

6 6789

10 1011121314

Idle AirControl

D C B A

D C B A

Intake AirTemperature/

Manifold AbsolutePressure Sensor

ThrottlePositionSensor

A B C D

A B C D

A

A

B

B

C

C

EngineTemperature

Sensor

2 1

2 1

RearInjector

FrontInjector

[85A]

[85B]

[84A]

[84B]

A BA B

A B

RBK

CrankPositionSensor(CKP)

RBK

1 2 3

1 2 312

12

SOCKET CONNECTOR(B side)

PIN CONNECTOR(A side)

E

K

TS U

I

C

QP RM O

G H

A B

15A

15A

15AP R

I J

C D

15A

15A

15AM O

G H

A B

15A

15A

15A

K L

S U

F

15A

15AE

SwitchPosition


OFFACC.IGNITION



HFSM only

123

12

123

123

12

123

Jiffy StandSensor

BKR W

1 2 3

1 2 3

[5]

[20A]Page 2

[22A]Page 2 [141B]

Page 2

BN

/GY

GY

GY

GY

GY

BK

BK

BK

BK

BK

BK

BK

BK

BK

BE

BEBE

BK

BK

BK

BK

BK

W/Y

V/W

V/W

Y/W

Y/W

Y/W

Y/R

Y/R

R/W

R/W

R/W

R/W

W/Y

O

O

R

R

R

R

R

R

R R

RB

K R

W

LGN/V

LGN/V

LGN/Y

LGN/V

LGN

/Y

LGN

/V

BN/GY

PK/GN

BN/GY

LGN/R

BE/GN

BE/GY

BE/GY

BE/GY

GN/BN

BK/PKGN/GY

GN

/BN

GN

/GY

PK

/GN

BK

/PK

BE

/GN

GY

/BE

GY

/BE

GY

/BE

GN/O

Y/BE

Y/GN

Y/GN

PK

/O

PK

/Y

GY

/V

O/G

Y

Y/G

N

Y/G

N

Y/G

N

Y/G

N

Y/B

E

BN

/R

BK

/W

BK

/W

BK

/W

BK

/O

BK

/W

BK

/W

BE/O

BK/W

BN/R

BE

/O

GY

/OGY/V

W/BK

BK/O

GY/O

W/BK

W/B

K

O/GY

R/BK

R/BK

R/BK

R/BK

PK/Y

GN/O

PK/O

W/Y W/Y

V/W V/W

R/WR/W

LGN/Y LGN/Y

BK/PK BK/PK

BE/GNLGN/R

LGN

/R

BE/GNLGN/R

GN/GY GN/GYY/GNY/GN

BK/O

GY/OGY/O

BK/O

BN/R BN/RBK/W BK/W

GY/V GY/V

EngineCase

GroundPoint

ActiveIntake

Solenoid(HDIonly)

868530

87A87

12345

USETK

[78B][78A]

[91A]

[133B]

[133A]

[137B][137A]

[138B][138A] [90B]

[90A]

[87B][87A]

[80B][80A]

[88B][88A]

[145B][145A]

[200A][200B]

[178A][178B]

[83A][83B]

[79A][79B]

[30B][30A]

2 1

2 1

et00120

Figure B-14. Engine Management (1 of 2) (XR): 2009 Sportster DOM. and INT. Models

Figure B-14.Figure B-14.Engine Management (1 of 2) (XR): 2009 Sportster DOM. and

INT. ModelsEngine Management (1 of 2) (XR): 2009 Sportster DOM. and

INT. Models

Engine Stop Switch

Tachometer

34

Right HandControls


To MainHarness

To MainHarness

2

67

1

12

Fuel Pump And Low Fuel Switch(In Fuel Tank)

[86]

1 2 3 4

To main harness

Speedometer

IgnitionSerial Data

Battery

Ground

RPM x 100

Serial Data

Battery

Ground

12

5

7

C

B

D

12

5

7

Accessory 66

Accessory AA

C

B

D

[141A]

[162]

[20B]Page 1

[22B]Page 1

BK

BK BK

O

O

LGN/V

LGN/V LGN/V

BN/GY

BN/GY

BN/GY

BK

Y/R

Y/WO

GY

W/B

K

O/W

O/W

O/W

[20A]

[141B]

[22A]

[108B][108A]

[39B][39A]

et00121

Figure B-15. Engine Management (2 of 2) (XR): 2009 Sportster DOM. and INT. Models

Figure B-15.Figure B-15.Engine Management (2 of 2) (XR): 2009 Sportster DOM. and

INT. ModelsEngine Management (2 of 2) (XR): 2009 Sportster DOM. and

INT. Models

AB

IGN 15A

ACCY 15A

IgnitionSwitch

[33]

Battery 15AJ

D

A

I

C

B

30 AmpMAXIFUSE

B A

[GND1]



ECM

TSM/TSSM/HFSM

[61B]

Headlamp Hi/lo SwitchLeft Turn Switch

Left HandControls

Right Turn Switch


Right HandControls


[119]

Accessories

Lights

Ignition

Fuel Pump


ECM

Battery

Spare

P&A IGN

Instruments

Spare

Engine Control

Open

25 1

25 1

6 5 4 3 2 1


To Rear Lighting


[61]

RearStop Lamp

Switch

1 2 3 4 5 61 2 3 4 5

1 2 3 4 5

1 2 3 4 5 7 12

1 2 3 4

To Headlamp

Lights 15AR P

Battery

123

5678

12

123

5678

12

5

10

28

5

10

28

HFSM only

SOCKET CONNECTOR


(B SIDE)E

K

TS U

I

C

QP RM O

G H

A B

15A

15A

15AP R

I J

C D

15A

15A

15AM O

G H

A B

15A

15A

15A

K L

S U

F

15A

15AE

SWITCHPOSITION

RED/BLACK

RED RED/GRAY

OFFACC.IGNITION



Serial Data

Ground

Ground

BatteryIgnition

Serial Data

Left Turn FeedRight Turn Feed

Right Turn Switch InputLeft Turn Switch Input

Ground

1234

1234


[162]

[5]

[163]

Page 2[31B]

[20A]Page 2

[38B]Page 2

[7B]Page 2

GY

BK

BN

BN

W/V

O/W

V

W V

LGN

/V

LGN/V

BN

/GY

BN/GY

W/BN

BK

O/W

R/Y

O/W

R/Y

W/B

NW

/BN

BE

BE

BN

BK

BK

R

R R

R

R

V

R/GY

R/BK

R/BK

R/BK

R/GY

GY

BK

BK

BE

BK

O/W

BN/GY

BE

BN

BK

O/W

O/W

O/W

R/Y

O/W

R/Y

V

BE

BE

BKO

/W

W/V

W/V

Y

Y

Y

WW

W

BK

BK

LGN/V


[121B][121A]

[24B][24A]

[78B][78A]

[208B][208A]

[38A] [7A]

[30B][30A]

[20B]

[22A][22B]

[31A]

et00125

Figure B-16. Lights (1 of 2) (XR): 2009 Sportster DOM. and INT. Models

Figure B-16.Figure B-16.Lights (1 of 2) (XR): 2009 Sportster DOM. and INT. ModelsLights (1 of 2) (XR): 2009 Sportster DOM. and INT. Models

[38B]

[31B]

[108B][108A]

[39B][39A]

[20A]

Speedometer

Tachometer


Front Lighting

To MainHarness

To MainHarness

To MainHarness

Serial Data

BatteryAccessory

Ground

RPM x 100

Serial Data

BatteryAccessory

Ground

C

BAD

C

BAD

2

12345

7

12

567

2

567

LeftTurn

RightTurn

Position Lamp(HDI ONLY)

12

56

1234

Headlamp

HighBeam

LowBeam

[31A]Page 1

[38A]Page 1

[20B]Page 1

BK

BK

BK

BN

O/W

O/W

O/W

VW

BN

BK

BK

BK

WV

LGN/V

LGN/V

LGN/V

BN/GY

BN/GY

BN/GY

BK

BK

BK

BK

BK

BK

BK

BE

BEBEBN

BNBE

O/W

O/W

V

V

Y

Y

W

W

Running lamps(DOM only)

Rear Lighting

BEBE

RightTurn

LeftTurn

12

12

To MainHarness

21

123

123456

21

123456

4321 1

234

123456

Tail(DOM Only)

Tail(HDI Only)

[7A]page 1

BK

BK

BK

BK

BK

BNBE

BN

BE

BK

O/W

O/W

R/Y

R/Y

R/Y

R/Y

V

V

V

BEBE

[94B][94A]

[7B]

[19B]

[18B]

[19A]

[18A]

[93B][93A]

V

et00142

Figure B-17. Lights (2 of 2) (XR): 2009 Sportster DOM. and INT. Models

Figure B-17.Figure B-17.Lights (2 of 2) (XR): 2009 Sportster DOM. and INT. ModelsLights (2 of 2) (XR): 2009 Sportster DOM. and INT. Models

Horn Switch

Left HandControls

TSM/TSSM/HFSM

Serial DataNeutral Switch

Ground

Serial Data

Ground

Ground

Speedometer

Tachometer


Trip ResetSwitch

To MainHarness6

789

12

1

6789

12

1ACCY 15A

IgnitionSwitch

[33]

D C

30 AmpMAXIFUSE

B A

GND1



ECM

[61B]


[119]

Accessories

Lights

Ignition

Fuel Pump


ECM

Battery

Spare

P&A IGN

Instruments

Spare

Engine Control

Open


[61]

1 6

1 6

[20B]

INSTR 15AG H

BatteryOilPressureSending

Unit

NeutralSwitch

IgnitionSerial Data

AccessoryGround



RPM x 100

Serial Data

AccessoryGround

12

678

11

12

678

11

C

AD

C

AD

1234


1234

34

12

34

12

HFSM Only

Socket Connector

Pin Connector(A Side)

(B Side)

E

K

TS U

I

C

QP RM O

G H

A B

15A

15A

15AP R

I J

C D

15A

15A

15AM O

G H

A B

15A

15A

15A

K L

S U

F

15A

15AE

SWITCHPOSITION


OFFACC.IGNITION



Horn

[20B][20A]

[5]

[163]

5

10

28

5

10

28

BKGY

BK

GY

O/W

O/W

OLGN/V

LGN/V

BK

BK

BK

BK

O/W

O/W

LGN/V

Y/B

KY

/BK Y

/BK

BK

BK

TN

TN

O/W R R

R

O R/BK

R/GY

GN

/Y

BK

BK

TN

TN

O/W

O

LGN/V

LGN/V

GN/Y

BK

TN

TN

O/W

O

OO

LGN/V

GN/Y

GN

/Y

R

R/GY

R/BK


[122B][122A]

[120B][120A]

[136B][136A]

[24B][24A]

[78B][78A]

[208B][208A]

[30B][30A]

[108B][108A]

[20A]

[39B][39A]

et00124

Figure B-18. Horn and Instruments (XR): 2009 Sportster DOM. and INT. Models

Figure B-18.Figure B-18.Horn and Instruments (XR): 2009 Sportster DOM. and INT.

ModelsHorn and Instruments (XR): 2009 Sportster DOM. and INT.

Models

Left Turn Switch

Left HandControls

IGN 15A

ACCY 15A

IgnitionSwitch

[7A]

[33]

Battery 15A

ECM 15A

SecuritySiren

(Optional)

A

J

D

A

B

I

C

B

StartRelay

ABC

ABC

PowerSignal

Ground

BK

30 AmpMAXIFUSE

B A

GND1


IGN − I

BATT – BACC – A

IQCPR

8787A308586

54321

ECM

TSM/TSSM/HFSM

[61B]

Right Turn SwitchEngine Stop SwitchStart Switch

Right HandControls


[119]

Accessories

Lights

Ignition

Fuel Pump


ECM

Battery

Spare

P&A IGN

Instruments

Spare

SystemRelay

Engine Control

Open

[119B]

[128]

6 5 4 3 1

6 5 4 3 1

6 5 2 1

6 5 2


To Rear Lighting


[61]

1 5

1 5

3 5 7 12

KTESU

8787A308586

54321

Starter

Battery

RedBand

2211 Antenna ‘A’

Antenna ‘B’

Hands Free Antenna

Battery

123

BatteryIgnition

Serial Data

Left Turn FeedRight Turn Feed

Right Turn Switch InputLeft Turn Switch Input

Start Relay Control

Alarm SignalGround


System Relay

Serial Data

Ground

Switched Power

Ground

123

56789

1112

123

123

56789

1112

2

5

10

13

28

31

2

5

10

13

28

31

Socket Connector

Pin Connector(A Side)

(B Side)E

K

TS U

I

C

QP RM O

G H

A B

15A

15A

15AP R

I J

C D

15A

15A

15AM O

G H

A B

15A

15A

15A

K L

S U

F

15A

15AE

SWITCHPOSITION


OFFACC.IGNITION


Dot indicates continuity with redWire in switch position indicated

HFSM Only

[162]

[5]

[163]

[20A]Page 2

[31B]Page 2

[7B]Page 2

BN

BK

BK

GY

W/V

V

BN/GYLGN/BN

LGN/BN

BN/GY

TN/GN

LGN/V

W/BN

BK

BK

GN

GY

BK

BK

BK

O/W

W/V

O/W

W/V

O/W

O/Y

BKO/Y

R

R

R

R

R

R

BK

BK

BKB

N

V

BN/GY

LGN/V

BE/GY

Y/BK

W/BK

R/GY

R/BK

R/BK

R/GY

GN/O

GN

TN/GN

BE/GY

BE/GY

BK/R

W/BKGN/O

R/BK

BK

BK

BN

GY

O/W

V

W/B

NW

/BK

BK

/R

GY

O/W

W/B

NW

/BK

BK

/R

BK

BN V

LGN

/V


[24B][24A]

[78B][78A]

[208B][208A]

[209A][209B]

[30B][30A]

[22A][22B]

[20B]

[31A]

[142B][142A]

et00126

Figure B-19. Security (1 of 2) (XR): 2009 Sportster DOM. and INT. Models

Figure B-19.Figure B-19.Security (1 of 2) (XR): 2009 Sportster DOM. and INT. ModelsSecurity (1 of 2) (XR): 2009 Sportster DOM. and INT. Models

BK

V

BKBN

12

56

23

5

7

12


Front Turn Signals

Serial Data

Battery

Ground

Serial Data

Battery

Ground

C

B

D

2

5

7

C

B

D

2

5

7

From MainHarness

LGN/V

BN/GY

BK

BN/GY

LGN/V

BK

BN

VBK BK

Speedometer

Tachometer

BN/GY

LGN/V

BK

BN

VTo MainHarness

LeftTurn

RightTurn

SOCKET CONNECTOR


(B SIDE)

[20B]Page 1

[31A]Page 1

BK

BK

BK

BN

BKBN

V

V

[39B][39A]

[108B][108A]

[31B][20A]

et00127

Figure B-20. Security (2 of 2) (XR): 2009 Sportster DOM. and INT. Models

Figure B-20.Figure B-20.Security (2 of 2) (XR): 2009 Sportster DOM. and INT. ModelsSecurity (2 of 2) (XR): 2009 Sportster DOM. and INT. Models

TABLE OF CONTENTS

SUBJECT............................................................................................................................PAGE NO.C.1 METRIC CONVERSION...........................................................................................................C-1C.2 FLUID CONVERSIONS............................................................................................................C-2C.3 TORQUE CONVERSIONS.......................................................................................................C-3

AP

PE

ND

IX C

CO

NV

ER

SIO

NS


C.1METRIC CONVERSION

CONVERSION TABLE

Table C-1. Metric Conversions

INCHES to MILLIMETERS(IN x 25.40 = MM)

MILLIMETERS to INCHES(MM x 0.03937 = IN)

mminmminmminmmininmminmminmminmm

84.143-5/1649.211-15/1615.240.6.025.0013.582912.28358.984225.0039.1

85.723-3/850.80215.8755/8.051.0023.622922.323591.02426.0078.2

86.363.452.392-1/1617.46211/16.076.0033.661932.362601.06327.0118.3

87.313-7/1653.342.117.780.7.102.0043.701942.401611.10228.0157.4

88.903-1/253.972-1/819.0503/4.127.0053.740952.441621.14229.0197.5

90.493-9/1655.562-3/1620.320.8.152.0063.779962.480631.18130.0236.6

91.443.655.882.220.63813/16.178.0073.819972.519641.22031.0275.7

92.073-5/857.152-1/422.2257/8.203.0083.858982.559651.26032.0315.8

93.663-11/1658.422.322.860.9.229.0093.897992.598661.29933.0354.9

93.983.758.742-5/1623.81215/16.254.0103.9371002.638671.33834.03941

95.253-3/460.322-3/825.401.3971/643.9761012.677681.37835.07872

96.523.860.962.426.991-1/16.508.0204.0161022.716691.41736.11813

96.843-13/1661.912-7/1627.941.1.762.0304.0551032.756701.45637.15754

98.423-7/863.502-1/228.571-1/8.7941/324.0941042.795711.49638.19685

99.063.965.092-9/1630.161-3/161.016.0404.1341052.834721.53539.23626

100.013-15/1666.042.630.481.21.270.0504.1731062.874731.57540.27567

101.6466.672-5/831.751-1/41.524.0604.2121072.913741.61441.31498

102.194-1/1668.262-11/1633.021.31.5881/164.2521082.953751.65342.35439

104.144.168.582.733.341-5/161.778.0704.2911092.992761.69343.393710

104.774-1/869.852-3/434.921-3/82.032.0804.3311103.031771.73244.433111

106.364-3/1671.122.835.561.42.286.0904.3701113.071781.77245.472412

106.684.271.442-13/1636.511-7/162.540.14.4091123.110791.81146.511813

107.954-1/473.022-7/838.101-1/23.1751/84.4491133.149801.85047.551214

109.224.373.662.939.691-9/164.7623/164.4881143.189811.89048.590515

109.544-5/1674.612-15/1640.641.65.080.24.5271153.228821.92949.629916

111.124-3/876.20341.271-5/86.3501/44.5671163.268831.96850.669317

111.764.477.793-1/1642.861-11/167.620.34.6061173.307842.00851.708618

112.714-7/1678.743.143.181.77.9385/164.6451183.346852.04752.748019

114.304-1/279.373-1/844.451-3/49.5253/84.6851193.386862.08653.787420

115.894-9/1680.963-3/1645.721.810.160.44.7241203.425872.12654.826821

116.844.681.283.246.041-13/1611.1127/164.7641213.464882.16555.866122

117.474-5/882.553-1/447.621-7/812.7001/24.8031223.504892.20556.905523

119.064-11/1683.823.348.261.914.2889/164.8421233.543902.24457.944924

HOME

2009 Sportster Diagnostics: Appendix C Conversions C-1

C.2FLUID CONVERSIONS

UNITED STATES SYSTEMUnless otherwise specified, all fluid volume measurements inthis Service Manual are expressed in United States (U.S.)units-of-measure. See below:

• 1 pint (U.S.) = 16 fluid ounces (U.S.)

• 1 quart (U.S.) = 2 pints (U.S.) = 32 fl. oz. (U.S.)

• 1 gallon (U.S.) = 4 quarts (U.S.) = 128 fl. oz. (U.S.)

METRIC SYSTEMFluid volume measurements in this Service Manual includethe metric system equivalents. In the metric system, 1 liter (L)= 1,000 milliliters (mL). Should you need to convert from U.S.units-of-measure to metric units-of-measure (or vice versa),refer to the following:

• fluid ounces (U.S.) x 29.574 = milliliters

• pints (U.S.) x 0.473 = liters

• quarts (U.S.) x 0.946 = liters

• gallons (U.S.) x 3.785 = liters

• milliliters x 0.0338 = fluid ounces (U.S.)

• liters x 2.114 = pints (U.S.)

• liters x 1.057 = quarts (U.S.)

• liters x 0.264 = gallons (U.S.)

BRITISH IMPERIAL SYSTEMFluid volume measurements in this Service Manual do notinclude the British Imperial (Imp.) system equivalents. The fol-lowing conversions exist in the British Imperial system:

• 1 pint (Imp.) = 20 fluid ounces (Imp.)

• 1 quart (Imp.) = 2 pints (Imp.)

• 1 gallon (Imp.) = 4 quarts (Imp.)

Although the same unit-of-measure terminology as the U.S.system is used in the British Imperial (Imp.) system, the actualvolume of each British Imperial unit-of-measure differs from itsU.S. counterpart.The U.S. fluid ounce is larger than the BritishImperial fluid ounce. However, the U.S. pint, quart, and gallonare smaller than the British Imperial pint, quart, and gallon,respectively. Should you need to convert from U.S. units toBritish Imperial units (or vice versa), refer to the following:

• fluid ounces (U.S.) x 1.042 = fluid ounces (Imp.)

• pints (U.S.) x 0.833 = pints (Imp.)

• quarts (U.S.) x 0.833 = quarts (Imp.)

• gallons (U.S.) x 0.833 = gallons (Imp.)

• fluid ounces (Imp.) x 0.960 = fluid ounces (U.S.)

• pints (Imp.) x 1.201 = pints (U.S.)

• quarts (Imp.) x 1.201 = quarts (U.S.)

• gallons (Imp.) x 1.201 = gallons (U.S.)

HOME

C-2 2009 Sportster Diagnostics: Appendix C Conversions

C.3TORQUE CONVERSIONS

UNITED STATES SYSTEMThe U.S. units of torque, foot pounds and inch pounds, areused in this service manual.To convert units, use the followingequations:

• foot pounds (ft-lbs) X 12.00000 = inch pounds (in-lbs).

• inch pounds (in-lbs) X 0.08333 = foot pounds (ft-lbs).

METRIC SYSTEMAll metric torque specifications are written in Newton-meters(Nm). To convert metric to United States units and UnitedStates to metric, use the following equations:

• Newton meters (Nm) X 0.737563 = foot pounds (ft-lbs).

• Newton meters (Nm) X 8.85085 = inch pounds (in-lbs).

• foot pounds (ft-lbs) X 1.35582 = Newton meters (Nm).

• inch pounds (in-lbs) X 0.112985 = Newton meters (Nm).

HOME

2009 Sportster Diagnostics: Appendix C Conversions C-3

C-4 2009 Sportster Diagnostics: Appendix C Conversions

NOTES

TABLE OF CONTENTS

SUBJECT............................................................................................................................PAGE NO.D.1 GLOSSARY..............................................................................................................................D-1

AP

PE

ND

IX D

GL

OS

SA

RY


D.1GLOSSARY

ACRONYMS AND ABBREVIATIONS

Table D-1. Acronyms and Abbreviations

DESCRIPTIONACRONYM OR ABBREVIATION

AmperesA

Alternating CurrentAC

AccessoryACC

Automatic Compression ReleaseACR

Absorbed Glass Mat (battery)AGM

AmpereAMP

American Wire GaugeAWG

Battery VoltageB+

Bank Angle SensorBAS

Before Top Dead CenterBTDC

Celsius (Centigrade)C

CaliforniaCA

CalibrationCAL

Cubic CentimetersCC

Cold Cranking AmpsCCA

Crankshaft PositionCKP

Centimetercm

Direct CurrentDC

Data Link ConnectorDLC

DomesticDOM

Diagnostic Trouble CodeDTC

Digital Volt Ohm MeterDVOM

Electronic Control ModuleECM

Engine Coolant TemperatureECT

Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only MemoryEEPROM

Electronic Fuel InjectionEFI

Engine TemperatureET

Evaporative Emissions Control SystemEVAP

FahrenheitF

Foot-Poundsft-lbs

Fluid Ouncefl oz.

Gramg

GallonGAL

Gross Axle Weight RatingGAWR

Ground (electrical)GND

Gross Vehicle Weight RatingGVWR

Harley-Davidson InternationalHDI

Harley-Davidson Smart Security SystemH-DSSS

Hands Free Security ModuleHFSM

MercuryHg

HOME

2009 Sportster Diagnostics: Appendix D Glossary D-1



Idle Air ControlIAC

Intake Air TemperatureIAT

Instrument ClusterIC

Inside DiameterID

Ignition Light/Key SwitchIGN

InchIn.

Injector Pulse WidthINJ PW

Inch-Poundsin-lbs

KilogramKg

KilometerKm

KilopascalkPa

Kilometers Per Hourkm/hr

LiterL

Liquid Crystal DisplayLCD

Light Emitting DiodeLED

MilliamperemA

Manifold Absolute PressureMAP

milliliterml

millimetermm

Miles Per HourMPH

millisecondms

Newton-MeterNm

Not ApplicableN/A

Numberno.

OxygenO2

Outside DiameterOD

Original Equipment ManufacturerOEM

Ounceoz

Parts and AccessoriesP&A

Part NumberPN

Pounds per Square InchPSI

ReserveRES

Revolutions Per MinuteRPM

Cubic Feet per Hour at Standard ConditionsSCFH

Throttle Control ActuatorTCA

Top Dead CenterTDC

Twist Grip SensorTGS

Throttle PositionTP

Intake Air Temperature/Manifold Absolute PressureTMAP

Turn Signal ModuleTSM

Turn Signal/Security ModuleTSSM

VoltV

Volts of Alternating CurrentVAC

HOME

D-2 2009 Sportster Diagnostics: Appendix D Glossary



Volts of Direct CurrentVDC

Vehicle Identification NumberVIN

Vehicle Speed SensorVSS

HOME

2009 Sportster Diagnostics: Appendix D Glossary D-3

D-4 2009 Sportster Diagnostics: Appendix D Glossary

NOTES

TABLE OF CONTENTS

SUBJECT............................................................................................................................PAGE NO.E.1 TSM/TSSM (JAPAN/KOREA) OVERVIEW...............................................................................E-1E.2 TSM/TSSM FEATURES............................................................................................................E-2E.3 VEHICLE DELIVERY................................................................................................................E-4E.4 TURN SIGNAL FUNCTIONS....................................................................................................E-8E.5 BANK ANGLE FUNCTION.......................................................................................................E-9E.6 SECURITY SYSTEM FUNCTIONS (TSSM ONLY)................................................................E-10E.7 ARMING/DISARMING (TSSM ONLY)....................................................................................E-13E.8 DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTC)...............................................................................E-15E.9 INITIAL DIAGNOSTIC CHECK: TSM/TSSM..........................................................................E-18E.10 ODOMETER SELF-DIAGNOSTICS.....................................................................................E-26E.11 BREAKOUT BOX: TSM/TSSM..............................................................................................E-28E.12 FAILS TO DISARM (TSSM ONLY)........................................................................................E-30E.13 TURN SIGNAL ERRORS: B1121, B1122, B1141................................................................E-33E.14 DTC B0563...........................................................................................................................E-46E.15 DTC B1131, B1132...............................................................................................................E-47E.16 DTC B1134...........................................................................................................................E-50E.17 DTC B1135...........................................................................................................................E-53E.18 DTC B1154, B1155...............................................................................................................E-54E.19 DTC U1016, U1255..............................................................................................................E-58E.20 DTC U1300, U1301 OR BUS ER.........................................................................................E-63E.21 TSM/TSSM: PASSWORD LEARN........................................................................................E-64E.22 TSSM MAINTENANCE.........................................................................................................E-65

AP

PE

ND

IX E

TS

M/T

SS

M (

JAPA

N/K

OR

EA

)


E.1TSM/TSSM (JAPAN/KOREA) OVERVIEW

GENERAL

TSMThe Turn Signal Module (TSM) has two major functions:

• Control turn signals.

• Serve as Bank Angle Sensor (BAS).

TSSMSee Figure E-1.The optional, factory-installed, Harley-DavidsonFactory Security System (H-DFSS) includes a Turn SignalSecurity Module (TSSM) which provides the same functionsas the TSM, but also includes security and immobilizationfunctions.

sm01275

Figure E-1.TSSM (Japan/Korea)

ed02825

Figure E-2.TSM/TSSM Location

TROUBLESHOOTINGProblems fall into at least one of five categories:

• Turn signal malfunction.

• Bank angle (engine disable).

• Clutch/neutral interlock (starter enable).

• Security lamp problem.

• Security system malfunction.

To resolve TSM/TSSM problems, four basic steps are involved.In order of occurrence, they are:

1. Retrieve DTCs using odometer self-diagnostics. SeeE.10 ODOMETER SELF-DIAGNOSTICS.



4. After repairs are performed, the work must be validated.This involves clearing the DTCs and confirming propervehicle operation as indicated by the behavior of the turnsignals.

HOME

2009 Sportster Diagnostics: Appendix E TSM/TSSM (Japan/Korea) E-1

E.2TSM/TSSM FEATURES

TURN SIGNAL FUNCTIONS

TSM/TSSM FeaturesSee E.4 TURN SIGNAL FUNCTIONS for complete details.

• Manual turn signal control: Manual activation/deactiva-tion of left and right turn signal flashing sequences.

• Automatic turn signal cancellation: Automatic cancella-tion of left and right turn signal flashing sequences basedon either vehicle speed, vehicle acceleration or turn com-pletion.

• Emergency flashers: Four-way left and right turn signalflashing capability.

• Turn signal lamp diagnostics: Self-diagnostics for shortcircuit and open lamp conditions on both left and right turnsignal systems.

BANK ANGLE FUNCTIONSee E.5 BANK ANGLE FUNCTION for complete details.

• Emergency engine shutdown: Will provide engineshutdown when vehicle is tipped over.

• Emergency outputs disable: Will disable turn signallamps and starter motor when vehicle is tipped over.

CLUTCH/NEUTRAL INTERLOCKFUNCTIONS

TSM/TSSM Features• Disables starter: Disables starter until either the clutch

lever is pulled in or transmission neutral is selected.

• Diagnostics: Provides diagnostics for clutch and neutralswitch faults.

SECURITY ALARM AND IMMOBILIZATIONFUNCTIONS

TSSM FeatureThe following information applies only to motorcycles with thesecurity option (TSSM). See E.6 SECURITY SYSTEMFUNCTIONS (TSSM ONLY) for more information.

• Remote arming/disarming: See Figure E-3. Owners mayenable and disable security alarm and immobilizationfunctions with a personally carried transmitter. This trans-mitter is referred to as a key fob. Remote arming/dis-arming is a function of the TSSM (Japan/Korea) only.

• Security lamp (key icon): See Figure E-4. A lamp withinthe speedometer face on XL, and the tachometer on theXR, tells the rider if the system is armed or disarmed.

• PIN disarming: If a key fob is not available, the TSSMallows the rider to disable the security alarm and immobil-ization functions if the rider knows the previously enteredpersonal identification number (PIN).

• Arming/disarming confirmation: When the TSSM isarmed, the system provides visual feedback to the rider

by flashing the turn signals and sounding the optionalSmart Siren.

• Auto-arming: Automatically enables the security alarmand immobilization functions within 30 seconds after theIgnition Switch is switched OFF.

NOTE

Motorcycles sold with a TSSM have auto-arming disabled, butit can be activated. See E.3 VEHICLE DELIVERY.

• Transport mode: It is possible to arm the security systemwithout enabling the motion detector for one ignition cycle.This allows the vehicle to be moved in an immobilizedstate.

• Starter/ignition disable: Should the security alarm andimmobilization functions be triggered by a vehicle securitycondition, the starter and ignition system will be disabled.

• Security system alarm: See Figure E-5. The system willalternately flash the left and right turn signals and soundan optional Security Siren if a vehicle security conditionis detected while the system is armed.

ed03007

Figure E-3. Key Fob:TSSM

HOME

E-2 2009 Sportster Diagnostics: Appendix E TSM/TSSM (Japan/Korea)

ed02920

Figure E-4. Security Lamp (Key Icon) (Typical)

ed02047

Figure E-5. Security Siren

HOME


E.3VEHICLE DELIVERY

GENERAL


Setting up a vehicle TSM/TSSM depends on whether thevehicle has a TSM or the optional TSSM installed.

All motorcycles ship with the TSM/TSSM set for use withouta sidecar installed. If a motorcycle is equipped with a TSM, nofurther configuration is required.

However, if a motorcycle has an optional security system(TSSM) installed, perform the following steps as necessary.

1. Configure TSSM motorcycles by assigning both key fobsto the vehicle. See E.3 VEHICLE DELIVERY, Key FobAssignment: TSSM.

2. Configure TSSM motorcycles by entering a PIN picked bythe owner.The PIN allows the owner to operate the systemif the key fob is lost or inoperable. Record this PIN in theOwner's Manual and instruct the customer to carry a copy.

CONFIGURING A TSSMNOTE

Do not forget to enter a Personal Identification Number (PIN)for TSSM motorcycles. If a PIN is not assigned and both keyfobs are lost or damaged while the motorcycle is armed, theTSSM must be replaced.

Changes to TSSM settings are made by a series of program-ming operations involving the ignition switch, left/right turnsignal switches and key fob (security systems).

At certain steps in the programming sequence, the motorcyclemay provide confirmation of settings by flashing the turn sig-nals, turn signal indicators and/or security lamp. In addition,when programming a PIN into a TSSM system, the odometerdisplays the PIN to the user and dynamically updates it as thecode is entered or changed.

All programming operations are listed in table format. Followthe numbered steps to configure the system. If a confirmationresponse is listed, wait for the confirmation before continuing

to the next step. Important information pertaining to certainactions will be found in the NOTES column.

SIDECAR CONFIGURATION


POWER DISRUPTION AND CONFIGURINGThe TSM/TSSM will not enter configuration mode on the firstattempt after battery voltage has been removed from terminal"1". This will occur after any of the following situations:

• Battery disconnect or power drain.

• Battery fuse removal.

• Connecting Breakout Box to TSM/TSSM connector.

Therefore, after all battery reconnects, the configurationsequence must be modified as follows.

1. Set Engine Stop Switch to OFF, cycle Ignition SwitchON-OFF-ON-OFF-ON and press left turn signal switchtwice.

2. Repeat step listed above.

3. Continue with configuration sequence listed.

KEY FOB ASSIGNMENT:TSSMRefer to Table E-1 to assign a key fob to a motorcycle equippedwith a TSSM.

The key fob on TSSM motorcycles must be set so it will operatethe alarm system on the vehicle. This assignment must becompleted with no pauses between steps greater than 10seconds.Turn the ignition switch to OFF after all key fobs havebeen assigned. The programming mode will also exit after 60seconds has elapsed without detecting any fob sign-up mes-sages or turn signal switch activity.

Two key fobs may be assigned to the TSSM. The first suc-cessful attempt to program a fob will disable all previouslyassigned fobs. If a second fob is to be programmed, it mustbe done in the same programming sequence as the initial fob.

Table E-1. Key FOB Assignment:TSSM


Verify the security lamp is notblinking (vehicle is disarmed).


This assignment proceduremust be completed with nopauses between steps greaterthan 10 seconds.

Cycle the ignition switch IGN - OFF - IGN- OFF - IGN.

2

HOME


Table E-1. Key FOB Assignment:TSSM


1 flash - Worldwide TSM, nosecurity.

One to four flashes turn signals and indic-ators depending on vehicle configuration

Press left turn switch 2 times and release.3

2 flashes - Japan/Korea config-uration TSSM.

(See E.3 VEHICLE DELIVERY regardingbattery disconnects.)

One flash turn signals and indicatorsPress right turn switch 1 time and release.4

Two flashes turn signals and indicatorsPress left turn switch 1 time and release.5

This may take 10-25 seconds.Two flashes turn signals and indicatorsPress and hold key fob button until con-firmation is received.

6

Optional step.Two flashes turn signals and indicatorsIf you have two key fobs, press and holdbutton on second key fob until confirma-tion is received.

7

Turn ignition switch to OFF.8

PIN ENTRY:TSSMNOTE

Do not forget to enter a PIN for TSSM vehicles. If a PIN is notassigned and the key fob is lost or damaged while the vehicleis armed, the TSSM must be replaced.

The TSSM PIN consists of five digits. Each digit can be anynumber from 1-9. There can be no zeros (0) in the PIN. ThePIN must be used to disarm the security system in case thekey fob becomes unavailable.

Refer to Table E-2 to enter an initial PIN with no PIN previouslyinstalled. The procedure listed uses 3-1-3-1-3 as the desiredPIN.

NOTE

For better security, do not use 3-1-3-1-3 as a PIN. It is shownas an example only.

Decide what five-digit PIN the owner would like to use. Thecode will be programmed using the turn signal switches and

key fob. Keep a record of the PIN in a secure place such asyour wallet or the Owner's Manual.

• When programming the PIN, the security lamp flashes toprovide feedback when entering each digit.The odometeralso displays the PIN and the change dynamically.

• The number of security lamp flashes corresponds to thenumber currently selected for a given digit. Therefore, thelamp may flash 1-9 times depending on the numberentered. The five-digit PIN will change in the odometerwindow and the active digit will blink.

• Press the left turn switch one time to increment each digit.

• Quickly press the key fob button twice to advance to thenext digit.

NOTE

The programming mode exits upon turning the ignition switchto OFF, or if no turn signal switch/key fob button activity occursfor 60 seconds. No data is saved for partial configurationattempts if entering a PIN for the first time. If a PIN has previ-ously been entered, the user can change any digit or group ofdigits.

Table E-2. Entering an Initial TSSM PIN (Example: 3-1-3-1-3) with No PIN Previously Entered


Verify the security lamp is notblinking (vehicle is disarmed).


This assignment proceduremust be completed with nopauses between steps greaterthan 10 seconds.

Cycle the ignition switchON-OFF-ON-OFF-ON.

2

One flash - Worldwide TSM, nosecurity.

One to four flashes turn signals andindicators depending on vehicle config-uration


Two flashes - Japan/Koreaconfiguration TSSM.(See E.3 VEHICLE DELIVERY

regarding battery disconnects).

HOME




Vehicle is in PIN entry modeready to enter or modify firstdigit.

One flash turn signals and indicatorsOdometer displays current five-digitPIN (five dashes if no code entered),first digit blinks.

Quickly press key fob button 2 times andrelease.

4

A lack of confirmation flashesindicates no digit is entered.

Security lamp flashes 1 - 9 times ifcode was previously entered.

Press left turn switch 1 time and release.5

You have selected 3 as anumber for the first digit.

Blinking digit in odometer displayincrements, security lamp flashes toindicate each digit selected.

Press and release left turn switch to advancethrough the digits.In this example, you will press and releasethree times.

6

In this example, the blinking digit dis-played is 3 and the security lamp willflash three times.

You have confirmed 3 as anumber for the first digit andhave advanced to entering thesecond digit.

Two flashes turn signals and indicatorssecond digit in odometer displayblinks.


7


NonePress left turn switch 1 time and release.8

You have selected 1 as anumber for the second digit.


Press and release left turn switch to advancethrough the digits.In this example, you will perform this stepone time.

9

In this example, the blinking digit dis-played is 1 and the security lamp willflash one time.

You have confirmed 1 as anumber for the second digit andhave advanced to entering thethird digit.

Three flashes turn signals and indic-ators third digit in odometer displayblinks.


10



You have selected 3 as anumber for the third digit.


Press and release left turn switch to advancethrough the digits.In this example, you will repeat this step threetimes.

12


You have confirmed 3 as anumber for the third digit andhave advanced to entering thefourth digit.

Four flashes turn signals and indic-ators fourth digit in odometer displayblinks.


13



You have selected 1 as anumber for the fourth digit.


Press and release left turn switch to advancethrough the digits.In this example, you will perform this stepone time.

15

In this example, the blinking digit dis-played is 1 and the security lamp willflash one time.

You have confirmed 1 as anumber for the fourth digit andhave advanced to entering thefifth digit.

Five flashes turn signals and indicatorsfifth digit in odometer display blinks.


16



HOME




You have selected 3 as anumber for the fifth digit.


Press and release left turn switch to advancethrough the digits.In this example, you will repeat this step threetimes.

18


You have confirmed 3 as anumber for the fifth digit andhave gone back to the first digit.

One flash turn signals and indicatorsfirst digit in odometer display blinks.


19


Write down code in Owner's Manual.21

Arm the security system and attempt todisarm using PIN entry. Refer to Table E-2.

22

CHANGING THE PIN:TSSMIf a PIN has been previously entered, the security lamp willflash the equivalent digit, and the odometer will display the

existing PIN with the active digit blinking. Each additional pressof the left turn switch will increment the digit.

• To advance from 5 to 6, press and release the left turnswitch 1 time.

• To advance from 8 to 2, press and release the left turnswitch 3 times (9-1-2).

HOME


E.4TURN SIGNAL FUNCTIONS

GENERALThe TSM/TSSM turn signal feature has several modes:

• Automatic cancellation.

• Manual cancellation.

• Four-way flashing.

• Diagnostics mode.

The turn signals cannot be activated or deactivated when theignition switch is in the ACC position.The turn signals can onlybe activated or deactivated with the ignition switch in theIGNITION position.


AUTOMATIC CANCELLATIONPress the left or right turn switch to activate automatic turnsignal cancellation. There is no need to hold the turn switch inwhen approaching the turn. The TSM/TSSM will not cancelthe signal before the turn is actually completed.

• When the directional switch is released, the system startsa 20 count. As long as the vehicle is traveling at more than7 MPH (11 km/h), the directional will always cancel after20 flashes, if the system does not recognize any otherinput.

• If the vehicle speed drops to 7 MPH (11 km/h) or less,including stopped, the directionals will continue to flash.Counting will resume when vehicle speed reaches 8 MPH(12 km/h) and will automatically cancel when the counttotal equals 20 as stated above.

• The turn signals will cancel within two seconds upon turncompletion. A sensor inside the TSM/TSSM cancels thesignal after the vehicle has been returned to an uprightposition.

NOTE

The bank angle cancellation function has an automatic calibra-tion feature. Ride the motorcycle for 0.25 mile (0.4 km) atsteady speeds (upright) to calibrate the system. Performanceof bank angle function may not be optimal until this calibrationis performed. This self-calibration is performed automaticallyevery time the vehicle is started and ridden.

MANUAL CANCELLATIONIf you want to stop the turn signals from flashing, briefly depressthe turn signal switch a second time.

If you are signalling to turn in one direction and you depressthe switch for the opposite turn signal, the first signal is can-celled and the opposite side begins flashing.

FOUR-WAY FLASHINGUse the following method to activate the four-way flashers:

1. With the ignition switch ON and the security system dis-armed (models with security only), press the left and rightturn signal switches at the same time.

2. Turn the ignition switch OFF and arm the security systemif present and desired.The four-way flashers will continuefor two hours.

3. To cancel four-way flashing, disarm the security systemif necessary, turn the ignition switch ON and press the leftand right turn signal switches at the same time.

This system allows a stranded vehicle to be left in the four-wayflashing mode and secured until help is found.

If the security system is disarmed while the four-way flashersare active, the lights will flash as follows:

1. TSSM stops four-way flashing mode. Motorcycle sits for1 second with turn signals off.

2. TSSM performs disarming confirmation (1 flash).

3. Motorcycle sits for 1 second with turn signals off.

4. Motorcycle restarts four-way flashing mode.

DIAGNOSTICS MODEThe TSM/TSSM measures the current when the turn signalsare used. If there is a burned out light bulb on one side, theremaining light and the corresponding turn signal indicator flashat double the normal rate starting with the fifth flash.

Other diagnostic conditions monitored include:

• Short circuit in the turn signal wiring.

• Open circuit in the turn signal wiring.

• Stuck turn signal switch.

NOTES

• A stuck turn signal switch will disable the automatic turnsignal cancellation feature.

• If a stuck switch is detected, you must hold the left andright turn signal switches in for more than one second toactivate the four-way flashers.

See E.8 DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTC) for moreinformation.

HOME


E.5BANK ANGLE FUNCTION

GENERALThe turn signals, starter motor, ECM, fuel pump, and ignitioncoil will be disabled in the event the vehicle is tipped over.


OPERATIONThe engine will shut off automatically if the vehicle is tippedover. The odometer displays "tIP" when a tip over condition isdetected.

To restart the motorcycle after shutdown has occurred:

1. Return the motorcycle to an upright position.

2. Cycle the Ignition Switch OFF-IGN before restarting.

HOME


E.6SECURITY SYSTEM FUNCTIONS (TSSM ONLY)

GENERAL

Security System OperationThe TSSM provides security and immobilization functions notfound on the TSM. The TSSM will disable the starter and igni-tion system. Additional functions include the ability to alternatelyflash the left and right turn signals and sound a siren (ifequipped) if a theft attempt is detected.

Conditions that activate the security system when system isarmed include:

• Detecting tampering of the ignition circuit: Turn signalsflash three times, optional siren chirps once and then turnsoff. If the tampering continues, a second warning willactivate after four seconds. Continued tampering will causethe alarm to activate for 30 seconds and then turn off.Thetwo warnings/alarm cycle is repeated for each tamperingincident.

• Detecting vehicle movement: Turn signals flash threetimes, optional siren chirps once and then turns off. If thevehicle is not returned to its original position, a secondwarning will activate after four seconds. If the vehicle isnot returned to its original position, the alarm activates for30 seconds then turns off. The two warnings/alarm cyclemay repeat a maximum of 10 times with a 10 secondpause between alarm cycles.

• Detecting that a battery or ground disconnect hasoccurred while armed: Siren, if installed, activates itsself-alarm mode. Turn signals will not flash.

See E.7 ARMING/DISARMING (TSSM ONLY) for moreinformation.

NOTE

Always disarm the TSSM before removing or disconnectingthe battery to prevent the siren (if installed) from activating. Ifthe TSSM is in auto-arming mode, you must disarm the systemand disconnect the battery or remove the battery fuse beforethe 30 second arming period expires.

Security System Options:TSSMThe following options are only available on the TSSM unit:alarm sensitivity, auto-arming feature, and storage mode.

Default settings for the TSSM include:

• Solo vehicle configuration.

• Medium motion sensitivity on alarm sensitivity.

• All vehicles are shipped with auto-arming disabled.

• Storage mode set to 10 days.

ALARM SENSITIVITY:TSSM

SensitivityThe TSSM has four sensitivity settings: extremely low, low,medium or high. The selection picked controls the sensitivityof the security system in regards to motion detection.

To set alarm sensitivity, refer to Table E-3.

Table E-3.TSSM Alarm Sensitivity


Verify the security lamp is not blinking(vehicle is disarmed).

Set RUN/OFF switch to OFF.1

Cycle the ignition switchON-OFF-ON-OFF-ON.

2

Two flashes - Japan/Korea configura-tion TSSM

Two flashes turn signals & indicatorsdepending on vehicle configuration

Press left turn switch 2 times andrelease.

3

(See E.3 VEHICLE DELIVERYregarding battery disconnects).

One flash turn signals and indicators.Press and hold key fob button untilconfirmation is received.

4

One flash - extremely lowTurn signals and indicators flash toindicate option selected.

Press left turn switch 1 time andrelease.

5Two flashes - low sensitivityThree flashes - medium sensitivityFour flashes - high sensitivity

One flash - extremely lowTurn signals and indicators flash toindicate option selected.

Press and release left turn switch toadvance through options.

6Two flashes - low sensitivityThree flashes - medium sensitivityFour flashes - high sensitivity


HOME


Transport ModeIt is possible to arm the security system without enabling themotion detector for one ignition cycle. This allows the vehicleto be picked up and moved in an armed state. In this mode,any attempt to hot-wire the vehicle will trigger the securitysystem.

• To enter the transport mode, refer to Table E-4.

• To exit from transport mode and return the system tonormal operation/functions, disarm the system using eitherthe key fob or PIN.

NOTE

Transport mode is especially useful when working on themotorcycle. If it is not used, the alarm will activate under manytypical service activities.

Table E-4.Transport Mode:TSSM




Turn ignition switch to ON.2

Three flashes turn signals & indicators.Press and hold key fob button untilconfirmation is received.

3


The vehicle can be moved withouttripping the alarm.

Three flashes turn signals & indicators.Press and hold key fob button untilconfirmation is received.

5

AUTO-ARMING FUNCTION:TSSMAuto-arming causes the system to automatically arm itself (nokey fob needed) within 30 seconds after the ignition switch isturned OFF. During this period, the security lamp stays on solidto indicate auto-arming is starting up.

The vehicle may be moved during these 30 seconds withouttriggering the alarm. However, any motion after that period willtrigger the security alarm. Upon expiration of the auto-armingperiod, the turn signals flash twice, the security lamp beginsto flash and the siren (if equipped) chirps twice.

The TSSM allows remote arming via the key fob at any time.However, if the system is remotely disarmed (with the key fob)but the ignition switch is not turned ON within 30 seconds, thesystem will rearm itself when auto-arming is enabled.

Japanese and Korean market motorcycles have auto-armingdisabled by default. However, the feature may be enabled ifthe customer desires.

When auto-arming is disabled, the key fob must be used toarm the security system.To set the auto-arming function, referto Table E-5.

Table E-5. Selecting TSSM Auto-Arming Function




Cycle the ignition switchIGN-OFF-IGN-OFF-IGN.

2

Two flashes - Japan/Korea configura-tion TSSM

Two flashes turn signals and indicators(See E.3 VEHICLE DELIVERYregarding battery disconnects).

Press left turn switch 2 times andrelease.

3

One flash turn signals and indicators.Press and hold key fob button untilconfirmation is received.

4

Two flashes turn signals and indicators.Press and hold key fob button untilconfirmation is received.

5

One flash - auto-arming disabledTurn signals and indicators flash toindicate option selected.

Press left turn switch 1 time andrelease.

6Two flashes - auto-arming enabled

Turn signals and indicators flash toindicate option selected.

Press and release left turn switch toadvance through options.

7


HOME


STORAGE MODE:TSSMThe TSSM has a special mode for long term storage. Thismode prevents the security system from draining the batteryafter a period of days (10, 20, 60 or infinite) without any ignitionswitch activity.

• If the TSSM is set to infinite, the system will not go intostorage mode.

• Vehicles will enter storage mode whether the securitysystem is armed or disarmed.

• If set to 20 days or greater, the customer must use anapproved trickle charger to keep the battery from dischar-ging.

In storage mode, all alarm functions remain active but thereceiver is shut down and will not respond to the key fob. Thevehicle is immobilized because the starter motor and ECM aredisabled.When the storage mode is entered, the security lampstops flashing to conserve power.

To wake up the TSSM from storage mode, the ignition switchmust be turned ON. This will trigger a warning/alarm if thesystem was previously armed. You must use the key fob orPIN to disarm the system and stop the alarm.

To set the storage mode preferences, refer to Table E-6.

Table E-6. Storage Mode Preferences:TSSM


Verify the security lamp isnot blinking (vehicle is dis-armed).


Cycle the ignition switchIGN-OFF-IGN-OFF-IGN.

2

Two flashes - Japan/Koreaconfiguration TSSM

Two flashes turn signals and indicatorsdepending on vehicle configuration


(See E.3 VEHICLE DELIVERY regardingbattery disconnects).

One flash turn signals and indicators.Press and hold key fob button until confirma-tion is received.

4

Two flashes turn signals and indicators.Release and then hold key fob button untilconfirmation is received.

5

Three flashes turn signals and indicators.Release and then hold key fob button untilconfirmation is received.

6

One flash - 10 daysTurn signals and indicators flash to indicateoption selected.

Press left turn switch 1 time and release.7Two flashes - 20 daysThree flashes - 60 daysFour flashes - Infinite

One flash - 10 daysTurn signals and indicators flash to indicateoption selected.

Press left turn switch to advance throughoptions.

8Two flashes - 20 daysThree flashes - 60 daysFour flashes - Infinite


HOME


E.7ARMING/DISARMING (TSSM ONLY)

GENERALThere are two methods to arm the security system:

• Using the key fob.

• Using auto-arming. See E.6 SECURITY SYSTEMFUNCTIONS (TSSM ONLY).

NOTE

The vehicle cannot be armed with the ignition switch turned toIGN.

There are two ways to disarm the system:

• Using the key fob. This method works in all situationsexcept before turning ignition switch to IGN when TSSMstorage mode is activated.

• Using a PIN.

SECURITY LAMPRefer to Table E-7. The security lamp within the speedometeron XL, and tachometer on XR, provides feedback to the riderconfirming armed or disarmed status.

Table E-7. Security Lamp Status:TSSM

MODELAMP

No security system (TSM),security system not armed orstorage mode active.

Does not flash.

Ten minute timeout after failedPIN entry attempt or a batteryreconnect has occurred whilearmed.

Flashes every second.

Security system armed.Flashes every 2 seconds.

PIN entry mode.Flashes 4 times a second.

Auto-arming is starting up.You have 30 seconds beforesystem is armed.

Stays on solid with ignitionswitch turned OFF.

If solid for more than 4seconds after ignition switchis turned to IGN, a currentDTC is present.

Stays on solid with ignitionswitch turned to IGN.

USING KEY FOB:TSSM

GeneralThe TSSM reception range for the key fob signal depends ona specific receiver pattern.

NOTE

Environmental and geographic conditions may affect signalrange.

Arming the System1. Hold key fob horizontal at waist level.

2. Point key fob at the front of the vehicle.

3. Hold down the key fob button until the system respondswith two turn signal flashes.

Disarming the System1. Hold key fob horizontal at waist level.

2. Point key fob at the front of the vehicle.

3. Quickly press the key fob button twice. The system willrespond with one turn signal flash.

NOTE

Disarming function may require practice. The key fob buttonmust be pressed twice within 1.5 seconds to send the disarmcommand. The action is very similar to double-clicking a com-puter mouse. Light quick taps work best; very hard or very slowtaps are less likely to work.

TroubleshootingIf the key fob button has been pressed numerous times whileaway from the vehicle, the fob may fall out of synchronizationwith the TSSM. If this happens, the TSSM might fail to recog-nize the key fob's commands.

To solve this problem, press and hold the key fob button for10-15 seconds until the security system responds with two turnsignal flashes. After confirmation, you may resume normal foboperation.

USING THE PIN

GeneralThe PIN consists of five digits entered using the left and rightturn signal switches. Each digit can be any number from 1-9.The PIN is intended to be used to disarm the motorcycle incase the key fob becomes unavailable or inoperable.

See E.3 VEHICLE DELIVERY to set a PIN.

Disarming the SystemRefer to Table E-8. If you make an error while disarming theTSSM using a PIN, the alarm will activate for 30 seconds afterthe last digit is entered. After a failed attempt, the security lampwill flash once every second for 10 minutes. During this time,the vehicle will not accept any attempt to enter a PIN.

Table E-8. Disarming TSSM with the PIN (Example: 3-1-3-1-3)



Turn ignition switch to ACC.2

HOME


Table E-8. Disarming TSSM with the PIN (Example: 3-1-3-1-3)


System is ready for PINentry.

Security lamp blinks at fast rate.Hold both turn switches in until confirm-ation.

3

Enter first digit of code (3) by pressingleft turn switch 3 times.

4

Serves as "enter" key for firstdigit.


Enter second digit of code (1) bypressing left turn switch 1 time.

6

Serves as "enter" key forsecond digit.


Enter third digit of code (3) by pressingleft turn switch 3 times.

8

Serves as "enter" key forthird digit.


Serves as "enter" key forfourth digit.

Enter fourth digit of code (1) bypressing left turn switch 1 time.

10


System is disarmed.Youmay use the vehicle or pro-gram another key fob.

Enter fifth digit of code (3) by pressingleft turn switch 3 times.

12

Security lamp stops blinking.Press right turn switch 1 time.13

HOME


E.8DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTC)

TSM/TSSMTo diagnose system problems, start by observing the behaviorof the security lamp.

NOTES

• See Figure E-6. "Key ON" means that the Ignition Switchis turned to IGNITION (3) and the Engine Stop Switch isset to RUN (although the engine is not running).

• See Figure E-7. When the Ignition Switch is turned ON,the security lamp will illuminate for approximately fourseconds and then turn off.

• If the security lamp is not illuminated at Key ON or if it failsto turn OFF after the initial four-second period, thespeedometer may need to be replaced. See E.10 ODO-METER SELF-DIAGNOSTICS. If "BUS Er" is displayedon the odometer, it may take up to twenty seconds for thesecurity lamp to illuminate.

• The security lamp will also light for eight seconds after thebulb check if historic Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs)are present.The security lamp will stay on if current DTCsare set. If an historic DTC is present, the security lampwill light for 2 ignition cycles or until the DTC is clearedmanually.

OFFACC. IGNITION

3

1

2ed02814


Figure E-6. Ignition Switch

ed02920

Figure E-7. Security Lamp (Key Icon) (Typical)

1. See Figure E-8. After the lamp turns off after being illumin-ated for the first four-second period, one of three eventsmay occur:

a. The lamp remains off. This indicates there are nocurrent fault conditions or stored historic DTCs cur-rently detected by the TSSM.

b. The lamp stays off for only four seconds and thencomes back on for an eight-second period. Thisindicates a historic DTC is stored, but no current DTCexists.


2. See E.8 DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTC), CodeTypes for a complete description of DTC formats.

HOME


ONA

B

C

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

Key On

Key On

Key On


Lamp OFF




4 Sec.

4 Sec.

4 Sec.

4 Sec.

8 Sec.

4 Sec.

ed01046

Figure E-8. Security Lamp Operation

CODE TYPES



There are two types of DTCs: current and historic. If a DTC isstored, it can be read using either a computer-based diagnosticpackage called DIGITAL TECHNICIAN II (Part No. HD-48650)or odometer self-diagnostics. See E.10 ODOMETER SELF-DIAGNOSTICS.

NOTES

• Odometer self-diagnostics will display both current andhistoric DTCs.To differentiate between current and historicDTCs, a computer-based diagnostic package calledDIGITAL TECHNICIAN II (Part No. HD-48650) must beemployed.

• All DTCs reside in the memory of the ECM, TSM/TSSM,odometer or tachometer until the DTC is cleared by useof the odometer self-diagnostics. See E.10 ODOMETERSELF-DIAGNOSTICS.

• A historic DTC is also cleared after a total of 50 ignitioncycles has elapsed. After the 50 ignition cycles retentionperiod, the DTC is automatically erased from memoryproviding that no subsequent faults of the same type aredetected in that period.


HistoricIf a particular problem happens to resolve itself, the activestatus problem is dropped and it becomes a historic DTC rather

than a current DTC. For example, intermittent output shortscan become typical historic DTCs.

Historic DTCs are stored for 50 ignition cycles after any DTCwas last set as current to assist in the diagnosis of intermittentfaults. On the 50th cycle, the DTC will clear itself. The securitylamp will only indicate the existence of only historic DTCs fortwo ignition cycles.

It is important to note that historic DTCs will exist wheneverthe system indicates the existence of a current fault. SeeE.8 DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTC), Multiple Dia-gnostic Trouble Codes if multiple DTCs are found.

Diagnostic charts are designed for use with current DTCs andas a result they frequently suggest part replacement. Whendiagnosing an historic DTC the charts can be helpful but shouldnot lead to part replacement without verification the part isfaulty.




The TSM/TSSM supports two levels of diagnostics.


• The second mode requires using odometer self-dia-gnostics. Speedometer, tachometer (if equipped),TSM/TSSM and ECM DTCs can be accessed and cleared.See E.10 ODOMETER SELF-DIAGNOSTICS.

HOME


MULTIPLE DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODESWhile it is possible for more than one fault to occur and setmore than one DTC, there are several conditions which mayresult in one fault setting multiple DTCs:

Serial data DTCs (U1016, U1255, U1300 and U1301) may beaccompanied by other DTCs. Always correct the serial dataDTCs before resolving the other DTCs.

Refer to Table E-9. This table gives most TSM/TSSM DTCs apriority ranking.

Table E-9.TSM/TSSM Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC) and Fault Conditions


E.20 DTC U1300, U1301 OR BUS ER.J1850 short-to-groundU13001

E.20 DTC U1300, U1301 OR BUS ER.J1850 short-to-batteryU13012

E.19 DTC U1016, U1255.Loss of serial communications - ECMU10163

E.19 DTC U1016, U1255.Loss of serial communication - generalU12554

E.17 DTC B1135.Accelerometer faultB11355

E.18 DTC B1154, B1155.Clutch switch input short-to-groundB11546

E.18 DTC B1154, B1155.Neutral switch input short-to-groundB11557

E.16 DTC B1134.Start relay output short-to-groundB11348

E.13 TURN SIGNAL ERRORS: B1121, B1122, B1141.Left turn lamp output faultB11219

E.13 TURN SIGNAL ERRORS: B1121, B1122, B1141.Right turn lamp output faultB112210

E.14 DTC B0563.Battery voltage highB056311

E.15 DTC B1131, B1132.Alarm output short-to-groundB113112

E.15 DTC B1131, B1132.Alarm output short-to-groundB113213

E.13 TURN SIGNAL ERRORS: B1121, B1122, B1141.Ignition switch input short-to-ground or openB114114

HOME


E.9INITIAL DIAGNOSTIC CHECK:TSM/TSSM

GENERAL



To locate faulty circuits or other system problems, follow thediagnostic flowcharts. For a systematic approach, always beginwith E.9 INITIAL DIAGNOSTIC CHECK: TSM/TSSM, InitialDiagnostics. Read the general information and then work yourway through the flowchart box by box.



In order to perform most diagnostic routines, a Breakout Boxand a digital volt/ohmmeter (DVOM) are required. SeeE.11 BREAKOUT BOX: TSM/TSSM.


Job/Time Code ValuesSome charts may contain warranty job/time codes. Dealershiptechnicians filing warranty claims should use the job/time codevalues printed in bold text underneath the appropriate repair.

Reprogramming ECMDiagnostic charts frequently suggest ECM replacement. In theevent an ECM needs to be replaced, it must be reprogrammed

using a computer-based diagnostic package called DIGITALTECHNICIAN II (Part No. HD-48650). See your dealer. Pass-word learn procedure must also be performed. SeeE.21 TSM/TSSM: PASSWORD LEARN.

INITIAL DIAGNOSTICS




Diagnostic Tips• If odometer reads "BUS Er" with the Ignition Switch turned

to IGN (Engine Stop Switch at RUN with the engine off),check data bus for an open or short to ground betweendata link connector [91A] terminal 3 and ECM connector[78B] terminal 5, TSSM connector [30B] terminal 3,speedometer connector [39B] terminal 2 on XL, C on XR,or tachometer (if equipped) connector [108B] terminal 2.

• Check for an open diagnostic test terminal between datalink connector [91A] terminal 3 and TSM/TSSM connector[30B] terminal 3.With Ignition Switch turned to IGN, serialdata bus voltage should be typically 0.6-0.8 Volt. Therange of acceptable voltage is 0-7.0 Volts.

• To identify intermittents, wiggle vehicle harness whileperforming steps in the Initial Diagnostic Check flowcharts.


1. Connect BREAKOUT BOX (Part No. HD-42682) betweenwire harness connector [39B] on XL, or connector [108B]on XR, and speedometer connector [39A] on XL, ortachometer connector [108A] on XR, using INSTRUMENTHARNESS ADAPTERS (Part No. HD-46601). See2.2 INITIAL DIAGNOSTIC CHECK: ODOMETER.

2. Compare TSM/TSSM system behavior to symptoms inTable E-10.

All TSM/TSSM DTCs are listed in Table E-9.

Table E-10. Symptoms That May Not Set Diagnostic Trouble Codes

SOLUTIONSYMPTOM

E.12 FAILS TO DISARM (TSSM ONLY).Fails to disarm

E.13 TURN SIGNAL ERRORS: B1121, B1122, B1141.Turn signal will not cancel or cancelserratically

E.13 TURN SIGNAL ERRORS: B1121, B1122, B1141.Turn signal flashes double normal rate, allbulbs good

Other DTCsSee 2.2 INITIAL DIAGNOSTIC CHECK: ODOMETER for anyDTCs related to the odometer.


HOME


BK

BK

BK

BK

BK

BK

GY GY

GY

O/W

O/W

O/W

O/W

O

O

O

O

R

BN/GY

BN

/GY

BN

/GY

BN

/GY

BN/GY BN/GY

LGN/V

LGN

/V

LGN/V

LGN/V

LGN

/VLG

N/V

LGN

/V

R/BK

R/BK

R/GY

1 2 3 12

1 2 3 12

1 2 5 76

1 2 5 76

1 2 5 6 7

1 2

Igni

tion

Ser

iald

ata

Bat

tery

Acc

esso

ry

Gro

und

Igni

tion

Ser

iald

ata

Bat

tery

Acc

esso

ry

Gro

und

Bat

tery

Igni

tion

Ser

iald

ata

Gro

und

5 6 7

[39B][39A]

[108B][108A]

[30B][30A]

[91A]

Speedometer

TSM/TSSM


12V ACCYFuse

12V BATTFuse

12V INSTRFuse

12V IGNFuse

3

2

1

4

Data LinkConnector

21 6 7 12

21 6 7 12

[20A][20B]

ECM

Ser

iald

ata

[78A][78B]

5

5

To ACCY fuse

To BATT fuse

To INSTR fuse

To IGN fuse

[GND1]

[GND1]

[GND1]

em01182

Figure E-9. Diagnostic Check (XL)

HOME


BK

BK

BK

GY GY

O/W

O/W

O/W

O/W

O

R

BN

/GY

BN

/GY

BN

/GY

BN

/GY

BN/GY

LGN

/V BK

BK

GY

BK

O/WO

OO

BN

/GY

LGN

/V

LGN

/V

LGN

/V

LGN/V

LGN

/V

LGN

/V

R/BK

R/BK

R/GY

1 2 3 12

1 2 3 12

1 2 5 76

1 2 5 76

C B A D

C B A DS

eria

lDat

a

Bat

tery

Acc

esso

ryG

roun

d

Igni

tion

Ser

ialD

ata

Bat

tery

Bat

tery

Igni

tion

Ser

ialD

ata

Gro

und

Acc

esso

ryG

roun

d

Speedometer

TSM/TSSM/HFSM

Tachometer

To ACCY Fuse

To BATT Fuse

To INSTR Fuse

To IGN Fuse

12V ACCYFuse

12V BATTFuse

12V INSTRFuse

12V IGNFuse

3

1

2

4

Ground

Serial Data

Power

Data LinkConnector

21 6 7 12

21 6 7 12

ECM

Ser

ialD

ata

5

5

GND1

GND1

GND1[78B][78A]

[108A][108B]

[20A][20B]

[39A][39B]

[30A][30B]

[91A]

em01304

Figure E-10. Diagnostic Check (XR)

Table E-11. Wire Harness Connectors



Under battery tray12-place DeutschTSM/TSSM[30]




HOME






HOME



Does Enginestart?





Check for DTCs. See E.10ODOMETER





YES

Refer to applicable DTC prioritychart. All DTCs are listed in TableE-9. DTCs are listed by priority.

NOUnable to enter

diagnostic mode.

NONo DTCsdisplayed.


backlighting?


Table E-10.

YES NO



YES NO



betweenterminal 7

and ground.

YES NO





betweenterminal 5

andbattery fuse.

YES NO



1

2

fc01997_en


HOME





YES NO


Perform “WOW” test.See E.10 ODOMETER SELF-DIAGNOSTICS.





YES


YES NO



YES NO



YES




1

NO



YES NO



YES NO

Locate andrepair




andinstrument fuse.

1

fc02007_en

NO


Check (Part 3 of3).

HOME





YES



YES NO

Locate andrepair

intermittent.

No troublefound.


(no vehicle speed).


Is debris present?

YES


NO



connection present?

YESNO


Replacespeedometer.


(no engine speed).


2

fc01960_en

XLXR


(XR).

HOME





YESNO

YES NO


YES NO



harness.



YES NO


wire.

fc01931_en



NOYES

1



present?

NO



YES



YES


on (BK) wire.

NO YES


NO

Replacespeedometer.


Is debris present?

YES


YES




connection present?

NO

NO

Replacespeedometer.


(Part 1 of 3).

HOME


E.10ODOMETER SELF-DIAGNOSTICS

GENERALThe odometer is capable of displaying and clearing speedo-meter, tachometer, TSM/TSSM, ABS, and ECM DTCs (dia-gnostic mode).

DIAGNOSTICS

Diagnostic Tips• For a quick check of speedometer (XL) or tachometer (XR)

functions, a "WOW" test can be performed. Press andhold trip odometer reset switch then turn ignition switchON. Release trip odometer reset switch. See Figure E-11.Background lighting should illuminate, gauge needlesshould sweep their full range of motion, and indicatorlamps (battery, security, low fuel, and check engine) shouldilluminate. All lamps should illuminate, even those notused in normal vehicle operations.

• If speedometer (XL) or tachometer (XR) fails "WOW" test,check for battery, ground, ignition, trip odometer resetswitch and accessory wiring to speedometer. If any featurein the speedometer is non-functional, see 2.2 INITIALDIAGNOSTIC CHECK: ODOMETER.




12

34

5

ed01721


Figure E-11. Warning Lamps (Typical)

OFFACC. IGNITION

3

1

2ed02814


Figure E-12. Ignition Switch

HOME



1 While holding trip odometer resetswitch in, turn ignition switch to


RUN position.

Release trip odometerreset switch.

Does “diag” appear?

YES

”P” flashing.




than 5 seconds.



”S” flashing.


”SP” flashing.


reset switch.


reset switch.

”T” flashing.


seconds.


seconds.




CHECK: ODOMETER.

YES

YES

NO

NO

NO

Deviceresponse?










TACHOMETER.


DTCdisplayed.


2

”b” flashing.




reset switch.

fc01815_en

HOME


E.11BREAKOUT BOX:TSM/TSSM

GENERAL



The BREAKOUT BOX (Part No. HD-42682) splices into themain harness. Used in conjunction with a DVOM, it allows cir-cuit diagnosis of wiring harness and connections without havingto probe with sharp objects.

INSTALLATION



1. Remove left side cover and battery. See the servicemanual.

2. See Figure E-13. Reach under battery tray and liftTSM/TSSM from cavity in bottom of tray.

3. See Figure E-14. Depress latches on harness connector[30B] and remove from TSM/TSSM connector [30A].

4. Route harness connector [30B] back down through cavityand out left side of vehicle under battery tray.

5. Reinstall battery.

6. See Figure E-15. Attach BREAKOUT BOX (Part No. HD-42682) to connectors:

a. Mate gray socket housing on BREAKOUT BOX (PartNo. HD-42682) with TSM/TSSM connector [30A].

b. Mate gray pin housing on BREAKOUT BOX (PartNo. HD-42682)with harness connector [30B].

ed02825

Figure E-13.TSM/TSSM Location

1

2

3

ed02818

1. Harness connector2. Pin 13. Pin 12

Figure E-14.TSM/TSSM Connector [30A]

2

3

1

ed02832

1. TSM/TSSM2. Tester harness connectors3. Vehicle's TSM/TSSM harness connector [30B]

Figure E-15. Breakout Box:TSM/TSSM

HOME


REMOVAL



1. Disconnect BREAKOUT BOX (Part No. HD-42682) fromvehicle:

a. See Figure E-14. Depress latches and detach grayBREAKOUT BOX (Part No. HD-42682) socket con-nector from TSM/TSSM connector [30A] (1).

b. See Figure E-15. Detach gray BREAKOUT BOX (PartNo. HD-42682) pin connector from harness connector[30B] (3).

2. Remove battery. Route TSM/TSSM harness connector[30B] up through cavity in bottom of battery tray.

3. Mate harness connector [30B] to TSM/TSSM.

4. Position TSM/TSSM with connector facing toward rear ofvehicle. Lower TSM/TSSM down into cavity in bottom ofbattery tray.

5. Install battery, MAXIFUSE, and left side cover. See theservice manual.

NOTE

Vehicle will not start with TSM/TSSM disconnected or incor-rectly mounted.

Table E-12.TSM/TSSM Connector [30B]

FUNCTIONTERMINALFUNCTIONTERMINAL

Right turn switch input7Battery1

Left turn switch input8Ignition2

Start relay control9Serial data3

Clutch switch10Neutral switch4

Alarm signal11Left turn feed5

Ground12Right turn feed6

HOME


E.12FAILS TO DISARM (TSSM ONLY)

GENERAL

Security Equipped Vehicles OnlyThis section applies only to those vehicles equipped with theoptional TSSM.

NOTE

Disarming function may require practice. The key fob buttonmust be pressed twice within 1.5 seconds to send the disarmcommand. The action is very similar to double-clicking a com-puter mouse. Light quick taps work best; very hard or very slowtaps are less likely to work.

The key fob sends a RF signal to activate all remote TSSMfunctions. The left front turn signal switch wire serves as thevehicle's antenna. If the TSSM does not respond (no confirm-ation at arming/disarming system) or responds weakly (limitedrange, won't consistently arm/disarm or synchronize), followthe flowchart.


ed03009

Figure E-16. Key Fob Battery:TSSM

DIAGNOSTICS

Diagnostic Tips• Verify key fob battery voltage is at least 2.9 volts. See

E.22 TSSM MAINTENANCE.

• Interference from physical surroundings may affect RFtransmission. Place fob next to left handgrip and disarmwith two clicks or move motorcycle to a new location andretest.

• Check for damage to antenna wire. Does left turn signalwork?

NOTE

See E.7 ARMING/DISARMING (TSSM ONLY). Use only theproper key fob for your market and TSSM package.


1. After a battery disconnect, the TSSM will not enter theconfiguration mode on the first attempt. All attempts toassign a fob or enter the configuration mode will requireat least two attempts.

HOME


1 8 12

1 8 12

5 5

Left Turn SignalSwitch


GND 1Battery

15 AmpBatteryFuse

To IgnitionSwitch

TSM/TSSM

30 AmpMAXIFUSE

Key Fob Antenna(TSSM Only)

Bat

tery

Gro

und

Left

Turn

Sw

itch

Inpu

t

[30B][30A]

[24A][24B]

BN/GY

BN

/GY

BK

BK

W/V

W/VW/VW/V

RRR R

R

em00259

Figure E-17. Antenna Circuit



Under fuel tank8-place MolexLeft hand controls and horn[24]

Under battery12-place DeutschTSM/TSSM[30]

HOME


Fails to Disarm

Correct key fob forvehicle?

YES NO

Does left turn signal function?Obtain correct fob or replace fob.

Verify fob is synchronized to vehicle’sTSSM.

YES NO

Replace fob battery and retest.See E.22 TSSM MAINTENANCE.

Does fob work?

See E.13 TURN SIGNALERRORS: B1121, B1122,

B1141.

1

YES NO

System OK.Attempt to assign new

fob to TSSM and retest.Does fob work?

YES NO

System OK.Replace TSSM.

Learn password andperform set-up.

67576756

6755

fc01161_en

HOME


E.13TURN SIGNAL ERRORS: B1121, B1122, B1141

GENERALThe turn signals will automatically cancel based on either thespeed/acceleration of the vehicle or upon turn completion. SeeE.4 TURN SIGNAL FUNCTIONS.

For turn signal diagnostics, refer to Table E-14.


sm01275

Figure E-18.TSM/TSSM

DIAGNOSTICS




Diagnostic Tips: All• DTCs B1121 and B1122 will illuminate the security lamp.

• DTC B1141 will not illuminate the security lamp.

• When the TSM/TSSM is in 4-way flasher mode, a fault oneither the left or right turn lamp output will not cause eitherDTC B1121 or DTC B1122 to be set. If fault occurs onboth left and right outputs, then both DTC B1121 and DTCB1122 will be set.

• When the TSM/TSSM detects an over current or short toground condition, it will turn off the turn lamp outputs.Theoutputs will be automatically reactivated once the fault isremoved.

Table E-14.Turn Signal Errors:TSM/TSSM


Cancels ErraticallyTurn signals cancel erraticallyN/A

DTC B1121, DTC B1122, DTC B1141, Will NotFlash, 4-Way Flashers Inoperable (Part 1 of 6)

Turn signals will not flash, 4-way flashers inoper-able

B1121, B1122, B1141

Will Not Cancel Upon Turn CompletionTurn signals will not cancel upon turn completionN/A

Flash at Double Normal Rate, All Bulbs WorkingLeft or right turn signals flash at double the normalrate while all bulbs are working

N/A

HOME


Sta

rter

Rig

htFr

ont

Turn

Lam

p

IGN

AC

CY

15A

15A

[31A

]

Igni

tion

Sw

itch

[7A

]

[33]

BK

Bat

tery

EC

M

15A

15A

BE/G

Y

BN/G

Y

R/BK

R

R

R

Sec

urity

Sire

n

BN/G

YBKLGN/

BN

TN/G

N

AJDA

BICB

TN/G

N

GY

GY O

LGN/

V

LGN/

V

(Opt

iona

l)

O/W

O/W

LGN/

BN

BA CBA C V

V

V

BN/G

Y

BN

BN

BN

W/B

NW

/V

W/V

BK

W/B

K

BE/G

Y

R/BK

R/G

Y

R/G

Y

BK/R

R

R

R/BK

GN

GN

BK

BK

BK

[142

B]

[142

A]

[78B

]

[30B

]

Pow

erS

igna

lG

roun

d

BK

[5]

30Am

pM

AXIF

USE

BA

GN

D1

Pow

ertr

ain

Gro

und

Poi

nt

TN

AC

C−

BAT

T−

IGN

−

[78A

]

2 5 10 13 28 31

2 5 10 13 28 31

I Q C P R

87 87A

30 85 86

5 4 3 2 1E

CM

[24B

]

BK/RBK

BK/R

TS

M/

TS

SM

[61B

]

Hor

nSw

itch

Hea

dlam

pH

i/Lo

Sw

itch

Left

Turn

Sw

itch

[24A

]

Left

Han

dC

ontr

ols

Rea

rTu

rnS

igna

ls,

XL

1200

NO

nly

Rea

rTu

rnS

igna

ls,

Exc

ept X

L12

00N

Clu

tch

Sw

itch

O/W

GYW/BKW/BNBK/R

Rig

htTu

rnS

witc

hE

ngin

eS

top

Sw

itch

Sta

rtS

witc

h

Sto

pLa

mp

Sw

itch

[22A

]

Rig

htH

and

Con

trol

s

O/W

W/V

BK/RBK

R

Fus

eblo

ck

Top

Vie

wTo

pV

iew

[119

]

Acce

ssor

ies

Ligh

ts

Igni

tion

Fuel

Pum

p

Star

tRLY

Syst

emRL

Y

ECM

Batte

ry

Spar

e

P&A

IGN

Inst

rum

ents

Spar

eI B A

Syst

emRe

lay

Star

tRe

lay

Spar

e

Ope

n

[119

B]

[128

]

65

43

1

[142

A]

BN

TN

BK

V

Left

Indi

cato

rN

eutr

al

O

Rig

htIn

dica

tor

BK

Bat

tery

BN

VBK

Rig

htR

ear

Turn

Lam

p

Left

Rea

rTu

rnLa

mp

Tail

Lam

pC

onve

rter

Mod

ule

[19B

]

BK BKV V

[18B

]

25

6

25

6

25

6

1 2

1 2 31234

1 21 2 1 2

Rig

htR

ear

Turn

Lam

p

Left

Rea

rTu

rnLa

mp

[19B

][94B

][9

4A]

[19A

]BK BKV

BK V/BN

VBK V

[18B

][18A

]

1 2 1 2

1 2 1 2

[94B

]

[94A

]

[19A

]

[18A

]

[93A

]

[7B

]

To tail/

brak

ela

mpLe

ftFr

ont

Turn

Lam

p

BK

V

BK

BKV

BN

[31B

]

BKBN

R/BK

BKGN/

O

65

43

1

35

68

12

35

68

12

BN

VBK

25

6

25

6

25

6 25

6

[7B

]

65

21

65

21

[22B

]

GY

O/W

W/BNW/BK

BK/R

INS

TR

15A

GH

BK

O

GN/

OBE

/GY

W/B

K

K T E S U

87 87A

30 85 86

5 4 3 2 1

BN

V

[20A

][2

0B]

BK

BK

Bat

tery

Red

Ban

d

21 43 65 87 109 1211

21 43 65 87 109 1211

[30A

]

Bat

tery

Igni

tion

VS

S/S

eria

lDat

aLi

nkN

eutr

alS

witc

hLe

ftTu

rnF

eed

Rig

htTu

rnF

eed

Rig

htTu

rnS

witc

hIn

put

Left

Turn

Sw

itch

Inpu

tS

tart

Rel

ayC

ontr

olC

lutc

hS

witc

hA

larm

Sig

nal

Gro

und

TN

TN

Neu

tral

Sw

itch

[136

]

Sys

tem

Rel

ay

Ser

ialD

ata

Link

Pow

erG

roun

d

Sw

itche

dP

ower

Pow

erG

roun

d

EKTS

U

I CQP

RM

O

GH

AB

15A

15A

15A

PR

IJ

CD

15A

15A

15A

MO

GH

AB

15A

15A

15A

KL F

15A

15A

E

15

78

15

78

NO

TE

:Spa

res

Kan

dL

are

used

for

engi

neco

ntro

lon

XR

only

.

em01316

Figure E-19.Turn Signal Circuit (Typical)

HOME








Under fuel tank12-place MolexConsole gauges/indicator lamps[20]















Under battery4-place Deutsch, grayTSSM antenna connector[208]


Diagnostic Notes: All Turn SignalFlowchartsEach reference number below correlates to a circled numberon the flowchart(s).

1. Gain access to vehicle's TSM/TSSM:

a. Remove battery. See the Service Manual for pro-cedure.

b. Unplug and remove TSM/TSSM from battery tray.

c. Reroute wiring harness so TSM/TSSM may bereconnected while removed from vehicle.

d. Reconnect TSM/TSSM.

2. Perform the following procedure:

a. See Figure E-20. Position TSM/TSSM in same orient-ation it is mounted on vehicle. Turn Ignition Switchon. Turn 4-way flashers on by depressing both leftand right turn signal switches simultaneously. TurnIgnition Switch off.The 4-way flashers should continueto flash.

b. Tilt TSM/TSSM greater than 45 degrees to the left.

c. Repeat step a.

d. Tilt TSM/TSSM greater than 45 degrees to the right.

3. To enable diagnostic mode, see E.10 ODOMETER SELF-DIAGNOSTICS.

4. Connect BREAKOUT BOX (Part No. HD-42682) (gray)between TSM/TSSM connector [30A] and wiring harnessconnector [30B]. See E.11 BREAKOUT BOX:TSM/TSSM.


6. Connect gray HARNESS CONNECTOR TEST KIT (PartNo. HD-41404-B) adapters and patch cords to connector[22] (right) or connector [24] (left).

HOME


1 2

ed01792

1. Left 45 degrees2. Right 45 degrees

Figure E-20.Tilting:TSM/HFSM

HOME


Will Not Cancel Upon Turn Completion

Is TSM/TSSM mounted properly?

YES NO

Mount correctly.

Check if TSM/TSSM is configured forsolo or side car operation. See E.3

VEHICLE DELIVERY.Is it proper configuration?

YES NO

Select propervehicle

configuration.

Do 4-way flasherscancel in both

directions?

YES NO

Operate motorcycle at a speedgreater than 7 MPH (10 km/h) in astraight line. Activate either turn

signal. Turn signals should cancelafter 20 flashes.

Do turn signals cancel?

Replace TSM/TSSM.Perform setup and

password learn.

6773

YES NO

Does speedometerregister vehicle

speed?

YES

Replace TSM/TSSM.Perform password learn

and setup.

NO

Refer to 2.2 INITIALDIAGNOSTIC CHECK:

ODOMETER.

6773

1

2

fc01996_en

Go to CancelsErratically.

HOME


Cancels Erratically

Check for voltage between Breakout Box terminal 8 (gray) andground at Breakout Box terminal 12 (gray): with left turn signalswitch depressed, wiggle harness between TSM/TSSM and lefthandlebar switches while monitoring for voltage fluctuations or

changes in turn signal flash pattern.

Check for voltage between Breakout Box terminal 7 (gray) andground at Breakout Box terminal 12 (gray): with right turn signal

switch depressed, wiggle harness between TSM/TSSM and righthandlebar switches while monitoring for voltage fluctuations or

changes in turn signal flash pattern.


YES

Locate and repairintermittent open.

NO

Check for voltage between Breakout Box terminal 8 (gray) and ground at Breakout Box terminal 12(gray): with left turn signal switch NOT depressed, wiggle harness between TSM/TSSM and left

handlebar switches while monitoring for voltage fluctuations or turn signal activation.

Check for voltage between Breakout Box terminal 7 (gray) and ground at Breakout Box terminal 12(gray): with right turn signal switch depressed, wiggle harness between TSM/TSSM and right

handlebar switches while monitoring for voltage fluctuations or turn signal flash pattern.


YES


to voltage.

Turn ignition switch OFF.

Check for continuity between Breakout Box terminal 8 (gray) and ground at Breakout Box terminal 12(gray): with left turn signal switch depressed, wiggle harness between TSM/TSSM and left handlebar

switches.

Check for continuity between Breakout Box terminal 7 (gray) and ground at Breakout Box terminal 12(gray): with right turn signal switch depressed, wiggle harness between TSM/TSSM and right

handlebar switches.

Is continuity present at any time?

NO

YES NO


to ground.

System OK. Review turn signalcancellation function with customer. SeeTURN SIGNAL FUNCTIONS under 3.1

TURN SIGNAL OVERVIEW.

4

3

fc01998_en

HOME



Turn ignition switch ON.Are turn signal lamps on continuously?

YES NO

Check for voltage on Breakout Box terminal 5 (Gray) (left turnsignals) or terminal 6 (Gray) (right turn signals) with TSM

disconnected from Breakout Box.Is battery voltage present?

YESall except XL

1200NNO


Replace TSM.Learn

password andperform setup.

Activate 4-way flashers.Do any lamps illuminate?

YES NO

Is Connector [30]mated fully?

NOYES

Place red meter lead atterminal 1 (Gray) andblack meter lead at

terminal 12 (Gray) ofBreakout Box.


Mateconnector.

NOYES

Move red meter lead toBreakout Box terminal 2.


NO

Check for voltage atignition fuse.

Is batteryvoltage present on both

terminals?

NO

YES

4

67906791

4

6792

YES

Locate and repairopen on (GY) wire

between ignition fuseand TSM.

6793

YESXL 1200N only

Unplug connectors [18] and[19] at tail lamp converter

module. Check forcontinuity between

terminals 12 and 6 (rightB1124) or 12 and 5 (leftB1123) of Breakout Box

(Gray).Is continuity present?

YES NO

YES NO

Unplug connectors [7] at taillamp converter module. Checkfor voltage between terminals12 and 6 (right B1124) or 12

and 5 (left B1123) or BreakoutBox (Gray).

Is voltage present?


between tail lampconverter moduleand turn signal.

Locate and repair short tovoltage between



fc01999_en



Go to DTCs B1121, B1122,and B1141, Will Not Flash, 4-

Way Flashers Inoperable(Part 5 of 6).

Go to DTCs B1121,B1122, and B1141, Will

Not Flash, 4-WayFlashers Inoperable

(Part 5 of 6).

See 4.10 NOECM

POWER.

HOME



Continued from DTCs B1121, B1122, and B1141, Will Not Flash, 4-Way Flashers Inoperable (Part 2 of 6).

Inspect bulbs on side that will not flash.Are the bulbs OK?

YES NO

Place jumper wire between terminals 2 and 6 of Breakout Box.Do the right turn signals (front and rear) illuminate?

Replace bulbsas necessary.

6796

YES

Place a jumper wirebetween terminals 1 and 5

of Breakout Box.Do the left turn signals

(front and rear) illuminate?

NO

Check for continuity between terminal 6 of Breakout Box and rightfront turn lamp and also between right front lamp housing and

ground.Is continuity present?

YES

Check for continuity between terminal 6 ofBreakout Box and right rear lamp and also

between right rear lamp housing and ground.Is continuity present?


NO


or ground and front lamp.

YES NO



YES NO


and rear lamp.

Check for continuity between terminal 6 of Breakout Box and terminal 2 of connector[7A] and also between terminal 6 of connector [7A] and ground.


6809

XL 1200N?

NOYES

YES NO

Replace TSM/TSSM. XL 1200N?

6791

NOYES

Locate and repairopen between

connector [30] orground and rear

lamp.


YES NO


Locate and repair open between connector[30] or ground and connector [7A].



fc02000_en

Go to DTCs B1121,B1122, and B1141 Will

Not Flash, 4-way FlashersInoperable (Part 4 of 6).

Go to DTCs B1121,B1122, and B1141 Will

Not Flash, 4-wayFlashers Inoperable

(Part 1 of 6).

Go to DTCs B1121,B1122, and B1141

Will Not Flash, 4-wayFlashers Inoperable

(Part 3 of 6).

HOME



Continued from DTCs B1121, B1122, and B1141, Will Not Flash, 4-way Flashers Inoperable (Part 2 of 6).

Check for continuity between terminal 5 of Breakout Box and left front lamp and also between left front lamp housing and ground.Is continuity present?

YES NO

Locate and repair openbetween connector [30] or

ground and front lamp.

YES NO

YES

Check for continuity between terminal 5 ofBreakout Box and terminal 2 of connector [18A]and also between terminal 2 of connector {18A]

and ground.Is continuity present?


NO



YES NO

6809

YES NO

6791


Locate and repair openbetween connector[30] or ground and

connector [7A].



Check for continuity between terminal 5 of BreakoutBox and left rear lamp and also between left rear lamp

housing and ground.Is continuity present?





and rear lamp.


fc02001_en

HOME



Continued from DTCs B1121, B1122, and B1141, Will Not Flash, 4-way Flashers Inoperable (Part 2 of 6).

Remove turn signal bulbs, Unplug connector [20]. Check for continuitybetween terminals 12 and 5 (left) of Breakout Box (gray).


YES NO

Unplug connector [31]. Check forcontinuity between terminals 12 and 6

(right) or 12 and 5 (left) of Breakout Box(gray).


NO


connector [31] and frontturn signals.

6810

Unplug connectors [18] and [19] at tail lampconverter module. Check for continuity



YES NO

YES NO

Unplug connectors [7] at tail lampconverter module. Check for continuity



Locate and repair short toground between tail lamp





YES

6810

6810 6809

fc02002_en

Go to DTCs B1121, B1122,and B1141, Will Not Flash, 4-way Flashers Inoperable (Part

2 of 6).

HOME



Continued fromDTCs B1121, B1122, and B1141, Will Not Flash,

4-way Flashers Inoperable (Part 1 of 6).

Check resistance to ground on Breakout Boxterminal 12 (Gray).


YES

Check for 12 volts at bothterminals of 15 amp battery fuse.

Is proper voltage present atboth terminals?

YES

Repair open in (BN/GY) wirebetween battery fuse and TSM/

TSSM.

6806

NO

NO

1 terminal.

Repair poorground.

6805

Neither terminal.

ReplaceFuse.

6807

Repair open between 30 AmpMAXIFUSE and fuse block.

6808

fc02003_en

HOME



Continued fromDTCs B1121, B1122, and B1141, Will Not Flash, 4-way Flashers Inoperable (Part 1 of 6).

Check for battery voltage at breakout box terminal 7 (Gray) with right turn signal depressed andterminal 8 (Gray) with left turn signal depressed.


YES

Replace TSM/TSSM.Learn password and

perform set-up.

NO

6791

3

Check for battery voltage on terminal 1connector [22B] (right), or connector


5

YES NO

With turn signal switch depressedon side under test, check for continuity

between terminal 1 and terminal5 on connector [22A] (right), or

connector [24A] (left).Is continuity present?

Locate and repair open (O/W)wire between terminal 1 on connector

[22B] (right), or connector[24B] (left) and accessory fuse.

6814 – right6812 - left

YES NO

Locate and repair open wirebetween terminal 5 on connector[22B] (right), or connector [24B]

(left) and TSM/TSSM connector [30].


turn signal switch.

6813 – right6810 - left

6811

fc02004_en

6

HOME


Flash at Double Normal Rate, All Bulbs Working

Determine correct part number for all installed turn signalbulbs and verify against parts installed on motorcycle.

Are the correct parts installed?

YES NO

Check for corrosionon bulbs and/or sockets.

Is corrosion present?

Replace withcorrect bulbs.

6820

NOYES

Remove corrosion with a wire brush.Install ELECTRICAL CONTACT

LUBRICANT (Part No. 99861-02) inbulb sockets.

Do lamps flash at normal rate?

Check for corrosionon all lamp connection

terminals.Is corrosion present?

YES NO

SystemOK.

6821

Clean or replace bulb.Do lamps flashat normal rate?

YES NO

SystemOK.

Replacelamp

assembly.

68226823

YES NO

Clean corrosion fromwires and terminals.

Do lamps flash atnormal rate?

Replace TSM/TSSM.Learn password (if


6824

YES

SystemOK.

6822

NO

Replace TSM/TSSMLearn password (if


6824

fc01168_en

Verify that lamps are learned:1) Turn ignition OFF - ON2) Activate left turn lamp for 5 flashes.3) Activate right turn lamp for 5 flashes.Do the lamps flash at the normal rate?

NOYES

System OK.

HOME


E.14DTC B0563

GENERAL

Battery Voltage HighThe TSM/TSSM continually checks the battery voltage duringIGN/OFF and IGN/RUN power modes. If the voltage exceeds16.0 Volts for more than 5.0 ± 0.5 seconds, the TSM/TSSMsets DTC B0563.

DIAGNOSTICS

Diagnostic Tips• This DTC may set when the vehicle is placed on a battery

charger, on fast charge, for a long period of time.

• The TSSM does not illuminate the security lamp when thisDTC is set.

Diagnostic NotesSee 1.7 CHARGING SYSTEM tests to correct. Problem maybe faulty voltage regulator.

HOME


E.15DTC B1131, B1132

GENERALNOTE

This section applies only to those vehicles equipped with theoptional security system.

Alarm Output Low (DTC B1131) or AlarmOutput High (DTC B1132)See Figure E-21. An alarm cycle is activated when the TSSMis connected, the siren has been armed by the TSSM and asecurity event occurs. See E.6 SECURITY SYSTEM FUNC-TIONS (TSSM ONLY). Under normal armed operation, thesiren input (terminal "2") is driven low by the TSSM to triggerthe audible alarm. When the siren input is driven high by theTSSM the audible alarm stops.

ed02047

Figure E-21. Security Siren

DIAGNOSTICS




Diagnostic Tips• If the siren is armed and the internal siren battery is dead,

shorted, disconnected, or has been charging for a period

longer than 24 hours, the siren will respond with threechirps on arming instead of two.


• If the siren does not chirp two or three times on a validarming command from the TSSM, the siren is either notconnected, not working, or the siren wiring was openedor shorted while the siren was disarmed.

• If the siren enters the self-driven mode where it is poweredfrom the siren internal nine-volt battery, the turn-signallamps will not alternately flash. If the TSSM activates thesiren, the turn-signal lamps will flash. If the siren has beenarmed and a security event occurs, and the siren is in self-driven mode, the siren will alarm for 20 to 30 seconds andthen turn off for 5 to 10 seconds. This alarm cycle will berepeated ten times if the siren is in the self-driven mode.

• If the siren does not stop alarming after it has been armed,then either the TSSM output or siren input may be shortedto ground, or the siren vehicle battery connection is openor shorted to ground, or the siren vehicle ground connec-tion is open, or a security event has occurred. SeeE.6 SECURITY SYSTEM FUNCTIONS (TSSM ONLY) fora description of alarm functions.


1. Use BREAKOUT BOX (Part No. HD-42682) and HAR-NESS CONNECTOR TEST KIT (Part No. HD-41404-B),gray pin probe and patch cord. See E.11 BREAKOUTBOX: TSM/TSSM.

2. Use HARNESS CONNECTOR TEST KIT (Part No. HD-41404-B), gray socket probe and patch cord.

3. Having the correct multimeter ohm scale is important forthis test. Some meters may read infinity for high ohmvalues. If this is the case, check your ohm scale and retest.

HOME


BK

BK

BK

R

R

RR

BN

/GY

BN/GY

BN/GY

LGN/BN

LGN

/BN

– +

[30A]

[30B]

To ignitionswitch

[142A] [142B]

TSSM

15 AmpBatteryFuse

30 AmpMAXIFUSE

Battery

SecuritySiren

(Optional)

Bat

tery

Ala

rmsi

gnal

Gro

und

1

1

1211

1211

A

B

C

A

B

C

em01185

Figure E-22. Siren Circuit



Under battery12-place DeutschTSSM[30]

Under frame3-place PackardSecurity siren (optional)[142]

HOME



Check for battery voltage at siren connector[142B]. With ignition ON, measure voltage

between terminal C (BK) and terminal A (BN/GY).


YES NO

With ignition OFF, measure resistancebetween siren connector [142B] terminal B

and Breakout Box terminal 11 (Gray).Is resistance less than 1 ohm?

With ignition OFF, check for continuity between siren connector [142B]terminal C and Breakout Box terminal 12. Then measure continuity

between siren connector [142B] terminal A and Breakout Box terminal 1.Is continuity present?

1 1

YES NO

Measure resistance between BreakoutBox terminal 11 and chassis ground.


Locate and repairopen on (LGN/BN)

wire.

YES NO

Locate and repairshort between (BN/GY) and (BK) wires.

Repairopen wire.

YESNO

Locate and repairgrounded (LGN/BN)

wire.

Disconnect siren from Breakout Box.Measure resistance between sirenconnector [142A] terminal B and C.

Is resistance between 120,000-200,000ohms with siren disconnected?

YES

Connect siren to a known good motorcycle.Arm and activate siren to verify operation.

Disarm siren.Did siren operate correctly?

YES

Replace TSSM. Learnpassword and perform

setup.

NO

ReplaceSiren.

NO

ReplaceSiren.

Clear DTCs using odometer self-diagnostics. SeeE.10 ODOMETER SELF-DIAGNOSTICS. Confirmproper operation with no check engine lamp.

2

3

fc01810_en

HOME


E.16DTC B1134

GENERAL

Starter Output HighWith the TSM/TSSM disarmed, ignition ON and the RUN/STOPswitch in the RUN position, the start relay is grounded. Batteryvoltage is applied to the start relay and coil which are groundedthrough the TSM/TSSM. This Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)is set when that ground is not established through theTSM/TSSM.

ed02837

Figure E-23. Start Relay

DIAGNOSTICS




1. Connect BREAKOUT BOX (Part No. HD-42682) (gray) towire harness connector [30] leaving TSM/TSSM discon-nected. See E.11 BREAKOUT BOX: TSM/TSSM.

HOME


Start Relay

Fuse Block

To Starter ButtonOn Right Handlebar15 Amp

BatteryFuse

30 AmpMAXIFUSE

IgnitionSwitch

TSM/HFSM

Bat

tery

Sta

rtR

elay

Con

trol

Gro

und

1 9 12

1 9 12

IBA

R

RR R R

R/BK R/BK

BK/R

BN

/GY

BN/GY

TN

/GN

TN/GN

BK

BK

Battery

[22]


GND 1

8685

3087A87

12

345

RP

CQI

[30B][30A]

[119A][119B]

em00260

Figure E-24. Starter TSM/TSSM Circuit





Under left side cover5-place AmpStart relay[119]

HOME


DTC B1134

Remove start relay. Check for voltage on Breakout Boxterminal 9 (Gray).

Is voltage present?

YES


on (TN/GN) wire.

NO

Install start relay.Is voltage present on

Breakout Boxterminal 9 (Gray)?

YES

Replace start relay.

NO

Replace TSM/TSSM.Learn password and

perform setup.

1

Clear DTCs using odometer self-diagnostics. See E.10ODOMETER SELF-DIAGNOSTICS. Confirm properoperation with no check engine lamp.

fc01811_en

HOME


E.17DTC B1135

GENERAL

Accelerometer Fault: B1135DTC B1135 indicates a failure which requires replacement ofthe TSM/TSSM.

NOTE

When DTC B1135 is set, the tip-over engine shutdown, TSSMtamper alarm and bank angle sensors are disabled. Thesecurity lamp will also illuminate when this code is set.

HOME


E.18DTC B1154, B1155

GENERALDTC B1154 may occur if the motorcycle is ridden with theclutch pulled at speeds greater than 10 MPH (16 km/h) formore than 60 seconds (as in coasting down a long mountainroad).

DIAGNOSTIC NOTES



Each reference number below correlates to a circled numberon the flowchart(s).

1. Connect BREAKOUT BOX (Part No. HD-42682) to TSSM.See E.11 BREAKOUT BOX: TSM/TSSM.

2. If DTC is current (lamp on continuously), clear codes. Ifthe code returns during operation, replace TSSM. If DTCis historic, check for intermittents

3. A reading of several hundred ohms is normal due to theneutral indicator lamp (LED).

Table E-18. Clutch/Neutral Switch DTCs

SYMPTOMDTC

Clutch switch short-to-groundB1154

Neutral switch short-to-groundB1155

HOME


IBA

15 AmpInstruments

Fuse

NeutralSwitch


30 AmpMAXIFUSE

Battery

IgnitionSwitch

NeutralIndicatorLamp

Neu

tral

Sw

itch

Clu

tch

Sw

itch

TNO

TNO

BK

BK

BK

BK

R

R

BK/R

BK

/R

BK

BK

/R

BKBK

/R

R/BK R/BK

87

87

8

8

6

6

4

TN

TN

TN

TNO

O

10

Gro

und

12

4 10 12

TSM/TSSM


R R

GND 1

[136B][136A]

[30B][30A]

[24A][24B]

[20A][20B]

em00261

Figure E-25. Clutch and Neutral Interlock Circuits




Under fuel tank8-place MolexLeft handlebar controls (gray)[24]




HOME


DTC B1154

Connect Breakout Box HD-42682 to the main harness, leaving theconnector [30] disconnected. Check for continuity between terminal

10 (Gray) (+) and terminal 12 (Gray) (-).Is continuity present?

YES NO

Disconnect connector [24]. Check forcontinuity between terminal 10 (Gray)

(+) and terminal 12 (Gray) (-) onBreakout Box.


Replace TSSM. Learn passwordand perform set-up.

1

6791

YES NO

Locate and repair short-to-ground on (BK/R) wire in main

wiring harnessbetween [30B] and [24B).

Locate and repairshort-to-ground in

left handlebar switchwiring.

5861 5861

NOTEThis DTC may occur if the vehicle is ridden with clutch disengaged(pulled in) at speeds greater than 10 MPH (16 km/h)for more than 60 seconds (coasting down a long mountain road).

fc01171_en

2

HOME


DTC B1155

Connect Breakout Box HD-42682 to the main harness, leaving theTSSM disconnected. Check for continuity between terminal 4 (Gray)

(+) and terminal 12 (Gray) (-).Is continuity present?

YES NO

Disconnect neutral switch connector [136]. Checkfor continuity between terminal 4 (Gray)

(+) and terminal 12 (Gray) (-) on Breakout Box.Is continuity present?

Replace TSSM. Learn passwordand perform set-up.

1

6791

YES NO

Locate and repair short-to-groundon (TN) wire in main wiring harness.

Replace Neutral Switch.

58625157

NOTEThis DTC may occur if the vehicle is ridden with clutch disengaged(pulled in) at speeds greater than 10 MPH (16 km/h)for more than 60 seconds (coasting down a long mountain road). fc01172_en

3

2

HOME


E.19DTC U1016, U1255

GENERAL

Loss of ECM Serial DataThe serial data connector provides a means for the ECM,TSM/TSSM, and speedometer on XL, or tachometer on XR tocommunicate their current status. When all operating para-meters on the serial data bus are within specifications, a stateof health message is sent between the components.




Table E-20. Code Description

DESCRIPTIONDTC

Loss of all ECM serial data (state ofhealth)

U1016


ed02821

Figure E-26. ECM Location (Typical)

DIAGNOSTICS





1. Connect BREAKOUT BOX (Part No. HD-42682) (gray)between TSM/TSSM connector [30A] and wire harnessconnector [30B]. See E.11 BREAKOUT BOX:TSM/TSSM.


HOME


BK

BK

BK

BK

BK

BK

GY GY

GY

O/W

O/W

O/W

O/W

O

O

O

O

R

BN/GY

BN

/GY

BN

/GY

BN

/GY

BN/GY BN/GY

LGN/V

LGN

/V

LGN/V

LGN/V

LGN

/VLG

N/V

LGN

/V

R/BK

R/BK

R/GY

1 2 3 12

1 2 3 12

1 2 5 76

1 2 5 76

1 2 5 6 7

1 2

Igni

tion

Ser

iald

ata

Bat

tery

Acc

esso

ry

Gro

und

Igni

tion

Ser

iald

ata

Bat

tery

Acc

esso

ry

Gro

und

Bat

tery

Igni

tion

Ser

iald

ata

Gro

und

5 6 7

[39B][39A]

[108B][108A]

[30B][30A]

[91A]

Speedometer

TSM/TSSM


12V ACCYFuse

12V BATTFuse

12V INSTRFuse

12V IGNFuse

3

2

1

4

Data LinkConnector

21 6 7 12

21 6 7 12

[20A][20B]

ECM

Ser

iald

ata

[78A][78B]

5

5

To ACCY fuse

To BATT fuse

To INSTR fuse

To IGN fuse

[GND1]

[GND1]

[GND1]

em01182

Figure E-27. Serial Data Circuit (XL)

HOME


BK

BK

BK

GY GY

O/W

O/W

O/W

O/W

O

R

BN

/GY

BN

/GY

BN

/GY

BN

/GY

BN/GY

LGN

/V BK

BK

GY

BK

O/WO

OO

BN

/GY

LGN

/V

LGN

/V

LGN

/V

LGN/V

LGN

/V

LGN

/V

R/BK

R/BK

R/GY

1 2 3 12

1 2 3 12

1 2 5 76

1 2 5 76

C B A D

C B A DS

eria

lDat

a

Bat

tery

Acc

esso

ryG

roun

d

Igni

tion

Ser

ialD

ata

Bat

tery

Bat

tery

Igni

tion

Ser

ialD

ata

Gro

und

Acc

esso

ryG

roun

d

Speedometer

TSM/TSSM/HFSM

Tachometer

To ACCY Fuse

To BATT Fuse

To INSTR Fuse

To IGN Fuse

12V ACCYFuse

12V BATTFuse

12V INSTRFuse

12V IGNFuse

3

1

2

4

Ground

Serial Data

Power

Data LinkConnector

21 6 7 12

21 6 7 12

ECM

Ser

ialD

ata

5

5

GND1

GND1

GND1[78B][78A]

[108A][108B]

[20A][20B]

[39A][39B]

[30A][30B]

[91A]

em01304

Figure E-28. Serial Data Circuit (XR)








HOME






HOME


DTC U1016

Can you read ECM hardware part number?See E.10 ODOMETER SELF-DIAGNOSTICS.


While wiggling harness, check continuitybetween terminal 3 (Gray) of

TSM/HFSM Breakout Box and terminal5 of ECM Breakout Box.

Continuity present?

Check continuity betweenterminal 3 (Gray) of TSM/TSSM

BreakoutBox and terminal 5 of ECM

Breakout Box.

1

2

Clear DTCs using odometer self-diagnostics. See E.10ODOMETER SELF-DIAGNOSTICS. Confirm proper operationwith no check engine lamp.

1

2

YES

Clear codes. Test ride.Did DTC U1016 return?

YES


password.

NO


NO

No trouble found.

YES


password.

NO


fc01812_en

HOME


E.20DTC U1300, U1301 OR BUS ER

GENERAL

Serial Data Low or Serial Data Open/HighThe typical serial data voltage range is 0 volts (inactive) to 7volts (active). Due to the short pulse, voltages will be muchlower on a DVOM. In analog mode, a DVOM reading serialdata will show continuous voltage when active, typically 0.6 to0.8 volts. The range for acceptable operations is 0 to 7.0 volts.

Table E-22. Code Description

DESCRIPTIONDTC



DIAGNOSTICS

Diagnostic Tips• If serial data is shorted, these DTCs will automatically

cause the check engine lamp to illuminate. The odometerwill read "BUS Er" in this condition.



HOME


E.21TSM/TSSM: PASSWORD LEARN

GENERALIf the ECM or TSM/TSSM is faulty, follow the instructions inthe Service Manual for ECM or TSM/TSSM replacement.Then,to determine if password learn is necessary, refer toTable E-23.

Table E-23. Password Learn

IS PASSWORD LEARNNECESSARY?

DEVICE REPLACED

YesECM

No *TSM

YesTSSM

* If a TSM has been replaced by a TSSM, or a TSSM hasbeen replaced by a TSM, password learn is necessary.

PASSWORD LEARNINGTo perform password learning procedure, refer to Table E-24.When finished, continue with all instructions underE.3 VEHICLE DELIVERY.

Always perform all appropriate instructions under E.3 VEHICLEDELIVERY after TSM/TSSM replacement or removal.

NOTE

Do not forget to enter a Personal Identification Number (PIN)for TSSM vehicles. If a code is not assigned and the key fobis lost or damaged while the vehicle is armed, the TSSM mustbe replaced.

Table E-24. Setting TSM/TSSM and ECM Password

NOTESCONFIRMATIONACTIONNO.

With ignition turned off, check enginelamp and security lamp will be off.

Ignition must be turned off for at least15 seconds.

Install new TSM/TSSM or ECM. Per-form all steps under E.3 VEHICLEDELIVERY.

1

Set engine stop switch to RUN.2

TSM/TSSM enables starterrelay.

Verify check engine lamp and securitylamp illuminate and then turn off.

Turn ignition switch ON.3

Password has not beenlearned. ECM sets DTCP1009.

Engine starts and stalls. Check enginelamp illuminates and stays on.

Attempt normal start one time.4

ECM enters PasswordLearning mode for tenminutes. Do not cycle ignitionswitch or interrupt vehiclepower or Password Learn willbe unsuccessful.

Security lamp illuminates.Wait ten seconds. security lamp willilluminate and stay on.

5

This takes ten minutes.Wait until security lamp turns off.6


Quickly (within one second) turn igni-tion switch OFF-ON.

7




9




11

Turn ignition switch OFF. Wait 15seconds before turning ignition switchON. Turn ignition switch ON and startengine to confirm successful PasswordLearn procedure. Clear DTCs.

12

Perform all steps under E.3 VEHICLEDELIVERY.

13

HOME


E.22TSSM MAINTENANCE

GENERALThe TSSM system uses batteries in the key fob and siren.These are the only parts requiring periodic maintenance.

KEY FOB

ScheduleReplace the key fob battery every 2 years.

Battery Replacement1. See Figure E-29. Open the key fob case.

a. Place a thin blade between the 2 halves of the case.

b. Slowly twist the blade.

2. Replace battery (1).

a. Remove the original battery.

b. Install a new battery with the positive (+) side down.Use a Panasonic® 2032 or equivalent.

3. Align case and circuit board (3) as shown. Snap casehalves together.

4. While standing next to the motorcycle, press and hold thekey fob button for 10-15 seconds until the security systemresponds with two turn signal flashes/siren chirps.

1 2

3

ed030114

1. Battery2. Battery contact3. Circuit board

Figure E-29. Open Key Fob:TSSM

ed03015

Figure E-30. Key Fob Assembly:TSSM

SIREN (IF INSTALLED)

ScheduleThe siren's internal 9 volt battery is rechargeable and does notneed to be replaced on a regular basis. Battery life undernormal conditions is approximately three to six years.

NOTES

• See Figure E-31 and Figure E-32. Early style siren willwork with both TSSM and HFSM. Late style siren will onlywork with HFSM.


Battery Replacement: Early Style Siren1. Disarm system and remove siren.

2. See Figure E-31. Remove battery cover.

a. Place the siren module on a flat and sturdy table withthe potted section (area with epoxy covering circuitboard) facing up and towards you.

b. Position a knife blade at a 45 degree angle to the longside of the siren case. Insert the knife blade betweenthe siren case and battery cover at one of the twoaccessible corners of the battery cover. Keep theblade slightly higher towards the battery cover as thishelps keep the blade away from the battery seal.

c. Slowly twist the blade towards the battery cover andthe cover will pop off.




HOME


3. Replace battery by removing old battery from polarizedbattery clip. Install a new 9 volt nickel metal hydride bat-tery.

4. Reinstall battery cover.

a. Carefully replace the rubber seal.

b. Align battery cover with case placing round cornerson cover away from connector [142A]. Snap coverinto place.


Battery Replacement: Late Style Siren1. Disarm system and remove siren.

2. See Figure E-32. With a small screwdriver or pick, pushthe catches (1) in through the two slots (2) in the end ofthe siren to release the battery cover (3).




3. Replace battery (4) by removing old battery from polarizedbattery clip.

4. Recharge and re-install or install a new 9 volt nickel metalhydride battery.

5. Reinstall battery cover (3).

a. Carefully replace the rubber seal (5) on the cover.

b. Align battery cover with case placing round cornerson cover away from connector [142A] (6).

c. Snap cover into place.


1 23

ed03016

1. Cover2. Battery3. Connector [142A]

Figure E-31. Battery Compartment (Early Style Siren)

4

5

6

3

1

2

ed02958

1. Catch2. Slot3. Cover4. 9 Volt battery5. Rubber seal6. Connector [142A]

Figure E-32. Siren Battery Compartment (Late Style Siren)

HOME


Tools Used in This ManualNOTESTOOL NAMEPART NUMBER

4.16 DTC P0107, P0108, P0112, P0113, Diagnostics VACUUM PUMPHD-23738

A.18 SEALED SPLICE CONNECTORS, Sealed SpliceConnector Repair

ROBINAIR HEAT GUNHD-25070

4.9 ENGINE CRANKS, BUT WILL NOT START, Dia-gnostics


4.15 MISFIRE AT IDLE OR UNDER LOAD, Diagnostics SPARK TESTERHD-26792



4.27 DTC P1351, P1352, P1354, P1355, Diagnostics FUEL INJECTOR TEST LAMPHD-34730-2C

A.14 METRI-PACK TERMINALS, Metri-Pack TerminalCrimps

PACKARD TERMINAL CRIMP TOOLHD-38125-6

A.6 DEUTSCH MINI-TERMINAL CRIMPS, Deutsch MiniTerminal Crimps








A.5 DEUTSCH STANDARD TERMINALS, DeutschStandard Terminal Crimps

DEUTSCH TERMINAL CRIMP TOOLHD-39965-A


ULTRA TORCH UT-100HD-39969


HEAT SHIELD ATTACHMENTHD-41183

1.2 STARTING SYSTEM DIAGNOSIS, Diagnostics HARNESS CONNECTOR TEST KITHD-41404-B

2.4 SPEEDOMETER/TACHOMETER, Diagnostics HARNESS CONNECTOR TEST KITHD-41404-B

3.15 TSM/HFSM: TURN SIGNAL ERRORS ANDDTCS, Diagnostics


3.16 DTC B1131, B1132 (HFSM ONLY), Diagnostics HARNESS CONNECTOR TEST KITHD-41404-B

3.18 DTCS B1135, B1136, B1141, AND B1142, DTCB1141 Ignition Switch Open/Low






4.10 NO ECM POWER, Diagnostics HARNESS CONNECTOR TEST KITHD-41404-B

4.12 FUEL SYSTEM ELECTRICAL TEST, Diagnostics HARNESS CONNECTOR TEST KITHD-41404-B

4.14 IDLE AIR CONTROL, Diagnostics HARNESS CONNECTOR TEST KITHD-41404-B

4.15 MISFIRE AT IDLE OR UNDER LOAD, Diagnostics HARNESS CONNECTOR TEST KITHD-41404-B

4.16 DTC P0107, P0108, P0112, P0113, Diagnostics HARNESS CONNECTOR TEST KITHD-41404-B


4.17 DTC P0117, P0118, Diagnostics HARNESS CONNECTOR TEST KITHD-41404-B







I

TOO

LS


E.13 TURN SIGNAL ERRORS: B1121, B1122,B1141, Diagnostics


E.15 DTC B1131, B1132, Diagnostics HARNESS CONNECTOR TEST KITHD-41404-B

2.6 INDICATOR LAMPS, Diagnostics HARNESS CONNECTOR TEST KITHD-41404-B

A.4 DEUSCH ELECTRICAL CONNECTORS, DeutschConnector Repair

DEUTSCH CONNECTOR SERVICE KITHD-41475

A.4 DEUSCH ELECTRICAL CONNECTORS, DeutschConnector Repair

FLAT BLADE L-HOOKHD-41475-100

A.1 AMP MULTILOCK CONNECTORS, AMP MultilockConnector Repair

AMP MULTILOCK CRIMPERHD-41609

1.2 STARTING SYSTEM DIAGNOSIS, Diagnostics BREAKOUT BOXHD-42682

2.2 INITIAL DIAGNOSTIC CHECK: ODOMETER, InitialDiagnostics


2.4 SPEEDOMETER/TACHOMETER, Diagnostics BREAKOUT BOXHD-42682

2.5 BREAKOUT BOX: SPEEDOMETER/TACHO-METER, General


2.5 BREAKOUT BOX: SPEEDOMETER/TACHO-METER, Speedometer: XL only




2.5 BREAKOUT BOX: SPEEDOMETER/TACHO-METER, Tachometer




2.7 DTC B1004, B1005, Diagnostics BREAKOUT BOXHD-42682

2.9 DTC B1008, Diagnostics BREAKOUT BOXHD-42682

2.10 DTC U1016, U1255, Diagnostics BREAKOUT BOXHD-42682


3.3 H-DSSS ACTUATION, Power Disruption and Config-uring


3.10 INITIAL DIAGNOSTIC CHECK: TSM/HFSM, InitialDiagnostics


3.12 BREAKOUT BOX: TSM/HFSM, General BREAKOUT BOXHD-42682

3.16 DTC B1131, B1132 (HFSM ONLY), Diagnostics BREAKOUT BOXHD-42682

3.17 DTC B1134, Diagnostics BREAKOUT BOXHD-42682

3.20 DTC B1154, B1155, Diagnostics BREAKOUT BOXHD-42682

4.5 INITIAL DIAGNOSTIC CHECK: EFI, Initial Dia-gnostics



E.9 INITIAL DIAGNOSTIC CHECK: TSM/TSSM, InitialDiagnostics


E.11 BREAKOUT BOX: TSM/TSSM, General BREAKOUT BOXHD-42682

E.15 DTC B1131, B1132, Diagnostics BREAKOUT BOXHD-42682

E.16 DTC B1134, Diagnostics BREAKOUT BOXHD-42682


II TOOLS


A.7 DEUTSCH SOLID BARREL TERMINALS, DeutschSolid Barrel Terminal Crimps

ELECTRICAL CRIMPER TOOLHD-42879


4.7 BREAKOUT BOX: EFI, General BREAKOUT BOXHD-43876



4.10 NO ECM POWER, Diagnostics BREAKOUT BOXHD-43876

4.12 FUEL SYSTEM ELECTRICAL TEST, Diagnostics BREAKOUT BOXHD-43876

4.13 SYSTEM RELAY CHECK, Diagnostics BREAKOUT BOXHD-43876

4.14 IDLE AIR CONTROL, Diagnostics BREAKOUT BOXHD-43876

4.15 MISFIRE AT IDLE OR UNDER LOAD, Diagnostics BREAKOUT BOXHD-43876

4.16 DTC P0107, P0108, P0112, P0113, Diagnostics BREAKOUT BOXHD-43876


4.17 DTC P0117, P0118, Diagnostics BREAKOUT BOXHD-43876


4.19 DTC P0131, P0132, P0134, P0151, P0152,P0154, Diagnostics








E.19 DTC U1016, U1255, Diagnostics BREAKOUT BOXHD-43876


IGNITION COIL CIRCUIT TEST ADAPTERHD-44687

4.27 DTC P1351, P1352, P1354, P1355, Diagnostics IGNITION COIL CIRCUIT TEST ADAPTERHD-44687

A.17 PACKARD MICRO-64 CONNECTORS, PackardMicro-64 Connector Repair

PACKARD MICRO-64 TERMINALREMOVER

HD-45928

A.17 PACKARD MICRO-64 CONNECTORS, PackardMicro-64 Connector Repair

PACKARD MICRO-64 TERMINALCRIMPER

HD-45929

2.2 INITIAL DIAGNOSTIC CHECK: ODOMETER, InitialDiagnostics


2.4 SPEEDOMETER/TACHOMETER, Diagnostics INSTRUMENT HARNESS ADAPTERSHD-46601

2.5 BREAKOUT BOX: SPEEDOMETER/TACHO-METER, General










2.7 DTC B1004, B1005, Diagnostics INSTRUMENT HARNESS ADAPTERSHD-46601

TOOLS III


2.9 DTC B1008, Diagnostics INSTRUMENT HARNESS ADAPTERSHD-46601

2.10 DTC U1016, U1255, Diagnostics INSTRUMENT HARNESS ADAPTERSHD-46601

2.11 DTC U1064, U1255, Diagnostics INSTRUMENT HARNESS ADAPTERSHD-46601

3.10 INITIAL DIAGNOSTIC CHECK: TSM/HFSM, InitialDiagnostics


4.5 INITIAL DIAGNOSTIC CHECK: EFI, Initial Dia-gnostics


4.29 DTC U1064, U1255, Diagnostics INSTRUMENT HARNESS ADAPTERHD-46601

4.30 DTC U1097, U1255, Diagnostics INSTRUMENT HARNESS ADAPTERHD-46601

E.9 INITIAL DIAGNOSTIC CHECK: TSM/TSSM, InitialDiagnostics


1.7 CHARGING SYSTEM, Troubleshooting ELECTRICAL SYSTEM TESTERHD-48053

A.15 MOLEX CONNECTORS, Molex Connector Repair MOLEX ELECTRICAL CONNECTOR TER-MINAL REMOVER

HD-48114

2.10 DTC U1016, U1255, Diagnostics ECM BREAKOUT BOXHD-48637

2.1 CHECKING FOR DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLECODES, Code Types


3.2 HARLEY-DAVIDSON SMART SECURITYSYSTEM, HFSM Features


3.7 SERVICE/EMERGENCY FUNCTIONS, Service Mode DIGITAL TECHNICIAN IIHD-48650

3.23 TSM/HFSM: PASSWORD LEARN, PasswordLearning


4.14 IDLE AIR CONTROL, General DIGITAL TECHNICIAN IIHD-48650

4.19 DTC P0131, P0132, P0134, P0151, P0152,P0154, Diagnostics


4.24 DTC P0603, P0605, General DIGITAL TECHNICIAN IIHD-48650

E.8 DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTC), CodeTypes



ELECTRICAL SYSTEM ANALYZERMCR-101 HD

A.12 630 METRI-PACK CONNECTORS, 630 Metri-PackConnector Repair

SNAP-ON PICKSNAP-ON TT600-3

IV TOOLS

2009 Harley-Davidson Sportster Models Electrical Diagnostic ManualNOTESTORQUE VALUEFASTENER

No torque values were found in this manual.

V

TOR

QU

E V

AL

UE

S

VI TORQUE VALUES

NOTES

1150 Metri-Pack Connector

Repair. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-18


Repair. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-20


Repair. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-22


Repair. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-23

AActive Intake Solenoid (HDI Models Only). . . . . . . . . . 4-105AMP Multilock Connector

Repair. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1

BBank Angle Sensor (HDJ/Korea). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-2Bank Angle Sensor Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3Bank Angle Sensor Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1Battery Testing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28

Conductance Test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28Load Test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28Voltmeter Test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28

Bus ER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36

CCharging System Testing

Current Voltage Output Test: Using HD-48053. . . . . 1-25Current Voltage Output Test: Using Load Tester. . . . 1-25Milliampere Draw Test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24Total Current Draw Test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24

Check Engine Lamp EFI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5Check Engine Lamp Functionality. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1CKP Sensor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-93Connectors

Location. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1Conversions

Fluid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2Length. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1Torque. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3

Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

DDelphi Connector

Repair. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-6Deutsch 1-Place Connector

Repair. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-8Deutsch Connector

Crimping Mini Terminals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-14Crimping Solid Barrel Terminals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-15Crimping Standard Terminals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-13Repair. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-9

Diagnostic Notes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4Diagnostic Trouble Code Types. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

Current. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3Historic. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3Retreiving Diagnostic Trouble Codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

DTC B0563: Battery Voltage High. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31DTC B0563 Battery Voltage High (HDJ/Korea). . . . . . . . E-46DTC B1004 Fuel Level Sending Unit Low. . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26DTC B1005 Fuel Level Sending Unit High/Open. . . . . . . 2-26DTC B1006 Accessory Line Overvoltage. . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30

DTC B1007 Ignition Line Overvoltage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30DTC B1008 Trip Odometer Reset Switch Closed. . . . . . 2-32DTC B1121, B1122, B1141 Turn Signals Will Not Flash, 4-WayFlashers Inoperable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32DTC B1123 Left Turn Signal Short-to-Ground. . . . . . . . . 3-32DTC B1124 Right Turn Signal Short-to-Ground. . . . . . . 3-32DTC B1125 Left Turn Signal Short-to-Voltage. . . . . . . . . 3-32DTC B1126 Right Turn Signal Short-to-Voltage. . . . . . . 3-32DTC B1131 Alarm Output Low. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-48DTC B1131 Alarm Output Low (HDJ/Korea). . . . . . . . . . E-47DTC B1132 Alarm Output High. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-48DTC B1132 Alarm Output High (HDJ/Korea). . . . . . . . . E-47DTC B1134 Starter Output High. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51DTC B1134 Starter Output High (HDJ/Korea). . . . . . . . E-50DTC B1135 Accelerometer Fault. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-54DTC B1135 Accelerometer Fault (HDJ/Korea). . . . . . . . E-53DTC B1136 Accelerometer Tip-Over Self-Test Fault. . . . 3-54DTC B1141 Ignition Switch Open/Low. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-54DTC B1142 Internal Fault. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-54DTC B1143 Security Antenna Short-to-Ground. . . . . . . 3-58DTC B1144 Security Antenna Short-to-Battery. . . . . . . . 3-58DTC B1145 Security Antenna Open. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-58DTC B1154 Clutch Switch Short-to-Ground. . . . . . . . . . 3-61DTC B1154 Clutch Switch Short-to-Ground (HDJ/Korea). E-54DTC B1155 Neutral Switch Short-to-Ground. . . . . . . . . 3-61DTC B1155 Neutral Switch Short-to-Ground(HDJ/Korea). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-54DTC P0107 MAP Sensor Open/Low. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-66DTC P0112 IAT Sensor Voltage Low. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-66DTC P0113 IAT Sensor Voltage Open/High. . . . . . . . . . 4-66DTC P0117 ET Sensor Voltage Low. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-73DTC P0118 ET Sensor Open/High. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-73DTC P0122 TP Sensor Open/Low. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-77DTC P0123 TP Sensor High. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-77DTC P0131 Front Oxygen Sensor Low or Engine RunningLean. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-82DTC P0132 Engine Running Rich. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-82DTC P0134 Front Oxygen Sensor Open/NotResponding/High. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-82DTC P0151 Rear Oxygen Sensor Low or Engine RunningLean. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-82DTC P0152 Engine Running Rich. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-82DTC P0154 Rear Oxygen Sensor Open/NotResponding/High. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-82DTC P0261 Front Injector Open/Low. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-87DTC P0262 Front Injector High. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-87DTC P0263 Rear Injector Open/Low. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-87DTC P0264 Rear Injector High. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-87DTC P0373 CKP Sensor Intermittent. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-93DTC P0374 CKP Sensor Synch Error. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-93DTC P0501 VSS Sensor Low. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-96DTC P0502 VSS Sesnor High/Open. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-96DTC P0505 Loss of Idle Speed Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-55DTC P0562 Battery Voltage Low. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-100DTC P0563 Battery Voltage High. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-100DTC P0603 ECM EEPROM Error. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-104DTC P0605 ECM Flash Error. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-104DTC P0661 Active Intake Solenoid Open/Low. . . . . . . 4-105DTC P0662 Active Intake High/Shorted. . . . . . . . . . . . 4-105DTC P1001 Ssytem Relay Coil Open/Low. . . . . . . . . . . 4-50DTC P1002 System Relay Coil High/Shorted. . . . . . . . . 4-50DTC P1003 System Relay Contacts Open. . . . . . . . . . . 4-50DTC P1004 System Relay Contacts Closed. . . . . . . . . . 4-50DTC P1009 Incorrect Password. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-109DTC P1010 Missing Password. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-109DTC P1064 Loss of TSM/TSSM/HFSM Serial Data. . . 4-124

VII

IND

EX

DTC P1097 Loss of All Speedometer Serial Data (State ofHealth). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-129DTC P1351 Front Ignition Coil Open/Low. . . . . . . . . . . 4-109DTC P1352 Front Ignition Coil High/Shorted. . . . . . . . . 4-109DTC P1354 Rear Ignition Coil Open/Low. . . . . . . . . . . 4-109DTC P1355 Rear Ignition Coil High/Shorted. . . . . . . . . 4-109DTC P1501 Jiffy Stand Sensor Low. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-119DTC P1502 Jiffy Stand Sensor High. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-119DTC P-1-8 MAP Sensor High. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-66DTC U1016 Loss of All ECM Serial Data. . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34DTC U1016 Loss of All ECM Serial Data (State ofHealth). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-58DTC U1064 Loss of TSM/TSSM/HFSM Serial Data. . . . 2-39DTC U1255 Missing Message at Speedometer. . . . . . 4-129DTC U1255 Serial Data Error/Missing Message. . . . . . . 2-34DTC U1255 Serial Data Error/Missing Message (ECM). 4-124DTC U1255 Serial Data Error/Missing Message(HDJ/Korea). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-58DTC U1300 Serial Data Low. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44DTC U1300 Serial Data Low (ECM). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36DTC U1300 Serial Data Low (HDJ/Korea). . . . . . . . . . . E-63DTC U1301 Serial Data Open/High. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44DTC U1301 Serial Data Open/High (ECM). . . . . . . . . . . 4-36DTC U1301 Serial Data Open/High (HDJ/Korea). . . . . . E-63

EElectronic Control Module (ECM). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3Electronic Fuel Injection (EFI). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3ET Sensor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-73

FFluid Conversions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2Fuel Injectors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-87Fuel Pressure Test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-134Fuel System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42Fuse Block Repair. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-17

GGlossary

Acronyms and Abbreviations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1

HHands-Free Fob Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-72Hands-Free Security Module (HFSM). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

IIdle Air Control Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3Idle Air Control Diagnostics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-55Ignition Coil Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3Ignition Coil Diagnostics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-114Indicator Lamps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21Intake Air Temperature (IAT)/Manifold Absolute Pressure(TMAP) sensor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

JJiffy Stand Sensor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-119

KKey Fob Assignment:TSSM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-4Key Fob Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-65

LLoctite. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-II

MMain Fuse Housing

Repair. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-24Metric System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-2Metri-Pack Terminals

Crimping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-26Molex Connector

Repair. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-28

OOdometer Theory of Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15Oxygen Sensor Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3Oxygen Sensor Diagnostics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-82

PPackard 100W Connector

Repair. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-30Packard Micro-64 Connector

Repair. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-32Personal Identification Number. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6PIN Entry:TSSM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-5

RReprogramming ECM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5

SSealed Splice. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-35Security Lamp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3Security Lamp (HDJ/Korea). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-13Security Lamp (Key Icon). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8Security Lamp Diagnostics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13Security Lamp Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2Security System Functions (TSSM Only). . . . . . . . . . . . E-10Service/Emergency Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11Service Bulletins. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-IService Preparation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-ISidecar Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5Sidecar Configuration (HDJ/Korea). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-4Siren. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10Siren Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-72Siren Battery (HDJ/Korea). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-65Speedometer Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4Speedometer Theory of Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15SPX Kent-Moore. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-IIStarter

Testing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16Starter Activation Circuits. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12Starter Current Draw Test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13Starter Free Running Current Draw Test. . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15Starter Solenoid

Solenoid Hold-In Test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15Solenoid Pull-In Test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15Solenoid Return Test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16

Starter Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1Starting System Diagnosis. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3Start Relay Test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13Stator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26System Relay. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-50

TTachometer Theory of Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15Throttle Position (TP) Sensor Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3Throttle Position (TP) Sensor Diagnostics. . . . . . . . . . . . 4-77

VIII INDEX

TMAP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-66Torque Conversion. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3Trademarks

Harley-Davidson. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-IIReferenced Products. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-II

Trip Odometer Reset Switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15TSM/HFSM: Password Learn. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-71TSM/TSSM: Password Learn. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-64Turn Signal Errors: B1121, B1122, B1141. . . . . . . . . . . E-33Turn Signal Functions

4-Way Flashing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-8Automatic Cancellation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-8Manual Cancellation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-8

Turn Signal Module Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

VVehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) Diagnostics. . . . . . . . . . . . 4-96

WWiggle Test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23Wiring Diagrams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3WOW Test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13WOW Test (HDJ/Korea). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-26

INDEX IX

X INDEX

NOTES

2009 harley davidson sportster 2009 eletrical diagnostic manual

Documents

harleydavidson product

service instructions

service manualrefer

page number

diagnostic methods

harleydavidson web sitehttp

noise control performance

number of acronyms